
Glass. 

Book 

Copyright^ 10 . 



C5PXRI6HT DEPCSm 



FIELD 

ARTILLERYMAN'S 

GUIDE 



CALENDAR FOR 1918-1919. 



1918. 



JANUARY. 


APRIL. 


JULY. 


OCTOBER. 


s 

6 

13 
20 

27 


M 

"l 

14 

21 

28 


T 

1 

8 
15 

22 
29 


W 

2 

9 

16 
23 
30 


T 

3 

10 
17 
24 
31 


F 

4 

11 

18 
25 


s 

5 

12 
19 
26 


s 

7 

14 
21 

28 


M 
1 

8 

15 
22 
29 


T 

2 

9 

16 

23 

30 


w 

3 

10 
17 
24 


T 

4 
11 

18 

25 


F 

5 
12 

19 
26 


s 

6 

13 

20 
27 


S 1 M 
.. 1 

7 8 
1415 
21 22 

2829 


T 

2 
9 

16 
23 
30 


w 

3 

10 
17 
24 
31 


T 

4 

11 

18 
25 

'* 


F 

5 

12 

19 
26 


s 

6 
13 
20 
27 


s 

6 

13 
20 
27 


M 

"l 
14 
21 

28 


T 

1 

8 
15 
22 
29 


W 

2 

9 

16 

23 

30 


T F 

3 4 

10 11 
17 18 
24 '25 

31 .. 


s 

5 

12 
19 
26 


FEBRUARY. 


MAY. 


AUGUST. 


NOVEMBER. 


s 

3 

10 
17 
24 


M 

*4 
11 

18 
25 


T 

5 
12 
19 

26 


w 

"e 

13 
20 

27 


T 

*7 
14 
21 

28 


F 

1 

8 
15 
22 


s 

2 
9 

16 
23 


s 

"5 
12 

19 
26 


M 

*6 

13 
20 

27 


T 

*7 
14 
21 

28 


w 

1 

8 

15 
22 
29 


T 

2 
9 

16 
23 
30 


F 

3 
10 
17 
24 
31 


s 

4 
11 

18 
25 


s 

*4 
11 

18 
25 


M 
"5 

12 
19 

26 


T 

*6 

13 
20 

27 


w 

'7 

14 

21 

28 


T 

1 

8 
15 
22 
29 


£ 

2 

9 

16 

23 

30 

- 


s 

3 

10 
17 
24 
31 


s 

*3 

10 
17 
24 


M 

'i 

11 

18 
25 


T 
'5 

12 
19 
26 


w 

*6 
13 
20 
27 


T 

i 

14 
21 

28 


F 

1 

8 
15 
22 
29 


s 

2 

9 

16 

23 

30 


MARCH. 


JUNE. 


SEPTEMBER. 


DECEMBER. 


s 

*3 

10 
17 
24 
31 


M 

"i 
11 

18 
25 


T 
5 

12 

19 

26 


w 
i 

13 

20 
27 


T 

'7 
14 
21 

28 


F 
1 

A 

22 

29 


s 

2 
9 

16 
23 
30 


s 

'2 
9 
16 
23 
30 


M 

3 

10 
17 
24 


T 

*4 
11 

18 
25 


w 

'5 
12 
19 

26 


T 

*6 
13 

20 
27 


F 

"7 
14 
21 
28 


s 

1 

8 

15 

22 

29 


s 

1 

8 
15 
22 
29 


M 

2 
9 

16 
23 
30 


T 

3 

10 
17 
24 


w 

4 
11 
18 
25 


T 

5 
12 
19 

26 


F 

6 

13 
20 

27 


s 

7 
14 
21 

28 


s 

1 

8 

15 

22 

29 


M 

2 
9 

16 
23 
30 


T 

3 

10 
17 
24 
31 


w 

4 
11 
18 
25 


T 

5 

12 
19 
26 


F 

6 

13 
20 
27 


s 

7 
14 
21 

28 



1919. 



JANUARY. 


APRIL. 


JULY. 


OCTOBER. 


s 


M 

*6 

13 

20 

27 


T 
"l 

14 

21 

28 


w 

1 

8 

15 

22 
29 


T 

2 

9 

16 

23 

30 


F 

3 

10 
17 
24 
31 


s 


s 


M 

7 

14 
21 

28 


T 

1 

8 

15 

22 
29 


w 

2 

9 

16 

23 

30 


T 

3 

10 
17 
24 


F 

4 

11 

18 
25 


s 

5 
12 
19 
26 


s 

6 

13 

20 

27 


M 

'7 

14 
21 

28 


T 

1 

8 
15 

22 

29 


w 

2 

9 

16 

23 

30 


T 

3 

10 
17 
24 
31 


F 

4 

11 
18 
25 


s 

5 

12 
19 
26 


s 

*5 
12 
19 

26 


M 

*6 

13 

20 
27 


T 

7 

14 
21 

28 


w 

1 
8 

15 
22 
29 


T 

2 
9 

16 
23 
30 


F 

3 

10 
17 
24 
31 


s 


*5 
12 

19 

26 


4 
11 

18 
25 


*6 
13 

20 
27 


4 

11 

18 
25 


FEBRUARY. 


MAY. 


AUGUST. 


NOVEMBER. 


s 

"2 

9 

16 

23 


M 

'3 
10 
17 
24 


T 

'4 
11 
18 
25 


w 

5 

12 
19 

26 


T 

6 

13 
20 
27 


F 
"l 

14 
21 

28 


s 

1 

8 
15 

22 


s 

"4 

11 

18 
25 


M 

*5 
12 
19 

26 


T 

*6 
13 
20 
27 


w 

"l 
14 
21 

28 


T 

1 
8 

15 
22 
29 


F 

2 

9 
16 
23 
30 


s 

3 

10 
17 
24 
31 


s 

'3 
10 
17 
24 
31 


M 

'4 
11 

18 
25 


T 
5 

12 

19 

26 


w 

*6 

13 

20 
27 


T 

7 

14 

21 

28 


F 
1 

8 

15 
22 
29 


s 

2 

9 

16 

23 
30 


s 

'2 

9 

16 
23 
30 


M 

a 

10 

17 
24 


T 

'4 
11 

18 
25 


W 

*5 
12 
19 
26 

•• 


T 

6 

13 

20 
27 


F 

*7 
14 
21 
28 


s 

1 

8 

15 

22 

29 


MARCH. 


JUNE. 


SEPTEMBER. 


DECEMBER. 


s 

*2 

9 

16 
23 
30 


M 

3 

10 
17 
24 
31 


T 

4 

11 
18 

25 


v; 

"d 
12 
19 
26 


T 

6 

13 

20 

27 


F 

I 

21 

28 


s 
1 

22 
29 


s 

1 
8 
15 

22 

29 


M 

2 

9 

16 

23 

30 


T 

3 

10 
17 
24 


w 

4 
11 
18 
25 


T 

5 

12 
19 

26 


F 

6 
13 
20 

27 


s 

7 
14 
21 

28 

• 


s 

"l 
14 
21 

28 


If 

1 

8 

15 

22 

29 


T 

2 
9 
16 
23 
30 


w 

3 

10 
17 
24 


T 

4 
11 
18 
25 


F 

5 

12 
19 
26 


s 

6 
13 
20 

27 


s 

*7 
14 
21 

28 


M 
1 

8 
15 

22 
29 


T 

2 

9 
16 

23 
30 


W 

3 
10 
17 
24 
31 


T F 

4 5 
11112 
1819 
25 26 


S 

6 
13 
20 

27 



11 



FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S 
GUIDE 



3 INCH GUN 
4.7 AND 6 INCH HOWITZER 



i cannot too strongly impress upon the 
war department the absolute necessity of 
rigid insistence that all men be thoroughly 
grounded in schools of soldiers." 

— Pershing. 



PREPARED BY THE OFFICERS OF 

THE 108th (2d PA.) FIELD ARTILLERY, 



PHILADELPHIA 

BLAKISTON'S SON & CO. 

1012 WALNUT STREET 



UFaoz 

. A3r. 



Copyright, 191 7, by E. St. J. Greble, Jr. 



JEC I2I9J7 



THE MAPLE PRESS YORK PA 

DCI.A47949 



FOREWORD 

A Pocket Guide intended to serve the immediate needs of field 
artillerymen in the Army of the United States, not with the 
idea of making them experts in any particular detail, but that 
they may have a general understanding of the fundamentals 
of their duties. 

Prepared by the officers of the Second Battalion, 108th (2nd 
Pa.) F. A.; reviewed, corrected and arranged by Lieut. George 
Roth, assisted by Pvt. W. S. D. Patton, this book is published 
in the hope that it may furnish some of the information so greatly 
demanded by our new army. 

Any changes or suggestions that may occur to officers or others 
using the guide are cordially invited by the editor, for consider- 
ation in the publication of future editions. 

E. St. J. Greble, Jr. 



FORM OF INDIVIDUAL EFFICIENCY 
RECORD CARD 



Subject 


Proficient 


Remarks 






Anti-gas 






p p 

•-t ct- 
V- to 
• ►-» 


Can- J Gun Squad 






noneer I Standing Gun 










Cordage 






Emplacements 






Dismounted 






F. A. Information Serv. 






b § 
s. £ 

Si * 

PJ 0) 

is! 3 
o> jo 

: > 

O P 

B 3 

to to 


Guard 






Gunnery 






Harnessing 






Hygiene 






Instruments 






Horsemanship 






( Fuses 






clature \ Material 






' Horse Equip. 






f Position & Aim 






> 
a. 

to 

09 




Pistol \ 

I Practice 






Roll" ind Packs ' ^ an * 






I Driver 




i 


Salutes and Courtesies 






( Buzzer 






Signalling -< Continental 






^ Semaphore 






j Pyramidal 






Tents \ 

I Shelter 














i 









TABLE OF CONTENTS 

Page 

Individual Efficiency Record Card iv 

Definitions i 

Purpose of Field Artillery : 6 

Formations 6 

Dismounted ■ 6 

Mounted 13 

General Organization 16 

Dismounted Drill 20 

Mounted Drill . . 26 

Cannoneers' Drill 42 

Standing Gun Drill. 3 Inch G. 4.7 Inch H, 6 Inch H. 42, 58, 66 

Gun Squad . . . . 52, 60, 78 

Prepare for Action " 52, 60, 78 

Firing " 54, 63, 81 

March Order. . " " " 56, 65, 82 

Questions and Answers 

Anti-Gas 85 

Calisthenics 94 

Cordage 99 

Emplacements 109 

Field Artillery Information Service 113 

Guard Duty 120 

Gunnery \ 131 

Harnessing 143 

Hygiene and First Aid 159 

Instruments 166 

Horsemanship 172 

Horse — Diseases and Cures 199 

Veterinary Medicines 206 

Nomenclature 217 

Ammunition 217 

Fuzes 218 

Materiel 219 

Cleaning Materiel, Harness, Instruments 227 

Pistol 233 

Rolls and Packs , . 238 

vii 



viii TABLE OF CONTENTS 

Page 

Salutes, Courtesies and Customs of the Service ...... 247 

Signalling 259 

Buzzer 259 

Telephone . 264 

Semaphore 267 

Wigwag . : 273 

Tents 278 

Pyramidal 279 

Shelter 281 

English-French Conversation 284 

Bugle Calls 288 

Tables 

English-French Tables of Measure and Value 320 

Range 

3 Inch Gun 331 

4.7 Inch Gun .....; 333 

4.7 Inch Howitzer 338 

6 Inch Howitzer . 343 



FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE 

GENERAL DEFINITIONS 

Alignment. — A straight line upon which several men, teams, 
carriages, or bodies of troops are formed or are to be formed; or 
the formation of such line; or the dressing of several elements 
upon a straight line. 

Base. — The element on which a movement is regulated or on 
which a formation is made. 

Center. — The middle point or element of a command. 

Column. — A formation in which the elements are placed one 
behind another. 

Conduct of Fire. — The employment of the technical means 
necessary to cause fire of the desired nature to be brought to 
bear upon the target. 

Depth. — The space from head to rear of any formation, in- 
cluding the leading and rear elements. The depth of a man dis- 
mounted is 1 2 inches. 

Disposition. — The arrangement of the elements in a formation. 

Distance. — Open space between elements in the direction of 
depth. 

Element. — One of the component parts of a larger unit — as a 
file, gun squad, team, carriage, section, platoon, battery, etc. 

Facing Distance. — About 14 inches, i.e., the difference between 
the front of a man in ranks, including his interval, and his depth. 

File. — Two men — the front-rank man and the corresponding 
man of the rear rank. The front-rank man is the file leader. 
A file which has no rear-rank man is a blank file. The term 
files applies also to individual men in single-rank formation. A 
single mounted man in ranks is also called a file. 

File Closers. — The men who, in dismounted formations, are 
posted 2 yards in rear of the rear rank in line. 
Fire Direction. — The tactical direction of one or more fire 

1 



2 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE 

units with a view of bringing their nre to bear at the right place 
at the right time. 

Fire Discipline. — That condition resulting from training and 
practice which insures an orderly and efficient working of the 
personnel in the delivery of fire. 

Flank. — The right or left of a command in line or column; 
also the element on the right or left of a line. 

By the enemy's right (left) flank is meant the flank which the 
enemy himself would so designate. 

Formation. — Arrangement of the elements of a command in 
their order in line, in column, or for battle. 

Front. — The space in width occupied by an element either in 
line or column. The term front denotes the direction of the 
enemy. The front of a man dismounted is 22 inches. 

The front of a gun unlimbered is the direction in which the 
muzzle points; of a limber or of a carriage limbered, the direction 
in which the pole points. 

Guide. — An officer, noncommissioned officer, or private upon 
whom a command or an element thereof regulates its march. 

Head. — The leading element of a column, in whatever direc- 
tion the column is facing. 

Interval. — Open space between elements abreast of each other. 

Laying. — The process of pointing a gun for range and direc- 
tion, so as to cause the trajectory to pass through the target. 

Left. — The left extremity or element of a body of troops. 

Line. — A formation in which the different elements are abreast 
of each other. When the elements are in column the formation 
is called a line of columns. 

Maneuver. — A movement executed by a battery or larger 
unit for the purpose of changing from one formation to another. 

Pace.— Thirty inches; the length of the full step in quick time. 

Rank. — A line of men, horses, teams, or carriages abreast of 
each other. 

Right. — The right extremity or element of a body of troops. 

Salvo. — A single discharge from each of the guns of a battery 
or other unit fired in regular order from one flank to the other, 
with intervals of about two seconds. 

Tail. — The rear element of a column, in whatever direction 
the column is facing. 



GENERAL DEFINITIONS 3 

Volley. — The rapid discharge of a certain indicated number of 
rounds, by each gun of a battery or other unit, each gun firing 
without regard to the others. 

DEFINITIONS FOR SERVICE PRACTICE 

Angle of Departure. — The angle between the plane of site and 
the line of departure. 

Angle of Fall. — The angle between the plane of site and the 
tangent to the trajectory at the point of fall. 

Angle of Incidence. — The angle between the plane of the sur- 
face struck and the tangent to the trajectory at the point of 
impact. 

Burst Center, Center of Burst, or Mean Point of Burst. — The 
point about which the points of burst of several projectiles are 
evenly distributed. 

Burst Interval. — The distance in the plane of site from the 
point of burst to the target. 

Burst Range. — The distance from the muzzle of the gun to the 
point of burst. 

Counter Slope. — A slope which descends toward the enemy 
and is wholly or partially hidden from him by the covering crest 
of the reverse slope. 

Crest. — The summit of a ridge. 

Curved Fire. — Fire with low muzzle velocity, the elevation 
not exceeding 540 mils. 

Danger Space. — The distance, in the plane of the slope con- 
sidered, over which an object of a given height would be 
struck. 

Deflection. — The angle between two vertical planes contain- 
ing, one the line of sight, and the other the axis of the bore. 

Deflection Center. — The point about which bursts in air or im- 
pact are evenly distributed in direction. 

Direct Fire. — Fire with high muzzle velocity, the elevation not 
exceeding 360 mils. 

Direct Laying. — Pointing the gun for direction and elevation 
by directing the line of sight upon the target. 

Drift. — The departure of the projectile from the plane of fire 
due to its rotation and to the resistance of the air. 



4 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE 

Elevation. — The angle between the plane of site and the axis 
of the bore when the gun is laid. 

Height of Burst. — (i) The vertical angle between the plane of 
site and a right line joining the muzzle of the gun and the point 
of burst. (2) The ordinate of a point of burst. 

Height of Burst Center. — The point about which bursts in air 
are evenly distributed in height. 

High Angle Fire. — Fire with elevation exceeding 540 mils. 

Indirect Laying. — Pointing the gun for direction by directing 
the line of sight upon an objective other than the target, and 
for elevation by the use of a quadrant or elevation level. 

Jump. — The angle between the line of departure and the axis 
of the bore before firing; hence, the difference between the ele- 
vation and the angle of departure. 

Line of Departure. — The prolongation of the axis of the bore 
at the instant the projectile leaves the gun. 

Line of Sight. — The right line passing through the sights and 
the target or the aiming point. 

Mean Height of Burst. — (1) The height of the burst center. 
(2) The average of several heights of bursts. 

Mil. — The unit of angular measure, one sixty-four-hundredth 
of a circle. The arc which subtends a mil at the center of a 
circle is, for practical purposes, equal to one one-thousandth of 
the radius. The arc and its tangent are nearly equal for angles 
not greater than 330 mils. 

Military Crest.— The line nearest a crest from which all the 
ground toward the enemy may be seen and reached by fire. 

Muzzle Velocity. — The velocity of the projectile at the instant 
it leaves the bore. Velocities are measured along the tangent 
to the trajectory at the point considered and are expressed in 
feet per second. 

Normal Corrector. — The corrector setting which gives a normal 
height. 

Normal Height. — The height of burst giving the maximum 
effect from a projectile. 

Ordinate. — The distance of a point of the trajectory from the 
plane of site. The maximum ordinate is the ordinate of the 
highest point of the trajectory. 

Parallax. — The angle at any point subtended by any given line. 



GENERAL DEFINITIONS 5 

Plane of Fire. — The vertical plane through the line of depar- 
ture; also called plane of departure. 

Plane of Site. — A plane containing the right line from the 
muzzle of the gun to the target, and a horizontal line perpen- 
dicular to the axis of the bore at the muzzle. 

Point of Burst. — The point at which a projectile bursts in the 
air or at which it would have burst in the air had it not struck 
the ground. 

Point of Fall, of Impact, or of Graze. — The point where the 
projectile strikes. 

Probable Error. — The amount of error that, in a large number 
of occurrences, will be as often exceeded as not. 

Quadrant Angle of Departure. — The angle between a horizon- 
tal plane and the line of departure. 

Quadrant Elevation. — The angle between a horizontal plane 
and the axis of the bore when the gun is laid. 

Range. — The distance from the muzzle of the gun to the 
target. 

Range Center, Center of Impact, or Mean Point of Fall. — The 
point about which the points of fall, reduced to the plane of site, 
are evenly distributed. 

Range of Burst Center. — The point about which bursts in air 
are evenly distributed in range. 

Site. — The angle between a horizontal plane and a right line 
joining the muzzle of the gun and the target; called also the 
angle of position. The origin of site scales is taken at 300. 

Trajectory. — The path described by the projectile in its flight. 

Remaining Velocity. — The velocity of the projectile at any 
point of the trajectory. 

Reverse Slope. — The slope which, from the direction of the 
eneniy, is hidden by a ridge of which the slope is a part. 

Terminal or Striking Velocity. — The remaining velocity at the 
point of -burst or point of fall. 

Time of Flight.— The time in seconds required for the projec- 
tile to travel from the muzzle of the gun to any point of the 
trajectory — usually to the point of fall or of burst. 



PURPOSE OF FIELD ARTILLERY 

i . The reason for the existence of field artillery is its ability 
to assist the other arms, especially the infantry, upon the field 
of battle. 

2. To enable it to render effective assistance upon the battle- 
field artillery must be able, first, to march rapidly and in good 
order and to establish itself, promptly and without confusion, 
in such positions as will best utilize the available terrain; second, 
to deliver an effective and overpowering fire upon any designated 
part of the enemy's position. 

Thorough training in marching, camping, reconnaissance and 
communication service, fire discipline, conduct of fire and fire 
direction, carried out over varied country, is essential to the 
attainment of these qualifications. 

3. So far as concerns the enlisted personnel, the most impor- 
tant element of a battery's efficiency on the battle field is its 
fire discipline. The basis of good fire discipline, as of all other 
matters, is thorough individual instruction, and it can only be 
secured and maintained by constant and vigorous drills and 
other exercises. To this end gun squads will be given daily such 
exercises as will serve to fix their attention and cultivate their 
dexterity. 

FORMATIONS 

A. DISMOUNTED FORMATIONS 

IN LINE 

The Captain. — Four yards in front of the center of the battery. 

Chiefs of Platoon. — Two yards in front of the center of their 
platoons. 

The Fourth Lieutenant, When There are But Three Platoons. 
— In the line of file closers, opposite the center of the battery. 

The First Sergeant. — In the front rank, 1 yard from the right 
of the first section. 

6 



DISMOUNTED FORMATIONS 7 

The Quartermaster Sergeant. — In the front rank, i yard from 
the left of the left section. 

The Mess and Stable Sergeants. — In the line of file closers of 
the ninth section. 

Chiefs of Section. — One yard in front of the center of their 
sections. 

Corporals. — The right man of the front rank of their squads, 
except the scout corporals, who are in the line of file closers of 
the fifth section. 

The Guidon and the Musicians. — In the line of file closers of 
the first section. 

Other Men for Whom There is no Place in the Squads. — 
In the line of file closers in rear of the section to which they 
belong or are attached. 

IN COLUMN OF SQUADS 

The Captain. — Four yards from the flank, opposite the center, 
on the left (right) when the first (ninth) section is in front. 

Chiefs of Platoon. — On the same side as the captain, 2 yards 
from the flank and opposite the center of their platoons. 

The Fourth Lieutenant, When There are But Three Platoons. 
— On the side opposite the captain, 2 yards from the flank and 
opposite the center of the column. 

The First Sergeant. — Either 40 inches in front of the guiding 
file of the leading squad or 40 inches in rear of the guiding file 
of the rear squad, according as the column has been formed by 
executing squads right or squads left from line. 

The Quartermaster Sergeant. — Either 40 inches in rear of the 
guiding file of the rear squad or 40 inches in front of the guiding 
file of the leading squad, according as the column has been formed 
by executing squads right or squads left from line. 

Chiefs of Section. — On the same side as the captain and 4 
inches from the flank man of the front rank of the rear squad of 
their section. 

The File Closers. — On the side opposite the captain and 
abreast of and 4 inches from the flank of the squad in rear of 
which they are posted in line. 

For technical, ' tactical, and administrative purposes the en- 
listed personnel of the battery is assigned to sections. A sec- 



8 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE 

tion dismounted consists of one sergeant, who is chief of section, 
and all the men assigned to the service of a piece and its caisson, 
called a gun section; or to the service of two caissons, called a 
caisson section. The leading caisson of a caisson section is the 
first caisson ; the rear caisson, the second caisson. The section 
assigned to the service of the battery wagon and the store wagon 
and to the service of the tools carried in those wagons is called 
the ninth section. The section assigned to the service of supply 
is called the supply section. With the 3 inch Gun and 4.7 
Howitzer, at dismounted formations the members of the supply 
section, unless assigned elsewhere, habitually form in the line of 
file closers of the ninth section. With the 6 inch Howitzer, at 
dismounted formations the members of the Battery Commander's 
Detail are assigned to the supply section. 

The first four sections of the battery are gun sections. The 
remaining sections, except the ninth section and the supply 
section, are caisson sections. Each gun section consists of a 
gun squad and a driver squad. Each caisson section consists of 
a caisson squad and a driver squad. The ninth section consists 
of a mechanic squad and a driver squad. The supply section 
consists of two squads. 

Each section dismounted is formed in line, with the gun squad, 
caisson squad, or mechanic squad on the right, the driver squad 
on the left. Men temporarily attached to sections fall in the line 
of file closers or at such other places as may be designated. 

Each gun squad consists of one of the corporals and seven 
(eight for 6 inch) of the privates assigned to the service of a gun 
section. The corporal is the gunner and should be selected for 
his qualifications without regard to his rank in the section. The 
privates are cannoneers, numbered from No. 1 to No. 7. (Nos. 
1-8 for 6 inch.) 

Each caisson squad consists of one of the corporals and seven 
of the privates assigned to the service of a caisson section. The 
corporal is a caisson corporal. The privates are cannoneers, 
three of whom are assigned to the first caisson and numbered 
from No. 4 to No. 6, and the remaining four to the second cais- 
son and numbered from No. 4 to No. 7. 

Movements prescribed for a gun squad apply, with obvious 
modifications, to a caisson, driver, or mechanic squad. 



DISMOUNTED FORMATIONS 



9 



For 3 inch Gun and 4.7 inch Howitzer each gun squad is formed 
in double rank as follows: The gunner and Nos. 2, 4, and 6 in 
the front rank in order from right to left; Nos. 1, 3, 5, and 7 in 
the rear rank, in order fiom right to left; No. 1 covering the gun- 
ner. For 6 inch Howitzer, the gunner and 8 cannoneers are 
formed as 



8 6 4 2 G 



40 inches. 



40 inches. 



7 5 3i 



7 5 3i 



3 inch Gun and 4.7 inch 
Howitzer. 



6 inch Howitzer. 



Each caisson squad is formed in double rank as follows: The 
caisson corporal and Nos. 4, 5, and 6 of the first caisson in the 
front rank in order from right to left; Nos. 4, 5, 6, and 7 of the 
second caisson in the rear rank, in order from right to left; No. 4 
covering the caisson corporal. 



6 


5 


4 


CC 




40 inches. 




7 


6 


5 


4 



For 3 inch Gun and 4.7 inch Howitzer each driver squad of 
the gun and caisson sections consists of a caisson corporal, the 
six drivers of the carriages of the section, and an extra cannoneer, 
No. 8, who is trained as a spare driver. 

For 6 inch Howitzer, each driver squad of the gun and caisson 
sections consists of a caisson corporal and the eight drivers of the 



10 



FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE 



carriages of the section. The driver squad of the ninth sec- 
tion consists of two of the spare drivers and the eight drivers 
of the carriages of that section. 

Each driver squad is formed in double rank as follows: The 
caisson corporal is on the right of the front rank; the lead, swing, 
and wheel drivers of the piece in a gun section, or of the first 
caisson in a caisson section, are on the left of the caisson corporal 
in order from right to left; the lead, swing, and wheel drivers 
of the caisson in a gun section, or of the second caisson in a caisson 
section, are in the rear rank in order from right to left: for 3 inch 
Gun and 4.7 inch Howitzer, covering the drivers of the front rank, 
the spare driver, No. 8, in the rear rank covering the caisson 
corporal; for 6 inch Howitzer covering the corresponding drivers 
of the front rank, the caisson corporal being uncovered, and when 
the driver squad assembles in section he takes post in the line of 
file closers ot his squad. 



W 



cc 



w 


ws 


LS 


L 


CC 



40 inches. 



40 inches. 



w 


s 


L 


8 



w 


ws 


LS 


L 



3 inch Gun and 4.7 inch 
Howitzer. 



6 inch Howitzer. 



3 INCH GUN AND 4.7 INCH HOWITZER 

The driver squad of the ninth section is similarly formed, the 
spare lead and spare wheel drivers taking, respectively, the places 
prescribed for the caisson corporal and No. 8. 

In the fifth section the driver squad is formed with the tele- 
phone corporal of the battery commander's detail as its corporal ; 
the scout corporals and the signal privates of that detail fall in 
as file closers of the section. 

The mechanic squad is formed in double rank as follows: In 
the front rank the chief mechanic is on the right and three of 



DISMOUNTED FORMATIONS 



11 



the mechanics are on his left ; in the rear rank, covering the men 
in the front rank, are the four remaining mechanics. 

In a battery on a peace footing the spare cannoneers assigned 
to the ninth section constitute a squad, which forms on' the left 
of the driver squad. 

6 INCH HOWITZER 

The driver squad of the ninth section is similarly formed, one 
of the spare drivers taking the place of the caisson corporal, 
the other spare driver taking post in the line of file closers of 
the squad. 

The mechanic squad is formed in line in. double rank as 
follows: The chief mechanic is on the right of the front rank; 
three of the mechanics are on the left of the chief mechanic in 
the front rank, the remaining four are in the rear rank cover- 
ing the men in the front rank. The two remaining spare drivers 
of the ninth section are posted in the line of file closers of this 
squad. 

For formation dismounted, the battery commander's de- 
tail is attached to the supply section, and this section is formed 
into two squads in double rank, in line as follows: First squad: 
The scout corporal is on the right of the front rank; three of 
the drivers are on the left of the scout corporal in order from 
right. to left; the scout private is in the rear rank covering the 
scout corporal; the fourth driver is in the rear rank covering 
the driver on the left of the scout corporal; the fifth driver is 
in the rear rank covering the left man of the front rank. The 
musician is in the line of file closers. 



D 


D 


D 


Scout 
Corp. 



D 



40 inches. 



D 


Scout 
Pvt. 



Second squad : The telephone corporal is on the right of the 
front rank; the two signal privates and one cook are on the left 
of the telephone corporal in order from right to left; the other 



12 



FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE 



two cooks are in the rear rank, one covering the telephone cor- 
poral and one covering the left man in the front rank. 



Cook 



Sig. 
Pvt. 



Sig. 
Pvt. 



40 inches. 



Tel. 
Corp. 



Cook 



Cook 



In a battery on a peace footing, the spare cannoneers in 
the gun and caisson sections are posted in the file closers of their 
respective sections, and the quartermaster sergeant may be 
assigned to the command of the supply section. 

At dismounted formations, if a squad contains less than six 
men, it is increased to that number by transfers from other 
squads, or is broken up and its members assigned to other squads 
and posted in the line of file closers. 

When a squad consists of six men, both of the interior files 
are blank; when of seven men, one such file is blank. 

A platoon dismounted consists of one lieutenant, who is chief 
of platoon, and two sections dismounted. 

The platoon dismounted is formed in double rank, with the 
sections arranged from right to left in the order of their perma- 
nent numbers. 

A battery dismounted (3 inch and 4.7) comprises the personnel 
shown in detail in Tables of Organization I and II; for 6 inch 
Howitzer as shown in Table III below and Table XVII in 
Appendix. 

The battery dismounted is formed in double rank with the 
platoons arranged from right to left in the order of their perma- 
nent numbers. 

The senior lieutenant is, at formations and exercises of the 
battery dismounted, assigned as chief of the first platoon. The 
lieutenant next in rank is assigned as chief of the second platoon, 
and so on. 



MOUNTED FORMATIONS 



13 



Chiefs of platoon and section supervise the movements of 
their units. 

When only a part of the battery is formed for dismounted in- 
struction, the word section or platoon, as the case may be, is 
substituted in the commands for battery. 



Table III 
Organization of a 6 inch Howitzer Battery 



Captain i 

First Lieutenants 2 

Second Lieutenants 2 

5 

First Sergeant 1 

Supply Sergeant 1 

Stable Sergeant 1 

Mess Sergeant 1 



Chief Mechanics 1 

Saddlers 1 

Horseshoers 4 

Mechanics 3 

Buglers 3 

Cooks 4 

16 

Privates, First Class 58 

Privates 117 



Sergeants: 

Line 8 

Instrument 1 

Signal 1 



175 

Total Enlisted 228 

Aggregate 233 



Corporals: 

Gun 4 

Caisson /. . .13 

Instrument 2 

Signal 2 

Scout , 2 



Note: Privates assigned: 

Sections 1-5, each 21 

Sections 6-8, each 14 

Sections, Battery Detail.. 13 
Sections, 9th Section and 

Supply 15 



23 



B. MOUNTED FORMATIONS 

The habitual formations are the order in line, the order in 
section column, the order in flank column, and the order in 
battery. 

The order in line is that in which the sections of the battery 
are formed abreast of each other in. the order, or the reverse 



TABLE OF ORGANIZATION NO. 17. FOR REGIMENT 

Three Battalions OF 6-INCH HOWITZERS. Six Batteries 





Regi- 
ment 
Hqrs. 


Bat- 
tin. 
Hqrs. 


Bat- 
tery 


Head- 
qrs. 

Com- 
pany 


Sup- 
ply 
Com- 
pany 


Total 

in 
Regi- 
ment 


Colonel 


1 

1 










1 


Lieutenant Colonel 










1 




1 
1 








3 


Captains-adjutant 


1 








4 


Captains ; 


1 
2 
2 


1 

11 

9 


1 
1 

1 


8 


First Lieutenants 






24 








22 











Regimental Sergeant-major. . , 
Battalion Sergeant-major. . . . 
Regimental Supply Sergeant. 

First Sergeants 

Color Sergeants 

Supply Sergeants 

Stable Sergeants 

Mess Sergeants 

Sergeants 

Corporals 

Chief Mechanics 

Saddlers 

Horseshoers 

Mechanics 

Buglers 

Cooks 

Privates, First Class 

Privates 

Wagoners 

Band Leader 

Assistant Band Leader 

Sergeant Bugler 

Band Sergeants 

Band Corporals 

Musicians, First Class 

Musicians, Second Class. . . . 
Musicians, Third Class 



1 
1 

1 

10 

23 

1 

1 

4 

3 

3 

4 

58 

117 



1 
2 
1 
1 
1 
14 
39 



3 

2 

4 

4 

34 

68 



1 
2 
4 
2 
4 
13 



3 
12 
24 
67 









228 


207 


128 


1703 


Draft Horses 






154 

48 


38 
134 


11 

176 

8 


962 

442 
176 


Riding Horses 


3 


2 


Draft Mules 


Riding Mules 










8 


Caissons 






12 

61 

171 

4 

1 

1 

1 

1 

336 




72 
622 


Pistols 


3 


2 


228 


19 
112 


Rifles 


1138 


Guns 






24 


Reel Carts. 


1 


1 




... 1 


10 


Store Wagons 






6 


Battery Wagons 










6 


Bicycles 






8 




14 


Ammunition Rounds .'....... 






2016 


Combination Battery Store Wagon. . . . 






1 
3 
1 
I 
I 
4 


27 
8 
8 
8 


1 


Spring Wagon (2 horse) 








3 


Telephone Truck 








1 


Two Ton Truck 








1 


Motor Cars 








1 


Motorcycles (Side cars) 








4 


Baggage and Ration Wagon 








27 


Ration Carts (2 Mule) 










8 


Water Carts (2 mule) 










8 


Rolling Kitchens 










8 















MOUNTED FORMATIONS 



15 



•d 

u 

O 



43 g 0*3 
.2 *"** 

d +j cd 

Sopo 

cd co ^43 

* d 43 

♦"•P CO 
P~> CD \-> r* .1 

g ° $*s s 

15 £ <=>43 p. 



43 £ ^ cd 
CD rv <-<43 

•P CO c 



CD CD CD CD 



o ft 



42^° .0,1 



hiw v-.'d U3 



>> o ^ d 



, IC*43 CD ! 



. Ct3 CD 

; >>« h g «5 



- g ° &fl 4) 

£ 2 J *d £ . >> *d 

ia C^ cd oJ^tj O cd cd 

Kj DC Cd p CO jyj P CN p CO 



is CO y 



43 O CD 

d ^cd 

CD 1/5,3 
O 1-,-P 

CDrtf £ 
43 d o 



43 

a. 



•d »i 

J43 



- § s 

CO C «J 

O d<E 



■S-S-S 

li s 

H O O 

«-( BO 

(D'd U 

+3 cd > 



rCj d £ n 

43 « C Cd 

d C ci M 

CD O 0) d 

§t.5S cD^d 

.£ cd43 OS 

s. rt £43 



u^i <u w _ 

CD S-^ 2 



— 1 


d 


CD 


nl 




-E 


o 




-H 






r/) 


CD 


o 


c, 


4= 


43 


4-= 


- 





»*5 Phfl 



sus si 



s^-g.gd 

CD*d°*° 

. ca dq3 d «» 

"OS CD*d 
g>Prt <o43 d 



h q«« CD 

CD 42 O CO 



*^ CO 

rd W 

^ o^ 

CO Oy. 

CD+ 3 CD 
ei Z. *-< 



CD O 
CD nS 

CD^d 



CD S 



cog 



"*- 5 ^ CD 

d d^ 
* 5 S 

CD^vb 

if o 

o ^*2 
o,« is S 

CVS ^r^ 



cd rt d 
"S ^ cd 

CD Tj-^ 
CD +J 

2 s"o 

t 3 O CD 

Ph co o 

§3* 



Vh Vi d 

aj aS as 

d * 

CD ^+» 

CD rC| 

cd >;.sp 



cdtS O 
©id 43 

4J O 



cd cd 



d CD 

o.+j 
£ o 

— a 

is ^ 

cd u 

00 



^^d° 

.2^ g 

f 5 CO 
C CD ' — 

£~ O 

42_h CD • 
bK CJh CD 

rt cd±! bo 
gco^.2 
tS d'd »-> 

Cd-rt CD " 



Jl4-< CD 

■^ o cd 

d P<° 

cd a vh 

cd o cd 

NCD d CD 

42 043 



Jo 
CD bo 

rC d 

^^ 

£ cd 

•ti CD 






ta 



oS 

rO O 
O Vh . 

+» CD CD 

+j > bo 



043.cd.-p 



CD O fcJDCD >, •> 

r^-.gr^cD^ 

^. CO >■ -M T d 

^-d cd S"S_ 

.h^'C CDT3 CD fc;^^ 



42 o' 

9 «H L. 

4^ >5 



> O WH 

> n d o 



>^44 $1 

C o 



g.S ° ^-P° ^«d^ 

^d ■g-S'SjjSB 

o^^l^d^rti^ 

ft^+5^43^! ft'C cd 



o ° 
03 ^ 
« rt 

CD 
43 ^ 

1-s 

CO 

o »- . 
o cd d 

^^cd 

o N a 
■p - cd 

• ^§° 



16 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE 

order, of their numbers from right to left. The carriages are 
limbered, and in each section are in section column, the pieces 
being either in front or in rear of their caissons. In the normal 
order in park the pieces are usually in front. 

If the carriages of each section are in double section, the for- 
mation is called a double section line. 

The order in section column is that in which the sections of 
the battery follow each other in the order, or the reverse order, 
of their numbers, from front to rear. The carriages are lim- 
bered, and in each section are in section column, the pieces being 
either in front or in rear of their caissons. 

If the carriages of each section are in double section, the for- 
mation is called a double section column. 

The order in flank column is that in which the sections of the 
battery follow each other in the order, or the reverse order, of 
their number, from front to rear. The carriages are limbered, 
and in each section are in flank column, the caissons being all 
either on the right or left of their pieces. 

The order in battery is that in which the pieces and caissons 
of the gun sections, placed for action, are in line in the order, 
or the reverse order, of their permanent numbers, from right 
to left; the caissons of the fifth section, unlimbered, one on each 
flank of this line, or otherwise disposed by direction of the cap- 
tain or the executive; the limbers either in rear of their carriages 
or formed at such other place as the captain may order. 

The sections comprising the combat train, when present, are 
posted at the discretion of the captain. 

C. GENERAL ORGANIZATION 

The administrative duties of a battery of field artillery are 
too numerous for their efficient supervision in detail by one 
officer. To secure such supervision the battery commander must 
utilize the services of his lieutenants. The most effective assist- 
ance will not be obtained by holding each lieutenant responsible 
for a platoon, which is not a self-sustaining unit but one depend- 
ent upon agencies outside itself. 

The assignment of lieutenants to administrative functions 
must then be made so as to correspond to the various duties 



General organization 17 

necessary to the daily existence of the battery as a whole. These 
duties may be classified into three departments: 

Department A. — The care and maintenance of all parts of the 
wheeled materiel. 

Department B. — The care of animals, the inspection, care, and 
issue of forage, the police of stables and picket lines, adjustment 
and care of harness, shoeing, etc. 

Department C. — The care and police of quarters, the superin- 
tendence of the battery mess, personal equipment and clothing, 
and the routine office work. 

Each of these departments, -together with all necessary person- 
nel and materiel, should be under the direct supervision of one 
of the lieutenants, who should be held responsible for the work 
of his department. Except in emergencies the battery com- 
mander should give instructions affecting any department 
thru the lieutenant in charge. r 

This division of administrative duties is also utilized to facili- 
tate the instruction of the battery as follows: The lieutenant in 
charge of department A is the executive, and is placed in imme- 
diate charge of the individual instruction of the cannoneers and 
their duties in the gun squads; the one in charge of department 
B is placed in immediate charge of the instruction in equitation, 
in driving, and in all duties pertaining to the horses; and the 
one in charge of department C is reconnaissance officer and is 
placed in immediate charge of all dismounted instruction and 
assists the captain in the training of the battery commander's 
detail. 

The fourth lieutenant, when available, is ordinarily the one 
with least experience as a battery officer. He should be utilized 
in assisting the others and should be required to thoroughly 
familiarize himself with their work. 

In time of war the captain assigns his lieutenants to the de- 
partments to which they are best fitted, the especial fitness of 
the executive being the first consideration. 

The battery as organized on a war footing is shown in the 
Tables of Organization. It is commanded by the captain. The 
first platoon is commanded by the executive; the second platoon 
by the assistant to the executive; the third platoon by the recon- 
naissance officer, when that officer is not otherwise employed; 
2 



18 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE 

and the fourth platoon by the lieutenant in charge of Department 
B. 

The first sergeant is assistant to the captain, and is responsible 
to him for the general good order, police, and discipline of the 
battery. 

The stable sergeant is responsible for the general care of the 
public animals assigned to the battery and the good order and 
police of the stables, picket lines, etc. 

The supply sergeant is responsible for the care of all Govern- 
ment property issued to the battery. 

The mess sergeant is responsible for the proper messing of the 
battery. 

The chief mechanic is responsible for the good order and repair 
of the materiel in actual use by the battery. In action he assists 
the executive. 

The chiefs of section are responsible to the lieutenant in 
charge for the good order of all materiel and equipment issued 
to their sections. They are directly responsible for the service- 
able condition of their teams, harness, and horse equipment. 

The gunners are responsible to their chiefs of section for the 
good order of their pieces and caissons. They are directly re- 
sponsible for the good order of the pieces. 

The Nos. 4 are directly responsible to their gunners in gun 
sections, to their chiefs of section or the caisson corporal in 
charge of caissons in caisson sections, for the good order of their 
caissons. 

The drivers are directly responsible to their chiefs of section 
for the good order of their horses, harness, and horse equipment. 

The instrument sergeant is responsible to the captain for the 
good order of the range-finding, fire-control, and signal equip- 
ment. 

The telephone corporal is responsible to the instrument ser- 
geant for the good order of all the signal equipment of the battery. 

Members of the special details are responsible to the tele- 
phone corporal for the good order of articles of signal equipment, 
' to the instrument sergeant for the good order of other articles 
of the range-finding and fire-control equipment issued to them. 

Individuals are directly responsible for the good order of all 
articles of personal equipment issued to them. Men assigned 



GENERAL ORGANIZATION 19 

to sections are responsible to their chiefs of section for the good 
order of such articles. 

It is the duty of all men to report at once to the noncommis- 
sioned officer, or officer to whom they are responsible, any injury 
to the materiel or any deficiency in the equipment. 

On subdivision for action the battery is divided into the 
firing battery and the combat train. The firing battery com- 
prises the first five sections. It is under the immediate command 
of the captain. The combat train comprises the sixth, seventh, 
eighth, and ninth sections. It is commanded by the lieutenant in 
charge of Department B. He is assisted by the stable sergeant. 



DISMOUNTED DRILL 
POSITION OF THE SOLDIER 

Heels on the same line and as near each other as the conforma- 
tion of the man permits. 

Feet turned out equally and forming an angle of about 45 . 

Knees straight without stiffness. 

Hips level and drawn back slightly; body erect and resting 
equally on hips; chest lifted and arched; shoulders square and 
falling equally. 

Arms and hands hanging naturally, thumbs along the seams 
of the trousers. 

Head erect and squarely to the front, chin drawn in so that 
the axis of the head and neck is vertical; eyes straight to the 
front. 

Weight of the body sustained principally upon the balls of the 
feet, heels resting lightly on the ground. 

Squad movements same as infantry. 

TO FORM THE BATTERY 

At the sounding of assembly, the first sergeant facing the bat- 
tery and 6 yards in front of where the center is to be, commands: 
1. FALL IN; 2. CALL ROLLS; 3. REPORT. 

At the command fall in, the gunners, caisson corporals, tele- 
phone corporal, and chief mechanic place themselves on the line 
facing to the front in their proper order, at sufficient distance 
apart for the formation of their squads; each squad forms on its 
corporal; the chiefs of section take their posts facing their sec- 
tions. The assembly having ceased, the first sergeant causes 
the section to close to the right, if necessary. 

At the command call rolls, the chiefs of sections call the rolls 
and then face to the front. 

At the command report, the chief of the first section salutes 

20 



DISMOUNTED DRILL 21 

and reports: First section, present; or First section, Corporal 

and Private (s) are absent. The first sergeant 

having received and verified this report, returns the salute. The 
chief of the second section then reports in like manner, and so 
on. Men who are known to be absent by proper authority are 
not reported absent by the chiefs of section. After receiving 
the reports, the first sergeant faces about, salutes the captain, 
and reports: Sir, the battery is present or accounted for; or, 
Sir, (so many), noncommissioned officers or privates are absent. 
The first sergeant then takes his post. 

The captain places himself 12 yards in front of the center 
of the battery, superintends the formation, and receives the 
report of the first sergeant, whose salute he returns. 

The lieutenants take their posts as soon as the first sergeant 
has reported. 

TO DISMISS THE BATTERY 

Being in line at a halt: 

The captain directs the first sergeant: Dismiss the battery, 
and returns the salute of the first sergeant. 

The officers fall out; the first sergeant salutes, steps 3 yards 
to the front, faces to the left, and commands: DISMISSED. 

In exceptional cases the battery may be dismissed from any 
formation, either at a halt or marching. 

TO OPEN RANKS 

Being in line at a halt: 1. Open ranks ; 2. MARCH ; 3. FRONT. 

At the command march the front rank executes right dress ; 
the rear rank and the file closers march backward four steps, 
halt, and execute right dress ; the fourth lieutenant, when only 
three platoons are present, marches backward 4 steps and halts; 
the chiefs of platoon step forward 2 yards, the chiefs of section 
1 yard, and all dress to the right. The captain goes to the right 
flank of the battery and aligns the chiefs of platoons, the chiefs 
of section, the front rank, the rear rank, and the file closers. 

Before giving the command front the captain places himself 
in front of the post of the first sergeant and on a line with the 
chiefs of platoon and faces to the left. At the command front 



22 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE 

all the men turn their heads and eyes to the front, and those 
in ranks drop the left arm. 

After the command front has been executed, the captain places 
himself 6 yards in front of the center of the battery, facing to 
the front. 

TO CLOSE RANKS 

Being at open ranks: i. Close ranks; 2. MARCH. 

At the command march, the lieutenants and chiefs of section 
face about and resume their posts. in line; the rear rank closes 
to 40 inches, each man covering his file leader; the file closers 
close to 2 yards from the rear rank; the captain then takes his 
post in line. 

ALIGNMENTS 

The alignments are executed as prescribed for the squad; the 
base squad may, if desired, be established instead of the base 
file. In aligning the battery, the captain places himself in pro- 
longation of the line, 2 yards from and facing the flank toward 
which the alignment is made; after commanding FRONT, he 
resumes his post. 

GUIDES 

In marching in line the guide is the right or left man of the 
front rank. In marching in column of squads the guide is the 
first sergeant or quartermaster sergeant if in ranks; otherwise 
the guide of the leading squad. 

If the guide is changed while marching in column of squads, 
the captain, chiefs of platoon, chiefs of section, and file closers 
change to the other flank by darting through the column or 
passing around the ends of the column, as may be most con- 
venient. 

When line is formed from column of squads, the captain, 
chiefs of platoon and of section, file closers, the first sergeant, 
and^the quartermaster sergeant take their posts in line in the 
most convenient way without interfering with the movements 
of the squads. 

Whenever the battery in line is faced about or marched to 
the rear, all men in the front rank, not covered, step into the 



DISMOUNTED DRILL 23 

new front rank; the first sergeant and the quartermaster ser- 
geant place themselves in line with the new front rank, but do 
not change to the opposite flank. The chiefs of platoon and 
section and the file closers maintain their relative positions. 

TO FORM OR MARCH IN COLUMN OF SQUADS FROM LINE 

Being in line: i. Squads right (left); 2. MARCH; or 1. 
Squads right (left) ; 2. MARCH; 3. Battery ; 4. HALT. 

Each squad executes the movement. The chiefs of platoon 
and of section and the file closers take their places in column of 
squads. 

The guide of each rank preserves the trace and step of the 
preceding guide at a distance of 40 inches. 

TO CHANGE DIRECTION WHILE IN COLUMN OF SQUADS 

Being in column of squads, to change direction: 1. Column 
right (left) ; 2. MARCH. 

At the second command the front rank of the leading squad 
turns to the right on a moving pivot; the other ranks, without 
command, turn successively on the same ground and in a similar 
manner. 

Column half right (half left) is similarly executed. 

TO FORM COLUMN OF SQUADS FROM LINE AND 
CHANGE DIRECTION 

Being in line: 1. Squads right (left), column right (left); 2. 
MARCH; or, 1. Right (Left) by squads; 2. MAHCH. 

In the first case the right squad initiates the column right as 
soon as it has completed the squad right. 

In the second case, at the command march, the right squad 
marches forward ; the remainder of the battery executes squads 
right, column left on the same ground as the right squad, and 
follows the right squad. The right squad in moving off takes 
four short steps and then the full step. 

TO FORM LINE FROM COLUMN OF SQUADS 

Being in column of squads, to form line to the flank: 1. Squads 
right (left) ; 2. MARCH; 3, Guide right (left) ; or, 1. Squads 
right (left) ; 2. MARCH; 3. Battery; 4. HALT. 



24 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE 

Executed by each squad. The chiefs of platoon and section, 
file closers, etc., take their posts in line in the most convenient 
manner. 

Being in column of squads, to form line on right or left: i. 
On right (left) into line; 2. MARCH; 3. Battery ; 4. HALT; 5. 
FRONT. 

At the first command the corporal of the leading squad com- 
mands: Right turn. The corporals of the other squads com- 
mand: Forward, if at a halt. At the second command the lead- 
ing squad turns to the right on moving pivot. The command 
halt is given when the leading squad has advanced the desired 
distance in the new direction; it halts; its corporal then com- 
mands: Right (left) dress. 

The squads in rear continue to march straight to the front; 
each, when opposite the right of its place in line on the left of 
the preceding squads, executes right turn at the command of its 
corporal; each is halted on the line at the command of its cor- 
poral, who then commands: Right dress. All dress on the first 
squad in line. 

If executed in double time, all the squads march in double 
time until halted. 

Being in column of squads to form line to the front: 1. 
Right (Left) front into line; 2. MARCH; 3. Battery; 4. 
HALT; 5. FRONT. 

At the first command the corporals of the squads in rear of 
the leading one command: Right oblique. If at a halt, the cor- 
poral of the leading squad commands: Forward. At the second 
command the leading squad moves straight forward; the rear 
squads oblique as indicated. The command halt is given when 
the leading squad has advanced the desired distance; it halts; 
its corporal then commands: Left dress. Each of the rear 
squads when opposite its place in line resumes the original direc- 
tion at the command of its corporal; each is halted on the line 
at the command of its corporal, who then commands: Left dress. 
All dress on the first squad in line. 

If executed in double time, all the squads march in double 
time until halted. 



DISMOUNTED DRILL 25 

TO FORM FLANK COLUMN OF FILES FROM LINE 

Movements in flank column have no disciplinary value. 
Their use should be limited to the rare occasions necessitating 
a narrow front of the column. They are executed in quick time 
only. 

Being in line at a halt : i. Right (Left) ; 2. FACE ; 3. Forward ; 
4. MARCH. 

At the second command all face to the right. At the fourth 
command all take the full step. Individuals not in the two 
ranks move so as to preserve the relative positions they had in 
line, 

ROUTE ORDER AND AT EASE 

Marching in column of squads: 1. Route order; 2. MARCH; 
or, 1. At ease ; 2. MARCH. 

Officers carry their sabers at w T ill or in the scabbard; the men 
retain their positions in ranks, but are not required to keep step. 

If the command be route order, the men are permitted to talk; 
if the command be at ease, silence is preserved. 

To resume the cadenced step: 1. Battery; 2. ATTENTION. 

If the command halt be given while marching at route order, 
the men remain at rest in ranks; if while marching at ease, they 
remain at ease. 

Route order and at ease are not used while marching in double 
time. 

The use of dismounted, exercises being limited, the marching 
of the battery dismounted at route order or at ease should be 
exceptional. 



MOUNTED DRILL 

POSITION OF THE SOLDIER MOUNTED 

The position described below should be considered a standard 
toward which all riders should gradually approximate. 

The buttocks bearing equally upon the saddle and as far for- 
ward as possible. 

The thighs turned without constraint upon their flat side, 
clasping the horse evenly and stretched only by their own weight 
and that of the lower legs. 

The knees bent and flexible. 

The lower legs falling naturally, the calves in contact with the 
horse without pressure; the toes dropping naturally when the 
rider is without stirrups. 

The back supple and never hollowed. 

The upper part of the body easy, free, and erect. 

The shoulders thrown back evenly. 

The arms free, the elbows falling naturally. 

The head erect without stiffness. 

Eyes alert and sweeping the horizon. 

The reins held as heretofore prescribed. 

This position may be modified by the instructor to suit vary- 
ing conditions and unusual conformations. 

TO FORM THE BATTERY IN THE PARK 

The battery, dismounted, being formed on the battery parade? 
the first sergeant commands : Drivers to the front. 

The chiefs of section and driver squads step 6 yards to the 
front; the chiefs of section place themselves in front, and the 
individually mounted men in the line of file closers of the squads 
thus formed. The first sergeant sees that suitable cannoneers 
are detailed to replace absent drivers, closes the driver squads 
toward either flank, and directs the senior chief of section to 
march them to the horses. 

26 



MOUNTED DRILL 27 

On arrival at the stable or picket line,- the chief of section in 
charge halts the drivers and commands: Harness. The drivers 
fall out and harness under the supervision of their respective 
chiefs. Chiefs of section and other individually mounted men 
saddle their horses while the drivers harness. 

The drivers having been marched off, the first sergeant closes 
the gun squads to either flank and directs the senior gunner to 
march them to the park. The senior gunner, on arrival at the 
park, posts the gun squads with their carriages. 

If the carriages are in a gun shed, the senior gunner halts the 
column in front of the building, gives the necessary directions 
for the formation of the park, and commands: Form park. 

The cannoneers fall out, the carriages are run out by hand and 
formed in park. 

The park being in order, the senior gunner posts the cannon- 
eers at the carriages limbered. He then commands: Put your 
carriages in order. At that command each gunner and No. 4, 
under the supervision of the chief mechanic, prepare the car- 
riages for hitching in. The remaining cannoneers either assist 
in this work or are sent to assist in policing the picket line or 
stables, as may be directed. They are returned to their posts 
by the time the teams are hitched. 

When the horses are harnessed, the first sergeant designates 
the place of formation and commands : LEAD OUT ; or, 1 . First 
(such) section ; 2. LEAD OUT. 

The sections lead out and form in column. The first sergeant 
mounts the drivers, conducts the column to the park, posts the 
teams with their carriages, and causes them to be hitched. 

If the park is near by, the first sergeant, as soon as the horses 
are harnessed, commands: 1. To your carriages; 2. LEAD OUT; 
or, 2. First (such) section; 3. LEAD OUT. He then gives the 
commands for hitching as before. 

In all cases the first sergeant sees that the cannoneers perform 
their duties in the park and that the drivers harness, lead out, 
and hitch with the least practicable delay and without noise or 
confusion. 

In the field when the horses are harnessed at the carriages the 
duties^are performed in a similar manner. The senior chief of 
section, on the arrival of the drivers at the picket line, commands: 



28 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE 

Harness and hitch. The teams are hitched by the drivers, under 
the direction of their chiefs of section, according to the methods 
heretofore prescribed. 

In horse batteries, as soon as the park is formed and the car- 
riages made ready for use, the senior gunner directs the gunners 
to march their squads to the horses and have the horses 
saddled. 

The squads may be required to lead out with the teams of 
their sections. In this case they form in rear of the teams and 
are marched to the park with them, each gunner posting his 
squad in rear of its caisson as the teams of the section are being 
posted with their carriages. 

If the squads are not ready when the teams are harnessed the 
first sergeant may direct that the teams be led out and posted 
as above prescribed; when ready each squad is then led out and 
formed by its gunner, marched to the park, and posted. 

The lieutenants reach the park or the stables at such time as 
is necessary for them to superintend the proper details of their 
departments. They take their posts as chiefs of platoon, as 
soon as the teams are posted with the carriages, and in time to 
superintend the hitching. 

Each chief of section, as soon as his teams are hitched, makes 
a minute inspection of his section and reports the result to his 
chief of platoon. 

Each chief of platoon, having received the reports of his chiefs 
of section and made a general inspection of the platoon, com- 
mands: REST. 

The special details and the other individually mounted men 
take their posts during the hitching. 

The buglers report to the captain at such time and place as 
he may direct. 

Upon the approach of the captain the chiefs of platoon call 
their platoons to attention, and as soon as the captain takes his 
place in front, report in succession from right to left; (Such) 
platoon in order, sir; or if anything be missing or out of order 
they so report. 

As soon as the chiefs of platoon have reported, the first ser- 
geant reports to the captain, 



MOUNTED DRILL 29 



TO DISMISS THE BATTERY 



As soon as the battery is parked each chief of section makes 
a minute inspection of his section and reports all losses or injuries 
to the chief of platoon; the chiefs of platoon then report in suc- 
cession from right to left : (Such) platoon in order, sir ; or if any- 
thing be missing or out of order they so report. 

The reports having been made, the captain gives such instruc- 
tions as may be necessary, and directs the first sergeant : Dismiss 
the battery. The officers return saber, if drawn,, and fall out. 

The first sergeant commands: i. Cannoneers; 2. UNHITCH; 
or, 1. Drivers; 2. UNHITCH; 3. UNHOOK TRACES. 

The special details and other individually mounted men leave 
the park and return their horses to the stable or picket line. 

The teams being unhitched, the first sergeant marches them 
to the stable or picket line and commands: FALL OUT. Each 
chief of section thereupon takes charge of his section, dismounts 
the drivers, causes them to unhook traces, if necessary, and lead 
to their places for unharnessing. 

If the stables or picket lines are close by, the first sergeant 
commands: 1. By the right (left, or right and left); 2. FALL 
OUT, and the drivers lead at once to their stalls or to their places 
on the picket line. 

The lieutenant in charge of Department A, assisted by the 
chief mechanic, superintends the work of the cannoneers in car- 
ing for the wheeled materiel. 

The lieutenant in charge of Department B, assisted by the 
first sergeant and stable sergeant, superintends the work of the 
drivers in caring for their harness and horses. 

In the field, when the horses are unharnessed at the carriages, 
the duties are performed as above described, except that the first 
sergeant, when directed to dismiss the battery, commands: 1. 
Drivers; 2. UNHITCH AND UNHARNESS. 

The teams are unhitched and unharnessed by the drivers 
under the direction of their chiefs of section, according to the 
methods heretofore prescribed, the horses being tied to the picket 
line as soon as unharnessed. 

In horse batteries, while the drivers are unhitching, the senior 
gunner forms the gun squads, marches them to the stable, and 



30 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE 

commands: FALL OUT. Each gunner conducts his squad to 
its place in the stable and causes the cannoneers to unsaddle 
and care for their equipments; he assigns suitable cannoneers to 
the care of the horses, so that there is one man for each two 
animals; he then marches the remaining cannoneers back to the 
park to care for the materiel. 

TO ALIGN THE BATTERY 

The battery being in line at a halt: 

If the section on the side toward which the alignment is to be 
made is not in proper position, the captain establishes it in the 
position desired, and commands: i. Right (left) ; 2. DRESS; 3. 
FRONT. At the command dress the other carriages move for- 
ward or backward, preserving their intervals; the drivers cast 
their eyes to the right and dress on the drivers of the carriages 
established as a basis of alignment. The captain places himself 
on the right flank in line with the wheel driver of the base car- 
riage, facing to the left, he quickly establishes the wheel driver 
of the leading carriage of the second section on the desired line, 
and then superintends the alignment of the other wheel drivers 
of the front rank carriages. The first sergeant similarly superin- 
tends the alignment of the wheel drivers of the rear rank 
carriages. The captain commands front when the alignment is 
complete, at which command the captain and first sergeant 
resume their posts and the drivers turn their eyes to the front. 

In horse batteries, at the command dress each gun squad 
aligns itself toward the side ordered, under the supervision of its 
gunner. 

TO MARCH TO THE FRONT 

1. Forward; 2. MARCH. 

Executed simultaneously by all the carriages. 

TO HALT 

1. Battery; 2. HALT. 

Executed simultaneously by all the carriages. 



MOUNTED DRILL 31 

TO MARCH BY THE FLANK 

i. By the right (left) flank; 2. MARCH. 

All the carriages simultaneously turn to the right, the rear 
carriages taking the track and distance from the carriages which 
precede them in the new formation. 

If the battery is in line, with closed intervals, the following 
modifications apply: The movement is successive; the section 
on the indicated flank begins the movement; the others take it 
up in turn so as to follow, at the proper distance, in the track 
of the carriages which precede them. If executed while march- 
ing, all the sections except the one on the indicated flank halt, 
and then resume the march so as to follow in their proper places 
in the column. 

TO MARCH TO THE REAR 

By an about: 1. Right (left) about; 2. MARCH. 

All the carriages simultaneously turn to the right about, the 
rear carriages taking the track and distance from the carriages 
which precede them in the new formation. 

By a countermarch: 1. Countermarch; 2. MARCH. 

The leading carriage of each section executes left about as 
just described; the rear carriages follow in the track of the lead- 
ing carriage, and execute a left about on the same ground. 

RIGHT SECTIONS FORWARD 

If the battery is in line, with closed intervals, the following 
modifications apply: The captain first commands: 1. Right 
sections forward ; 2. MAJRCH. The right section of each platoon 
moves forward so as to clear the left section. If the captain 
orders an increased gait for the maneuver, the right sections 
take the gait indicated; if an increased gait is not ordered, the 
left sections reduce the gait i°, or, if halted, they remain halted. 
As soon as the right sections are clear of the left sections, the 
captain gives the command for the about or the countermarch, 
which is executed by all the sections at the gait of the right sec- 
tions. On the completion of the about or countermarch, the 
sections in rear increase the gait so as to reach their positions in 
line. 



32 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE 

In horse batteries, in executing an about, if the pieces are in 
front, they reduce the gait slightly so as to follow the gun squads 
at 2 yards' distance; if the caissons are in front, they increase 
the gait slightly on completing the about, so as to follow the 
pieces at 2 yards' distance. 

TO MARCH OBLIQUELY 

1. Right (left) oblique; 2. MARCH. 

All the carriages simultaneously turn to the oblique. The 
carriages move in parallel lines. The lead drivers align them- 
selves in each rank of carriages; the lead driver of each rdar rank 
carriage also aligns himself upon the lead driver of the carriage 
corresponding to his own in the front rank. If these positions 
are properly maintained, the carriages should, on executing a 
second oblique in either direction, have the proper distances, 
intervals, and alignment. 

TO CHANGE DIRECTION 

1. Column right (left); 2. MARCH. 

If in section column the leading carriage turns to the right 
through an angle of 90 . The carriages in rear follow and turn 
on the same ground. 

If in double section or flank column the carriages on the side 
toward which the turn is made, execute the movement as before. 
In each section, as the inside carriage begins the turn, the outside 
carriage increases the gait i°, preserves its interval from the 
inside carriage and takes the gait of the latter on arriving abreast 
of it. 

Column half right (left) is similarly executed. 

Being in line: 1. Battery right (left) wheel; 2. MARCH. 

The pivot section executes column right. The other sections 
by twice executing column half right place themselves on the 
line established by the pivot section. 

Rule I governs the gait. 

Battery right (left) half wheel is similarly executed. 

TO EXECUTE A PASSAGE OF CARRIAGES 

Being in line or in section column, to place the rear carriages 
in front: 1. Pieces (Caissons) front; 2. MARCH. 



MOUNTED DRILL 33 

The carriages designated in the command are the rear car- 
riages in the existing formation. 

In each section the designated carriage inclines to the right, 
passes the other carriage, takes position in front of it, and con- 
tinues the march; the carriage thus placed in rear then follows 
at the prescribed distance. 

Rule II governs the gaits. 

TO CLOSE OR EXTEND INTERVALS IN LINE 

i. On (such) section ; 2. To (so many) yards ; 3. Close (Extend) 
intervals; 4. MARCH. 

The indicated section moves straight to the front; the other 
sections incline toward or away from the indicated section and 
move to the front when at the proper interval. 

Rule I governs the gaits. 

TO FORM SECTION COLUMN TO THE FRONT FROM LINE 

1. Right (Left) by section; 2. MARCH. 

The right section moves straight to the front. The other 
sections in turn, change direction to the right and follow in the 
column at the proper distance. 

Rule II governs the gaits. 

TO FORM LINE FROM SECTION COLUMN 

To the front: 1. Right (Left) front into line; 2. MARCH. 

The leading section moves straight to the front. Each section 
in rear obliques to the right until opposite its place in line, when 
it obliques to the left, moves to the front, and takes its place on 
the line 

Rule I governs the gaits. 

To the light (left): 1. Right (Left) into line; 2. MARCH. 

The leading section executes column right and then moves 
straight to the front. The other sections move forward and 
successively execute column right, when, by so doing, they will 
be opposite their positions in line; they then move to the front 
and take their places on the line, to the right of the carriages 
which preceded them. 
3 



34 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE 

If, in the execution of the movement, the sections in rear 
move at a faster gait than the leading section, the second section 
in the column inclines to the right sufficiently to clear the leading 
section. 

Rule I governs the gaits. 

On the right (left): i. On right (left) into line; 2. MARCH. 

Executed as prescribed for right into line, except that the 
second section in the column inclines to the left in order to clear 
the leading section, and that each section passes beyond the 
preceding one before turning to the right; also that the leading 
section is habitually halted on advancing three carriage lengths 
after the completion of its change of direction. 

To form line at closed intervals, the captain commands: At 
(so many) yards, before giving the prescribed commands for 
forming line; the battery is then formed with the intervals pre- 
scribed. 

TO FORM FLANK COLUMN FROM SECTION COLUMN 

1. Flank column; 2. Right (left) oblique, 3. MARCH. 

The rear carriages of all the sections oblique to the right 
simultaneously, and then oblique to the left, when by so doing 
they will have their proper intervals from the leading carriages. 
All carriages in rear of the leading one close upon the carriages 
which precede them in the column at the gait of the carriages 
which oblique. 

Rule I governs the gaits. 

TO FORM LINE TO THE FRONT FROM FLANK COLUMN 

1. Right (Left) front into line; 2. MARCH. 

The carriages on the right of the column execute right front 
into line, as prescribed for a section column. The carriages on 
the left move by the right flank, and each forms in section col- 
umn behind the right carriage of its own section. 

Rule I governs the gaits. 

TO FORM LINE TO THE FI ANK AT CLOSED INTERVALS FROM 
FLANK COLUMN 

1. At (so many) yards; 2. Right (left) into line; 3. MARCH. 

In each column the carriages execute right into line as pre- 



MOUNTED DRILL 35 

scribed for the sections Right into Line, each section marching 
by the right flank in time to be opposite its place in line. 

TO FORM SECTION COLUMN FROM FLANK COLUMN 

i. Pieces (Caissons) front; 2. MARCH. 

The designated carriage of the leading section moves straight 
to the front; the other carriage of this section obliques toward 
the designated carriage in time to follow in its track at the pre- 
scribed distance. The remaining sections in the column execute 
the movement similarly, each carriage moving out in time to 
follow the preceding one at the proper distance. 

Rule II governs the gaits. 

TO FORM DOUBLE SECTION AND TO RESUME THE PREVIOUS 

ORDER 

Being in line or in section column: 1. Double section; 2. 
Right (left) oblique; 3. MARCH. 

In each section the rear carriage inclines to the right and 
places itself abreast of the leading carriage at an interval of 2 
yards. * 

If in section column, all carriages in rear of the leading one 
close upon- the carriages which precede them in the column at 
the gait of the carriages which incline. 

Rule I governs the gaits. 

To resume the previous order: 1. Pieces (Caissons) front; 2. 
MARCH. 

If in column, the designated carriage of the leading section 
moves straight to the front; the other carriage inclines toward 
the designated carriage in time to follow in its track at the pre- 
scribed distance. The remaining sections in the column execute 
the movement similarly, each carriage moving out in time to 
follow the preceding one at the proper distance. 

If in line, the movement is executed simultaneously by all the 
sections. 

Rule II governs the gaits. 

Being in flank column: 1. Double section; 2. Right (left) 
oblique ; 3. MARCH. 

In each section the right carriage moves or continues straight 



36 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE 

to the front, the left one inclines sharply to the right, and moves 
up abreast of the right carriage at 2 yards interval. 

Rule I governs the gaits. 

To resume the previous order: 1. Flank column; 2. Right (left) 
oblique ; 3. MARCH. 

In each section the left carriage moves or continues straight 
to the front, the right one inclines sharply to the right and then 
moves up abreast of the left carriage at the prescribed intervaL 

Rule I governs the gaits. 

The section being formed in double section retains that forma- 
tion until again formed in section or flank column, and is ma- 
neuvered as if it were a single carriage. In executing the turns 
the pivot carriage executes the movement as heretofore pre- 
scribed; the other carriage conforms to the movement of the 
pivot carriage, increasing the gait so as to arrive abreast of the 
latter without delay. 

The double section line or column is maneuvered as explained 
for the normal order in line or in section column, with the ex- 
ceptions made necessary by the difference of formation. The 
carriages retain their relative order until they are again formed 
in the normal order in line, in section column, or in flank column. 
The posts of individuals are analogous to those prescribed for 
the order in line or column. 

PASSAGE OF OBSTACLES 

If, while maneuvering or marching, an obstacle is encountered 
by any subdivision, its chief, without waiting for orders, gives 
appropriate commands for avoiding the obstacle and for resum- 
ing the original formation as soon as the obstacle is passed. 

DIVISION OF FIFTH SECTION 

The first caisson of the fifth section is habitually unlimbered 
on the right of the line of guns, the second caisson on the left. 
Depending upon the nature of the ground and the circumstances 
of the case, the fifth section may either follow the remainder of 
the battery toward the position for action and take post under 
the direction of its chief in the most convenient manner, or, at 
the subdivision for action, the caissons may take post on the 
proper flanks of the battery, accompany it to the position, and 



MOUNTED DRILL 37 

unlimber simultaneously with the guns. In the absence of 
special instructions from the captain the chief of the fifth section 
adopts the measures best suited to the immediate case. One or 
both caissons may be unlimbered in rear of the line under cover, 
depending upon the nature of the ground and the character of 
the action. If practicable, the captain uses the caisson on the 
windward flank as his observing station. 

If it is desired to subdivide the battery without preparing for 
action the captain gives the necessary instructions. 

GUIDES 

{Same for Three Inch, Four Point Seven Inch and Six Inch) 

The guide of a carriage is its lead driver, of a section in section 
column, the lead driver of its leading carriage; of a section in 
double section, the lead driver of its left carriage. 

Chiefs of section supervise the gait and direction of the march 
of their sections. 

In section column the guide of the leading section is the guide 
of the battery. 

The guide of the battery line is the guide of the right, or left 
or center section. 

The guide of the battery in flank column is the guide of the 
leading carriage on one flank or the other. 

During an oblique march the guide of the battery is, without 
indication, the guide of the leading carriage on the side toward 
which the oblique is made.v 

On leaving the park the guidon at once posts himself with the 
guide of the battery. If a subsequent movement places the 
guidon at the rear of a section column, he hastens to post himself 
with the guide of the leading section; if with a rear carriage in 
line or a flank column, he hastens to post himself with the guide 
of the leading carriage nearest his former position, or takes post 
with the indicated guide in case a guide is announced. On the 
formation of double section the guidon posts himself with the 
left carriage of the guiding section. During an oblique march 
the guidon does not change position. 

With the exception just noted, the guide is habitually toward 
the guidon; while he is changing position, it is toward the guide 
with whom he is to take post. 



38 



FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE 



The captain may announce a change of guide; thus: GUIDE 
(Right, Left or Center). 

If the captain desires, he may place himself in front of any 
carriage of the battery, and command: GUIDE ON ME. The 
carriage in rear of the captain then follows his movements and 
the others guide on this as the directing carriage, regulating 
their march and gait so as to maintain their proper relative posi- 
tions. The guidon posts himself with the directing carriage. 



INTERVALS AND DISTANCES 





3 inch and 4.7 inch 


6 inch 


Intervals between: 






Pairs in line 


1 horse length, 3 yds. 
1 team length, 3 yds. (for 
each pair; i.e., 12 yds.) 


(Same) 


Teams in line 


(Same) 






Hitched carnages in line. 


1 hitched carriage length 


With four pairs 




(17 yds. for a 3-pair team) 


22 yards. 


Distances between: 






Pairs in column 


1 yd. 


(Same) 


Teams in column 


2 yds. 


(Same) 


Hitched carriages 


About 2 yds., or such that, 
when moved by the flank, 
the intervals will be as 
above. 


4 yds. 



RULES FOR GAIT 

Rule I. — When a change of formation requires certain carriages 
to gain ground so as to reach specified positions abreast of the 
directing carriages, the captain may or may not announce an 
increased gait for the movement. If he announces an increased 
gait, the directing carriages maintain their gait; the other car- 
riages move at the gait announced until they have reached their 
new position, when they take the gait of the directing carriages. 

If the captain does not announce an increased gait, the direct- 
ing carriages reduce their gait one degree; the others maintain 
their gait until they reach their new position, when they take 
the gait of the directing carriages. If the movement is executed 
from a halt or while marching at a walk, and an increase of gait 



MOUNTED DRILL 39 

is not ordered, the directing carriages advance there carriage 
lengths toward the front of the new formation and halt. 

This rule applies to forming line from column, double section 
line from line, flank column from section column or double sec- 
tion column, double section column from section column or flank 
column, closing or extending intervals, and wheeling by battery. 

Rule II. — When a change of formation requires the directing 
carriages to gain ground in order to precede the other carriages, 
the captain may or may not announce an increased gait for the 
movement. If he announces an increased gait, the directing 
carriages take the increased gait at once, the other carriages 
take it up so as to follow the movement in their proper order. 

If the captain does not announce an increased gait, the direct- 
ing carriages maintain their gait, the others reduce the gait one 
degree, and take the gait of the directing carriages in time to 
follow the movement in their proper order. If the movement 
is executed from a halt, or while marching at a walk, and an 
increase of gait is not ordered, the directing carriages move at 
a walk; the others remain halted, or halt and take up the gait 
of the directing carriages as before. 

This rule applies to forming column from line, line from double 
section line, section column from flank column or from double 
section column, and passage of carriages. 

ARM SIGNALS 

Preparatory signals : 

Attention. — Extend the arm vertically and move it slowly back 
and forth from right to left. 

Forward. — Extend the arm vertically and lower it to the front 
until horizontal. 

By the Right (Left) Flank.— Extend the arm vertically and 
lower it to the right (left) until horizontal. 

Right (Left) About. — Extend the arm vertically and describe 
slowly a large horizontal circle with the hand; then extend the 
arm to the left (right) and describe a horizontal arc to front and 
right (left). 

Countermarch. — Extend the arm vertically and describe 
quickly several horizontal circles with the hand. 



40 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE 

Right Sections Forward. — Extend the arm vertically and then 
thrust several times to the front. 

Right (Left) Oblique. — Extend the arm obliquely upward to 
the right (left) and front, and then lower the arm, describing a 
vertical circle on the right (left) side of the horse. 

To Increase the Gait. — Carry the hand to the shoulder, 
forearm vertical; extend the arm vertically from this position 
and repeat several times. 

To Decrease the Gait. — Hold the arm horizontally above and 
in front of the forehead. 

To indicate an increased or decreased gait for a maneuver, the 
appropriate signal is made just after the preparatory signal for 
the maneuver. 

To Halt. — Extend the arm vertically and hold it there until 
the signal is obeyed. 

To Change Direction to the Right (Left). — Extend the arm 
vertically; lower it to the left (right) until horizontal and describe 
a horizontal arc to the front and right (left). 

To Close Intervals. — Point to the section on which the inter- 
vals are to be closed, and then signal right (left) oblique, or left 
and right oblique, according as the intervals are to be closed on 
the right (left) section or on an interior section. 

To Extend Intervals. — Point to the section on which intervals 
are to be extended, and then signal left (right) oblique, or right 
and left oblique, according as the intervals are to be extended 
on the right (left) section or on an interior section. 

Right (Left) by Section. — Point at the right (left) section and 
signal forward. 

Right (Left) Front into Line. — Extend the arm vertically and 
describe several large vertical circles on the right (left) side of 
the horse. 

Right (Left) into Line. — Signal a change of direction to the 
right (left), followed by describing small circles with the hand 
while the arm is extended to the right (left) . 

Pieces Front. — Extend the arm horizontally to the front and 
then move it several times thru a small vertical arc. 

Caissons Front. — Extend the arm horizontally to the front and 
then move it several times thru a small horizontal arc. 



MOUNTED DRILL 41 

WHISTLE SIGNALS 

Attention. — One long blast. 

Cease Firing. — One long blast. Given only when the battery 
is in position and firing service or subcaliber ammunition. 

Special Detail Report. — Three long blasts. 

Cannoneers Report. — Several short, sharp, and rapid blasts. 

Chiefs of Section Report. — One long, followed by one short, 
blast, the whole signal repeated once. 

Chiefs of Platoon Report. — Two long blasts. 

At the signals for reporting, the personnel indicated report in 
person to the captain. 

Flank Column, Right (Left) Oblique. — Extend the arm hori- 
zontally to the right (left) and then move it several times thru 
a small horizontal arc. 

Double Section, Right (Left) Oblique. — Extend the arm hori- 
zontally to the right (left) and then move it several times thru 
a small vertical arc. 

The signals for flank column, or double section, right (left) 
oblique, apply also for the formation of flank column or double 
section to the right (left) after limbering. 

Action Front (Right, Left, Rear). — Extend the arm vertically; 
then lower quickly to the front (right, left, rear), and repeat 
several times. 

Limber. — Extend both arms laterally. 

These improvised signals may be used. 

Prepare to Mount (Dismount) Drivers. — Extend arm sideward 
palm up; move horizontally to front and back to first position 
and repeat several times. 

Cannoneers. — Extend arm downward and raise sideward to 
horizontal palm up, and repeat several times. 

Drivers and Cannoneers. — Extend arm sideward palm up. 
(All of above signals end with arm extended horizontally side- 
ward.) 

Mount. — Raise arm from sideward horizontal to vertical over- 
head. 

Dismount. — Same as above. 

On Right into Line. — Signal a change of direction to the right 
(left), then thrust several times to the right (left). 



CANNONEERS DRILL 

STANDING GUN DRILL— THREE INCH 

1. TO FORM THE GUN SQUADS 

The instructor indicates the place of formation and com- 
mands: FALL IN. 

Each gunner repeats the command and hastens to place him- 
self, faced to the front, where the right of his squad is to rest. 

The cannoneers move at double time and take their places. 

The place of formation is indicated and the command given 
thus, for example: i. In front (rear) of your pieces (caissons) ; 
or, i. On the right (left) of your pieces (caissons) facing them; 
or, i. On the road facing the park; 2. FALL IN. 

In case the front or rear of the carriages is designated, each 
squad falls in at its post. 

For the first formation of the gun squads for any drill or 
exercise the instructor cautions as gun squads before giving the 
command. 

2. TO TELL OFF THE SQUADS 

CALL OFF. — In each gun squad the cannoneer on the right 
of the rear rank calls off one ; the cannoneer on the left of the 
gunner, two; the cannoneer on the left of No. 1, three; and so 
on. The gunner does not call off. 

In each caisson squad the cannoneers of the front rank call 
off first, thus: four, five, six, in order from right to left, followed 
by the cannoneers of the rear rank in the same order. The 
caisson corporal does not call off. 

After having called off, if a subsequent formation is ordered, 
the cannoneers fall in at once in their proper order. 

3. POSTS OF THE GUN SQUADS, CARRIAGES LIMBERED 
In Front of the Pieces or Caissons. — Each squad is in line 

facing to the front, its rear and center 2 yards from the end of 

the pole or from the heads of the lead horses. 
In Rear of the Pieces or Caissons. — Each squad is in line 

facing to the front, its front and center 2 yards from the muzzle, 

or from the rear of the caisson. 

If no special place of formation has been designated, each 

squad, when formed at the carriages, is posted in front of the 

leading carriage of its section. 

42 



CANNONEERS DRILL 



43 



4. TO POST THE GUN SQUADS 

The squads are marched to the park, and, on arrival near the 
carriages, the instructor commands: Squads in front (rear) of 
your pieces (caissons). 

Each gunner marches his squad to its car- 
riage and posts it in the indicated position. 

The instructor habitually causes the squads 
to approach the front (rear) of the carriages 
which he designates in his command, from the 
right of the park if left in front and from 
the left if right in front. 



5. POSTS OF THE CANNONEERS, CAR- 
RIAGES LIMBERED 

The gunner and No. i opposite the rear of 
the limber wheels of the piece. 

Nos. 2 and 3 opposite the rear of the piece 
wheels. 

Nos. 4 and 5 opposite the rear of the caisson 
wheels. 

Nos. 6 and 7 opposite the rear of the 
limber wheels of the caisson. 

The gunner and even numbers are on the 
right, the odd numbers on the left; all 2 feet 
outside the wheels, facing the front. 

6. TO POST THE CANNONEERS 




1. Cannoneers; 2. POSTS. Each gunner 

I 6 repeats the command posts. The cannoneers 

leave the ranks, if formed, and move at 

double time by the shortest practicable routes 

to their posts. 

For preliminary instruction the squads, on 
entering the park, are first posted with the 
carriages; the cannoneers are then sent to 
their posts by the foregoing command. The 
command is general, however, and is applicable when the can- 
noneers are in or out of ranks, at a halt or marching, and when 
the carriages are limbered or unlimbered. 



Same for 3 inch 
and 6 inch. 



44 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE 

7. TO MOUNT THE CANNONEERS ON THE CARRIAGES 
LIMBERED 

In each squad the gunner and No. i mount on the limber 
chest of the piece. 

Nos. 2 and 3 mount on the axle seats. 

Nos. 4 and 5 mount on the caisson chest. 

Nos. 6 and 7 mount on the limber chest the caisson. 

When extra cannoneers are present: 

No. 8 mounts between Nos. 6 and 7. 

No. 9 mounts between Nos. 4 and 5. 

The gunner and even numbers mount on the right side of their 
respective carriages, odd numbers on the left. 

1. Cannoneers, prepare to mount; 2. MOUNT. At the first 
command the cannoneers who mount on the limber chests or 
axle seats hasten to the rear of the limber chests or axle seats; 
those who mount on the caisson chest hasten to the front of 
that chest. Each cannoneer who mounts on the limber chest 
places the foot nearest the wheel on the step, grasps the chest 
handle with the hand nearest the wheel, and with the other hand 
grasps the hand of the cannoneer opposite him. Each cannoneer 
who mounts on the caisson chest places the foot nearest the wheel 
on the step, and grasps the chest handle with the hand nearest 
the wheel. Cannoneers who mount on the axle seats place the 
foot nearest the wheel on the brake beam, and grasp the seat 
handle with the hand nearest the wheel. 

At the command mount, all spring up and seat themselves, 
those on the chest facing the front, those on the axle seats to the 
rear. Those who mount on the limber chests place the foot 
farthest from the wheel on the top of the limber chest, and then 
step down on their foot board. 

If the command be: 1. Cannoneers; 2. MOUNT, the can- 
noneers execute, at the command mount, all that has been pre- 
' scribed for the commands prepare to mount and mount. 

8. TO DISMOUNT THE CANNONEERS FROM THE CARRIAGES 

1. Cannoneers, prepare to dismount; 2. DISMOUNT. The 

cannoneers on the chests stand up on the foot boards at the 
first command; at the second command all the cannoneers 
jump to the ground and take their posts at the double time. 



CANNONEERS DRILL 45 

If the command be: i. Cannoneers, 2. DISMOUNT, they 
execute, at the command dismount, all that has been prescribed 
for the commands prepare to dismount and dismount. 

9. POSTS OF THE CANNONEERS, CARRIAGES UNLIMBERED 
BUT NOT PREPARED FOR ACTION 

In each squad the gunner immediately in rear of the can- 
noneer's seat, on the left side of the trail of the gun. 

No. 1, immediately in rear of the cannoneer's seat, on the right 
side of the trail of the gun. 

No. 2, 2 feet in rear of the gunner, covering him. 

Nos. 3, 4, and 5, 2 feet in rear of the caisson chest in the order 
named from right to left. 

Nos. 6 and 7, abreast and in order from right to left, 5 yards 
in rear of the trail spade. 

Higher-numbered cannoneers, if present, accompany the lim- 
bers. The cannoneers stand at attention at their posts, facing 
to the front. 

10. TO CHANGE THE POSTS OF THE CANNONEERS 

In order to exercise the cannoneers in all duties connected 
with the service of the piece, to vary the drill, and to fix the 
attention of the men, the posts of the cannoneers are frequently 
changed. 

The cannoneers being at their posts, carriages limbered or 
unlimbered: 1. Change Posts; 2. MARCH. 

In each squad No. 1 quickly takes the post of No. 2; No. 2 of 
No. 3; No. 3 of No. 4; No. 4 of No. 5; No. 5 of No. 6; No. 6 of 
No. 7; No. 7 of No. 1. 

Higher numbered cannoneers change only when specially 
directed. 

11. TO MOVE BY HAND THE CARRIAGES LIMBERED 

To the Front. — 1. Pieces (Caissons) forward; 2. MARCH; 
3. HALT. In each squad, at the first command, the gunner and 
No. 1 hasten to the end of the pole; Nos. 2 and 3 to the limber 
wheels; Nos. 4 and 5 to the rear wheels; higher numbered cannon- 
eers to the rear of the carriage; the gunner and even numbers 



46 



FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE 



working on the right side of the carriage, odd numbers on the 
left. The cannoneers who work at the pole or at the wheels 
grasp the same with both hands; those in rear of the carriage 
prepare to push against the most convenient part of the carriage. 

At the command march, all assist in moving the carriage to 
the front. At the command halt the carriage is stopped, the pole 
is lowered to the ground, and all resume their posts. 

To the Rear. — i. Pieces (Caissons) backward; 2. MARCH; 
3. HALT. Executed as in the preceding paragraph, except that 
at the command march the cannoneers move the carriage to the 
rear and that the higher numbered cannoneers place themselves 
in front of the rear axle of the carriage and push against the most 
convenient part of the carriage. 

12. DISPOSITION OF THE CARRIAGES BEFORE AND AFTER 
UNLIMBERING 

Before Unlimbering. — The piece and its caisson are placed 
abreast of each other, 2 yards apart, poles pointing in the same 




Same for 3 inch and 6 inch. 



direction. This formation of the carriages is called a double 
section. The interval of 2 yards should not be materially 
changed, otherwise the amount of movement of the carriages 
by hand is greatly increased. 

If it is intended to fire to the front, the caissons should be 



CANNONEERS DRILL 47 

placed on the left of their pieces before the command for un- 
limbering is given; if it is intended to fire to the rear, the caissons 
should be placed on the right of their pieces; if to the flank, on 
either side of their pieces. In emergencies the carriages may be 
unlimbered from any formation. Dispositions to meet the 
various situations should be practised. 

When not horsed the carriages are drawn by the cannoneers 
and the instructor gives the necessary instructions for moving 
the carriages by the shortest routes into the prescribed positions. 

After Unlimbering. — The adjacent wheels of the gun and 
caisson are about i foot apart, the gun muzzle and the caisson 
trail pointing to the front, the gun on the right and slightly in 
advance of the caisson. 

The gun is placed slightly in advance to allow for recoil at the 
first shot, which on ordinary ground is about 10 inches. 

The interval of i foot may be increased to permit wide move- 
ments of the trail if they are anticipated, but effort should be 
made to preserve the protection afforded by the shields. 

In emergencies the caissons may be placed temporarily on the 
right of their pieces. As this position is not favorable to the 
service of ammunition, the caissons should be placed on the left 
of their pieces as soon as practicable. 

In active service, and in instruction simulating service con- 
ditions, the limbers are placed under cover in the vicinity of 
the position; if no cover is obtainable in the vicinity, they are 
placed in line in rear of either flank at such place as the instructor 
may designate. 

13. TO UNLIMBER 

General Rules 

i. In unlimbering to fire to the front, each caisson establishes 
the position. 

2. In unlimbering to fire to the rear, each piece establishes the 
position. 

3. In unlimbering to fire to the flank, the elements (gun or 
caisson) on the side toward which fire is to be directed establishes 
the position. 

4. If the carriages, after unlimbering, have to be moved by 
hand to the firing position, all the cannoneers of the gun squad, 



48 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE 

when the ground is difficult, assist at each carriage in turn moving 
it to the designated position. 

5. In drills with the carriages not horsed spare cannoneers or 
those higher in number than No. 5 are used to move the limbers 
to the place designated by the instructor. 

6. If the carriages are not horsed, they are unlimbered succes- 
sively, the one which establishes the position being unlimbered 
first. The limbers are drawn by cannoneers designated by the 
instructor. Thus, if only the gunner and five cannoneers are 
present, the cannoneers posted with the piece may be required 
to move the limber of the caisson, and those with the caisson 
the limber of the piece. If higher numbered cannoneers are 
present, however, they are ordinarily used for this purpose. 

14a. TO FIRE TO THE FRONT 

The carriages being in double section, the caissons on the left : 
ACTION FRONT. If marching, the carriages halt at the com- 
mand or signal. The cannoneers, if mounted, dismount after 
the carriages have halted. 

The Caissons. — Nos. 4 and 5 jump to the trail handles. Nos. 
6 and 7 run to the right and left caisson wheels, respectively, 
and stand ready to assist in such movements of the carriage as 
may be necessary. No. 4 unlatches the pintle; Nos. 4 and 5 
raise the trail from the pintle and No. 4, by raising his arm, 
signals for the drivers to drive on; Nos. 4 and 5 then lower the 
trail to the ground. No. 4 sets the brake and all the cannoneers 
at the caisson take their posts. 

The Pieces. — The gunner and No. 1 jump to the trail handles. 
No. 2 runs to the wheel that is to become the right wheel of the 
piece unlimbered and places himself so as to be ready to turn the 
top of his wheel toward the trail. No. 3 runs to the wheel that 
is to become the left wheel of the piece unlimbered and places 
himself so as to be ready to turn the top of his wheel toward the 
muzzle. The gunner unlatches the pintle, and assisted by No. 1, 
raises the trail from the pintle. The gunner, by raising his arm, 
signals for the drivers to drive on. The gunner and No. 1 carry 
the trail away from the caisson and all of the cannoneers working 
together turn the piece around 180 degrees. The gunner causes 



CANNONEERS DRILL 49 

the piece to be placed by the side of the caisson. The gunner 
and No. i lower the trail to the ground and all the cannoneers 
at the piece take their posts. 

Limbers. — At the signal drive on, the limbers take their pre- 
scribed positions. To take posts in rear of the carriages, each 
caisson limber executes a left about, moves straight to the rear, 
executes another left about, and halts, so that the heads of the 
lead horses or the end of the pole will be 25 yards from the rear 
of the caisson. Each piece limber follows the caisson limber, 
passes around in rear of it, and halts so as to be abreast of it and 
2 yards to its right. 

14b. TO FIRE TO THE REAR 

The carriages being in double section, the caissons on the 
right, ACTION REAR. If marching, the carriages halt at the 
command or signal. The cannoneers, if mounted, dismount 
after the carriages have halted. 

The Caisson. — Nos. 4 and 5 jump to the trail handles. Nos. 
6 and 7 run to the right and left caisson wheels, respectively. 
No. 6 stands ready to turn the top of his wheel away from the 
trail while No. 7 stands ready to turn his toward the trail. No. 
4 unlatches the pintle; Nos. 4 and 5 raise the trail from the 
pintle and No. 4 by raising his arm, signals for the drivers to 
drive on; Nos. 4 and 5 carry the trail away from the piece and all 
the cannoneers working together turn the caisson around 180 
degrees and place it by the side of the piece; Nos. 4 and 5 lower 
the trail to the ground. No. 4 sets the brake and all of the can- 
noneers working on the caisson take their posts. 

The Piece. — The gunner and No. 1 jump to the trail handles. 
No. 2 runs to the wheel that is to become the right wheel of the 
piece unlimbered and stands ready to assist in such movements of 
the carriage as may be necessary. No. 3 runs to the wheel that 
is to become the left wheel of the piece unlimbered and stands 
ready to assist in such movements of the carriage as may be 
necessary. The gunner unlatches the pintle and, assisted by 
No. i, raises the trail from the pintle. The gunner, by raising 
his arm, signals for the drivers to drive on. The gunner and No. 1 
lower the trail to the ground and all the cannoneers at the piece 
take their posts. 



50 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE 

Limbers. — To take posts in rear of the carriages, each caisson 
limber inclines well to the right, moves to the rear, executes a 
left about, and halts so that the heads of the lead horses or the 
end of the pole will be about 25 yards from the rear of the caisson. 
Each piece limber follows the caisson limber, passes around in 
rear of it, and halts so as to be abreast of it and 2 yards to its 
right. 

14c. TO FIRE TO THE FLANK 

The caisson being on either side of the piece, 2 yards from 
and abreast of it: ACTION RIGHT (LEFT). 

Executed according to the principles of action front and action 
rear, with the following modifications: After the carriages are 
unlimbered the muzzle of the gun and the trail of the caisson are 
turned in the direction of the fire, and the carriage in rear is run 
up to its proper position on the line. The carriage on the side 
toward which fire is to be delivered is first established in position, 
and then all the cannoneers assist in bringing up the carriage in 
rear to its proper place. 

Limbers. — To take post in rear of their carriages, the limbers 
farthest from the flank toward which fire is to be delivered move 
out first, wheel away from the direction of fire, and after having 
gained sufficient distance to the rear execute an about and halt 
at the prescribed position. The other limbers follow and take 
position in a similar manner. 

15. DUTIES OF THE CANNONEERS IN LIMBERING 

The carriages being in position unlimbered and in march 
order, to limber to the front and rear: 1. Limber; 2. FRONT 
AND REAR. 

In each squad the gunner and No. 1 face to the rear at their 
posts. No. 2 places himself on the right of the gunner facing to 
the rear. No. 3 jumps across the trail of the piece and places 
himself on the left of No. 1 facing to the rear. Nos. 4 and 5 
hasten to the front of the caisson, No. 4 releases the brake, and 
both place themselves with their backs toward the chest, close 
up against the footboards, No. 4 on the right, No. 5 on the left 
of the trail. No. 6 passes around the right of the caisson and 



Cannoneers drill 51 

places himself on the right of No. 4. No. 7 runs around the left 
of the caisson and places himself on the left of No. 5. 

The limbers are brought up so as to move squarely across the 
directions of the trails and so that the wheel nearest the trail will 
pass about a foot outside of the lunette. 

When the axle of the piece limber is nearly in line with the trail, 
the gunner commands: 1. Limber; 2. HALT. The limber halts 
and is then swung around and again halted so that the pole is 
pointing in the direction of the trail and so that the pintle is 
almost over the lunette. As soon as the limber has halted in 
this position, the gunner and No. 1 spring to the trail handles 
and raise the trail. Nos. 2 and 3 jump to the gun wheels and 
prepare to assist in any movements of the carriage that maybe 
necessary. The gunner and No. 1 place the lunette over the 
pintle; the gunner latches the pintle. 

The caisson is limbered in the same manner, No. 4 giving the 
commands for halting the limber; Nos. 4 and 5 handling the 
trail; No. 4 latching the pintle; Nos. 6 and 7 assisting by working 
on the wheels in any movements of the carriage. 

All the cannoneers take their posts at the carriages limbered. 

To the rear; 1. Limber; 2. REAR. No. 4 releases the 
brake. T^he caisson is turned around 180 degrees; Nos. 4 and 5 
carrying the trail away from the piece. Nos. 1 and 6 turn the 
top of their wheel toward the trail; Nos. 3 and 7 turn the 
top of their wheel away from the trail; the gunner and No. 2 
assist by pulling and pushing on the chest. The caisson having 
been turned, all the cannoneers working together run the caisson 
20 yards straight to the rear of the line of guns. Nos. 4 and 5 
lower the trail and all the cannoneers take their posts for limber- 
ing. The limbers are brought up and the limbering is com- 
pleted as described for limbering to the front and rear. 

16. TO LEAVE THE PARK 

At the conclusion of the instruction in the park the instructor 
sees that the carriages are properly cared for and then causes 
the squads to join in front or rear of their carriages. The squads 
may then be closed by the command: 1. Squads right (left); 
2. MARCH; 3. Close; 4. MARCH. At the last command the 



52 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE 

leading squad halts and the rear squads close on it in quick time 
and halt. If executed in double time, the leading squad resumes 
or continues the quick time at the last command and the other 
squads take the quick time when they are closed. 

Or, the squads may be faced to the right or left. At the com- 
mand:*!. Close ;*2. MARCH, the leading squad stands fast and 
the others close on it. 

After forming the squad column the men are marched off. 

GUN SQUAD— THREE INCH 

1. TO PREPARE FOR ACTION 

The carriages being in position unlimbered: PREPARE FOR 
ACTION. 

Each member of the gun squad performs his duties in the order 
given below: 

Gunner: (a) Removes the hood from the sight bracket; 

(b) Releases the traversing and elevating lock and operates 
the traversing and elevating gear; 

(c) Removes the sight shank from its case and places it in 
its socket, setting the range at 3000 and the peep sight deflec- 
tion at zero; 

(d) Takes the panoramic sight from its case and places it in 
its seat, making sure that the sight is clamped and that the 
deflection is set at zero; 

(e) Raises and secures the top shield, with the assistance of 
No. 1; 

(/) Seats himself on his seat. 

No. 1: (a) Removes the quadrant from its case and places 
it in its seat; centers the cross level bubble; 

(b) Sets the range at 3000 and the sight at 300, and brings 
the range bubble to the center; 

(c) Equips himself with a lanyard and a wiping cloth; 

(d) Operates the breech mechanism, examines the breech 
block, bore, and chamber, cleaning any parts requiring it, 
leaving the breech open, except when the gun is loaded; 

(e) Assists the gunner in raising and securing the top shield; 

(f) Seats himself on his seat. 



GUN SQUAD— THREE INCH 53 

No. 2 : (a) Removes the breech cover; 

(b) Turns back the trail handspike and engages it; 

(c) Runs around to the right of the piece and assists No. 3 
to lower the piece apron; 

(d) Distributes tow or waste to the cannoneers for use in their 
ears; 

(e) Seats himself on the handspike. 

No. 3: (a) Runs around the left of the caisson and removes 
the muzzle cover; 

(b) Removes the front sight cover and adjusts the sight in 
its firing position; 

(c) Lowers the piece apron, with the assistance of No. 2; 

id) Seats himself at the fuze setter, with his back to the right 
caisson wheel; 

(e) Sets his scales at corrector 30, range 3000. 

No. 4: (a) Assisted by No. 5, lowers the caisson apron; 

(6) Lowers the fuze setter; 

(c) Assisted by No. 5, raises the caisson door; 

(d) Stands ready to serve ammunition. 

No. 5: (a) Assists No. 4 to lower the caisson apron; 

(b) Assists No. 4 to raise the caisson door; 

(c) Puts a round of shrapnel in the fuze setter, setting the 
fuze; 

(d) Stands ready to serve ammunition. 

The cannoneers report to their chief of section if any parts 
of the materiel are not in working order. 

The carriages, limbered, are habitually prepared for action 
before reaching the firing position. The duties of the cannon- 
eers are the same as at the carriages unlimbered, except that 
after the examination of the elevating and traversing gear the 
piece is secured by the traveling lock; the trail handspike is 
not turned back; the breech is closed; the firing pin is released; 
the fuze setter is not lowered, nor is a round put in the fuze 
setter; the apron is not lowered; the caisson door is left closed; 
and the cannoneers do not take their posts for serving the gun. 
The gunner and No. 1 return the panoramic sight and the quad- 
rant to their cases, unless special orders to the contrary are 
given. 

Immediately after establishing the carriages the preparation 



54 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE 

for action is completed without command and the cannoneers 
take their posts for serving the piece. 

If prepare for action has not been given before establishing 
the carriages in the firing position, that command is habitually 
given by each chief of section as soon as his carriages have been 
unlimbered and established. The instructor may, however, 
caution do not prepare for action when he wishes to drill the 
personnel in limbering and unlimbering only or in the details 
of preparation for action. 

POSTS OF THE CANNONEERS, CARRIAGES UNLIMBERED 
AND PREPARED FOR ACTION 

In each squad, the gunner, seated on his seat facing the gun. 

No. i, seated astride his seat facing the gun. 

No. 2, seated astride the trail handspike near the trail. 

No. 3, seated with his back to the inside of the right caisson 
wheel, facing the bracket fuze setter, legs extended one on each 
side of the fuze setter. 

Nos. 4 and 5, in rear of the caisson in a convenient position 
for the performance of their duties. 

Nos. 6 and 7, abreast and in order from right to left, 5 yards 
in rear of the trail spade of their piece, awaiting orders. 

Higher numbered cannoneers, if present, accompany the 
limbers. 

2. TO FIRE 

Duties in Detail of the Gunner 

The duties of the gunner in the service of the piece are: 

1 . To set the deflection. 

2. To apply the deflection difference. 

3. To set the range. 

4. To level the cross-level bubble on the sight-shank socket. 

5. To give the direction to the piece. 

6. To give the elevation in direct laying. 

7. To call ready. 



GUN SQUAD— THREE INCH 55 

8. To move his head out of the way of the sight before the 
piece is fired. 

9. To give the command to fire the piece. 

10. To measure a deflection. 

Duties in Detail or No. 1 

The duties of No. 1 in the service of the piece are: 

1 . To set and release the brake. 

2. To open the breech. 

3. To set the site on the quadrant. 

4. To set the range on the quadrant. 

5. To center the cross level bubble of the quadrant. 

6. To close the breech. 

7. In indirect laying, to give the elevation. 

8. To call set. 

9. To fire the piece. 

10. To measure the site. 

Duties in Detail or No. 2 

The duties of No. 2 in the service of the piece are: 

1. To shift the trail so as to give the general direction to 
the piece. 

2. To throw the empty cartridge cases out of the way of the 
gun squad. 

Duties in Detail of No. 3 

The duties of No. 3 in the service of the piece are: 

1. To set the corrector. 

2. To set the range on the fuze setter. 

3. To set the fuze when the hand fuze setter is used. 

Duties in Detail of No. 4 

The duties of No. 4 in the service of the piece are: 

1. In time fire to complete the setting of the fuze. 

2. To insert the round in the breech. 

3. In volley fire to call out the number of the round. 



56 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE 

Duties in Detail of No. 5 

The duties of No 5 in the service of the piece are: 

1. To take ammunition from the chest. 

2. When the bracket fuze setter is being used, to insert the 
round in the fuze setter and to set the fuze. 

3. When the hand fuze setter is used, to hold the round 
while No. 3 sets the fuze. 

4. To pass the round directly to No. 4 in percussion fire, and 
when the hand fuze setter is used in time fire. 

Duties of Nos. 6 and 7 

Nos. 6 and 7 have no specific duties in the service of the piece 
after it is established in position. They act as spare cannoneers. 

Upon going into action, Nos. 6 and 7 are utilized for the con- 
struction of concealment for the carriages, for line guards on 
the telephone lines, for the resupply of ammunition, etc. This 
work is done under the immediate supervision of the executive 
or his assistant. 

3. TO RESUME THE ORDER FOR MARCHING 

The carriages being prepared for action, to resume the order 
for marching: MARCH ORDER. 

Each member of the gun squad performs his duties in the order 
given below: 

Gunner: (a) Lowers and secures the top shield, with the 
assistance of No. 1 ; 

(b) Sees that the deflection reading is zero, returns the pano- 
ramic sight to its case and secures the case; 

(c) Replaces the cover on the sight shank and returns it to 
the trail box; 

(d) Traverses and elevates the piece to the traveling position 
and fastens the traveling lock; 

(e) Secures the hood over the sight bracket; 
(/) Takes his post. 

No. 1 : (a) Assists the gunner in lowering and securing the top 
shield; 

(b) Closes the breech; releases the firing pin; 

(c) Returns the lanyard and wiping cloth to the trail box; 



GUN SQUAD— THREE INCH 57 

(d) Sets the range at 3000 and the site at 300; 

(e) Returns the quadrant to its case and secures the case; 
if) Takes his post. 

No. 2: (a) Assists No. 3 to raise and secure the piece apron; 

(b) Turns down and secures the trail handspike; 

(c) Replaces the breech cover and secures it; 

(d) Takes his post. 

No. 3 : (a) Sees that the fuze of any round whose fuze has been 
set, is set back at safety; 

(b) Sets fuze setter at range 3000, corrector 30; 

(c) Raises and secures the piece apron, with the assistance 
of No. 2. 

(d) Replaces the front-sight cover and adjusts the front sight 
in the traveling position; 

(e) Replaces and secures the muzzle cover; 
(/) Takes his post. 

No. 4: (a) Assists in setting fuzes back at safety; 

(b) Passes the round to No. 5; 

(c) Assisted by No. 5, lowers and secures the caisson door; 

(d) Raises and secures the fuze setter; 

(e) Assisted by No. 5, raises and secures the caisson apron; 
(/) Takes his post. 

No. 5: (a) Receives ammunition from No. 4 and stores it in 
the chest; 

(b) Assists No. 4 to lower and secure the caisson door; 

(c) Assists No. 4 to raise and secure the caisson apron; 

(d) Takes his post. 

If it is intended to resume the fire, but in another position, 
so that the limbering of the carriage is necessitated, the com- 
mand MARCH ORDER is not given. At the command for 
limbering the carriages are placed in the order described in the 
section relative to preparing for action. 

If the situation is such as to make it probable that the guns 
will have to defend themselves from close attack the command 
sights for fire at will may be added either to the command for 
preparation for action or to that for resuming the march order. 
At such command, the gunner sets deflection zero, range 1000; 
No. 3 sets corrector 30, range zero. 



58 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE 

STANDING GUN DRILL— FOUR POINT SEVEN INCH 

1. TO FORM SQUADS 

{Same as for Three Inch) 

2. TO TELL OFF THE SQUADS 

i \ {Same as for Three Inch) 

3. POSTS OF GUN SQUADS, CARRIAGES LIMBERED 

{Same as for Three Inch) 

4. TO POST THE GUN SQUADS 

{Same as for Three Inch) 

5. POSTS OF CANNONEERS, CARRIAGES LIMBERED 

The gunner and No. i opposite the rear of the piece wheels. 

Nos. 2 and 3 opposite the front of the caisson limber wheels. 

Nos. 4 and 5 opposite the front of the caisson wheels. 

Nos. 6 and 7 opposite the rear of the limber wheels of the 
caisson. 

The gunner and even numbers are on the right, the odd 
numbers on the left; all 2 feet outside the wheels, facing the front. 

6. TO POST THE CANNONEERS 

{Same as for Three Inch) 

7. TO MOUNT THE CANNONEERS ON THE CARRIAGES 
LIMBERED 

In each squad, the gunner and No. 1 mount on the axle seats 
of the piece. 

Nos. 2, 3, and 6 mount on the limber chest of the caisson, 
No. 6 in the middle. 

Nos. 4, 5, and 7 mount on the caisson chest, No. 7 in the middle. 

The gunner and even numbers are on the right of their respect- 
ive carriages, odd numbers are on the left. 

1. Cannoneers, prepare to mount; 2. MOUNT. At the first 
command the cannoneers who mount on the limber chests or 
axle seats hasten to the rear of the limber chests or axle seats; 
those who mount on the caisson chest hasten to the front of 
that chest. Each cannoneer who mounts on the limber chest 
places the foot nearest the wheel on the step, grasps the chest 



STANDING GUN DRILL 59 

handle with the hand nearest the wheel, and with the other hand 
grasps the hand of the cannoneer opposite him. Each cannoneer 
who mounts on the caisson chest places the foot nearest the wheel 
on the step, and grasps the chest handle with the hand nearest 
the wheel. Cannoneers who mount on the axle seats place the 
foot nearest the wheel on the brake beam, and grasp the seat 
handle with the hand nearest the wheel. 

At the command mount, all spring up and seat themselves, 
those on the chest facing the front, those on the axle seats to 
the rear. Those who mount on the limber chests place the foot 
farthest from the wheel on the top of the limber chest, and then 
step down on their foot board. 

If the command be: i. Cannoneers ; 2. MOUNT, the cannoneers 
execute, at the command mount, all that has been prescribed 
for the commands prepare to mount- and mount. 

8. TO DISMOUNT THE CANNONEERS FROM THE CARRIAGES 

{Same as for Three Inch) 

9. POSTS OF THE CANNONEERS, CARRIAGES UNLIMBERED 

BUT NOT PREPARED FOR ACTION 

In each squad, the gunner immediately in rear of the can- 
noneer's seat, on the left side of the trail of the gun. 

No. 1, immediately in the rear of the cannoneer's seat, on the 
right side of the trail of the gun. 

No. 2, on the left side of the trail handspike. 

Nos. 3, 4 and 5, in rear of trie caisson body, in order from right 
to left. 

Nos. 6 and 7, five feet in rear of the right and left halves of 
the caisson body, respectively. 

All cannoneers face to the front. 

10. TO CHANGE THE POSTS OF THE CANNONEERS 

(Same as for Three Inch) 

11. TO MOVE BY HAND THE CARRIAGES LIMBERED 

(Same as for Three Inch) 

12. DISPOSITION OF THE CARRIAGES BEFORE AND AFTER 
UNL1MBERING 

(Same as for Three Inch) 



60 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE 

13. TO UNLIMBER 
General Rules 

{Same as for Three Inch) 

14a. TO FERE TO THE FRONT 

{Same as for Three Inch) 

14b. TO FIRE TO THE REAR 

{Same as for Three Inch) 

14c. TO FIRE TO THE FLANK 

{Same as for Three Inch) 

15. DUTIES OF THE CANNONEERS IN LIMBERING 

{Same as for Three Inch) 

16. TO LEAVE THE PARK 

{Same as for Three Inch) 

17. POSITION OF THE HOWITZER WHEN MARCHING 

The howitzer is locked by the traveling lock and the pawls 
are disengaged from the rockers. 

GUN SQUAD— FOUR POINT SEVEN INCH 

1. TO PREPARE FOR ACTION 

The carriages being in position and unlimbered: PREPARE 
FOR ACTION. 

Each member of the gun squad performs his duties in the 
order given below: 

Gunner: {a) Removes the top carriage cover, if on, with the 
assistance of No. i; 

{b) Removes the covers from the sight bar and front sight; 

{c) Releases the traveling lock and operates the elevating and 
traversing gears; 

{d) Removes the sight shank from its case and places it in its 
socket, setting it at Zone 3, range 4000, and the site at 300, and 
brings the elevation bubble to the center; 

{e) Takes the panoramic sight from its case and places it in 
its 1 seat, making sure that the sight is clamped, that all the de- 



GUN SQUAD— FOUR POIXT SEVEN INCH 61 

flection scales are set at zero and that the elevating mechanism 
of the rotating head is set at 300; 

(/) Raises and secures the top shield, with the assistance of 
No'. 1; 

(g) Seats himself on his seat. 

No. 1: (a) Assists the gunner in removing the top carriage 
cover, if on; 

(b) Disengages the pawls; 

(c) Equips himself with a lanyard and wiping cloth; 

id) Operates the breech mechanism, examines the breech 
block, bore and chamber, cleaning any part requiring it, leaving 
the breech open except when the piece is loaded; 

(e) Assists the gunner in raising and securing the top shield; 

(/) Seats himself on his seat. 

No. 2: (a) Removes the breech cover and places it on the 
ground 2 yards in rear of the trail; 

(b) Runs around the right of the piece and assists No. 3 in 
lowering the apron of the piece; 

(c) Turns back and engages the trail handspike; 

id) Unfastens the rammer staff, removes the sponge cover, 
and places the staff on the ground, rammer head to the front and 
on the breech cover 2 yards to rear of the trail; 

(e) Distributes tow or waste to the cannoneers for use in their 
ears; 

(/) Kneels to the left of the trail handspike. 

No. 3: (a) Runs around the left of the caisson and removes 
the muzzle cover; 

(b) Lowers the apron of the piece, with the assistance of No. 2; 

(c) Procures the fuze setter and half seats himself with his 
back to the right caisson wheel, the fuze setter in his hands; 

(d) Sets his scales at Corrector 60, Zone 3, 4000. 

No. 4: (a) Assisted by No. 5 lowers the caisson apron; 

(b) Assisted by No. 5. opens the caisson doors; 

(c) Procures the shot tongs and places them on the middle 
rail in front of the pintle; 

(d) Stands ready to serve ammunition. 

No. 5: (a) Assists No. 4 in lowering the caisson apron; 

(b) Assists No. 4 in opening the caisson doors; 

(c) Draws from the chest a cartridge case carrier, opens it 



62 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE 

and lays it on the ground under and parallel to the lower rear 
edge of the chest; 

(d) Stands ready to serve ammunition. 

Nos. 6 and 7: (a) Procure the necessary tools and stand 
ready to dig a trench for the trail, if ordered; 

(b) Take their respective posts and stand ready to serve 
ammunition. 

The cannoneers report to their chief of section if any parts of 
the materiel are not in working order. 

The carriages, limbered, are habitually prepared for action 
before reaching the firing position. The duties of the cannoneers 
are the same as at the carriages unlimbered except that after the 
examination of the elevating and traversing gears the piece is 
secured by the traveling lock; the trail handspike is not turned 
back; the breech is closed; the firing pin is released; the apron is 
not lowered; the caisson door is left closed; and the cannoneers 
do not take their posts for serving the gun. The gunner returns 
the panoramic sight to its case unless special orders to the con* 
trary are given. 

Immediately after establishing the carriages the preparation 
for action is completed without command and the cannoneers 
take their posts for serving the piece. 

If prepare for action has not been given before establishing 
the carriages in the firing position, that command is habitually 
given by each chief of section as soon as his carriages have been 
unlimbered and established. The instructor may, however, 
caution do not prepare for action when he wishes to drill the 
personnel in limbering and unlimbering only or in the details 
of preparation for action. 

POSTS OF THE CANNONEERS, CARRIAGES, UNLIMBERED 
AND PREPARED FOR ACTION 

In each squad — the gunner, seated on his seat facing the 
howitzer. 

No. 1, seated astride his seat facing the howitzer. 

No. 2, kneeling to the left of trail handspike. 

No. 3, half seated with his back to the inside of the right 
caisson wheel. 



GUN SQUAD— FOUR POINT SEVEN INCH 63 

Nos. 4 and 5, in rear of the caisson in a convenient position 
for the performance of their duties, No. 5 to the left of No. 4. 

Nos. 6 and 7, 5 feet in rear of the right and left halves of 
the caisson chest, respectively. Each kneeling on one knee. 

2. TO FIRE 

Duties in Detail of the Gunner 

1. To set off the deflection. 

2. To apply the deflection difference, if any. 

3. To set off the site. 

4. To set the range on the sight shank. 

5. To level the cross level bubble. 

6. To give the direction to the piece. 

7. To give the elevation to the piece. 

8. To call Ready when the piece is accurately laid. 

9. To move his head out of the way of the sight before the 
piece is fired. 

10. To give the command to fire the piece. 

11. To measure the deflection. 

12. To measure a site. 

Duties in Detail of No. i 

The duties of No. 1 in the service of the piece are: 

1. To set and release the brake. 

2. To disengage the pawls. 

3. To open the breech. 

4. To close the breech. 

5. To engage the pawls. 

6. To fire the piece. 

No. 1 sets the brake as soon as the piece has been given the 
general direction. Whenever the trail has to be shifted No. 1 
releases the brake and sets it again as soon as the trail has been 
reestablished. 

Duties in Detail of No. 2 

The duties of No. 2 in the service of the piece are: 
1. To shift the trail so as to give the general direction to the 
piece. 



64 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE 

2. To ram the projectile. 

3. To receive and throw the empty cartridge cases out of the 
way of the gun squad. 

Duties in Detail of No. 3 

The duties of No. 3 in the service of the howitzer are: 

1. To set the fuze setter scale. 

2. To set the fuze in time fire. 

Duties in Detail of No. 4 

The duties of No. 4 in the service of the howitzer are: 

1. Procures the shot tongs. 

2. Draws the projectile from the chest sufficiently far for No. 6 
to take it in his arms. 

3. Replaces the shot tongs. 

4. In time, fire removes the waterproof hood and safety wire. 

5. Prepares to draw another projectile. 

Duties in Detail of No. 5 

The duties of No. 5 in the service of the howitzer are: 

1. To procure a powder charge. 

2. To remove the diaphragm, and prepare the charge for Zone 
1 or 2, if necessary. 

3. To insert the charge in the breech. 

4. In volley fire to call out the number of the round. 

5. To resume his post and prepare another charge. 

Duties in Detail of No. 6 

The duties of No. 6 in the service of the howitzer are: 

1. Receives the projectile in his arms as it is drawn from the 
chest by No. 4. 

2. In time, fire places the projectile on the ground and steadies 
it while No. 3 sets the fuse. 

3. Carries the projectile to the breech of the howitzer, the pro- 
jectile resting on his left arm, the right hand supporting the base, 
and inserts the projectile in the chamber. 

4. Resumes his post. 

When shell or percussion shrapnel is being fired, No. 6 takes 
the projectile directly from the chest to the breech and inserts it. 



GUN SQUAD— FOUR POINT SEVEN INCH 65 

Duties in Detail of No. 7 

Relieves No. 6 by performing the duties of No. 6 for every 
alternate round. 

No. 7 may be withdrawn from the service of the howitzer 
for duty as line guard on the telephone line, for the resupply of 
ammunition, etc. This will be done under the immediate 
supervision of the executive or his assistant. 

3. TO RESUME THE ORDER FOR MARCHING 

The carriages being prepared for action, to resume the order 
for marching: MARCH ORDER. 

Each member of the gun squad performs his duties in the order 
given below: 

Gunner: (a) Lowers and secures the top shield with the 
assistance of No. 1 ; 

(b) Sees that the scales are set at zero, returns the panoramic 
sight to its case and secures the case; 

(c) Replaces the cover on the sight shank and returns it to 
the trail box; 

(d) Traverses and elevates the piece to the traveling posi- 
tion, and fastens the traveling lock; 

(e) Secures the cover over the sight bar and front sight ; 

(J) Replaces the top carriage cover, if used, with the assistance 
of No. 1 ; 

(g) Takes his post. 

No. 1 : (a) Assists the gunner in lowering and securing the top 
shield; 

(b) Closes the breech; releases the firing pin; 

(c) Engages the pawls; 

(d) Returns the lanyard and wiping cloth ; 

(e) Assists the gunner in replacing the top carriage cover, if 
used; 

(J) Takes his post. 

No. 2: (a) Assists No. 3 in raising and securing the apron of 
the piece; 

(b) Replaces the sponge cover; replaces the rammer staff in 
its fastenings ; 

(c) Turns back and secures the trail handspike; 



66 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE 

(d) Replaces the breech cover and secures it; 

(e) Takes his post. 

No. 3: (a) Sets fuzes at safety; 

(b) Raises and secures the apron of the piece, with the assist- 
ance of No. 2 ; 

(c) Sets the fuze setter at Zone 3, 4000, Corrector 60; replaces 
it in its case and returns the case to the trail box; 

(d) Replaces and secures the muzzle cover; 

(e) Takes his post. 

No. 4: (a) Assisted by No. 5, closes the caisson doors; 

(b) Assisted by No. 5, raises and secures the caisson apron; 

(c) Replaces the shot tongs in its fastenings; 

(d) Takes his post. 

No. 5: (a) Replaces the cartridge case carriers; 

(b) Assists No. 4 in closing the caisson doors; 

(c) Assists No. 4 in raising and securing the caisson apron; 

(d) Takes his post. 

Nos. 6 and 7: (a) Assist No. 3 in setting fuzes at safety, and 
replacing projectiles in chest; 

(b) Return and secure the tools used in digging trench for 
trail; 

(c) Take their respective posts. 

If the situation is such as to make it probable that the guns 
will have to defend themselves from close attack the command 
sights for fire at will may be added either to the command for 
preparation for action or to that for resuming the march order. 
At such command, the gunner sets the deflection Zero, range 
1000; No. 3 sets corrector 60, range zero. 



STANDING GUN DRILL— SIX INCH 
FORMATION OF THE GUN SQUADS 

1. To Form the Gun Squads 

(Same as for Three Inch and Four Point Seven Inch) 

2. TO TELL OFF THE SQUADS 

(Same as for Three Inch and Four Point Seven Inch) 



STANDING GUN DRILL— SIX INCH 67 

3. POSTS OF THE GUN SQUADS, CARRIAGES LIMBERED 

{Same as for Three Inch and Four Point Seven Inch excepting last 
paragraph — in place of which insert as follows) 

If no special place of formation is designated, each gun squad 
when formed at the carriages, is posted in rear of its caisson; 
each caisson squad in rear of the second caisson of its section. 

4. TO POST THE GUN SQUADS 

(Same as for Three Inch and Four Point Seven Inch) 

5. POSTS OF THE CANNONEERS, CARRIAGES LIMBERED 

The gunner is opposite the rear of the left wheel of the piece, 
No. 4 is opposite the front of the right wheel of the caisson, the 
carpenter mechanic is opposite the right wheel of the battery 
wagon, the saddler mechanic is opposite the right wheel of the 
store wagon, all 2 feet outside the wheels and facing to the front. 

The remaining men of each of the dismounted squads are 
posted as a squad as prescribed in paragraph above, relative to 
the posts of the gun squads, and each squad is commanded by the 
right front rank man of the squad. 



6. TO POST THE CANNONEERS 

i. Cannoneers; 2. POSTS. Each gunner repeats the com- 
mand posts. Each gunner, -each No. 4 and the carpenter and 
saddler mechanics leave the ranks, if formed, and move in double 
time by the shortest practicable routes to their posts at the 
carriages. 

The remainder of each dismounted squad if not posted as in 
paragraph above, relative to the method of posting squads, 
assembles there, the men moving at a double time. 

For preliminary instruction the dismounted squads, on entering 
the park, are first posted with their carriages; the cannoneers 
are then sent to their posts by the foregoing command. The 
command is general, however, and is applicable when the can- 
noneers are in or out of rank, at a halt or marching, and when 
the carriages are limbered or unlimbered. 



68 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE 

7. TO MOUNT THE CANNONEERS ON THE CARRIAGES 

LIMBERED 

Each gunner mounts and stands on the left brake beam of 
his piece; each No. 4 mounts and seats himself on the chest of 
his caisson; the carpenter mechanic and the saddler mechanic 
mount and stand on the step of the battery wagon and store 
wagon bodies respectively. 

Each man so mounted operates the brake of his carriage as 
necessary. Whatever the post or formation of their squad 
these men take their posts at the carriages limbered without 
command when the teams are hitched and mount to operate the 
brakes if the carriages are put in motion. 

The remaining cannoneers are habitually dismounted. In 
garrison, however, when ammunition is not carried, they may, 
at the discretion of the instructor, be mounted on the chests for 
the purpose of training caisson teams in heavier draft. In 
mounting the cannoneers care will be taken to place them so that 
the weight at the end of the pole will not be increased. 

8. TO DISMOUNT THE CANNONEERS FROM THE CARRIAGES 

Each gunner and the carpenter and saddler mechanic dismount 
without command whenever necessary in the operation of the 
brake. All dismount with the drivers of their carriages. 

9. POSTS OF THE CANNONEERS, CARRIAGES UNLIMBERED 

AND NOT PREPARED FOR ACTION 

Gun Section 

The gunner immediately in rear of the cannoneer's seat on 
the left side of the trail. 

No. 1, immediately in rear of the cannoneer's seat on the right 
side of the trail. 

No. 2, 2 feet in rear of and opposite the right of the caisson 
limber chest. 

Nos. 3, 5 and 6, 2 feet in rear of the caisson chest in the order 
named from right to left. 

No. 4, 2 feet in rear of No. 5 covering him. 

Nos. 7 and 8, 2 feet in rear of the caisson limber chest, No. 7 
on the right and both on the left of No. 2. 



STANDING GUN DRILL— SIX INCH 69 

Caisson Section 

First Caisson: No. 4, 2 feet in rear of the center of the limber 
chest. 

Nos. 5 and 6, 2 feet in rear of the caisson chest, No. 5 on the 
right. 

Second Caisson: Nos. 4 and 5, 2 feet in rear of the limber 
chest, No. 6 on the right. 

The cannoneers stand at attention at their posts facing to the 
front. 

10. TO CHANGE THE POSTS OF THE CANNONEERS 

(Same as for Three Inch and Four Point Seven Inch) 

11. TO MOVE BY HAND THE CARRIAGES LIMBERED 

To the Front 
Gun Sections: 1. Pieces (caissons) forward; 2. MARCH; 3. 

HALT. In each gun squad at the first command the gunner 
(No. 4) releases the brake. Nos. 1 and 2 hasten to the end of the 
pole; Nos. 3 and 4 to the limber wheels; Nos. 5 and 6 to the rear 
of the limber; Nos. 7 and 8 to the howitzer (caisson body) 
wheels; even numbers on the right, odd numbers on the left. 
The gunner remains near the brake and directs the movement. 

At the command march all assist in moving the carriage to 
the front. At the command halt the carriage is stopped, the 
pole is lowered to the ground, the ropes replaced and all resume 
their posts. Nos. 5 and 6 may be directed to work in rear of 
the howitzer (caisson body) if the nature of the footing renders 
their efforts there more efficient. 

In a caisson the instructor designates the carriage to be moved. 

In each caisson section at the first command No. 4 of the 
designated carriage releases the brake. Both Nos. 4 then hasten 
to the end of the pole; both Nos. 5 to the limber wheels; both 
Nos. 6 to the caisson body w T heels; No. 7 to the rear of the caisson 
body. The caisson corporal assists and superintends the move- 
ment. 

To the Rear 

1. Pieces (caissons) backward; 2. MARCH; 3. HALT. Exe- 
cuted as in the preceding paragraph, except that in a gun section 
Nos. 5 and 6 place themselves in front of the limber or howitzer 



70 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE 

(caisson body) and in a caisson section No. 7 places himself in 
front of the caisson body and the cannoneers move the carriage 
to the rear. 

The limbered howitzer or loaded caisson can be moved by 
hand by the cannoneers of a section only when the footing is 
hard and level and then only for short distances without fatigue. 
When the conditions are other than these extra men must be 
provided. In such cases it may be advantageous to use the 
picket ropes which are rigged as follows: 

To the Front. — At the first command, the gunner and No. 1 
each procure a picket rope and attach them to the wheel hooks 
on the right and left piece (caisson) wheels, respectively, stretch- 
ing them to the front. The instructor assigns the necessary 
number of cannoneers to work at the end of the pole and on the 
picket ropes. At the command march, all working together 
move the piece (caisson) in the direction indicated. At the com- 
mand halt the carriage is stopped, picket ropes replaced, and all 
resume their posts. 

It will sometimes be found advantageous to attach the middle 
of a picket rope around the double-tree bolt, drawing the ends 
out under the double-tree and giving them a half hitch around 
the end of the pole. By attaching additional ropes to these 
ends any desired length can be secured, and the piece, or caisson, 
moved as above described. 

To the Rear. — Executed as in the preceding section except that 
the ropes are stretched to the rear and the carriage is moved to 
the rear. 

In moving carriages by hand cannoneers should be taught to 
place themselves alternately on each side of the rope and to 
take sufficient distance so that they will not interfere with 
one another. They should be practised in pulling together. 
For short distances, five men, well placed on a rope, can pull 
more than a horse. 

In a caisson section, the caisson corporal and No. 4 of the 
designated carriage procure and attach the ropes. 

12. DISPOSITION OF THE CARRIAGES BEFORE AND AFTER 
UNLIMBERING 

Before Unlimbering. — The piece and the caisson are beside 
each other, 1 yard apart, poles pointing in opposite directions, 



STANDING GUN DRILL— SIX INCH 71 

muzzle of the howitzer pointing in the direction of fire, the rear 
of the caisson wheels abreast of the single-trees of the howitzer 
limber. The caisson of the gun section is normally on the left 
of the piece, with respect to the direction of fire, but may be 
placed on the right when so ordered. The interval of i yard 
should not be materially increased, otherwise the amount of 
manhandling is increased or the amount of cover obtained from 
the carriages is greatly diminished. In emergencies the carriages 
may be unlimbered from any formation. Dispositions to meet 
various situations should be practised. 

When not horsed, the carriages are drawn by the cannoneers' 
and the instructor gives the necessary instructions for moving 
the carriages limbered by the shortest routes into the pre- 
scribed positions. 

After Unlimbering. — The adjacent wheels of the howitzer 
carriage and caisson limber are about i foot apart, the howitzer 
muzzle and the limber pole pointing to the front. The caisson 
is on the same side of the piece as the limber, the rear of its wheels 
opposite the rear end of the handspikes; the connecting pole 
pointing to the front and directly in rear of the limber wheel 
more distant from the piece. The caisson of the gun section is 
normally unlimbered on the left of the piece, but, when so 
directed, it may be placed on the right. 

The howitzer is placed slightly in advance to allow for recoil 
on the first shot, which on ordinary ground is about 10 inches. 

The interval of i foot may be increased to permit wide move- 
ments of the trail if they are anticipated, but effort should be 
made to preserve the protection afforded by the shields. 

The piece limber is placed in rear of the howitzer 10 yards 
from the end of the trail, the pole pointing to the rear. 

In active service, and in instruction simulating service con- 
ditions, the teams are placed under cover in the vicinity of the 
position; if no cover is obtainable in the vicinity, they are placed 
in line in rear of either flank at such place as the instructor may 
designate. On occasions of ceremony, or when a post is not 
designated, the piece team is placed directly in rear of the piece, 
facing to the front, the heads of the lead horses 25 yards from the 
rear of the caisson bodies. The caisson team is placed 2 yards 
from and abreast of the piece team on its left (right) if the caisson 
is on the left (right) of the piece. 



72 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE 

13. TO UNLIMBER 

General Rules 
i. On account of the extreme difficulty of man handling heavy 
field materiel, the teams will be used to draw the carriages to 
the positions they are to occupy in firing unless the necessity for 
concealment demands the placing of the carriages by hand. In 
the latter case a sufficient number of cannoneers with picket 
ropes should be employed at each carriage in turn to move it 
promptly to its proper position. 

2. In order to avoid unnecessary strain on the piece wheels 
and increased difficulties of draft, the howitzer should usually be 
left in its traveling position as long as practicable. For moving 
short distance over smooth ground, however, the piece may be 
in its firing position. 

3. The howitzer is habitually shifted to its firing position 
before unlimbering. 

4. The howitzer may or may not be prepared for action before 
unlimbering. 

5. In unlimbering to fire to the front, the caisson establishes 
the position. 

6. In unlimbering to fire to the rear, the piece establishes the 
position. 

7. If necessary to move the carriages by hand to the firing 
position, they are moved before being unlimbered. 

8. In the maneuvers described in paragraphs concerning the 
direction of movements the terms right, left, front, and rear are 
referred to the direction of the muzzle as front. 

TO UNLIMBER 

The Howitzer.— UNLIMBER THE HOWITZER. Nos. 6, 
2, 7 and 8 grasp the right and left trail handles, respectively, 
and stand ready to lift. Nos. 4 and 5 grasp and raise the pole 
of the piece limber. The gunner releases the trail prop, unfastens 
and turns the pintle bolt, and commands: HEAVE. The trail 
is raised until the lunette is clear of the pintle; the gunner 
commands: DRIVE ON. Nos. 4 and 5 pull the limber to its 
position in rear of the piece; the trail is lowered until the prop 
rests on the ground. Nos. 6 and 2 fasten the spade in its firing 



STANDING GUN DRILL— SIX INCH 73 

position and turn over and latch the right and left handspikes, 
respectively. 

Nos. 6, 2, 7 and 8 grasp the right and left handspikes, and the 
right and left trail handles, respectively, and stand ready to 
lift. The gunner commands: HEAVE. The trail is lifted 
sufficiently for the gunner to pull the trail prop to the front, and 
is then lowered to the ground. The gunner fastens the trail prop. 
The howitzer is ordinarily unlimbered before, the caisson. 

The Caisson.— UNLIMBER THE CAISSON. Nos. 4, 5, 6, 
7 and 8 hasten to the caisson. Nos. 4 and 5 take position on the 
connecting pole, Nos. 6 and 7 at the limber wheels even numbers 
on the right, odd numbers on the left, No 8 at the limber pole. 
No. 4 unlatches the pintle; No. 5 lowers the connecting pole 
prop; together they raise the lunette from the pintle; No. 4 
commands DRIVE ON. At this command Nos. 6, 7 and 8 move 
the limber free of the caisson. Nos. 4 and 5 lower the connecting 
pole until the prop rests on the ground. Nos. 4 and 5 then assist 
in moving the limber to its position beside the howitzer under the 
direction of No. 4. The chief of section supervises the unlimber- 
ing and assigns Nos. 1, 2 and 3 to assist in moving the limber if 
necessary. 

In unlimbering the caisson section Nos. 4 and 5 perform the 
duties of Nos. 4 and 5 of a gun section and No. 6 of the first 
caisson and Nos. 6 and 7 of the second caisson, assisted by Nos. 
4 and 5, the duties prescribed for Nos. 6, 7 and 8 of a gun section. 

14. TO FIRE TO Tip: FRONT OR TO THE REAR 

The carriages being in double section or in section column: 
ACTION FRONT (REAR). 

If marching the carriage which establishes the position halts. 
If the carriages are in double section, the carriage which does not 
establish the position moves to its front inclining away from the 
carriage already in place; makes an about and moves to its 
position beside the halted carriage. 

If the carriages are in section column, the carriage which does 
not establish the position moves to its front inclining to the 
right, passing the other carriage if necessary, makes a left about 
and takes its position beside the halted carriage. 

If in ranks, the cannoneers break ranks. 



74 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE 

As soon as the caisson halts, No. 4 sets the brake and, if 
mounted, dismounts, the caisson team is then unhitched by Nos. 
4 and 5, No. 5 working on the near and No. 4 on the off side, 
No. 5 then lets down the pole. 

Similarly as soon as the piece halts, the gunner sets the brake, 
the team is unhitched by No. 2 and No. 6, No. 6 working on the 
near and No. 2 on the off side, No. 6 lets down the pole. 

Unless otherwise directed, the halted carriage is approached 
by the moving carriage so that the caisson will be on the left of 
the piece when unlimbered. 

If the piece is in its traveling position the chief of section 
habitually causes it to be shifted to the firing position before the 
piece is unlimbered. 

15. DUTIES OF THE CANNONEERS IN LIMBERING 
To Limber 
The Howitzer.— LIMBER THE HOWITZER. Nos. 7 and 8 
loosen the earth about the spade, if necessary. Nos. 6 and 2 
extend the trail handspikes. Nos. 6, 2, 7 and 8 grasp the right 
and left handspikes and the right and left trail handles, respec- 
tively, and stand ready to lift. The gunner releases trail prop: 
commands HEAVE and the trail is raised and then lowered until 
the prop rests on the ground. Nos. 6 and 2 unlatch and turn 
back the right and left handspikes, respectively; and turn back 
and fasten the spade. Nos. 4 and 5 grasp and raise the pole of 
the piece limber and back the limber to the end of the trail. 
Nos. 6, 2, 7 and 8 grasp the right and left trail handles and the 
right and left upper trail handles, respectively; and stand ready 
to lift. The gunner adjusts the pintle bolt for limbering; 
commands : HEAVE, the trail is lifted; the limber is backed under 
the trail; No. 2 removes the prop to the right with his front foot 
and the trail is lowered upon the limber so that the pintle enters 
the lunette. The gunner turns and fastens the pintle bolt, and 
fastens the prop. Nos. 4 and 5 place the end of the limber pole 
on the ground. The howitzer is ordinarily limbered before the 
caisson. If the team is brought up it is hitched upon completion 
of the limbering without command. No. 6 engages the pole in 
the yoke. Nos. 6 and No. 2 then hitch the team, No. 6 working 
on the near side and No. 2 on the off side. 




STANDING GUN DRILL— SIX INCH 75 

The Caisson.— LIMBER THE CAISSON. Nos. 4, 5, <5, 7 
and 8 hasten to the caisson; No. 4 releases the brake; Nos. 4, 5, 
6, 7 and 8 take posts as for unlimbering, Nos. 6, 7 and 8 3 assisted 
by Nos. 4 and 5 if necessary, back the limber up to the caisson 
under the direction of No. 4; Nos. 4 and 5 raise the connecting 
pole of the caisson; No. 5 raises and secures the prop; together 
they place the lunette over the pintle; No. 4 latches the pintle; 
No. 8 lowers the limber pole to the ground; the chief of section 
supervises the limbering and, if necessary, directs Nos. 1, 2 and 

3 to assist. If the ground is more favorable the caisson body 
may be run toward the limber. If the team is brought up it is 
hitched without command. No. 5 engages the pole in the yoke. 
The team is then hitched, No. 5 working on the near side and No. 

4 on the off side. 

In limbering a caisson section Nos. 4 and 5 perform the duties 
prescribed for Nos. 4 and 5 of a gun section and No. 6 of the first 
caisson and Nos, 6 and 7 of the second caisson assisted by Nos. 
4 and 5 the duties of Nos. 6, 7 and 8 of a gun section. 

16. TO LEAVE THE PARK 

{Same as for Three Inch and Four Point Seven Inch) 

17. POSITIONS OF THE HOWITZER WHEN MARCHING 

When prepared for movement the howitzer is always locked 
by one of the traveling locks, and the pawls are disengaged from 
the rockers. 

When locked by the rear traveling lock the howitzer is said to 
be in traveling position. It is always put in this position for 
marches of any length. 

When locked to the recoil cylinder by means of the cylinder 
retaining ring, the howitzer is said to be in firing position. It 
may be locked by the front traveling lock and moved for short 
distances while in this position. 

18. TO SHIFT THE HOWITZER FROM THE TRAVELING TO 
THE FIRING POSITION 

The howitzer being limbered and in its traveling position: 
SHIFT TO FIRING POSITION: The gunner procures the 
socket wrench; engages the pawls as soon as the locking pin of the 



76 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE 

traveling lock has been removed; directs the shifting of the 
howitzer from the traveling to the firing position. 

Nos. i and 3 remove the breech cover. 

No. 3 procures waste and oil; assisted by No. 7, cleans and oils 
the unpainted surfaces of the recoil lug, the guide rails and the 
gun slides; replaces the waste and oiler; procures the necessary 
wrenches; assists No. 1 in replacing and locking the retaining 
ring, and in replacing the wrenches. 

No. 1 removes the cylinder retaining ring; procures waste and 
oil from No. 3; cleans and oils the rear end of the cylinder, and 
the threads and front surfaces of the retaining ring; after the 
howitzer has been moved to its firing position, and before the 
piece is unlimbered, disengages the pawls; assisted by No. 3 
replaces and locks the retaining ring; replaces the wrenches. 

No. 6 procures the shifting bar, and places it under the breech 
in front of the traveling lock lug, the flattened end of the bar 
resting on the left flask. Nos. 2, 6 and 8 then use the bar to 
support the breech while No. 7 removes the locking pin of the 
rear traveling lock. 

Nos. 2, 6, 7 and 8 man the shifting bar, and, under the direc- 
tion of the gunner, support the breech while the gunner operates 
the elevating mechanism until the traveling lock lug is clear of 
the traveling lock. The bar is then placed against the rear of 
the breech, with the flattened end against any convenient part 
of the left side of the trail, and the howitzer is moved forward 
until the rear of the recoil lug is flush with the rear cylinder head. 
Using the socket wrench, the gunner aligns one of the notches 
on the rear of the cylinder with the locating pin of the recoil 
lug and causes the howitzer to be moved forward to its firing 
position. It is important that the gunner carefully align the 
notch and the locating pin before the piece is shoved home. 

No. 6 places the shifting bar on the ground, pointing to the 
rear, 3 yards in rear of the end of the trail or replaces it on 
the carriage depending upon whether or not the carriage is to be 
unlimbered immediately. 

No. 7 releases the rear traveling lock from its right clip. The 
gunner replaces the socket wrench in the tool box. 



STANDING GUN DRILL— SIX INCH 77 

19. TO SHIFT THE HOWITZER FROM THE FIRING TO THE 
TRAVELING POSITION 

SHIFT TO TRAVELING POSITION: The gunner releases 
the rear traveling lock from its front clip, and swings it to No. 7, 
who fastens it in its right clip; traverses the piece until the azi- 
muth is at the middle of the scale; engages the pawls, elevates 
until the traveling lock lug will just clear the front of the travel- 
ing lock when the howitzer is retracted and directs the shifting 
of the howitzer from the firing to the traveling position. 

No. 1 procures the necessary wrenches, and assisted by No. 3 
unlocks and removes the cylinder retaining ring; after the how- 
itzer has been retracted, replaces the retaining ring, and assists 
the gunner in disengaging the pawls. 

No. 3 assists No. 1 in unlocking and removing the retaining 
ring, replaces the wrenches; procures waste and oil; cleans and 
oils the guide rails and gun slides; and replaces the waste and 
oiler. 

Nos. 2 and 6 attach the retracting apparatus to the howitzer, 
and No. 6 procures the shifting bar. 

Assisted by the gunner, if necessary, No. 2 operates the re- 
tracting apparatus until the traveling lock lug is above the rear 
traveling lock; removes the retracting tongs from the lug, and 
secures the retracting apparatus. 

No. 6 places the shifting bar under the breech in front of the 
traveling lock lug, the flattened end of the bar resting on the left 
flask; Nos. 6, 7 and 8 man N the bar, and support the breech while 
the gunner operates the elevating, and, if necessary, the travers- 
ing mechanisms until the howitzer rests in the rear of the travel- 
ing lock. 

No. 1 operates the pawl handle while the gunner operates the 
elevating mechanism until the rockers are clear of the pawls. 

Nos. 7 and 8 use the bar to support the breech while No. 6 
inserts the locking pin. 

No. 6 replaces the shifting bar. Nos. 1 and 3, assisted by the 
gunner or No. 2, replace the breech cover. 



78 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE 

GUN SQUAD— SIX INCH 
1. TO PREPARE FOR ACTION 

The carriages being in position limbered or unlimbered: 
PREPARE FOR ACTION. 

Each member of the gun squad performs his duties in the order 
given below: 

Gunner: (a) Removes the hood from the sight bar; 

(6) Removes the sight shank from its case and places the 
sight shank in the sight standard, setting the range at 3000 in 
zone 3, the elevation level scale at 300 and the peep sight deflec- 
tion at zero, in the absence of any command to the contrary; 

(c) Takes the panoramic sight from No. 2 and places the sight 
in its seat, making sure that the sight is clamped and that the 
deflection is set at zero; 

(d) 'Assisted by No. 3, raises and fastens the top shield; 

(e) Operates the traversing and elevating gear; 
(J) Seats himself in the gunner's seat. 

No. 1: (a) Assisted by No. 3 removes the breech cover if it is 
in place and throws it to the right rear of the trail; 

(b) Equips himself with a wiping cloth and a lanyard, slinging 
the lanyard over his right shoulder and hooking the ends to- 
gether under his left arm; 

(c) Operates the breech mechanism, examines the breech block 
bore, and chamber, cleaning any parts requiring it, leaving the 
breech open except when the gun is loaded; 

(d) Seats himself on the trail seat. 

No. 2: (a) Procures the panoramic sight and hands it to the 
gunner; 

(&) Assisted by No. 6 lowers the apron of the piece; 

(c) Distributes tow or waste to the cannoneers; 

(d) Takes his post at the caisson limber. 
No. 3: (a) Removes the muzzle cover; 

(b) Equips himself with a fuse setter, slinging the case strap 
over his left shoulder and under his right arm; 

(c) Assists the gunner in raising the top shield; 

(d) Removes the fuse setter from its case and sets it, corrector 60, 
zone 3, range 3000, in the absence of a command to the contrary. 

(e) Takes his post, fuse setter in hand. 






GUN SQUAD— SIX INCH 79 



No. 4: (a) Assisted by No. 5 lowers the apron of the caisson 
and opens the caisson chest; 

(b) Assisted by No. 5, removes the loading barrows from their 
brackets; 

(c) Takes the upper loading barrow, extends its handles, and 
stands it on the ground against the caisson limber wheel between 
the chest and the wheel farthest from the piece, tray stop of 
the barrow down and convex side of the tray next to the wheel; 

(d) Draws from the caisson chest a cartridge case carrier, 
opens it, and lays it on the ground under and parallel to the bot- 
tom edge of the lower chest door; 

(e) Assists No. 5 to open the caisson limber; 
(/) Takes his post. 

No. 5: (a) Assists No. 4 in lowering the apron of the caisson; 
(b) Assists No. 4 in removing the loading barrows from their 
brackets; 

(c) Takes the lower loading barrow, extends its handles, and 
stands it on the ground against the caisson wheel between the 
chest and the wheel farthest from the piece, tray stop of the 
barrow down and convex side of the tray next the wheel; 

(d) Unfastens the shot tongs of the caisson and places them 
above the upper chest door, the ends of the tong handles under 
the chest door handle on the side farthest from the piece, tongs 
resting on the edge of the door, handles extending to the front; 

(e) Assists No. 4 to open the caisson limber; 

(/) Unfastens the shot tongs of the caisson limber and places 
them on the limber door, as'prescribed for the caisson tongs on the 
caisson door; 

(g) Takes his post. 

No 6: (a) Assists No. 2 to lower the apron of the piece; 

(b) Prepares the rammer for use and lays in on the ground, head 
resting on the breech cover 2 yards in rear of the ends of the hand- 
spikes, staff extended to the rear; 

(c) Takes his post. 

No. 7: (a) Procures the necessary tools and assists No. 8 in 
digging a trench for the trial, if ordered; 

(b) Takes his post. 

In a caisson section at the command prepare for action, Nos. 
4, 5 and 6 of the first caisson and Nos. 4, 5, 6 and 7 of the second 



80 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE 

caisson perform the duties prescribed for Nos. 4, 5, 6 and 7 of a 
gun section, so far as they relate to the preparation of their 
caisson and its limber for action. 

The cannoneers report to their chief of section if any of the 
parts of the materiel are out of order. 

After firing the diaphragms are stored with the empty car- 
tridge cases and the unused bags of powder are destroyed. 

TO REMOVE THE LOADING BARROWS 

The piece being in the firing position and unlimbered, to re- 
move the loading barrows: No. 4 stands on the left and No. 5 
on the right side of the trail, facing it; No. 4 removes the loading 
barrow pin, grasps the left forward handle supports of both 
barrows with the left hand, and grasps the left rear handle 
supports similarly with the right hand. In the same manner 
No. 5 grasps the right forward and rear handle supports with 
his right and left hands respectively; together they turn the 
barrows until they are clear of the brackets; No. 4 moving his 
hands to the rear and No. 5 his to the front; No. 4 lowers and 
No. 5 raises the right hand; the barrows are turned slightly and 
lifted clear of the trail. 

The carriages limbered, may be prepared for action before 
reaching the firing position. The duties of the cannoneers are 
the same as at the carriages unlimbered; except that the breech 
is closed; the firing pin is released; the panoramic sight is left 
in its case; the aprons are not lowered; the loading barrows, 
cartridge-case carriers, the breech, muzzle and sight bar covers 
are fastened to the carriage and the caisson and caisson limbers 
are not opened. 

Immediately after establishing the carriages in position the 
preparation for action is completed without command and the 
cannoneers take their posts for serving the piece. 

If prepare for action has not been given before establishing 
the carriages in firing position, that command is habitually given 
by each chief of section as soon as the carriages have been unlim- 
bered and established. The instructor may, however, caution do 
not prepare for action when he wishes to exercise the personnel in 
limbering and unlimbering only or in the details of preparation 
for action. 



GUN SQUAD— SIX INCH 81 

POSTS OF THE CANNONEERS, CARRIAGES UNLIMBERED 
AND PREPARED FOR ACTION 

The same as when unlimbered and not prepared for action, 
except that the gunner and No. i are seated astride the trail 
seats on their respective sides facing the howitzer. During the 
service of the piece Nos. 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 and 8 take such positions 
as best to insure orderly and rapid service of the piece. 

[ 2. TO FIRE 

Duties of the Gunner in Detail 
The duties of the gunner in the service of the piece are: 

1. To set the deflection. 

2. To apply the deflection difference, if any. 

3. To set off the site. 

4. To set the range on the sight shank. 

5. To level the cross level bubble. 

6. To give the direction to the piece, 

7. To give the elevation to the piece. 

8. To call ready when the piece is accurately laid. 

9. To move his head out of the way of the sight before the 
piece is fired. 

10. To give the command to fire the piece. 

11. To measure a deflection. 

12. To measure a site. 

Duties of No. i in Detail 

1. To set and release the brake. 

2. To disengage the pawls. 

3. To open the breech. 

4. To close the breech. 

5. To engage the pawls. 

6. To fire the piece. 

Duties of No. 2 in Detail 

1. To ram the projectile. 

2. To receive the cartridge case. 

Duties of No. 3 in Detail 

1. Assists at the loading barrow\ 

2. In time fire, sets the fuze setter. 

6 



82 FIELD ARTILLERYMANS' GUIDE 

3. In time fire, sets the fuze. 

4. Assists No. 4. 

Duties of No. 4 in Detail 

1. Procures the shot tongs. 

2. Indicates the projectile to be used. 

3. Draws the projectile from the chest. 

4. Replaces the shot tongs. 

5. In time fire, removes waterproof hood and safety wire. 

6. Secures a powder charge. 

7. Removes the diaphragm. 

8. Prepares the charge for zone 1 or 2, if necessary, 

9. Inserts charge in breech. 

Duties of Nos. 5 and 6 in Detail 

1. Turn the trail handspikes back on the trail as soon as the 
piece has been given its approximate direction. 

2. Procure a loading barrow. 

3. Receive the projectile. 

4. In time fire, assist in the preparation of the projectile. 

5. Transport the projectile to the breech. 

6. Prepare to receive another projectile. 

Duties of Nos. 7 and 8 in Detail 

The duties of Nos. 7 and 8 in the service of the piece are: 
No. 7 performs the duties of No. 5 and No. 8 the duties of No. 6, 
using the second loading barrow when ammunition is to be drawn 
from the caisson limber. When specially ordered Nos. 7 and 8 
may be required to alternate with Nos. 5 and 6 in serving 
projectiles. 

Upon going into action Nos. 7 and 8 may be utilized for the 
construction of concealment for the carriages, digging the trail 
trench, etc., etc., Nos. 5 and 6 carrying all the projectiles if the 
battery is actually firing. The work is done under the immediate 
supervision of the executive or his assistant. 

3. TO RESUME THE ORDER FOR MARCHING 

The carriages being prepared for action, limbered or unlim- 
bered, to resume the order for marching: MARCH ORDER, 



GUN SQUAD— SIX INCH 83 

Each member of the gun squad performs his duties in the order 
given below: 

Gunner: (a) Hands the panoramic sight to No. 2; 

(b) Removes and replaces the sight shank; 

(c) Assisted by No. 3 lowers the top shield; 

(d) Secures the hood on the sight bar; 

(e) Brings his piece to the center of traverse; 
(0 Takes his post. 

No. 1: (a) Releases the brake of the piece, if set; 

(b) Replaces the lanyard in the trail box; 

(c) Sees that the piece is unloaded, closes the breech; 

(d) Assisted by No. 3 replaces the breech cover if ordered; 

(e) Takes his post. 

No. 2: (a) Takes the panoramic sight from the gunner and 
replaces it in its box; 

(b) Assisted by No. 6 raises and secures the apron of the piece; 

(c) Takes his post. 

No. 3: (a) Replaces the muzzle cover; 

(b) Assists the gunner in lowering and fastening the top shield; 

(c) Replaces the fuze setter in the trail box; 

(d) Takes his post. 

No. 4: (a) Returns the upper loading barrow to the howitzer 
and, assisted by No. 5, replaces both barrows in their brackets; 

(b) Assisted by No. 5, replaces cartridge cases, if ordered, 
replaces cartridge case carriers in the caisson chest and the 
caisson shot tongs in their fastenings, closes the caisson doors, 
raises and secures the apron of the caisson; 

(c) Assisted by No. 5, replaces cartridge cases, if ordered, 
replaces cartridge-case carriers in the limber chest and limber 
shot tongs in their fastenings, closes the limber doors ; 

(d) Takes his post. 

No. 5: (a) Returns the lower loading barrow to the howitzer 
and assists No. 4 to replace both barrows in their brackets; 

(b) Assists No. 4 to raise and secure the apron of the caisson, 
to replace the cartridge cases, if ordered, and to replace the car- 
tridge-case carriers in the caisson chest, to replace the caisson 
shot tongs in their fastenings and to close the caisson doors; 

(c) Assists No. 4 to replace cartridge cases, if ordered, to re- 
place cartridge-case carriers in the caisson limber chest, to replace 



84 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE 

the limber shot tongs in their fastenings and to close the limber 
doors; 

(d) Takes his post. 

No. 6: (a) Assists No. 2 in raising and securing the apron of the 
piece ; 

(b) Unscrews the rammer staff and secures it in its fasten- 
ings; 

(c) Takes his post. 

No. 7: Has no routine duties. 

No. 8: Has no routine duties. 

In a caisson section at the command march order, Nos. 4, 5 
and 6 of the first caisson and Nos. 4, 5, 6 and 7 of the second 
caisson perform the duties prescribed for Nos. 4, 5, 6 and 7 of a 
gun section so far as they relate to the preparation of their 
limber and caisson for march order. 

TO REPLACE THE LOADING BARROWS 

The piece being in the firing position and unlimbered, to replace 
the loading barrows. No. 4 folds the handles of his barrow and 
carries it to the left side of the trail; holds it across the trail, 
bottom of the barrow up and tray stop to the rear, in order for 
No. 5 to grasp the handle supports; similarly No. 5 carries his 
barrow to the right side of the trail and holds it below No. 4*s 
barrow, for No. 4 to grasp the handle supports; both cannoneers 
then grasp both barrows as previously described. No. 4 lowers 
and No. 5 raises the right hand; the barrows are turned slightly, 
lowered between the flasks of the trail, and turned again so 
that the left forward handle supports are just in rear of their 
bracket in the proper opening of the left reinforce plate; No. 4 
raises and No. 5 lowers the right hand, the barrows are turned, 
No. 4 moving his hands to the front and No. 5 his to the rear; 
and the barrows are seated in their bracket one at a time, be- 
ginning with the lower one. No. 4 replaces the loading barrow 
pin. 

If it is intended to resume the fire but in another position, so 
that the limbering of the carriages is necessitated, the command 
march order need not be given. At the command for limbering, 
the carriages are placed in the order described. 



ANTI-GAS 

WHAT SHOULD THE SOLDIER KNOW ABOUT GAS ATTACKS 
AND THE USE OF HIS MASK? 

The first thing for the soldier to know about gas attacks is that 
ignorance and carelessness may mean death to him. If the sol- 
dier is gassed and is not killed outright, he will sutler hours, days, 
and maybe, weeks of horrible agony. He should remember that 
his gas mask is his only protection. It is an absolute safeguard 
against all known forms of gas attacks. 
Q. What must a soldier do when "gas alarm" devices are used 

to warn against an oncoming gas cloud attack? 
A. Put mask on in shortest time possible. 
Q. Is the mask an absolute safeguard against the soldier being 

gassed, if it is put on properly? 
A. It is. 

Q. What kind of gases are used? 

A. Lachrymatory or tear producing gases, which irritate the 
mucous membranes of the eye, causing profuse weeping and 
swelling of the eyelids. This gas also causes an irritation of the 
mucous membranes of the nose and mouth to the extent that 
vomiting may be produced. Tear-producing gases tempora- 
rily blind the soldier. The effect of these tear-producing gases 
wear off in from three to four hours. The soldier must bear 
in mind that this kind of gas frequently remains in the air 
for some time and his eyes may become red even if there is a 
very slight amount of it present. After a cloud of this kind 
has passed, the eyes should be bathed frequently with cold 
water. Benzyl bromide is the chief tear-producing gas used 
at present. 

Asphyxiating gases are far more severe in their action. 
Their strength can be realized when it is known that a dilu- 
tion of one part of chlorine or bromine in iooo parts of air 
is fatal, while a mixture of i part of phosgene to 25,000 
parts of air will destroy the life of the soldier who inhales it. 

85 



86 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE 

These gases act to a lesser degree on the eye than do the 
lachrymatory gases, but their action is particularly virulent 
on the membranes of the respiratory tract, which they cause 
to swell rapidly, and finally destroy. The result of inhaling 
any one of these gases is oedema of the lungs, or water in the 
lungs, accompanied by persistent coughing and spitting of 
blood, then creating difficulty in breathing, the soldier 
becoming blue and struggling for breath. Death may be 
almost instantaneous, or it may be postponed for several 
days, the sufferer in the meantime not being able to eat any- 
thing and undergoing great agony. Many of the cases in 
which recovery does take place develop later a chronic disease 
of the lungs. The soldier's only protection against these 
lachrymatory and asphyxiating gases is his mask. Paraly- 
zant gases produce instant death by paralyzing the central 
nervous system. Prussic acid is a type of the gas used. One 
part of this gas to 10,000 parts of air will kill instantly. This 
gas is used only in gas shells. Again, is it necessary for the 
soldier to understand that his mask is his only protection 
against instant death. 

Q. Are lachrymatory and asphyxiating gases ever used together 
in a gas cloud attack? 

A. They are. And it is necessary for the soldier to bear this in 
mind and not attempt to remove his mask under any circum- 
stances during an attack. He must never remove it until 
commanded to do so by his superior officers. Removal of his 
mask, or even the mouthpiece, for the fraction of a minute — 
in event that the soldier inhales outside air — may prove fatal 
or cause terrible suffering. 

Q. Is it possible for a soldier to make a gas attack with grenades 
and bombs, or may gas bombs be thrown from a trench 
mortar? 

A. Yes. Hand grenades of various kinds made of glass and 
iron, and containing a quantity of gas-producing liquid are 
used in trench warfare. Iron bombs with a bursting charge 
of black powder and containing gas liquid are also used in 
trench mortars. 

Q. May gas shells be used when the wind is blowing in any direc- 
tion? 



ANTI-GAS 87 

A. Yes. Unlike cloud gas, gas shells can be used in wind 
blowing in any direction. The strength of the wind, how- 
ever, has considerable influence on the effective use of the 
shells. A wind of seven miles per hour or less is as high a wind 
as is practicable for their effective use. 

Q. How is a gas cloud attack brought about? 

A. The method of making a gas cloud attack is entirely depend- 
ent upon the direction of the wind. The gas is carried up to 
the trenches compressed in steel cylinders. These steel 
cylinders are buried in the bottom of the trench and connected 
with pipes leading over the parapet. When the valves of the 
cylinders are opened the gas escapes with a hissing sound, 
which, on a still night, can frequently be heard at a consider- 
able distance. It mixes with the air and is carried by the 
wind towards the opposing trenches, spreading out as it goes 
forward. A continuous wave of gas and air is thus formed, 
the color of which may vary. In a very dry atmosphere 
it may be almost transparent and slightly greenish in color, 
while in damp weather it forms a white cloud. The gas may 
also be mixed with smoke of any color. A cloud attack can 
only take place when there is a steady but not too strong 
wind blowing from the enemy's lines toward our own; a 
wind between four and eight miles an hour is the most likely 
condition. An eight-mile wind will carry the gas cloud about 
as quickly as a man walks rapidly. An eight-mile wind will 
carry the gas ioo yards in twenty seconds. Gas attacks may 
occur at any time of the day, but are most likely to be made 
during the night or in the early morning. Gas attacks have 
been made on a front varying from one to five miles; their 
effects at points up to eight miles behind the front trenches 
have been sufficiently severe to make it necessary to wear 
masks for the entire distance. 

Q. What is the tactical value of a gas shell attack? 

A. Gas used in shells has a much more definite military value 
than gas used in clouds. The gas shell has, in fact, become 
one of the most important weapons in modern warfare, and at 
present S3H per cent, of the shells used on the western front 
are gas shells. 
They fulfill a double purpose. They are excellent in forming 



88 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE 

a barrage to prevent the bringing up of supplies and reinforce- 
ments and they are most excellent in silencing artillery posi- 
tions. Gas is used in shells of both heavy and light field 
howitzers; the 5.9 minnewerfer is the shell most used by the 
Germans. 

Q. How may gas shells be recognized? 

A. (a) Many gas shells make a peculiar wobbling noise as they 
come thru the air. This is due to their being filled with a 
liquid instead of a solid, (b) The noise of the burst is very 
small and might be mistaken for a " blind." There is a 
difference, however. And after hearing a few gas shells 
burst, one can recognize them, (c) Most gas shells on 
bursting form a dense white cloud which hangs together in a 
peculiar way and is carried along by the wind. This is the 
easiest sign by which the gas shell can be recognized. The 
density of the cloud varies with the weather conditions. It 
is greatest when the air is damp and least when it is dry. 

Q. How are warnings of shell attacks given? 

A. Gas shell attacks are local in their effects and the gas does 
not spread to so great a distance as does the gas cloud. 
Therefore, the character of the "gas alarm" for gas shells is 
different from that for "gas cloud." In the case of gas shells, 
every man must be his own sentry and be constantly on the 
lookout for that form of attack to give the alarm as soon as he 
detects the gas. For this reason, a local gas shell alarm must 
be arranged for each individual unit. It must be distinct 
from the cloud gas alarm and every man in the unit must 
know what it means. It is of the utmost importance that 
every man within 300 yards of the first gas shell or trench 
mortar gas bomb get his mask on at once. Frequently gas 
shells do not burst at the commencement of a bombardment, 
but are used intermittently. For this reason, when anyone 
realizes that gas bombs are being fired, he must give the 
alarm instantly. This can be done in two ways, (a) By 
men, who are not in the gas at the moment or may have 
gotten their masks completely adjusted, shouting "GAS 
SHELLS " as loudly as possible, (b) By the prearranged sig- 
nal for the unit being given by the sentry or whoever has 
first realized that gas shells are being fired. On this alarm 



ANTI-GAS 89 

may depend the safety of those men who are in dugouts or in 
other parts of the position, who would otherwise not get 
warning. 

Q. What protective measures should be used during gas attacks? 

A. There should be as little movement and talking in the trenches 
as possible. The soldier must be made to realize that, with 
the gas now used by the enemy, the strict observance of this 
rule may be essential for his personal safety. When an 
attack is in progress, all bodies of troops, all transports on the 
move, and all working parties should cease working until the 
gas cloud has passed. If a relief is coming on, units should 
stand fast, as far as possible, until the gas cloud has passed. 
Supports and parties bringing up bombs should only be 
allowed to move when the tactical situation demands it. 
If troops in support are in reserve lines of trenches and remain 
in or come into dugouts, they must continue to wear their 
gas masks. N.C.O.'s must on no account remove of open 
their masks to give orders. Mouthpieces may be removed 
when it is necessary to speak, but must be immediately 
replaced. The method of speaking when the mask is on is: 
Before removing the mouthpiece take a deep breath and 
shout the order while the breath is being exhaled. If the 
order is a long one, it may be given in jerks, the mouthpiece 
being placed in the mouth and a deep breath taken between 
the jerks. Men must always be on the lookout to help each 
other in case a mask is damaged. W r hen a man is wounded, 
he must be watched to see that he does not remove his mask; 
if necessary, his hands should be tied. 

Men must be warned that, if they are slightly " gassed " before 
adjusting their masks, they must not remove them; the effect 
will wear off. After the cloud has passed and the trenches 
have been cleared of the gas by the apparatus provided for 
the purpose, the Non-Commissioned Officers in charge of each 
trench section will assure themselves that the trench is free 
from gas by raising their masks slightly and will then issue the 
order to take off masks. MEN WILL ON NO ACCOUNT 
TAKE OFF THEIR MASKS UNTIL THE ORDER TO DO 
SO HAS BEEN GIVEN. Dugouts and bombproofs must 



90 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE 

be entered with caution, even after the trenches are cleared, 
as gas frequently remains in them for some hours. 

Q. What action is taken in the trenches on "gas alarm"? 

A. (a) Masks must be put on immediately by all ranks, (b) 
Men in trenches, dugouts and mine shafts must be roused, 
officers and artillery observation posts and all employed 
men warned, (c) Artillery support be called for by com- 
pany commanders by means of prearranged signals, (d) 
Warn regimental headquarters and troops in rear, (e) All 
ranks stand at arms in the front trenches and elsewhere, 
when the tactical situation demands. (J) Blanket curtains 
to be adjusted and protective shields be let down and care- 
fully fixed, (g) All movement to cease except where 
necessary. 

Q. What action should be taken in billets and back areas? 

A. (a) Men in cellars or houses must be aroused, (b) The 
blanket curtains of protected cellars, etc., to be let down and 
fixed in position, (c) Masks to be put on immediately the 
gas is apparent. 

Q. How is a "gas alarm" warning given? 

A. For the purpose of giving the "gas alarm" the British use a 
strombos horn, which can be heard at very long distances. 
This instrument is a large horn worked by compressed air and 
comes in a box with two cylinders of compressed air and a rub- 
ber connecting tube. They are placed at intervals of not 
greater than 400 yards along the front line and at such points 
behind the front as is required to insure transmission of the 
warning. In addition to the strombos horn, bells and gongs 
made from shell cases, suspended rails, etc., are used. The 
buzzer wire is frequently used to send warning to the rear. 
No reliance can be placed upon bugles, whistles or such 
devices that require the use of the lungs. 

Q. What is meant by the "wind dangerous" period? 

A. " Wind dangerous " is ordered when the wind is in a dangerous 
quarter, no matter what the strength of the wind may be. 
At the same time, it is advisable that the N.C.O. be able to 
estimate the strength of the wind, as that has some bearing 
on the likelihood of an attack. The Germans seem to prefer 
a wind of from four to twelve miles per hour. It is during 



ANTI-GAS 91 

a "wind dangerous" period that gas cloud attacks are 
usually made. 

Q. What precautions are necessary during a "wind dangerous" 
period? 

A. (a) All masks should be carefully inspected and the inspec- 
tions repeated daily. Steps must be taken to ascertain that 
all gas alarm appliances are in position and in good order. 
(b) All ranks within one mile of the front line must carry their 
satchels in the "alert" position. During "wind dangerous" 
the chin strap of the helmet or the hat must on no account be 
worn under the chin, as it will impede the rapid adjustment 
of the mask, (c) A sentry should be posted at each strombos 
horn or other' alarm device and instructed in its use. All 
working parties should have a sentry posted to give instant 
warning of a gas attack. A sentry should be posted to every 
large house or group of houses and also each Headquarters 
Signal Office and each independent body of men. Arrange- 
ments must be made by the officer in charge of the trench for 
warning the artillery observation post officers when in the 
trench. Commanders of units in billets within eight miles 
of the front line trenches must organize a system of giving 
the alarm and rousing all men in cellars and houses. At 
night sentries should have at least two men within reach of 
them, so that the alarm can be spread rapidly, (d) When a 
gas attack is probable, men in front trenches should sleep on 
the fire step instead of in dugouts. Men sleeping in rearward 
lines, or in works where they are allowed to take off their 
equipment, must sleep with their satchels on their person. 
No soldier is permitted to remove his gas mask satchel for 
any reason whatsoever while in the front trenches or within 
eight miles of the front line trenches, (e) Company gas 
N.C.O.'s will report to company headquarters in readi- 
ness to assist the company commander should a gas attack 
occur. 

Q. What is the best method for the soldier to pursue to protect 
himself against gas attacks? 

A. His gas mask is his only protection. The soldier must feel 
absolute confidence in his mask. It is the only thing that will 
pull him thru a gas attack successfully. He must remem- 



92 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE 

ber that any carelessness may cause him his life. He is 
absolutely safe as long as his mask is adjusted properly. 

Q. Will the soldier be provided with an auxiliary mask in case his 
respirator mask should become damaged? 

A. Yes; he will be issued two masks, one of which will be a res- 
pirator and will be contained in a satchel provided for it. 
The second mask will be similar to the one now used by the 
French, and is called the "M-2." This mask is only good 
for three or four hours in a gas attack, while the respirator 
is good for twelve to eighteen hours, according to the strength 
of the gas used. 

Q. Are the masks made in different sizes? 

A. Yes; they are made to fit any face. And when a mask is 
issued to a soldier, it is the duty of his commanding officer 
to see that it fits properly, and that the size required by him 
be written on his service record. 

GAS MASK DRILL 

Practice A. — Adjustment of the respirator satchel in the 
"alert" position. On the command "GAS ALERT/' hang the 
satchel around the neck with the press buttons next to the 
body. With the right hand seize the satchel by the leather tab, 
with the left hand seize the sling by the brass button and clip 
this into the leather tab; undo the press buttons, closing the 
flap ; tuck in the slack of the sling into the left hand compartment 
so that it lies under the mask. The length of whip cord will 
then be withdrawn from the right hand compartment; passed 
thru the ring on the right of the satchel and carried around 
the waist to the ring on the left, where it is fastened. The press 
button closing the flap will be left undone, but the flap will be 
put in condition to keep the respirator from getting wet. 

Practice B. — Drill by numbers to obtain correct adjustment 
of the mask. 

(i) On the command "One," press down both thumbs be- 
tween the satchel and the body and open the satchel flap; imme- 
diately seize the mask with the right hand, the metal breathing 
tube just outside the mask being in the palm of the hand, the 
thumb and first finger grasping the wire frame of the nose clip. 



AXTI-GAS 93 

(2) On the command "Two," bring the mask smartly out of the 
satchel and hold it in both hands, with all the fingers outside 
and around the binding; the two thumbs inside, pointing inward 
and upward under the elastic; at the same time throw the chin 
well forward, ready to enter the mask opposite the nose clip. 

(3) On the command " Three," bring the mask forward, digging 
the chin into it and with the same motion bring the elastic bands 
back over the crown of the head to the full extent of the retain- 
ing tape, using the thumbs. (4) On the command "Four," 
seize the metal breathing tube outside the mask, the thumb on 
the right, the fingers on the left, all pointing toward the face; 
push the rubber mouthpiece well into the mouth and pull it 
forward until the rim of the mouthpiece lies between the teeth 
and the lips, and the two rubber clips are held by the teeth. (5) 
On the command "Five," adjust the nose clip to the nose, using 
the thumb and first three fingers of the left hand; come smartly 
to attention. If, after wearing for a long time, the pressure of 
the nose clip becomes unbearable, it may be relieved for a few 
moments by taking off the pressure by removing the clip, bearing 
in mind that, under no circumstances, must the soldier breathe 
thru his nose. 

To Remove Masks. — It must be seen that, when the masks 
are removed, this is done without strain on the face piece or the 
elastic. On the command "Take off Masks," insert the fingers 
of the left hand under the mask at the chin bending the head 
forward, at the same time removing the mask with an upward 
motion of the left hand. "After all drills, the mouthpiece must 
be wiped dry, folded correctly, and put away in such a manner 
that the rubber valve is not bent. It would be well to wash 
mouthpieces occasionally. 



CALISTHENICS 

By ist Lt. S. A. Rowland, Jr. 

Q. How are calisthenic exercises classified? 

A. Neck, shoulder, arm, trunk, leg and combination exercises. 

Q. How many kinds of commands are used in giving the 
exercises? 

A. Two; the preparatory commands, such as arms thrust, 
indicating the movement to be executed; and the com- 
mand of execution, such as RAISE, which causes the 
movement to be executed. 

Q. How are the men assembled and placed in position for 
calisthenics? 

A. They FALL IN, COUNT OFF and TAKE DISTANCE. 

Q. In what respects do the commands AT EASE and REST, 
as herein referred to, differ from those ordinarily executed? 

A. During these exercises, men will not be permitted to as- 
sume awkward or slouching positions. During AT EASE 
and REST the head and body will be erect and the weight of 
the body will be supported equally by both legs, both feet 
being firmly planted on the ground. The hands (knuckles, 
if desired) will be placed on the hips or clasped behind the 
back. The legs may be spread apart if desired, but the 
weight of the body must not be supported by either leg 
entirely. 

Q. What is a starting position? 

A. An advantageous position from which to start an exercise. 

Q. Name the starting positions, and the appropriate com- 
mands to execute them from the position of attention. 

A. i. i. Arms forward. 2. RAISE. 

2. 1. Arms sideward. 2. RAISE. 

3. 1. Arms upward. 2. RAISE. 

4. 1. Arms backward. 2. CROSS. 

5. 1. Arms to thrust. 2. RAISE. 

6. 1. Hands on hips. 2. PLACE. 

7. 1. Forearms vertical. 2. RAISE. 

94 



CALISTHENICS 95 

8. i. Hands on shoulders. 2. PLACE. 

9. 1. Fingers in rear of head. 2. LACE. 

10. 1. To squatting position, hands on hips or hands on 
ground. 2. BEND. 

11. 1. To side straddle position, hands on hips or with arms 
vertical. 2. HOP. 

Q. At what commands is the position of attention resumed 
from the starting positions? 

A. From Nos. 1 to 9, inclusive: 1. Arms. 2. DOWN. 
No. 10: 1. To the position of attention. 2. RISE. 
No. n: 1. To the position of attention. 2. HOP. 

Q. After the men are in a starting position and the exercise 
has been indicated, what commands are necessary to cause 
the execution of the movements? 

A. 1. Ready. 2. EXERCISE. One, two; one, two; or one, 
two, three, four, etc. 

Q. How is the exercise discontinued? 

A. By the command HALT. 

Q. How are the men warned that HALT is to be given, so that 
they may all stop at the same instant? 

A. By a rising inflection on the count "one" immediately 
preceding HALT, except in a two-count exercise, when the 
rising inflection is placed on the next to the last "one"; 
• i.e., "one," two, one. HALT. 

Q. What are the commands for the breathing exercise? 

A. 1. Breathing exercise. 2. INHALE. 3. EXHALE. At 
the command INHALE the arms are stretched forward 
and overhead, or stretched sideward and overhead, so 
that the palms of the hands are turned toward the body, 
and, at the same time, the lungs are inflated. At the 
command EXHALE the arms are lowered to the sides and 
the air expelled from the lungs. 

NECK EXERCISES 

1. 1. Arms to thrust. 2. RAISE. 3. Turn head right (or 
left), and then back to position. 4. Ready. 5. EX- 
ERCISE. Executed in two counts. 

2. 1. Arms to thrust. 2. RAISE. 3. Bend head forward 
and backward. Two counts. 



96 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE 

3. 1. Arms to thrust. 2. RAISE. 3. Bend head to right 
and left. Two counts. 

4. 1. Arms to thrust. 2. RAISE. 3. Bend head forward, 
right, backward, left. Circle exercise in four counts. 

SHOULDER EXERCISES 

1. 1. Arms to thrust. 2. RAISE. 3. Raise shoulders and 
resume position. Two counts. 

2. 1. Arms to thrust. 2. RAISE. 3. Move shoulders 
forward and back to position. Two counts. 

3. 1. Arms to thrust. 2. RAISE. 3. Move shoulders for- 
ward, upward, backward and downward. Four counts. 

4. 1. Curl shoulders forward. Two counts. 

5. 1. Hands on shoulders. 2. PLACE. 3. Move elbows 
forward and back to position. Two counts. 

ARM EXERCISES 

1. 1. Arms to thrust. 2. RAISE. 3. Thrust arms forward 
and back to position. Two counts. 

2. 1. Hands on shoulders. 2. PLACE. 3. Strike arms 
sideward and back to position. Two counts. 

3. 1. Arms to thrust. 2. RAISE. 3. Thrust arms forward ; 
swing them sideward, forward, and back to position. Four 
counts. 

4. 1. Arms to thrust. 2. RAISE. 3. Thrust arms forward, 
sideward, upward and downward returning to "arms to 
thrust" after each movement. Executed in eight counts. 

5. 1. Forearms vertical. 2. RAISE. 3. Extend right arm 
up and the left arm down on the count one; resume fore- 
arms vertical at count two ; right arm down, left arm up, on 
count three; forearms vertical at count four. Executed 
in four counts, beginning slowly and gradually increasing 
to a rapid cadence. 

6. 1. From position of attention, arm exercise in eight counts, 
as follows: Forearms vertical on counts 1, 3, 5 and 7. 
Similar to foregoing exercise excepting in that the position 
of attention is resumed at counts 4 and 8. Extend the 
arms — right up, left down, at count two; left arm up, and 
right arm down, at count six. 



CALISTHENICS 97 



TRUNK EXERCISES 



i. i. Hands on hips. 2. PLACE. 3. Quarter bend trunk 
forward and back to position. Two counts. 

2. 1. Hands on hips. 2. PLACE. 3. Half bend trunk 
forward and back to position. Two counts. 

3. 1. Fingers in rear of head. 2. LACE. 3. Full bend 
trunk forward. Two counts. 

4. 1. Handsonhips. 2. PLACE. 3. Bend trunk backward. 

5. 1. Handsonhips. 2. PLACE. 3. Bend trunk sideward, 
right or left. 

6. 1. Hands on hips. 2. PLACE. 3. Twist trunk side- 
ward, right or left. 

7. 1. Hands on hips. 2. PLACE. 3. Bend trunk ob- 
liquely forward, right or left. 

8. 1. Hands on hips. 2. PLACE. 3. Bend trunk forward 
and backward. 

9. 1. Hands on hips. 2. PLACE. 3. Circle trunk right or 
left. 

LEG EXERCISES 

1. 1. Hands on hips. 2. PLACE 3. Quarter bend knees. 

2. 1. Arms backward. 2. CROSS. 3. Half bend knees. 

3. 1. Hands on hips. 2. PLACE. 3. Full bend knees. 

4. 1. Arms to thrust. 2. RAISE. 3. Extend leg forward. 

5. 1. Hands on hips. 2. PLACE. 3. Raise knee. 
Back to position in each exercise. 

Two counts for each exercise. 

COMBINATION EXERCISES 

1. 1. Arms forward overhead. 2. RAISE. 3. Swing 
arms downward and upward. Two counts; arms ex- 
tended full length; palms inward. 

2. 1. Arms sideward overhead. 2. RAISE. 3. Fingers. 
4. LACE. 5. Bend trunk sideward, right and left. Four 

counts. 

3. 1. Hop to side straddle; swing arms overhead laterally, and 
recover position of attention. Two counts. 

4. 1. Hands on hips. 2. PLACE. 3. Full bend knees and 
extend arms sideward. Arms are extended vigorously to 
7 



98 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE 

the side, palms down; execute movements at a moderate 
cadence; breathe naturally. Two counts. 

5. Raise arms, and right or left leg forward; move arms side- 
ward, and leg backward; move arms and leg forward; and 
recover position of attention. Four counts. 

6. 1. Forearms vertical. 2. RAISE. 3. Extend arms up- 
ward and raise on toes; resume vertical position; and 
recover position of attention. Four counts. 

7. 1. Hands on hips. 2. PLACE. 3. Swing right and left 
leg forward, breast high; extend right and left arm for- 
ward horizontally, alternating right and left. Four counts. 

8. 1. To side straddle with arms overhead. 2. HOP. 3. 
Bend trunk forward and backward; swing arms down- 
ward and upward. Two counts. 

9. 1. Arms to thrust. 2. RAISE. 3. Thrust arms side- 
ward' and lunge sideward right and left, alternately. 
Four counts. 

10. 1. Leaning rest in four counts. (Repeat six to eight 
times.) At "one" knees are bent to squatting position, 
hands placed on ground between the knees; at "two" 
the legs are extended backward, body supported by the 
hands and toes, knees straight, hands directly under the 
shoulders, back arched, head up, at "three" the first 
position is resumed; at "four" take the position of atten- 
tion. Execute the movements moderately fast, breathe 
naturally. 
II* 1. To squatting position. 2. BEND. 3. Hands on hips. 
4. PLACE. 5. Balancing the body on one leg, kick out 
alternately to right and left in four counts; to the right on 
count "one," to the left on count "three;" resume starting 
position at counts "two" and "four." Execute at a 
moderate cadence. 

Q. Where can further information concerning these calisthenics 
be obtained. 

A. In the "Manual of Physical Training" by Capt. Koehler, 
published by the Government Printing Office, and sold by 
the Superintendent of Public Documents, Washington, 
D. C, for fifty cents. 





By Capt. R. Fellman 




COMMON CORDAGE KNOTS AND LASHINGS 


The following knots are very useful 


in Artillery Work, and in 


mak: 


Lng quick repairs of bridges that have been partly demol- 


ished: 






i. 


Overhand or thumb knot 


14. 


Bowline on a bight 


2. 


Figure eight 


15. 


Running bowline 


3- 


Square, reef or flat knot 


16. 


Cat's paw 


4- 


Becket bend or single sheet bend 


17. 


Sheepshank 


5. 


Becket bend or double sheet bend 


18. 


Rolling hitch 


6. 


Two half hitches 


19. 


Blackwall hitch 


7. 


Round turn and 2 half hitches 


20. 


Mooring knot 


8. 


Fisherman's bend or anchor knot 


21. 


Single wall knot 


9. 


Clove hitch 


22. 


Crown on wall 


10. 


Timber hitch 


23- 


Thief knot 


11. 


Telegraph hitch 


24. 


Granny 


12. 


Hawser bend 


25. 


Short splice 


13- 


Bowline 


26. 


Long splice 



27^ Eye splice 



LASHINGS 



1. To lash a transom to an upright spar. Fig. 28. 

2. Lashing for a pair of shears. Fig. 29. 

3. To lash three spars together as for a gin or tripod. 



Fig. 30. 



99 



100 



FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE 





Fig. i. — Overhand or thumb 
knot. 



Fig. 



2. — Figure-of- 
eight. 






Fig. 3. — Square, 
reef, or flat knot. 



Fig. 4. — Single sheet 
bend, or single becket 
bend. 



Fig. 5. — Double sheet 
bend, or double becket 
bend. 




Fig. 6. Fig. 7. Fig. 8, 

Fig. 6. — Two half hitches. 
Fig. 7. — Round turn and two half hitches. 
Fig. 8. — Fisherman's bend or anchor knot. 

{From U, S* Engineers' Manual.) 



CORDAGE 



101 




Fig. 9. — Clove hitch. 




Fig, ga. 



Fig. gb. 



Fig. gc. 




Fig. 10. — Timber hitch. 




Fig. 11. — Telegraph hitch. 




Fig. 12. — Hawser bend. 
(From U. S. Engineers* Manual.) 



102 



FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE 




Fig. 14. — Bowline on a bight. 



Fig. 13.— Bowline. 





Fig. 15. — Running bowline. Fig. 16. — Cat's paw, b. 






Fig. 16a— Cat's paw, a. Fig. 17. — Sheep- Fig. 18. — Rolling 

shank. hitch. 

{From U. S. Engineers' Manual.) 



CORDAGE 



103 





Fig. 19. — Blackwall hitch. Fig. 20. — Mooring knot. 





Fig. 21. Fig. 21a. 
Figs. 21 and 21a. — Single 
wall knot. 



Fig. 22. Fig. 22a. 

Figs. 22 and 22a. — Crown on 

wall. 





Fig. 23.— Thief. Fig. 24. — Granny. 

{From U. S. Engineers' Manual.) 



104 



FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE 





Fig. 25.— Short splice. 



Fig. 25a. — Short splice. 




Fig. 256. — Short splice. 




Fig. 26a. — Long splice. 




Fig. 27. Fig. 27a. Fig. 27^. Fig. 27c. 
(From U. S. Engineers 1 Manual.) 



CORDAGE 



105 





Fig. 28. 



Fig. 29. 




Fig. 29a. 




Fig. 30. 
(From U. S. Engineers 1 Manual.) 



106 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE 

QUESTIONS ON CORDAGE 

Q. What is a strand? 

A. A strand is a number of yarns twisted together. 

Q. What are the jaws of a rope? 

A. The jaws are the spaces between the strands of a rope. 

Q. For what is an overhand or thumb knot used? 

A. Used at the end of a rope to prevent unreeving or to prevent 

the end of the rope from slipping thru a block. 
Q. For what is the figure eight used? 
A. Used for the same purpose as the thumb knot. 
Q. For what is the square, reef or flat knot used? 
A. Commonly used for joining two ropes of the same size. 

(a) Why is it tied instead of the thief or granny? 
A. It can be upset by taking one end of the rope and its standing 

part and pulling them in opposite direction. The knot is 

then easily untied. 

(6) How strong is it? 
A. With dry rope it is as strong as the rope, with wet rope it slips 

before the rope breaks. 

(c) Why must you be careful and not tie a thief knot which 

looks very much like a flat knot? 
A. A thief knot will not hold. 
Q. What is a granny? 
A. A knot that looks very much like a square knot but will bind 

and cannot be upset after it has been tightened. 
Q. For what is a single sheet bend or a Becket bend used? 
A. Used for joining two ropes of different sizes and is more 

secure than the reef knot but more difficult to untie. 
Q. For what is the double sheet or Becket bend used? 
A. Used also for joining two ropes of unequal sizes, especially wet 

ones, and is more secure than the single sheet bend. 
Q. What is a half -hitch? 

A. Used to secure the loose end of lashings, etc. 
Q. For what are two half hitches useful? 
A. Especially useful for belaying or making fast the end of a 

rope around its own standing part. The end may be lashed 

down or seized to the standing part, this adds to its security 

and prevents slipping. 
Q. What is a round turn and two half hitches? 



CORDAGE 107 

A. Similar to two half hitches except that you first take a turn 

around the spar or post. 
Q. For what is a fisherman's bend or anchor knot used? 
A. Used for fastening a rope to anchor or ring. 
Q. For what is a clove hitch used? 
A. Generally used in fastening a rope at right angles to a spar 

or at the commencement of a lashing. 
Q. For what is a timber hitch especially used? 
A. Used for hauling and hoisting timbers and spars; it can be 

easily loosed when the strain has been taken off, will not slip 

under a pull. When used for hauling timbers a half -hitch is 

added near the end of the timber. 
Q. For what is a telegraph hitch used? 
A. Used for hoisting a spar or for pulling in a cable. 
Q. Explain the use of a hawser bend? 
A. A hawser bend is used for joining two large cables. Each 

end is seized to its own standing part. 
Q. What knot is used in forming a loop that will not slip? 
A. Bowline. 

(a) Why is the bowline very useful? 
A. It is easy to untie, can be used for hoisting barrels or boxes in 

place of sling or strap and has many other uses. 
Q. For what is a bowline on a bight used? 
A. It makes an excellent sling and is more comfortable than single 

bight. Also used for making a loop anywhere on a rope 

other than the end. 
Q. What uses has a running bowline? 
A. The same as a bowline and can also be used as a lariat or for 

making a slip-knot. 
Q. For what is the cat's paw used? 
A. Used to pass over the hook of a block. 
Q. What uses has a sheepshank? 

A. Used for shortening a rope or to pass a weak spot in the rope. 
Q. For what is a rolling hitch useful? 
A. A very useful knot and quickly made, used for hauling a large 

rope or cable. 
Q. What is a Blackwall hitch? 
A. A turn of a single rope around the hook of a block. Very 

useful in dismantling a howitzer. 



108 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE 

Q. When is a mooring knot used? 

A. Whenever it is necessary to be able to give line to avoid 
breaking from heavy strain. 

SPLICING 

Q. When is a short splice made? 

A. Whenever a rope has been broken and is not used in a block it 

may be permanently joined by a short splice. 
Q. When is a long splice used? 
A. Whenever the rope that is broken is to be used thru a 

block. 
Q. What is the eye splice useful for in our line of work? 
A. Very useful on end of line about six feet long to use as halter 

tie rope. Can also be used in many other ways. 

LASHINGS 

Q. In repairing a transom of a bridge that has been partly de- 
molished what lashing is used? 

A. Transom lashing. 

Q. How do you make a pair of shears? 

A. Lay two spars of equal length alongside of one another and 
use the shear lashing. 

Q. How do you make a gin or tripod? 

A. Three spars of equal lengths are laid on the ground two of the 
spars parallel to each other with an interval a little greater 
than their diameter. Rest their tips on a skid and lay the 
third spar between them with the butt in the opposite direc- 
tion, make a mark on each spar the distance from the butt to 
center of lashing and have the spars laying so that the 
three marks are on line, then make fast with gin lashing. 

Q. How should a rope be stored? 

A. Rope should be stored in a cool dry place and in such a 
manner as to allow a free circulation of air through the coils. 

Q. What is meant by whipping a rope? 

A. Wrapping the end of a rope to prevent its unraveling. 

Q. What is a strap or sling and for what is it used? 

A. It is formed by knotting or splicing together the ends of a 
short rope. It is used for hooking tackles into it. 



EMPLACEMENTS 

Q. Why is cover important for the protection of artillery? 

A. To prevent it from being put out of action. 

Q. Xame the various types of natural cover. 

A. Hills, woods and ravines. 

Q. What kinds of entrenchments are used? 

A. Epaulments, dug-in emplacements and casemate emplace- 
ments. 

Q. What is the difference between -an epaulment and a dug-in 
emplacement. 

A. When placed in an epaulment the wheels of the gun carriage 
are on or near the level of the ground, the dirt simply mounded 
around the gun; in a dug-in emplacement the wheels of the 
gun are below the leve] of the ground. 

Q. In presence of the enemy, what should be done the instant 
the battery is in position? 

A. All men not occupied in the immediate service of the piece 
should throw up an epaulment. 

Q. If the position is to be occupied for some time, what is done 
to an epaulment? 

A. It is developed into a. dug -in emplacement, and the dug-in 
emplacement may later be changed into a casemate emplace- 
ment in case of siege. 

Q. What are some of the advantages of epaulments? 

A. An epaulment is quickly and easily constructed and allows 
the guns to be speedily withdrawn. 

Q. What are some of the disadvantages of epaulments? 

A. They are easily seen from aeroplanes, because of the shadow 
they cast, and from balloons by their relief. They are easily 
destroyed and afford no protection against high-angled 
fire. 

Q. How may these disadvantages be made less important 
(minimized) ? 

109 



110 



FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE 



A. By constructing the epaulments on the edges of woods, 
roads, or railroad embankments, by making dummy (fake) 
guns of logs, etc., in emplacements near the battery to draw 




Fig. i. — Hasty entrenchment for field artillery. Protection against 
rifle fire and shrapnel. 




Fig. 2. — Deliberate entrenchment for field artillery. Portable type 
when depression is necessary for concealment. (From U. S. Artillery 
Drill Regulations,) 



the enemy's fire; by constructing dugouts in the immediate 
vicinity of the battery into which the men may go for pro- 
tection when the guns are under fire. 
Q. By whom should epaulments be most used? 



EMPLACEMENTS 111 

A. By artillery of advancing armies or a body detailed to cover a 

retirement (retreat). 
Q. What are the chief advantages of dug-in emplacements? 
A. They are not easily seen, and afford more protection than does 

the epaulment. 
Q. What is the difference between a dug-in and a casemated 

emplacement? 
A. The dug-in usually has no overhead cover, whereas a case- 
mated emplacement is covered. 
Q. Are casemated emplacements proof against the penetration 

of a heavy shell? 
A. No; practically no roof is proof against heavy shell. 
Q. How may protection be afforded against large shells? 
A. By deflecting or making them burst before they penetrate. 

The following is one example of many and illustrates the 

general principle. (See Diagram.) 

Probable direction of hostile shell fire. 



fr 




The protection consists essentially of the following parts, 
from the top: 

i. A hard flat "bursting course," which retards a howitzer 
shell sufficiently to cause the fuze to act very quickly and in 
the case of a gun shell, with a small angle of descent, may 
deflect it altogether. 

2. A "deflecting course" which turns the shell that has al- 
ready penetrated the bursting course into a more horizontal 
direction. 

3. A "cushion" in which the shell should explode. It is 
soft, so that the shock may be disseminated. 

4. A supporting framework with splinter-proof cover. 



112 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE 

In ideal conditions each part should be supported separately 
with a small air space between, so that the shock on each part 
is borne separately. Practically, i, 2, and 3 should be sup- 
ported separately from 4. 
Considering the roof in detail — 

(a) is a concrete roof about 5 inches thick, reinforced with 
expanded metal. This is the " bursting course." Im- 
mediately under it is a roof (b) of match boarding or corru- 
gated iron, which held the concrete in position until it had set. 
If the concrete roof were made thick, it might inclose the 
explosion and collapse the whole cover. 

(f) is a layer of bricks laid on each other so as to form a de- 
flecting course. 

(d) is the " cushion" in which the shell is to burst, made of 
sandbags full of gravel or slag. 

(e) is a supporting roof of girders, iron rails, or baulks kept 
up by the stanchions (/). This must be covered by boarding 
or corrugated iron to prevent the sandbags escaping. 

(g) is a small air space which allows a certain amount of 
sagging of the upper supporting roof before any pressure is 
borne on the lower supports. 

Qi) is a splinter-proof cushion course laid on the lower sup- 
porting roof. 

(k) is the lower supporting roof, rather stronger than (e), as it 
may have to bear the weight of both roofs. It is supported 
by stanchions (I). It would be improved by a 6-inch layer 
of concrete immediately above the support, which would dis- 
tribute a force on any point over the whole lower roof. 

Q. How may the fire of a field gun be made more accurate? 

A. By constructing gun platforms on which to place the guns. 

Q. How are gun platforms constructed? 

A. The usual method is to cover the surface where the gun will 
stand with about a foot of broken brick, etc., so that the 
wheels will not sink. Large beams are placed on each side 
of the wheels and wedges driven between the wheels and these 
beams. The trail is held in position by a large beam, held 
by stakes, and a sandbag rests between the trail spade and 
the beam. In this way the shifting of the carriage is mini- 
mized, and the service of the gun is simplified. 



FIELD ARTILLERY INFORMATION SERVICE 

By ist Lt. Kenneth A. Rockwell 

Q. What are the purposes of the information service? 

A. (i) To secure information that will favor the movement 
and employment of guns; (2) to maintain communication 
between the various commanders concerned; (3) and to 
provide for the security of the field artillery when such 
security is not provided by other means, such as protection 
afforded by nature itself or by auxiliary arms of the service. 

Q. How is this information secured? 

A. Information is usually secured by reconnaissance officers 
and scouts. 

Q. How is this information communicated? 

A. Communication is usually maintained by agents, acting as 
couriers, or by signallers using visual signals, the telephone 
or buzzer. Pigeons are also used for carrying messages, and 
signalling is also done by means of flares, rockets, the helio- 
graph, etc. 

Q. What is the first rule to be remembered by scouts and agents? 

A. To obtain the information desired and to get it to the com- 
manding officer quickly, so that it may be used to advantage. 

Q. What are the qualifications for scouts and agents? 

A. 1. Specially keen witted, agile, intelligent and trustworthy 
soldiers. 

2. Good eyesight and hearing. 

3. Good physique, healthy and sound. 

4. Presence of mind, courage and good judgment, 

5. Willing and able to turn his hand to any kind of a task. 

6. Good rider and able to swim. 

7. Able to read and write. 

Q. In what must scouts and agents be drilled? 
A. 1. Signaling, 

2. Map reading. 

3. Sketching. 

8 113 



114 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE 

4. Reporting information (writing messages and reports). 

5. Carrying information (acting as agents, couriers, mes- 
sengers, etc.). 

6. Patrolling. 

7. Tracking and following an enemy. 

8. Riding across difficult country, 

9. Finding one's way in a strange country. 

10. Concealment; quickness of eye and ear. 

11. Care of self. 

12. Care of horse. 

Scouts should also be trained in making reports on: artillery 
positions, bridges, camp sites, country, the enemy, fords, rail- 
roads, rivers and streams, roads, towns, villages and water. 
Q. What are the principal duties of agents? 
A. Agents are employed to act as carriers of written or oral com- 
munication between the commander and the elements con- 
cerned. They keep the commander informed as to the 
location of the several elements and the best route for ap- 
proaching them, guide the elements into new positions when 
necessary and transmit information between the commander 
and troops of other arms. Each battalion and higher head- 
quarters is provided with sufficient agents for linking the 
commander with the next higher unit of his command. 
Q. In what should agents be trained particularly? 
A. Agents are especially trained and exercised in carrying verbal 
messages; in map reading, so that they may be able to identify 
positions of troops, features of the terrain, etc.; in finding 
their way by day and by night in order to designate posi- 
tions; in signalling, in the use of the service buzzer. 
Q. In passing thru strange country, by what method is a scout 
or agent able to retrace his steps or to return to a certain 
designated point. 
A. By the observation of landmarks, peculiarities of the terrain, 
etc., keeping always on the alert, observing, forming mental 
pictures of landmarks as they appear when approached, by 
viewing it after it has been passed, and, if necessary, chang- 
ing the course sufficiently to get a view of them from the side. 
The topography, or rise and fall of the terrain, is often of 
great service in this work. 



FIELD ARTILLERY INFORMATION SERVICE 115 

Q. What are some of the details in connection with the perform- 
ance of courier duty by agents? 
A. A courier makes every effort to keep himself informed as to 
the location of the subdivision to which he belongs, and as 
to the route by which it may most readily and easily be 
reached. 

When sent on a mission, he should note carefully the country 
traversed, the facilities or difficulties it offers for the passage of 
artillery, and endeavors to imprint on his mind the features of 
the terrain, so that he could, if need be, guide troops thru it if 
instructed to do so. 

He moves promptly when on an errand and allows nothing 
to delay or interrupt him. All military persons are required to 
expedite the movements of such messengers and to promptly 
point out the best routes for reaching the subdivision or individual 
sought. 

On reaching his destination, if the individual sought is not im- 
mediately seen or recognized, the courier calls out the name or 
military designation of the person sought; e.g., " Commanding 
Officer, Battery A, First Field Artillery." It is not necessary 
for a mounted man carrying a message to dismount when 
addressing or on being addressed by a dismounted officer. 

Having delivered the message he waits in the presence of the 
individual who received it until notified whether or not an 
answer is to be taken. In case of delay he asks for instructions. 

Important messages should always be in writing and should be 
acknowledged by the receiver's initials on the envelope, with the 
date and hour of receipt. 

Verbal messages should always be repeated by the courier in 
the presence of the sender before starting on the errand. The 
message should be couched in concise terms, and the sender 
should make sure that the courier grasps its spirit and meaning. 

If a courier is aware of the nature of a message carried and has 
noted any circumstances bearing upon its subject matter since 
leaving the sender, he should report the circumstances after 
delivering the message. 

If a courier after diligent search is unable to locate the in- 
dividual to whom he is sent, he should endeavor to find some 
other person who can take full advantage of the information 



116 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE 

conveyed. Whether or not this can always be done, he always 
reports back to the sender, with full facts in the case. 

A courier should note matters of military interest, especially 
those affecting the subdivision to which he is attached and should 
make report of any essential matters on his return to the officer 
to whom he is assigned. 



RECONNAISSANCE 

Soil and Cultivation. 



OO OOOO 

OO OoOOo 
o C£p o O CO 

r^ oc e© <b 




o 


o 


o 


o 


o 


o 


o 


o 


o 


o 


o 


c 


o 


o 


o 



r inn ii rtriri 1 1 1 ii i . 1 1 n n ij 



Woods. Grass or meadow. Cultivated.,- Orchard. 



Rice swamps 
ditch and dikes. 




£j^aj>>== 


^Sv^ 


*t=^-=^^=^ 


5^£S 



Sand 
and gravel, 

Enclosures 
Wire Fence 



Mud and 
Tidal Flats. 



Salt marsh 




Wooden fence. 



Fresh marsh Cypress 

pond. swamp. 

Communications. 



^z. 



Public Road. 



,V 



Wagon trail. 



Foot or bridle trail. 



T T T T 

Telegraph. 



3 j 1 1 1 m 1 1 1 1 r i [i 1 1 1 

R.R. single track. 

i nTrrn \T\vr\Trm 

R.R. double track. 



Stone fence. 
Hedge. 



Fill 



20 ' 

Cut 



Bridges. 



Tunnel. 




(From U. S* Engineers' Field Manual.) 
117 



118 



FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE 

Military Signs, 



Infantry 
In column o-a-o- d-d- d- 



ln line C 



HI 1 



V-tf 



Cavalry 
In column E C E E fi E* 

In line i — Z^umsam 

Artillery ,|, ,[ s ,|, ,|, ,|, ,1, 

Sentrv (J) Vedette £ 

Headquarters VV 

Battle 

Palisades 



Redoubt 



A 



Fort 

AllAii 
Cam P AAAAAA 



Trenches ^^^'^^^^ 

battery ^ T ^ 

Mortar 
batteiy 



Mortar #&T = 5^ 



Wire 
entanglement 




Abattis H^^Hf 



Chevaux de 
frise 



Miscellaneous, 





*- — . 


Dry run 


'*" , '«<i.«milliU'"" V "" ,,, ""'iiu 


Guriy 


*> 


Mine or 


A 


Quarry 




O 




Well 


^>p?~ 


- Springs 


n 


\ 


Wind Mill 



o-ho+o||+- +s-+ 



+ +*+ 






Church 

Cemetery 



B.S. 



Blacksmith Shop 
Wagon Shop 



S..NU 



Sa.w Miil 



G.m. GMsfc Mill 

(i*Vom. C7. 5. Engineers* Field Manual.) 



RECONNAISSANCE 



119 









i 


1 . 




I 


I 










i , 


( / r " 






N 


% 










-K 














x 










i 
















\ 








m 


















\ 




J 






















| 




§ 




















j 


( 


























\ 


























\ 


i ' 


















; / 






%>» 
























w 




1 














— 




■ 




















: 






















1 














/ 








\w$ 








f 


>> 












i r 


- 


22 

















(From U. S. Engineers 1 Field Manual.) 



GUARD DUTY 

By Capt. Harold Hellyer and 2D Lt. Stuart 0. Pusey 

CATECHISM OF INTERIOR GUARD DUTY 

Q. Into what four classes are guards divided? 

A. Exterior, interior, military police and provost guards. 

Q. What is the purpose of exterior guards? 

A. To prevent surprise, delay attack, and provide for the security 
of the main body in time of war. 

Q. What is the purpose of interior guards? 

A. To preserve order, protect property, and enforce police 
regulations in camp or garrison. 

Q. What is the purpose of military police? 

A. To guard prisoners, arrest stragglers, and deserters. To 
maintain order in rear of armies, along lines of communica- 
tion and near large camps. 

Q. What is the purpose of provost guards? 

A. To take the place of military police, to aid the civil authori- 
ties, near large camps to preserve order beyond the interior 
guard. 

Q. How is an interior guard classified? 

A. (a) The main guard, (b) Special guards, stable, park, 
prisoner, train, etc. 

Q. How does a relief call off when formed? 

A. Commencing on the right the men call off alternately rear 
and front rank, one, two, etc. 

Q. How is a relief posted? 

A. The new sentinel approaches the old, one pace from him. 
The corporals face each other, the old corporal on the right 
of the new sentinel, the new corporal on the left; when 
the instructions relative to the post are transmitted the 
new corporal commands "post." Both sentinels face the 
new corporal and step back so as to allow the relief to pass. 

120 



GUARD DUTY 121 

The old sentinel takes his place in the rear as the relief 
passes. The new sentinel walks his post after the relief has 
passed six paces beyond him. 

ORDERLIES AND COLOR SENTINELS 

Q. What are the points considered in selecting an orderly? 
A. (a) Correctness in performance of duty. 

(b) Military bearing. 

(c) Neatness of personal appearance and clothing. 

(d) Condition of arms and accoutrements. 

Q. When directed to fall out and report as orderly, what will 

a sentinel do? 
A. He will give his name, battery and regiment to the sergeant 

of the guard and proceed to the officer to whom he is assigned. 
Q. How does an orderly report? 

A. "Sir, Private Smith, Battery F, reports as orderly." 
Q. What should an orderly be careful of, when he is ordered to 

carry a message? 
A. That the message is delivered exactly as it was given to him. 
Q. When does his tour of duty end? 
A. When he is relieved by the next orderly. 
Q. How does a color sentinel call the corporal of the guard? 
A. Corporal of the guard, color line. 
Q. Will officers and enlisted men salute while passing the 

uncased colors? 
A. Yes. 
Q. Will a sentinel placed s over the colors permit them to be 

moved? 
A. No. Except in the presence of an armed escort. 
Q. Who is allowed to touch the colors? 
A. The color bearer only, unless otherwise ordered by the 

commanding officer. 
Q. If any person passes the colors or crosses the color line 

without saluting the colors, what will the sentinel do? 
A. The sentinel will caution him to do so, and if the caution is 

not heeded, he will call the corporal of the guard and report 

the fact. 



122 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE 

ORDERS 

Q. What kinds of orders has a sentinel on post? 

A. General and special. 

Q. If a sentinel is asked " what are your orders?" how should 
he answer? 

A. My orders are of two kinds, general and special. My general 
orders are: (He then gives his general orders.) My special 
orders are: (He then gives his special orders.) 

Q. What are your general orders? 

A. My general orders are: 

i. To take charge of this post and all government property 
in view. 

2. To walk my post in a military manner, keeping con- 
stantly on the alert and observing everything that takes 
place within sight or hearing. 

3. To report all violations of orders I am instructed to 
enforce. 

4. To repeat all calls from posts more distant from the 
guard house than my own. 

5. To quit my post only when properly relieved. 

6. To receive, obey and pass on to the sentinel who relieves 
me all orders from the commanding officer, officer of the 
day, officers and non-commissioned officers of the guard 
only. 

7. To talk to no one except in the line of duty. 

8. In case of fire or disorder to give the alarm. 

9. To allow no one to commit a nuisance on or near my post. 

10. In any case not covered by instruction to call the corporal 
of the guard. 

11. To salute all officers, and all colors and standards not 
cased. 

12. To be especially watchful at night and during the hours of 
challenging to challenge all persons on or near my post, 
and to allow no one to pass without proper authority. 

GENERAL ORDER NO. 1 

Q. Are all persons of whatever rank, required to observe respect 
toward sentinels and members of the guard? 



GUARD DUTY 123 

A. Yes. When the sentinels are in the performance of their 

duties. 
Q. What should a sentry do in case anything suspicious or 

unusual happens? 
A. Call the corporal of the guard. 
Q. What is a sentinel to do to all suspicious persons prowling 

around his post. 
A. Arrest them and call the corporal of the guard. 
Q. Are the numbers and extent of your post part of your general 

or special orders. 
A. Part of my special orders. 

GENERAL ORDER NO. 2 

Q. What is the meaning of the word "alert?" 
A. Watchful, wide awake. 

GENERAL ORDER NO. 3 

Q. What is the meaning of the word " violation. " 

A. Breaking or disobedience. 

Q. When does a sentinel report violations of orders? 

A. When inspected or relieved. Unless the violations are seri- 
ous, in which case he should call the corporal of the guard at 
once. 

GENERAL ORDER NO. 4 

Q. How does a sentinel call the corporal of the guard? 

A. Corporal of the guard No. . Never say, " Never mind 

the corporal." 

GENERAL ORDER NO. 5 

Q. How does he call for relief? 

A. Corporal of the guard No. , relief. 

GENERAL ORDER NO. 6 

Q. Who has the authority to investigate apparent violations of 

regulations by members of the guard? 
A. Any officer. 



124 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE 

GENERAL ORDER NO. 7 

Q. How does a sentinel hold his pistol while holding conversation 

at night. 
A. Raise pistol. 

GENERAL ORDER NO. 8 

Q. How does a sentinel give the alarm in case of fire? 

A. "Fire. No. ." 

Q. Should the sentinel put out the fire himself? 

A. Yes, if it is not too large. 

Q. In case of disorder what does the sentinel do? 

A. Calls "the guard No. ." 

Q. Will he discharge his piece in case of fire or disorder? 
A. Yes, if the danger is great. 



GENERAL ORDER NO. 11 

Q. Does a sentry salute all officers who pass? 

A. Yes, if not engaged in the performance of duties which would 

prevent it. 
Q. How does a sentry salute? 

A. Present arms with rifle. Hand salute if armed with pistol. 
Q. At what distance does a sentinel salute? 
A. When an officer is at six paces or at the nearest point to him. 
Q.-Does a sentinel armed with a pistol salute after challenging? 
A. No. 
Q. Will a sentinel in conversation with an officer interrupt the 

conversation to salute other officers? 
A. No. Unless the officer to whom he is talking salutes. 
Q. What does a sentry on post do at retreat? 
A. He faces toward the flag during the playing of "To the 

Colors" or "The Star Spangled Banner. " 
Q. What are colors? 
A. National and regimental flags carried by foot troops: 

national, red, white, and blue; regimental, blue for infantry 

and scarlet for coast artillery. 
Q. What are standards? 
A. National and regimental flags carried by mounted troops: 



GUARD DUTY 125 

national, red, white and blue; regimental, yellow for cavalry 

and scarlet for field artillery. 
Q. What is the meaning of cased? 
A. Colors or standards rolled around their staffs and covered by 

a waterproof case, are said to be " cased." 

GENERAL ORDER NO. 12 

Q. What does a sentinel do if a person or party comes on his 

post during challenging hours? 
A. He advances rapidly toward the person or party to be chal- 
lenged and when within thirty paces calls, "Halt! W r ho is 

there?" and places himself in the best position to receive or 

arrest the person or party. 
Q. What does the sentinel do if the person is mounted? 
A. He should do the same as in challenging a dismounted person 

except that he challenges, "Halt! Dismount, who is there?" 
Q. What does the sentry do in case the challenged party consists 

of more than one person? 
A. He calls "Halt! who is there?" On receiving his answer 

to the challenge he calls, "Advance one to be recognized." 

If he recognizes one of the party he may pass all of the party 

together. 
Q. What does a sentry do in case several parties approach his 

post from several directions at the same time? 
A. He halts all of them and advances the senior. 
Q. If a sentry is in conversation with someone and other persons 

approach, what does he N do ? 
A. Halts them in turn and continues his conversation, unless 

they are senior to the person to whom he is talking, in which 

case he advances them at once. 
Q. In what order do officers, officials of the guard and others come 

in rank? 
A, Commanding officer, officer of the day, officer of the guard, 

officers, patrols, reliefs, non-commissioned officers of the 

guard and friends. 

SPECIAL ORDERS 

Q. If a sentinel is asked to give his special orders, what does he 
answer? 



126 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE 

A. My special orders are. The number of my post is— . It 

extends from 'to . Also any further orders or 

information given him concerning his post. 

SPECIAL ORDERS FOR SENTINELS AT THE POST OF THE 

GUARD 

Q. What orders are the sentinels at the post of the guard (guard 

house) required to memorize? 
A. i. Between reveille and retreat to turn out the guard for all 
persons designated by the commanding officer, for all 
colors and standards not cased, and in time of war for all 
armed parties approaching my post, except troops at drill 
and reliefs and detachments of the guard. 
2. At night, after challenging any person or party, to advance 
no one but call the corporal of the guard, repeating the 
answer to the challenge. 
Q. How does the sentry at the guard house turn out the guard? 
A. By calling "Turn out the guard, armed party," or "officer 

of the day," etc. 
Q. If the person named does not desire the guard formed he 
will salute or say, " Never mind the guard." What does the 
sentinel do? 
A. He calls, " Never mind the guard." 
Q. What does the sentry at the guard house do on the approach 

of the new guard at guard mounting? 
A. He calls, "Turn out the guard, armed party." 
Q. After calling "Turn out the guard" on the approach of an 
armed party, does the sentinel ever call, "Never mind the 
guard." 
A. No. 

COUNTERSIGNS AND PAROLES 

Par. 209. Interior guard manual. Forty-fourth article of 
war. Any person belonging to the armies of the United States 
who makes known the watchword to any person not entitled to 
receive it, according to the rules and discipline of war, or pre- 
sumes to give a parole or watchword different from that which 
he received, shall suffer death or such other punishment as a 
court martial may direct. 
Q, What is a countersign? 



GUARD DUTY 127 

A. A word used as an aid to sentinels in identifying persons who 

are authorized to pass at night. It is usually the name of a 

battle. 
Q. What is a parole? 
A. A word used as a check on the countersign and given only to 

those who are entitled to inspect the guard. It is usually 

the name of some general. 

GENERAL RULES CONCERNING GUARD DUTY 

Par. 231. Thirty-sixth article of war. No soldier shall hire 
another to do his duty for him. 

Par. 232. Thirty-eighth article of war. Any soldier who is 
found drunk on his guard, party, or other duty, shall sutler such 
punishment as a courtmartial may direct. 

Par. 236. Without permission from the commander of the 
guard, members of the main guard, except orderlies, will not 
leave the immediate vicinity of the guard house. Permission to 
leave will not be granted except in cases of necessity. 

PRISONERS 

Q. What are the duties of No. 1 concerning prisoners? 

A. Par. 299. The sentinel at the post of the guard has charge of 
the prisoners except when they have been turned over to 
the prisoner guard or overseers. (Par. 247 and 300 to 304). 

A. HE WILL ALLOW NONE TO ESCAPE. 

B. HE WILL ALLOW NONE TO CROSS HIS POST 
LEAVING THE GUARD HOUSE EXCEPT WHEN 
PASSED BY AN OFFICER OR NON-COMMIS- 
SIONED OFFICER OF THE GUARD. 

C. HE WILL ALLOW NO ONE TO COMMUNICATE 
WITH PRISONERS WITHOUT PERMISSION 
FROM PROPER AUTHORITY. 

D. HE WILL PROMPTLY REPORT TO THE COR- 
PORAL OF THE GUARD ANY SUSPICIOUS NOISE 
MADE BY THE PRISONERS. 

E. HE WILL BE PREPARED TO TELL WHENEVER 
ASKED HOW MANY PRISONERS ARE IN THE 
GUARD HOUSE AND HOW MANY ARE OUT AT 
WORK AND ELSEWHERE. 



128 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE 

Q. What will No. i do when prisoners are returned? 

A. He will call, " Corporal of the guard — prisoners. " 

Q. Will he allow prisoners to pass at once? 

A. No. Only after the corporal of the guard has answered the 

call and ordered him to do so. 
Q. What should a sentry do if a prisoner attempts to escape? 
A. He should call, "Halt!" Call, "Halt!" again and if the 

prisoner does not halt and the sentry sees no other way of 

stopping him he shall tire upon him. Also call the corporal 

of the guard. 
Q. What are the duties of a sentinel on stables? 
A. (a) Verifies the number of horses on the line. 

(b) Permits no horse or equipment to be taken from the 
picket line, except in the presence of an officer or non- 
commissioned officer. 

(c) Should a horse get loose tie him up. If unable to catch 
him or if a horse is sick, caught or entangled and he is 
unable to get him loose call the noncommissioned officer 
of the stable guard. 

(d) See that the gates are kept closed and the water turned off 
after dark. 

(e) Allow no smoking near stables. 

Q. What does a sentinel do in case of fire at the stables? 

A. Fires his piece repeatedly and calls, "Fire Stables, Battery 
."or "Fire No. ." 

Q. What is a garrison flag, post flag, storm flag? 

A. A garrison flag is 38' fly by 20' hoist, hoisted at posts author- 
ized by the W.D. and on holidays, and important occasion. 
A post flag is 19/ fly by 10' hoist, hoisted at garrison posts 
in pleasant weather. 

A storm flag is 0/ 6" fly by 5' hoist, hoisted at all occupied 
posts in stormy weather and used in National Cemeteries. 

Q. W T ho raises and lowers the flag? 

A. A noncommissioned officer and two privates of the guard. 

COURTSMARTIAL 

Q. If a man enlists making statements that are untrue what 
punishment may he get? 



GUARD DUTY 129 

A. Under A.W. 54. dishonorable discharge, forfeiture of all pay 

and allowances, and one year's confinement 
Q. What crimes are capital? In peace? In war? 
A. In peace: (1) Assaulting or disobeying a superior officer 
(A. W. 64). 

(2) Mutiny or sedition (A. W. 66). 

(3) Failure to suppress mutiny or sedition (A. 
W. 67). 

In war: the above 3 and 

(4) Desertion (A. W. 58). 

(5) Advising or aiding another to desert (A. W. 59). 

(6) Misbehavior before the enemy (A. W. 75). 

(7) Subordinates compelling commander to sur- 
render (A. W. 76). . 

(8) Improper use of countersign (A. W. 77). 

(9) Forcing a safeguard (A. W. 78). 

(10) Relieving, corresponding with or aiding the 
enemy (A. W. 81). 

(11) Spies (A. W. 82). 

(12) Misbehavior of sentinels (A. W. 86). 
Q What are the punitive articles of war by subject? 

PUNITIVE ARTICLES 

(a) Enlistment; muster; returns — 
Art. 54. Fraudulent enlistment. 

Art. 55. Officer making unlawful enlistment. 

Art. 56. Muster rolls — false muster. 

Art. 57. False returns — omission to render returns. 

(b) Desertion; absence without leave — 
Art. 58. Desertion. 

Art. 59. Advising or aiding another to desert, 
Art. 60. Entertaining a deserter. 
Art. 61. Absence without leave. 

(c) Disrespect; insubordination; mutiny — 

Art. 62. Disrespect toward the President, Vice President, 
Congress, Secretary of War, governors, legislatures. 
Art. 63. Disrespect toward superior officers. 
Art. 64. Assaulting or willfully disobeying superior officer. 



130 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE 

Art. 65. Insubordinate conduct toward noncommissioned 

officer. 

Art. 66. Mutiny or sedition. 

Art. 67. Failure to suppress mutiny or sedition. 

Art. 68. Quarrels; frays; disorders. 

(d) Arrest; confinement — 

Art. 69. Arrest or confinement of accused persons. 

Art. 70. Investigation of and action upon charges. 

Art. 71. Refusal to receive and keep prisoners. 

Art. 72. Report of prisoners received. 

Art. 73. Releasing prisoner without proper authority. 

Art. 74. Delivery of offenders to civil authorities. 

(e) War offenses — 

Art. 75. Misbehavior before the enemy. 

Art. 76. Subordinates compelling commander to surrender. 

Art. 77. Improper use of countersign. 

Art. 78. Forcing a safeguard. 

Art. 79. Captured property to be secured for public service. 

Art. 80. Dealing in captured or abandoned property. 

Art. 81. Relieving, corresponding with, or aiding the enemy. 

Art. 82. Spies. 

(J) Miscellaneous crimes and offenses — 

Art .83. Military property — willful or negligent loss, damage, 

or wrongful disposition of. 

Art. 84. Waste or unlawful disposition of military property 

issued to soldiers. 

Art. 85. Drunk on duty. 

Art. 86. Misbehavior of sentinel. 

Art. 87. Personal interest in sale of provisions. 

Art. 88. Intimidation of persons bringing provisions. 

Art. 89. Good order to be maintained and wrongs redressed. 

Art. 90. Provoking speeches or gestures. 

Art. 91. Dueling. 

Art. 92. Murder — rape. 

Art. 93. Various crimes. 

Art. 94. Frauds against the Government. 

Art. 95. Conduct unbecoming an officer and gentleman. 

Art. 96 General article. 



GUNNERY 

By ist Lt. S. P. Goodenough 

Q. How may I become a first-class gunner? 

A. By passing the gunner's examination with an average mark 
of 85. 

Q. What is the advantage of becoming a first-class gunner? 

A. I may wear on my sleeve a chevron (projectile point up with 
a bar under it) and I will receive an increase in pay. In 
peace times, if there be at least twenty first-class gunners 
in my battery, my battery will receive its full allowance of 
target ammunition. 

Q. What are the subjects in which I have to qualify to pass the 
gunner's examination? 

A. A practical test for accuracy and speed in direct laying. 
A practical test in accuracy and speed in indirect laying. 
The ability to drill a gun squad in cannoneer's standing gun 
drill. 

A practical test in fuze setting. 

A knowledge of the nomenclature of the piece and the care of 
materiel. 
Knowledge in the nomenclature of harness and its care. 

Q. How may I prepare myself for these tests? 

A. By understanding the operation of the sights and becoming 
dexterous in handling them accurately through actual prac- 
tice. By close attention to cannoneer's standing gun drill, 
understanding and being able to explain what each cannon- 
eer has to do in connection therewith ; and by acquiring knowl- 
edge of the nomenclature of the piece, materiel and harness, 
its care and cleaning. 

Q. Is the examination difficult? 

A. No. In a well-trained battery there is no reason why every 
member should not qualify as a first-class gunner. In some 
batteries as high as 90 per cent, of the membership have so 
qualified. 

131 



132 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE 

Q. What is the axis of the bore? 

A. A straight line drawn through the center of the bore of a gun 
in the direction the gun is pointing. 

Q. What is the line of sight? 

A. A straight line drawn from the gun to the object used as an 
aiming point. 

Q. What is deflection? 

A. The horizontal angle between the line of sight and the axis of 
the bore measured in mils. 

Q. If the aiming point and the target are the same what would be 
the deflection? 

A. Zero. 

Q. If the aiming point is directly in rear of the gun, what would 
be the deflection? 

A. 3200. 

Q. If the aiming point is at a right angle to the right what is the 
deflection? 

A. 1600. 

Q. If the aiming point is at a right angle to the left what is the 
deflection? 

A. 4800. 

Q. What is direct laying? 

A. When your line of sight is directed at the target. 

Q. What is indirect laying? 

A. When your line of sight is directed at some object known as 
the aiming point, other than the target to be fired upon; pref- 
erably some w T ell-defined stationary object in the rear such as 
church steeple. 

Q. Do you ever set off any deflection in direct laying? 

A. Yes. 

Q. When may the peep sight be used? 

A. Only when laying directly upon the target for "fire at will" 
in close defense of the guns. 

Q. How is the deflection determined in direct laying? 

A. By correctly measuring or estimating the angle between a 
line drawn from the target to the gun and a second line drawn 
from the gun to the aiming point. This is done by the bat- 
tery officers or the instrument sergeant. 



GUNNERY 133 

Q. When once the deflection has been announced, how may it be 

changed? 
A. Either by announcing a new deflection or by the command 

" right (left)" so much. The command "right (left)" indi- 
cates the direction in which the captain wishes to throw the 

projectile. 
Q. Assuming the deflection to be 1850, the captain commands 

left 50, what does the gunner do ? 
A. He adds 50, making the deflection 1900. Left add — right 

subtract. In other words to throw the projectile to the left 

increase the deflection — to throw the projectile to the right 

diminish the deflection. 
Q. What is parallel fire? 
A. When the lines of fire of all the guns in the battery are 

parallel. 
Q. What is cross fire? 

A. WTien the lines of fire of the guns of a battery are crossed. 
Q. What is an open sheaf? 
A. When the lines of fire from the several guns of a battery are 

fan shaped. 
Q. How is the sheaf opened? 
A. One of the guns is always designated as the directing piece. 

The guns on the right of the directing piece must have their 

muzzles moved to the right, that is away from the directing 

piece. The guns on the left to the left, that is away from 

the directing piece. 
Q. How do you close the sheaf? 
A. The guns on the right of the directing piece must have their 

muzzles moved to the left toward the directing piece. Those 

on the left to the right. 
Q. In closing or opening the sheaf does the directing piece change 

its deflection? 
A. No. 
Q. Do the other guns each make the same amount of change in 

deflection? 
A. No. You must multiply the announced deflection difference 

for each gun by the number of intervals the gun is distant from 

the directing piece. 
Q. How are the guns in the battery numbered? 



. 134 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE 

A. Always beginning from the right, i, 2, 3, 4. 

Q. If the command should be given "On 1st piece open 5," what 

change in deflection should be made on each piece? 
A. First piece — none. Second piece add 5; third piece add 10; 

fourth piece add 15. 
Q. If the command should be "On 1st piece close 5?" 
A. First piece — none. Second piece subtract 5; third piece 

subtract 10; fourth piece subtract 15. 
Q. If the command should be "On 4 rjh piece close 5?" 
A. Fourth piece — none. Third piece add 5 ; second piece add 10; 

first piece add 15. 
Q. If the command should be "On 2nd piece close 5?" 
A. First piece add 5; second piece — none; third piece subtract 5; 

fourth piece subtract 10. 
Q. What is the angle of site for the gun? 
A. It is the angle between the horizontal plane and the line 

drawn from the gun to the target. 
Q. What does the captain mean when he says: "Site 300?" 
A. He means the gun and the target are on the same level. 
Q. If the target is 5 mils below the gun what site would the 

captain announce? 
A. 295. 

Q. If 5 mils above? 
A. 305. 
Q. If the target is 50 yards higher than the gun and the range 

5000 yards, what is the proper angle of site? 
A. 310. (Divide 50 by the number of thousands of yards in the 

range, that is 5.) 
Q. How is the angle of site set off on the panoramic sight? 
A. By turning the lower index thumb screw on the left side of the 

panoramic sight, so that it correctly registers the announced 

angle of site. 
Q. What is the hand fuze setter? 
A. It is an instrument used to set mechanically the time fuze on 

shrapnel, so that the required height of burst may be accu- 
rately obtained. 
Q. How many scales are there on a hand fuze setter? 
A. Two — the range scales and the corrector scale. 
Q. How is the range scale used? 



GUNNERY 135 

A. The announced range is set off upon such scale by turning the 

range thumb screw on the hand fuze setter. 
Q. What is the corrector used for? 
A. For more accurate adjustment. After the range has been 

set off on the range scale, slight changes can be made by using 

the corrector scale. 
Q. After the range has been set off and the corrector is announced 

how is the hand fuze setter used? 
A. It is placed upon the point of the shrapnel, so that the lug 

upon the hand fuze setter becomes engaged with the lug upon 

the time fuze of the shrapnel. It is then turned clockwise 

until it can be turned no longer. 
Q. What does this operation do? 
A. It adjusts the time fuze on the shrapnel, so that the shrapnel 

will explode at a point in the air at which it is desired to 

explode in accordance with the range and corrector setting 

set off on the hand fuze setter. 
Q. If the shrapnel should explode too high in the air, how is 

this corrected? 
A. The captain commands Down (so much) for instance io, and 

10 is then subtracted from the corrector setting on the hand 

fuze setter by turning the corrector thumb screw. 
Q. If the shrapnel should explode on the ground, how are sub- 
sequent rounds adjusted to explode at the proper point? 
A. By the command Up (so much) and adding the amount 

announced on the corrector scale. 
Q. How many zones of fire are used in connection with the 4.7 

howitzer. 
A. Three. 

Q. How are the different zones of fire regulated? 
A. By reducing the powder charge. 
Q. W 7 hat is the maximum range in the first zone? 
A. 1980 yards. 
Q. In the second zone? 
A. 3525 yards. 
Q. In the third zone? 
A. 6640 yards. 

Q. What is the object of having three zones of fire? 
A. The 4.7 howitzer has a high angle of fire and is used largely 



136 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE 

for dropping shells into trenches or exploding shrapnel directly 
over trenches. By reducing the powder charge and using a 
high angle of fire — sometimes called a high trajectory — a 
shell may be dropped upon the enemy from above at a 
shorter range. 

Q. Just what is meant by trajectory? 

A. The path the projectile follows in the air from the gun to the 
target. 

Q. How many range scales are on the sight shank? 

A. Three; one for each zone. 

Q. How is the range set off on the sights? 

A. By first turning the thumb screw on the front of the sight 
bar so that the slotted opening will disclose the announced 
zone range scale. Then by raising or lowering the sight 
shank, so that the announced range will be disclosed at the 
index point. If there is to be a large change in range, the 
sight shank is moved up or down with the right hand after 
first slightly pulling out and so disengaging the scroll-gear 
attached to the left of the sight bar. If the range is to be 
changed slightly the sight shank is moved up or down by 
simply turning the scroll-gear with the left hand. 

Q. After the range has been announced, how may it be changed? 

A. By announcing a new range. 

Q. In what order is firing data announced? 

A. Always in the following order: 
Deflection. 
Deflection difference. 
Angle of site. 
Corrector. 
Method of fire. 
Zone. 
Range. 
As for instance: deflection 2800, on first piece close by 5, 
sight 300, corrector 60, right right (the word range is not 
used) , 4000 fire. If no zone is announced the firing will be 
in third zone. 

Q. Are all of these commands habitually given? 

A. No. Sometimes no deflection difference is announced. In 
such case none is set off on the sight. When shell is to be 



GUNNERY 137 

used the command "with shell" is given just before the 
method of fire is announced, and no corrector is given, 
because there is no time fuze on shell. 

Q. After the first round has been fired, how does the captain 
make any desired corrections? 

A. To correct the deflection he commands (Right) (Left) (so 
much). To correct the deflection difference (Open) (Close) 
on an indicated piece (so much) . The angle of site is seldom 
if ever changed. If so a new angle of site is announced. 
The corrector (Down) (Up) (so much). And the range is 
announced each time. 

Q. In the conduct of fire, does it often occur that all of these 
changes are made for any one found? 

A. No. 

Q. May corrections be made for any one piece, and if so how? 

A. Yes. By commands such as " Third Piece Teft 10' or 
'Down io.'" In such case the third piece only makes the 
indicated change. 

Q. What should the gunner always do before signalling that his 
piece is correctly laid and ready to be fired? 

A. He should see that both bubbles are level and that the vertical 
hair is correctly laid upon the aiming point, that the an- 
nounced deflection, deflection difference, site and range are 
properly set. 

Q. Of what assistance can No. 2, whose post is at the trail 
hand spike, be to the gunner in correctly and rapidly laying 
for deflection? 

A. Of great assistance. They must work together as a team; 
moving the trail spade one full length to the right adds 150 
mils to the deflection. Moving it to the left subtracts 150 
mils from the deflection. No. 2 should pay particular atten- 
tion to all commands changing the deflection and without 
waiting for the gunner should carefully estimate how much 
the trail should be shifted on an announced change in deflec- 
tion and so shift it. For instance at the command " Right 
50" he should shift the trail one-third of the length of the 
spade to the left. 

Q. If it is impossible to see any common aiming point from the 



138 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE 

position of the guns, how are they laid, so that they will 
be directed at the target and parallel fire established? 

A. By directing one of the guns at the target by compass or in 
some other manner, and then establishing parallel fire by 
reciprocal laying. 

Q. How is this done? 

A. Each gunner sets off zero range and levels all bubbles. Then 
without elevating or depressing the piece raises the sight 
shank to 6000 yards. This enables him to look thru his 
panoramic sight and clear the tops of the wheels. The gunner 
of the piece that has been directed toward the target, then 
turns his panoramic sight in turn on the panoramic sights of 
each of the other guns in the battery and reads off the sev- 
eral deflections measured on his panoramic sight. The gun- 
ners to the right of the directing piece add 3200 to the 
deflection announced by the gunner of the directing piece 
and lay their gun with such deflection on the panoramic 
sight of the directing piece. The gunners to the left of the 
directing piece subtract 3200 from the announced deflec- 
tion and do likewise. When this has been done, each gunner 
then lowers his sight shank without traversing his piece-, and 
sets his deflection at 3200. One of the cannoneers in his 
squad then goes to the rear of the piece with a stake or rod 
and places it in the ground as directed b3' the gunner, so 
that it will be directly in line with the vertical hair of the 
panoramic sight, set as indicated above at 3200. Care must 
be taken that the individual aiming points so established 
behind each gun are approximately an equal distance in the 
rear of their several pieces. They should be located as far 
in the rear as possible. These stakes are then used as 
individual aiming points by their respective pieces. 

Q. Into how many platoons is a firing battery divided? 

A. Two. Right platoon and left platoon. The first and second 
guns are in the right platoon — third and fourth in the left 
platoon. 

Q. What are the different methods of firing? 

A. Platoon salve, battery salvo, volley fire, continuous fire, 
fire at will. 

Q. What is a platoon salvo? 



GUNNERY 139 

A. When one gun of the platoon fires first followed three seconds 
later by the second gun. A different time interval than three 
seconds may be announced. 

Q. How may a platoon salvo be fired? 

A. Either from the right (in which case the right gun of the 
platoon fires followed by the left gun) or vice versa. 

Q. What would be the command for the right platoon to fire a 
salvo from the right? 

A. Right-right. 

Q. What would be the command for the right platoon to fire a 
salvo from the left? 

A. Right-left. 

Q. What would be the command for the left platoon to fire a 
salvo from the right? 

A. Left-right. 

Q. From the left? 

A. Left-left. 

Q. How is a battery salvo fired? 

A. Either from the right or the left, each gun firing with three 
seconds interval, unless the captain announce a different 
interval. 

Q. What would be the command? 

A. "Battery right (left)." 

Q. While one platoon is firing salvos, what does the other 
platoon do? 

A. The gunners set oft on their sights, all the firing, data an- 
nounced. The No. 3s set off all changes on the hand fuze 
setters. The 'time fuzes, however, are not set nor the guns 
loaded or fired. 

Q. What is volley fire? 

A. Fire in which each gun fires a stated number of rounds, with- 
out reference to the other guns, as quickly as is compatible 
with accurate laying. 

Q. What is continuous fire? 

A. Fire in which each gun starting from the right or left fires 
in turn at a stated interval and continues to so fire until the 
command " Cease Firing" is given. 

Q. How is the command "Cease Firing" given? 



140 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE 

A. Either by the command " Cease Firing" or by one long blast 

on the whistle. 
Q. What is "Fire at Will?" 
A. Direct fire for the purpose of defending the battery against 

a threatened attack. The fuze is set at zero. The range 

is set at iooo yards and the guns are fired as rapidly as 

possible. 
Q. Why is the fuze set at zero? 
A. This causes the shrapnel to explode about 20 yards from the 

muzzle of the gun creating a cannister effect — such fire is 

effective at about 250 yards. 
Q. What is fire for adjustment? 
A. Fire to determine the right deflection, distribution of sheaf, 

height of burst and range 
Q. How many bags of powder are there in a cartridge case? 
A. Three. 

Q. In firing second zone how many are removed? 
A. One. 

Q. In the first zone? 
A. Two. 

Q. How are they removed? 

A. By tearing off the tin cover and lifting them out. 
Q. Should this tin cover be removed on firing third zone? 
A. Yes, although no powder bags are taken out. If the tin 

cover is not removed it may fly back when the gun is fired 

and injure someone. 
Q. What should be done with the bags of powder that are so 

removed? 
A. They should be thrown out of the way, collected after the 

firing, taken to the rear, opened and the powder scattered on 

the ground. 
Q. When shrapnel or shell is received from the arsenal, how is 

it packed? 
A. Together with a loaded cartridge case is packed in a wooden 

container. 
Q. May this be thrown away? 
A. No. Moreover, the blocking which holds the shrapnel or 

shell with its cartridge case within the container should be 

put back into the container and the cover replaced. 



GUNNERY 141 

Q. What must be done to a shrapnel before the fuze can be set? 

A. You would first have to remove the tin cap, covering the time 
fuze and then pull out the wire loop which is inserted in the 
hole at the top of the fuze. 

Q. When is this wire so inserted? 

A. It can only be inserted when the shrapnel fuse is set at safety. 
The fuze cannot be turned until it is removed. 

Q. What precautions must always be taken at the close of firing? 

A. All shrapnel that have been removed from the caisson should 
be examined before putting them back in the chest to see 
that their fuzes are set at safety and wires inserted. 

Q. How is a shrapnel fuze set at safety? 

A. Set the range index as S and the corrector at 60 on hand fuze 
setter — and set time fuze accordingly. 

Q. In using shrapnel for percussion fire is it necessary to remove 
the wire loop? 

A. No. A shrapnel explodes on impact providing it is revolving 
at a sufficiently high rate of speed. This is determined by an 
auxiliary primer. The hammer discharging it cannot oper- 
ate unless released by the centrifugal force caused by rapid 
revolution. 

Q. What is done with the empty cartridge cases? 

A. They are carefully collected after firing, put back into the 
cartridge case carrier in the caisson. On return to the 
park the primers are removed and the cases washed in solu- 
tion of sal soda and so made ready for return to the arsenal. 

Q. What is a masked position? 

A. A position in which the guns are concealed. 

Q. What is sight defilade? 

A. A position behind a mask, such that the target can be seen 
thru the sights on the guns. 

Q. What is dismounted defilade? 

A. A position behind a mask such that a dismounted man can 
see the target over the mask. 

Q. What is mounted defilade? 

A. Such a position that a mounted man can see the target over 
the mask. 

Q. What is a flash defilade? 

A. A position sufficiently behind a mask so that the enemy can- 



142 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE 

not see the flash of the guns. Flash defilade should be such 

that the flash of the guns will be concealed from the highest 

point from which the enemy might make observation. 
Q. What kind of a position is the best? 

A. A position of concealment within medium range of the targets. 
Q. In what manner is fire from such a position concealed? 
A. By the battery commander from some point where he can 

observe the effect of the fire. 
Q. Should every man in the battery be trained as a cannoneer? 
A. Yes. Casualties in battle may be so great that drivers 

would have to be dismounted and used. The guns must be 

served until the last. 
Q. How should the sights be set at the command " Prepare for 

Action?" 
A. Range 4000, third zone, site 300 and deflection zero. 
Q. How is the fuze setter set at the same command? 
A. Range 4000, third zone, corrector 60. 



HARNESSING 

By ist Lt. Clement Tingle y 

Q. What is the difference between a pair and a team? 

A. The horses assigned to a single driver are called a pair ; the 

horse on the left side is called the near horse ; the other the 

off horse. The driver rides the near horse. 



Coat Strcxp.Fbmmel^ 
Quarter Strap, Tomm* 
Toot Staple Low 
TootStaple Sem 
Circular. 
/ 55 in, BrassR-ing- 
Hatter Square 
Saddle /VaU 

QuarterStrap Side 

Stirrup Stra/o 



^Sliding Loop 



Stirrup StrapBuckle 



Stirrup Hood —i 




*~Coat StrapCantle 
~Sadd L e Bag Stud 
Toot Staple Loyy 
r /.c5 in, Brass Ring 

Toot Staple High 
^QuxirterStrapCantle 
Halter Square 



Quarter Strap Safe 
Fling Chape 
QuarterStrap fling 

Cincha Strap 

incha Safe 
Cine ha, R,in,g 
Cincha Co-ver 



-Horse Hair Cincha 
Stirrup 

McClellan Pattern. 
(From School of the Trooper.) 

The pairs assigned to the traction of a single carriage are 
termed collectively a team. A team usually consists of not 
less than three pairs. The leading pair is called the lead 

143 



144 



FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE 



pair; the one attached to the carriage the wheel pair; the 
pair between these two the swing pair. When there are two 
pairs between the lead and wheel pairs, the pair next behind 
the lead pair is called the lead swing ; the other the wheel 
swing pair. When there are five pairs the one between the 
lead swing and the wheel swing is called the middle swing 
pair. 




The Bridle. 
Headstall: A, crownpiece; B, brow band; C, ornament; D. D f 
check piece; E, throatlatch. Bit: F. F, mouthpiece; G, port; H. H, 
branches; J. I, rein rings; K, curb strap; R, reins. Link: L, link 
strap; M, link snap. (From School of the Trooper.) 



Q. How and where is harness placed? In garrison? 

A. In Garrison. — The harness is arranged on two pegs on the 
heel posts, as follows : 

On the upper peg: Both bridles hung from the peg by their 
headstalls; the traces of both horses hung over the peg close 
to the heel post; the off saddle with its attachments over the 
seat; the blanket across the saddle; both collars, unlocked, 
over the blanket. 

On the lower peg: The near saddle and blanket arranged as 
prescribed for the off harness. 



HARNESSING 145 

The neck yoke, with martingales attached, is hung from a 

spike driven into the side of the heel post. 

To prevent injury to the off saddle when the blankets are out 

drying, the sack is put over the harness and the collars are 

then placed across the sack. 

If the harness pegs are on the left heel post as the driver 

faces the manger, the saddles are placed with the cantles 

against the heel post; if the pegs are on the other side of the 

stall, the pommels are placed against the heel post. 

Q. In the field? 

A. In the Field. — The pole prop is placed under the end of the 
pole. The wheel traces are detached from the collars only 
and laid back on the footboards. The remainder of the har- 
ness of the near-wheel horse is placed on the pole next to the 
double-tree, arranged as follows: The saddle with its attach- 
ments over it, the blanket across the saddle, the bridle and 
collar over the blanket. The remainder of the off -wheel har- 
ness is placed next, then the swing, and lead harness in the 
same order. The traces of the swing and lead harness, 
folded once, are placed across the saddle. The neck yoke is 
placed on the footboard. 

Q. In entraining? 

A. In Entraining. — The harness belonging to a single pair is 
placed in a harness sack in the following order: Neck yoke; 
collars, one in each end of the sack; bridles, one inside of each 
collar; traces looped around and outside of the collars; blan- 
kets, one on each collar psaddles, one on each blanket. The 
harness sack is securely tied and is tagged to show (i) the pair 
in the team, (2) the carriage, (3) the section. 
When harness sacks are not taken, each horse's harness 
may be packed in a grain sack and appropriately tagged. 

Q. What is the order of harnessing by detail? In the field? 

A. The instructor commands: 1 By detail; 2. HARNESS. 
Collar. — At this command each driver puts on and locks the 
collar of his off horse, then that of his near horse. To avoid 
pinching and clamping a portion of the skin or mane between 
the collar and the collar pad, the collar is placed well up on 
the neck, locked, and then lifted gently to its position against 
the shoulders. By stooping down and looking at it, the driver 
10 



146 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE 

should satisfy himself that the buckle latch is securely locked. 

Bridle. — He bridles first the off horse, passing the reins 

through the roller, and then the near horse. 

Unless otherwise instructed, the halters are removed before 

bridling. 

Saddle. — He puts on the blanket of the off horse, then the 

saddle with its attachments, taking care not to displace the 

blanket; buckles the collar strap to the saddle; turns back the 

back strap and, in the case of wheel drivers, the breeching, 

fastens the crupper and completes the saddling. He then 

saddles the near horse in like manner. 

Traces. — He lays the middle of the traces of the off horse over 

the horse's back, behind the saddle, toggles on opposite sides, 

and, beginning with the off trace, passes the toggles thru 

the trace loops from the rear and attaches them to the hame 

tugs on the collar. The traces of the near horse are then 

attached in the same manner. The rear ends of the traces 

are left hanging over the backs of the horses. 

When the horses are harnessed for drill by pair, the traces, 

at the direction of the instructor, are either not attached or are 

toggled up by passing each trace over the back behind the 

saddle and slipping the ring of the trace chain over the toggle 

which attaches the opposite trace to the hame tug. 

Couple. — He turns his .pair about so as to face the stable 

driveway and attaches the hook at the end of the coupling 

rein to the right pommel ring of the near saddle. He then 

stands to horse. 

Yoke. — The wheel driver takes down the neck yoke; places 

himself between his horses, facing in the same direction w T ith 

them; fastens the breast strap of the off horse, then that of the 

near horse; passes the martingale of the near horse between 

the forelegs, thru the standing loop on the cincha; attaches 

the hooks at the end of the side straps to the martingale D 

ring; secures the martingale of the off horse in the same manner; 

then passes out in rear of the near horse and stands to horse. 

Q. What is the order of unharnessing by detail? In the field? 

A. i. By detail; 2. UNHARNESS. 

Unyoke. — At this command the wheel driver passes between 
his horses from the rear, unhooks the martingale of his near 



HARNESSING 147 

horse, and draws the martingale thru the standing loop 
on the cincha; then does the same with respect to the off horse; 
unhooks the inside end of each breast strap, detaches the 
neck yoke, and hangs it on its spike. 

Uncouple. — Each driver steps in front of his pair and un- 
couples. If the horses are facing the stable driveway, he 
turns them about to face the manger. 

Traces off. — He disengages the near trace of the near horse 
and lays its middle over the saddle, toggle on the near side; 
disengages the off trace and lays it beside the near trace, tog- 
gle on the off side; removes the traces and hangs them on their 
peg. In like manner he removes and hangs up the traces of 
the off horse. 

Unsaddle. — He unfastens the crupper of the near horse and 
places the attachments in the saddle; unfastens the collar 
strap and then unsaddles the near horse , placing the sad- 
dle on the low T er peg. He removes the blanket from the near 
horse and places it over the saddle, the folded edge away 
from the heel post. He then unsaddles the off horse in like 
manner. 

Unbridle. — He unbridles the near horse, puts the halter 
on, fastens the halter to the manger, and hangs the bridle 
on the upper peg next the heel post. He then unbridles the 
off horse in like manner. 

Collar off. — He removes the collar of the near horse, then that 
of the off horse, and hangs them up, the near collar next to the 
post, the zinced surfaces away from the heel post. 

Q. What is the order of harnessing and unharnessing in garrison? 

A. Executed as in field, but in such order as to suit the disposi- 
tion of the harness. Thus, the order in harnessing is: Collar, 
saddle, traces, bridle, couple, yoke. In unharnessing: Un- 
yoke, uncouple, unbridle, traces off, unsaddle, collar off. 

Q. Where are the horses tied during harnessing and unharnessing? 

A. While harnessing and unharnessing, the horses are ordinarily 
tied by their halters to their carriages, as follows : The lead pair 
to the right wheel of the gun or caisson or to the end of the pole; 
the swing or lead swing pair to the right wheel of the limber; 
the wheel pair to the left wheel of the limber; and the wheel 
swing pair, if present, to the left wheel of the gun or caisson. 



148 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE 

In harnessing or unharnessing by detail, drivers stand to heel 
after completing each detail of the instruction. 

Q. What is the importance of the fitting and adjusting of 
harness? 

A. Drivers must bestow constant and unremitting attention on 
the adjustment and fitting of their harness. They must 
learn early that a horse can not properly perform his work 
unless he is made comfortable in well-fitted harness. If the 
harness pinches, galls, or otherwise causes him discomfort, his 
sole idea will be to escape from the annoyance or pain 
thereby occasioned him, and he will become fretful, nervous, 
and unsteady in his work. This will not only add to his own 
distress, thru a useless expenditure of strength and nervous 
energy, but by rendering the draft of the whole team unsteady 
it will needlessly increase the work and fatigue of the other 
horses. 

Drivers must appreciate the fact that every sore, every injury, 
every abrasion of the skin, is due to a certain definite cause 
which, if removed, can produce no further effect. If ill-fitting 
harness has escaped the notice of a driver while his horses were 
at work, any injury caused thereby must not escape his notice 
at the next stables. Failure to discover and report such injury 
at once to the instructor or to the chief of section is a neglect 
calling for disciplinary correction. 

Injuries due to the harness must be discovered in their very 
beginning and at once reported to the officer in charge of the 
horses. That officer then performs his duty unsatisfactorily 
if he lacks ingenuity and skill to modify or correct the fit of 
the harness so as to remove the cause of the injury. 
It is only by constant attention on the part of all concerned — 
drivers, chiefs of section, chiefs of platoon, the officer in 
charge of the horses, and the captain — that the animals of a 
battery can be kept up to their work without more or less pro- 
longed periods of enforced idleness due to harness injuries. 
The bridle and saddle are fitted as already described. 
The collar should fit about the horse's shoulders and neck 
easily and uniformly. It should freely admit the thickness of 
the hand between the lower part of the collar and the throat 
and, when pulled to one side, should admit the thickness of the 



HARNESSING 149 

fingers between the sides of the collar and the neck. A short 
collar chokes a horse by pressing on the windpipe; a narrow 
one pinches and rubs the neck. A broad collar works about 
and galls the shoulders. More injuries result from collars 
that are too large than from collars that are too small. 
The final test of the fit of a collar is to observe it carefully 
when the horse is in draft and, at halts, to notice what effect it 
is having on his shoulders. 

After a collar has been properly fitted to a horse it should 
be marked with his battery number. This is conveniently 
done by painting the number just above the left draft spring 
on the inside of the collar. 

The back strap, when adjusted, should admit the breadth of 
the hand between it and the horse's back. If too short, the 
crupper will cut the tail and the saddle will be displaced. 
The collar strap should not be tight; otherwise it will pull the 
saddle forward on the withers. 

The surcingle, when used, should be buckled on the near side 
of the near horse and on the off side of the off horse, less tight 
than the girth and over it. 

The hip straps should be so adjusted as to enable the breech- 
ing body to bear flat against the thighs and to rest from 12 to 
15 inches below the dock. If this strap hangs too low, the 
action of the horse, when set into the breeching, will be inter- 
fered with; if it hangs too high, the side straps will rub the 
stifle. 

The side straps are adjusted to cause the breeching body to 
bear quickly should the horse be required to check the car- 
riage, but not so short as to impede the animal's movements 
while in draft. The exact adjustment can be obtained only 
by watching the horse in draft, both up and down grade. 
The martingale is fastened by its cincha strap to the neck 
yoke. The length of this fastening should be such as to per- 
mit the D ring and D ring safe on the martingale to be well 
thru the standing loop on the cincha, thus avoiding catch- 
ing and interfering with the latter when the horse is set into 
the breeching. The martingale must be kept smooth and soft 
or it will chafe the inner sides of the legs and rub the belly. 
Thv. breast straps should support the pole in a horizontal 



150 



FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE 



position. If the pole is too low, the effort of supporting it is 

increased; if too high, the martingale and neck yoke may rub 

the breast. 

The loin straps should be adjusted so that the traces, when in 

draft, will be straight and without downward pull on the trace 

loops. Otherwise, galls on the back will result. 

The traces. — The length of the lead and swing traces must 

depend in a great measure on the size of the horse and his 

stride. The rule for lead and swing pairs is to allow about i 




Off W7ieel Sfamess 



3ho<4/inj old model iridic 

PLATE XV 



Artilleri/ Jfarness 



Horse in draft 



yard from head to point of buttocks when in draft. The 
length of the wheel trace is fixed, but allowance may be made 
for difference in the size of the horses by proper adjustment of 
the martingale and side straps. This will allow a minimum 
distance of about 14 inches between hind quarters and single- 
tree for the average wheel horse when in draft. The traces 
should be adjusted by a strap under the belly or one over the 
saddle so that their direction shall be as nearly normal to the 
shoulders as possible to avoid any downward or upward pull 



HARNESSING 



151 



on the collar. A downward pull on the. collar will tend to gall 
or injure the neck, while an upward pull on it will tend to make 
it rise and choke the horse. 

The rear trace chains of the lead and swing traces have a 
ring at one end and a hook at the other; the hook is passed 
thru a "D" ring at the end of the trace and hooked back 
into any desired link. By this means the length of the lead 
and swing traces may be adjusted, Care must be exercised 




Off Zead J^irn ess . 

Showing near moist Jbridtc 
PLATE XV 

that the traces belonging to any one horse are of even length. 
The coupling rein should be so adjusted as to permit the off 
horse properly to maintain his trace and yet to hold him to his 
place in the team. 

THE ARTILLERY HARNESS 

[Plate XV.l 

The component parts of the artillery harness are given in the 
table below. Plate XV shows the harness for the off-wheel and 
off-lead horses. The nomenclature corresponding to the num- 
bers on the plate will be found in the table, 



152 



FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE 



#*:V- ; $ tfr 


_~J&~- 




.H^ Jfc 




kliH'iliiiu^ 


j? 1 La 


- 


>■ : * ... 


r 


^ . P^^s^'-ji ^Ukm 




stiiitii^^B^ 


•v"_ '" - . A -,".' v . ■ 


W' ' ' 





Horses in Draft with Full Packs 



HARNESSING 



153 



Xo. 

on 

plate 



Component parts 



Wheel 



Lead 



Property 
classifica- 
tion 



Near] Off jNear 
horse [horse :horse 



Off 

horse 



Class 



Sec- 



2 

3 

4 . 

8,9 



Backstrap and crupper, complete. . . 
Consisting of— - 

Body and hip straps 

Dock 

Loin strap 

Trace loops 

Backstrap-hooks 

Breast strap, complete 

Consisting of — 

Breast strap 

Breast-strap hooks 

Breeching, complete 

Consisting of — 

Backstrap (i) and hip straps (4) 

Body 

Dock 

Back-strap hooks 

Side-strap hooks 

3 Loin strap 

7] Side straps 

4 _ Trace loops 

10-19 Bridle, complete 

Consisting of — 

10 Brow band 

1 1 Brow-band ornaments . 

12 Check pieces 

18 Coupling strap 

Connecting strap 

Crownpiece 

Snaffle bit, model of 191 1 1 

Reins (pairs) . . 

Throatlatch 

20 Collar, steel 

21 Hame tug, a part of the collar 
40 Collar strap - 

22, 23 Halter, complete 

Consisting of — 

Headstall 

Tie rope 

Martingale, complete 

Consisting of — 

Martingale 

Cincha strap 

26-23 Saddle, complete 

Consisting of — 

Cinchas, with reinforces and 

loops 

Cinchas. without reinforces and 

loops 

Lead-rein roller and strap 

Quarter straps, including rings, 

safes, and cincha straps 

Cincha strap, a part of the sad- 
dle quarter strap 

431 Coat strap, 33-inch (pommel). . 

44 Coat strap, 45-inch (cantle).. . . 



19 
13 
14 
16 
17 



23 

24, 25 



24 
25 



27 



28 
29 



4 2 



IV 



1 Twenty curb bits with chains are issued for use in place of snaffle bits on 
fractious draft horses. 



154 



FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE 



No. 

on 

plate 


Component parts 

\ 

1 


Wheel 


Lead 


Property 
classifica- 
tion 


Near 
horse 


Off 
horse 


Near 
horse 


Off 
horse 


Class 


Sec- 
tion 


30 
3i 
32 


Saddle, complete — Continued. 
Consisting of — 

Coat strap, 60-inch 




2 
1 

2 
2 
1 
2 


1 

2 
2 

2 


2 

1 

2 
2 
1 
2 
2 


IV 
IX 




Saddletree, leather-covered 

Stirrups, brass (new style nickel 
steel) 


1 

2 
2 




33 
34 
35 
36 


Stirrup straps 




Saddlebags 




Saddlebag side straps 






Traces, lead, model of 1908, 








Consisting of — 

1 trace body 
























3 links 














1 chain 














1 toggle 














2 sockets 














2 cones 














2 filler pieces 










8 


37 


Traces, wheel, model of 1908 

Consisting of — 

1 trace body 


2 


2 












































2 sockets 














2 links 














2 chains 














2 toggles 














2 cones 














2 filler pieces 












38 


Mogul spring, a part of wheel 
trace ' 


























1 loop hook. . . 




























1 Mogul spring loop 














1 locking strap 












39 


Trace chain 






2 

1 
2 

1 


2 

1 






Whip 


1 
2 

1 


1 






Sweat leathers 




41 


Blanket, issued separately from har- 
ness , 


5 



STEEL COLLARS 

Sizes and Directions for Fitting 

Steel collars are made in the following sizes: 2 A, 2 B, 4 A, 4 B, 
5, 5 A, 5 B, 6, 6 A, 6 B, 7, 7 A, 7 B, and 8 A. The number and 
shape of the collar are stamped on the front side under the ex- 
tension bolt. The A and B shapes have straighter sides than 
the numbers without letters. When issued with harness, unless 
otherwise ordered, 10 per cent of the collars are No, 5, 5° P^ r cent 



HARNESSING 155 

No 5 A, and 40 per cent. No. 6. In requisitions, the size of 
collars desired should be given. 

The steel collar pads are made in seven different sizes: No. o 
is 4 inches wide, No. 1 is 4.5 inches, No. 2 is 5 inches, etc., to No. 
6, which is 7 inches wide. The pad connections are also furnished 
in seven sizes, From No. o to No. 6. For the plain number of 
collar (5, 6, or 7) the regular adjustment requires a pad connec- 
tion of the same number as the pad. The A and B shapes have 
straighter sides and take a pad connection two sizes larger than 
the pad — that is, it would take a No. 3 connection with a No. 1 
pad, etc., for the regular adjustment in these shapes. When the 
collar is very wide at the top and narrow at the bottom the size of 
the pad connection must be increased one or two numbers to 
allow the collar to close easily at the bottom. In the reverse case, 
a smaller pad connection should be used. The collar pads are 
numbered on the front inner side. The pad connections are 
numbered on the side having the round holes, which side must 
be kept to the front on the collar. In requisitions for collar pads 
and pad connections, the sizes desired must be stated. 

The buckle is made in two sizes. No. 2 is 1 inch longer than 
No. 1, and is used with the larger sizes of collar pad. 

The correct adjustment and fitting of collars is of the utmost 
importance. The variety of sizes and shapes of collars, pads, 
pad connections, and buckles issued by the Ordnance Depart- 
ment is sufficient to enable any horse to be correctly fitted. 
Efficient supervision by officers of the fitting of collars and of the 
adjustment of the point of draft (trace plate) is required to 
secure proper results. 

The table of dimensions gives the largest and smallest size 
that each collar can be made with the No. 3 and No. 1 pads. 
Adding }/2 inch in length and width to the smallest dimen- 
sions given in the table will give the size of the collars when 
fitted with the No. 2 pads. These examples are given to show 
the three regular adjustments in each size of collar, but these 
dimensions can be varied to suit the different shapes of necks. 
The largest pad can be put in the top of the collar and the bottom 
taken in to its smallest dimensions, or the smallest pad can be 
put in the top and the bottom left out. While each collar can be 
lengthened or shortened and taken in or let out at the bottom by 



156 



FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE 



means of the adjustments provided, the width at the top can 
not be changed without using a larger or smaller pad. 

Table of Dimensions 

(Size of collars fitted with No. 3 pads) 



Number of collar 


Length of 
collar in- 
side, 


Width 6 

inches 

down from 

top, 


Width 8 

inches 

down from 

top, 


Width at 
draft, 


2 A 


inches 
18 
18 

10M 
ioM 
21 
21 
21 

22^ 
22>2 

22>2 
24 
24 
24 

25 H 


inches 
6% 

6H 

7 

7 5 A 
7 

7 5 4 

7 
7 

7^8 

7 
7 
7 


inches 
7H 
6% 
7% 
7H 

&u 

7% 

7H 

7 7 A 
7M 

83/2 

7 7 A 

7%6 

7M 


inches 


2 b : 


8 


4 A 


8M 


4 B 


8^ 


5 


9M 


5 A 


9 


5 B 


8H 


6 


9% 


6 A 


9M 


6 B 


9% 


7 


10M 


7 A 


9^8 


7 B 


10 


8 A 


9% 









(Size of collar fitted with No. 1 pads) 



2 A. 
2 B. 

4 A. 
4.B. 

5-... 

5 A. 

5 B. 
6.... 

6 A. 

6 B. 
7.... 

7 A. 
7B. 

8 A. 




In fitting irregular shapes none of the connections may give 
just the proper tension on the pad. In such a case use the one 
that comes nearest and straighten or bend the extension at the 
top. When the collar requires to be widened at top to relieve 



HARNESSING 



157 



the pressure on the pad and make it lock easily at the bottom, 
open the collar wide and place a round piece of hard wood or 
iron, i inch in diameter and 2 inches long, between the connec- 
tion and collar side close up to the hinge; then press the sides 
together and bend both sides alike, so that they will be the same 




COLLAR PAD CONNECTION 



COLLAR PAD 



COLLAR STRAP 




WRENCH 



length at the bottom. Do not let the fulcrum rest on the pad, for 
it will bend it. If the collar sides require straightening to close 
them tighter on the pad and give more tension on the latch at 
the bottom, open the colar at the bottom, hook the wrench over 



158 



FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE 



the top of collar side, and press down the lever, treating both 
sides alike. Both of these operations can be performed with the 
collar put together. 

The spare parts furnished for the repair of the collars with 
the correct names of the parts are shown on Plate XVI. 




BUCKLE LATCH 



DRAFT SPRING 



PAD HOOK 



^^^ 



'and NUT for TOP CONNECTION 



B0L7 and NUT for BOTTOM of COLLAR 





PAD BOLT At, 



#s$ 



SOLTano NOT for TRACE PLATE 



V 
BOLT AND NUT FOR EXTENSION 

YflWf 

BUCKLE SPRING 



TRACE PLATE 
COLLAR BACK STRAP CONNECTION 




Canvas collar pads are not part of the Artillery harness, but 
are ' furnished upon requisition. They are made in sizes Nos. 
2, 3, 4, 5, and 6, as called for; if no size is called for, they are 
made in equal proportions of Nos. 4, 5, and 6. 



PERSONAL HYGIENE AND FIRST AID 

By Major Norman D. Smith 

Q. What is the first requirement for good health? 

A. Cleanliness of body and clothing. 

Q. How is cleanliness of body and clothing maintained? 

A. (a) Frequent bathing, (at least twice a week in cold weather 
and daily in hot weather), keeps the pores of the skin free 
and open so that they may secrete the waste matter of the 
body, which if not secreted' would soon produce illness, (b) 
Very dirty clothing should be soaked first, and then thor- 
oughly scrubbed. If water is not obtainable, as in some 
field conditions, the underclothing should be changed, dried 
in the sun, aired and beaten. 

Q. What materials are used in making clothing? 

A. Wool, cotton and linen. 

Q. What are the advantages of woolen clothing? 

A. Wool is a poor conductor of heat and a good absorbent of 
moisture, hence it keeps in the heat of the body in winter, 
and keeps out the heat of the sun in summer. By absorb- 
ing and condensing moisture, thus setting forth its latent 
heat, it keeps the body from getting chilled after excessive 
perspiration. These properties make it suitable for under- 
garments, both for summer and winter, and outer garments 
in winter. 

Q. What are the advantages of cotton clothing? 

A. Cotton is a good conductor of heat and a poor absorbent of 
moisture, which makes it useful as an outer garment in 
summer. 

Q. When should the teeth be cleaned? 

A. Immediately after each meal. 

Q. What happens if teeth are not cleaned? 

A. Tartar forms, causing the gums to become soft and spongy, 
so that they bleed easily and are thus exposed to infection. 

Q. What protects the teeth from decay? 

159 



160 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE 

A. A hard white covering called enamel, which when broken 

allows the teeth to decay. 
Q. What is one of the greatest dangers to which a soldier is 

exposed? 
A. Venereal diseases. 

Q. What is the only certain protection against venereal disease? 
A. Absolute avoidance of impure intercourse. 
Q. What is meant by the term continence, as applied to sexual 

relations? 
A. By continence is meant, the absolute refraining from sexual 

intercourse. 
Q. Is continence harmful to the young and vigorous man? 
A. Absolutely not. Nature has provided emissions for any 

excess accumulation of seminal fluid and this occasional 

occurrence does no harm. 
Q. How may foot soreness be avoided? 
A. (i) Properly fitted and shaped shoes. No shoes should be 

worn except that issued by Quartermaster Department. 

(2) Clean feet; and (3) Clean dry socks. 
Q. What care of the feet should be taken on the march? 
A. Feet would be washed carefully at the end of a march; 

socks changed and the old pair either washed or at least 

sunned and dried for the next day's use. If the feet become 

sore, rub with vaseline, especially between the toes. If 

vaseline is not available, use foot powder. 
Q. What is the treatment for blistered feet? 
A. If the blisters are small, cover them with adhesive plaster 

but do not open them. If large, make only a small opening 

and press the fluid out. If the skin is rubbed off cover the 

blistered area with plaster. 
Q. What is meant by chafing and how is it prevented? 
A. Chafing is an irritation of the skin caused by rubbing, and 

is most common in the crotch or other joint flexures. The 

surest preventative is cleanliness, which is accomplished by 

daily baths. If water is scarce, at least the feet, hands, 

genitals, and arm-pits should be washed. 
Q. What is the treatment for lice? 
A. Lice are generally the result of lack of cleanliness. When 

found on the body the hair of the parts affected should be 



PERSONAL HYGIENE AND FIRST AID 161 

cut close and blue ointment, or a solution of bichloride 
(One tab. to a half pint of water) should be applied. Under- 
clothes should be boiled. 

Q. How much water is necessary for the average man per day? 

A. From 3 to 4 pints. 

Q. What diseases are caused by the presence of (1) the mosquito, 
(2) the fly? 

A. Both Malaria and Yellow fever are transmitted by the 
mosquito. Typhoid fever is transmitted by the fly. 

Q. From what three diseases, has the soldier been made im- 
mune? 

A. Smallpox, by vaccination, and Typhoid fever and Paraty- 
phoid fever by inoculation. 

FIRST AID 

Q. What does the first-aid package contain? 

A. Two compresses of gauze, sewed to a bandage, and wrapped in 

waxed paper. Also two safety pins wrapped in wax paper. 
Q. For what is the first-aid package used? 
A. Used for all types of open wounds and injuries of such size 

as justify emergency treatment. It is not for minor scratches 

and knocks. 
Q. What first aid treatment will give relief from insect bites? 
A. Paste of bicarbonate of soda, ammonia, or wood ash, applied 

to the bitten area. 
Q. How would you treat a snake bite? 
A. Cut down at site of bite, suck out poison, cauterize with hot 

coal or gun powder poured on and ignited, put ligature above 

the bite. 
Q. What is Tetanus and how is it prevented? 
A. Tetanus — commonly known as Lockjaw — is prevented by 

prompt attention to wounds, especially where they are deep 

and dirty, and incurred near picket line, or around stable. 
Q. What is hemorrhage and how do you recognize it? 
A. Hemorrhage is bleeding. It is recognized by the presence of 

blood. In severe hemorrhage by the collapse of the patient. 
Q. Name types of hemorrhage, and means of distinguishing 

different types. 
11 



162 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE 

A. They are of three types; namely, venous, capillary and 
arterial. In the case of capillary hemorrhage, blood oozes 
all over wound; venous; rapid, steady flow of dark blood; 
arterial; bright in color and escapes in spurts. 

Q. How would you treat the venous and arterial types? 

A. Venous — by elevation and pressure over wound, that is, with 
first aid dressing, and pressure below the injury. Arterial — 
by pressure above the injury. 

Q. What common method can be used to stop arterial bleeding? 

A. Pressure above, by (a) ringers, (b) tourniquet. 

Q. Describe an improvised tourniquet. 

A. Use a handkerchief, piece of clothing, hat cord, or other 
binding material to wrap around and above the bleeding point, 
with knot above the line of blood vessel and tightened until 
bleeding is controlled, but not too tightly, as it will cause 
gangrene. 

Q. What is a dislocation? 

A. It is the slipping of a bone out of joint. 

Q. What is the most common dislocation and why? 

A. Shoulder, because the joint cavity is shallow (to allow of wide 
range of motion) and because the shoulder is most used and 
most subject to sprains and injuries. 

Q. What are most easily recognized signs of dislocation? 

A. Patient cannot move joint, sickening pain, often numbness or 
tingling in the affected part; limb is fixed and cannot be 
moved, limb fixed in an unnatural position and seems longer 
than the one on the opposite side. 

Q. How do you feel the difference between a fracture and a dis- 
location? 

A. In fracture there is an unnatural degree of moaon between the 
joint, instead of fixed joint; movement also produces grating 
sound and sensation. The deformity is between the joints 
and often the affected limb is shorter than the one on the 
sound side. 

Q. What is a fracture? 

A. A fracture is a broken bone. 

Q. What are the main types and describe them? 

A. Simple and compound — A simple fracture occurs when the 
bone is broken without the skin being ruptured. In a com- 



PERSONAL HYGIENE AND FIRST AID 163 

pound fracture, the ragged edge of the bone protrudes 
through the skin and may be easily seen from the outside. 

Q. What are the usual symptoms of fracture? 

A. Pain, tenderness, unusual amount of motion between joints, 
grating sensation on motion, shortening of the affected limb. 

Q. What would be your first aid treatment of a simple fracture? 

A. Make patient comfortable, place limb in straight line — 
handling carefully, so as not to push broken bones thru 
skin; fix limb rigidly by some method of splint so as to render 
it immovable. 

Q. Xame some common materials from which splints may be 
improvised. 

A. Small limbs and twigs of trees, rifles, bayonets, blankets, hay, 
sticks or anything which will hold the limb immovable. 

Q. Describe sunstroke. 

A. Sunstroke is caused by prolonged exposure to excessive heat, 
as sunlight. Patient first has headache and dizziness, and 
then sensation of looking thru red haze. He falls uncon- 
scious, skin is dry and very hot, pulse becomes very full, he has 
deep breathing resembling snore and cannot be aroused. 

Q. What is the treatment? 

A. Place in cool shady place and remove clothes. Apply ice or 
cold water to head and over body. 

Q. What is heat exhaustion? 

A. Heat exhaustion is similar to fainting. The patient falls, but 
is not unconscious, face is pale, skin moist and clammy, pulse 
weak, and breathing very shallow. 

Q. What is the treatment? 

A. Place patient in shade, loosen clothing, keep head low, give 
water and keep body warm. 

Q. What are symptoms of frost bite? 

A. Unpleasant sensation of cold with pain, the part becomes red, 
and finally white. The affected part is hard and painless. 

Q. What is the treatment? 

A. Prevent body from quickly becoming warm. Remember 
not to move into warm room. Rub well with ice or wet 
snow. After the pain and redness reappears, put on wet 
dressing. 

Q. Give first aid treatment for burns. 



164 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE 

A. First remove clothing from burned area, then apply any 
substance which will exclude the air, such as vaseline, lard, 
butter or lubricating oil. 

Q. What is the treatment for unconsciousness? 

A. Place patient flat on back, give plenty of fresh air, sprinkle 
face and neck with cold water. Keep bystanders away. 

Q. Give treatment of fits. 

A. Loosen clothing, restrain patient, and protect tongue from 
being bitten by placing wooden peg, folded towel or knife 
handle between the teeth. After recovering consciousness 
allow patient to sleep and rest. 

Q. What should be done in case of fire in one's clothing? 

A. Do not run as this would tend to fan the flame and increase it. 
Roll on the floor or ground and smother the fire in that 
manner or by wrapping up in a rug or blanket. Great care 
should be taken not to inhale the flame. 

Q. Give treatment for sprains of ankle, wrist, hand or foot. 

A. Put into water as hot as possible for ten or fifteen minutes, 
then apply a tight bandage and elevate. 

Q. What is the treatment of Ivy-poisoning? 

A. Wash affected part with soap and water to dissolve and re- 
move any remaining poison that may be on the skin and apply 
solution of baking soda, or 20 drops of bromine to 1 oz. of 
glycerine. 

Q. What is the treatment of ptomaine poisoning? 

A. Empty the stomach by drinking warm mustard water (table 
spoon of mustard to a tumbler of water) or by sticking the 
index finger down the throat. Make the bowels move 
freely by using Epsom salts or Castor oil. Give stimulants 
and apply heat externally. 

Q. Give treatment for drowning. 

A. In drowning water gets into the air passages and mechanically 
shuts off the air. 

To clear the lungs of water turn the patient on his face with 
forehead on his wrist with a roll of clothing under his chest. 
Get astride the body, press on the back to force out the 
water, next place your hands under his abdomen and lift 
up his body with head hanging down so that water will run 
out. 



PERSONAL HYGIENE AND FIRST AID 165 

Follow this with artificial respiration as follows: 
Place patient on his back, shoulders slightly raised by small 
pillows or folded coat, clear nose and throat of mucus, 
froth and dirt, draw the tongue forward to keep it from drop- 
ping back and closing the opening of the larynx. Keep it 
forward by forcing a pencil between the last teeth and over 
the tongue or by having an assistant hold it between his 
fingers covered by a handkerchief. 

Loosen all clothing; kneel behind patient's head facing his 
feet; grasp his forearms just below the elbows and press them 
against the front and sides of the chest, throwing the weight 
of your body forward and upon his arms and chest. This 
forces the air out of the lungs. Then draw his forearms slowly 
upward above patient's head throwing your own body back, 
so as to make the extension complete; this draws the lower 
ribs upward and outward, expands the chest and the air rushes 
in; repeat these movements about fifteen times to the minute 
and keep it up until patient begins to breathe by himself or 
until there appears no possibility of his doing so. 
Keep artificial respiration working at least one hour before 
giving up and at the same time snuff, tobacco, pepper or 
smelling salts may be applied to the nostrils to aid in stimula- 
ting respiration. 



INSTRUMENTS 

ist Lt. Kenneth D. Rockwell 

Q. What unit of measure is used in computing angles for artil- 
lery purposes ? 

A. The mil. 

Q. What is a mil? 

A. A mil is the angle which subtends i yard at iooo yards 
range. Therefore, the value of a mil at any particular point 
is one-one-thousandth (Kooo) of the range in yards to that 
point. There are 6400 mils in the circumference of a circle. 

Q. What instrument is used for measuring these angles? 

A. The Battery Commander's Telescope (Scissors Instrument) 
and the Aiming Circle. 

THE BATTERY COMMANDER'S TELESCOPE 

Q. How is the Battery Commander's Telescope set up? 

A. The tripod is first removed from the case, the thumbscrews 
at the bottom of the wooden part of the legs unloosened, the 
metal extensions drawn out, and tripod set up so that the 
legs will not be placed too far apart. The head of the tripod, 
containing the spindle, must be as level as possible. The 
instrument should be removed from its case, the elevating 
worm case straightened out, and the instrument seated on the 
spindle of the tripod after pressing in the locking plunger. 

Q. How is the instrument leveled? 

A. The vertical spindle clamping lever should be loosened and 
the instrument so adjusted that the bubble on the Azimuth 
worm case is centered when looking at it from two directions 
at right angles one from the other. 

Q. How is the instrument focused? 

A. The telescope is directed on a distant object, one eye is closed* 
and the eyepiece for the other is focused by twisting the ad- 

166 



INSTRUMENTS 167 

justing screw until the object appears clearly denned. Repeat 
the process for the other eyepiece. The interpupilary dis- 
tance is adjusted by turning the interpupilary adjusting screw 
until the distant object appears in a clear, distinct image. 

Q. How is the angle of deflection, or a horizontal angle measured? 

A. The Azimuth scale is set at zero, and, without altering the 
reading — by loosening the lower free motion screw — the 
vertical cross-hairs are directed on the aiming point; the free 
motion screw is set up and any error corrected with the aid 
of the slow motion screw immediately above it. After this 
has been done the Azimuth scale should be released and the 
vertical cross-hair put on the object to which the angle is to be 
measured. The angle is then set off and easily read. 

Q. How is vertical, or angle of site measured? 

A. The instrument is set up and leveled. A sight is made on the 
object to which the angle is to be measured, instrument being 
adjusted to bring the horizontal cross-hair on the base of the 
object. The bubble between the tubes is leveled and the 
reading appearing on the attached scale is the angle. 

THE AIMING CIRCLE 

Q. How is the aiming circle set up? 

A. The tripod is set up and the instrument mounted on it and 
leveled by centering the bubble in the middle of the upper 
face. 

Q. How is an angle of deflection measured? 

A. The Azimuth scale is set at zero and the instrument turned 
until the cross-hairs appear exactly on the aiming point, the 
lower worm knob being used for this purpose. The head is 
then released by means of the Azimuth worm lever and turned 
so that the cross-hairs will appear on the target or object 
to which the angle is to be measured. Read the angle. 

Q. How may an angle of site be measured? 

A. The instrument being level, the cross-hairs are placed on the 
base of the target by operating the thumbscrew located 
below the eyepiece, the bubble at the end of the telescope 
elbow centered by means of the worm scale. The reading 
on the angle of site scale is the angle of site. 



168 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE 

Q. In the event of these instruments being destroyed by shell 
fire, by what means may the horizontal or angles of de- 
flection be measured? 

A. By means of the Battery Commander's Ruler and by the use 
of the fist. 

Q. How should the string on the B. C. Ruler be adjusted so that 
the ruler will accurately measure 300 mils. 

A. With the Battery Commander's Telescope lay off 300 mils 
on the side of a building, subdividing the last 100 mils into 50 
mil parts. One of these parts should be again divided, 
and the last 25 mils further divided into 5 equal parts of 
5 mils each. Drive a stake at the point over which the 
B. C. Instrument was set up. Then by standing so that eye 
is over stake and holding the cord of the ruler against the teeth 
and shortening or lengthening it a point may be determined 
such that when the ruler is so held it will accurately measure 
300 mils. Tie a knot in the string at this point. 

Q. How may the mil value of your fist be determined? 

A. By standing at the stake above mentioned and extending the 
arm horizontally to the side, fist closed, read along the line of 
knuckles the number of mils covered. The hand may then 
be opened and fingers calibrated. 

Q. If the angle to be measured approached, or was slightly 
greater than 3200 mils (a straight line) how could its value 
be quickly determined? 

A. By taking two rocks or two sticks and placing one of them on 
the ground in front of the body and pointing to the aiming 
point; then moving back 20 or 30 feet align the body 
with the first marker and the aiming point, place the other 
stick or rock on this line. Then move back toward the aim- 
ing point in the direction of the first stick, turn about and 
align the body with the two markers. Sight over the markers 
and locate a distant point or object in continuation of the 
line. Measure the remaining distance to the target, adding 
or subtracting this amount from 3200, as the conditions may 
require. If care is exercised, the angle may be measured 
very accurately in this manner. 

Q. If the angle to be measured were about 1600 mils (aright 
angle), how could it be measured? 



INSTRUMENTS 169 

A. By taking a book or some object with a square corner, hold- 
ing it horizontally on the finger ends and sighting along one 
side at the aiming point hold the book for an assistant to 
sight along the edge at right angles and locate a point. The 
distance between the two points so determined would sub- 
tend an angle of 1600 mils. As in the preceding method 
measure any remaining distance with the B. C. Ruler, and 
add or subtract this amount from 1600, as the case may 
necessitate. 

THE RANGE FINDER 

Q. How are ranges determined? 

A. By means of the range finder. The range finder is a long 
cylindrical instrument padded at each end and mounted on a 
tripod. The focus is obtained by turning the eyepiece. 

Q. How is a range finder operated? 

A. Adjust by the turn screw in front so that the two eyes of the 
instrument will include the object, the range of which is 
desired. Two images will be seen — one upright, the other 
inverted, separated by a medial horizontal line into which 
both images can be made to merge and on which both images 
can be horizontally aligned so that they are equidistant. 
To secure this equidistant, horizontal alignment of both 
images, turn the knurled roller screw (halving screw) in the 
lower right arm of the instrument. To align both images 
vertically so that they will merge into each other perfectly on 
the horizontal line already referred to, turn the knurled 
roller screw (ranging screw) in the upper right arm of the 
instrument. Read off the range in yards thru the window 
in the left arm of the instrument. Caution: (1) Adjust for 
only one object at a time and only some definite part of that 
one object, as right or left edge; (2) Do not disturb the regis- 
tration reading in theiittle window on the right arm of the 
instrument — this reading is the manufacturer's check for 
the original true adjustment of your particular instrument. 

Q. How may a range be determined when the range finder is not 
available ? 

A. Examine the object to which the range is to be found thru 
glasses and, basing an estimate on previous experience in 



170 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE 

estimating distances and heights, estimate its height in yards. 
Then, by holding the B.C. Ruler in a vertical position, or by 
using the mil scale in the glasses, determine the height of the 
object. Divide the number of yards of your estimate by the 
number of mils, and the result will be the value of a mil at 
that distance. Multiply by iooo and the range will be 
determined. Care in the estimation of the height of the ob- 
ject in question will lead to accurate results. 

Q. What is the purpose of an angle of deflection in the artillery 
service? 

A. So that the gun may be pointed as accurately as possible at 
the target whether seen or not seen by the gunner. 

Q. What is an aiming point? 

A. An aiming point is some sharply defined and easily recogniz- 
able object, or feature of the terrain, either in front or in rear 
of the guns, used for reference to secure accuracy of fire. The 
farther an aiming point is from the guns the better it serves 
to increase accuracy of fire. 

Q. How is the aiming point used? 

A. The Battery commander, with his Detail, establishes his sta- 
tion at some point as near the guns as possible, from which he 
is able to observe both the target and the aiming point. By the 
use of the instruments — the B. C. Telescope or the Aiming 
Circle, he measures the angle (A) from aiming point (A. P.) to 
target (T) and corrects this by the proper difference for the 
same angle at the guns — which angle is then sent down as De- 
flection. The correction can be made most quickly by the 
Parallel Method as follows: lay zero of the instrument on a 
point as far from the A. P. as you are from the line joining the 
A. P. and the gun and on the same side of that line as your 
station, read around counter-clockwise to a point correspond- 
ing with T, which point will be as far from T as you are from 
the line joining T and the gun and on the same side of that 
line as your station. The reading will be the deflection and 
by means of the panoramic sights on the guns, the gunners are 
able to lay precisely the same angle on the same aiming point 
so as to point muzzles automatically on the target. 

Q. What are auxiliary aiming points? 

A. Points established by executive officer or chiefs of section for 



INSTRUMENTS 171 

individual guns so that accurate laying may be secured when 
all the guns cannot lay on the same distant aiming point. 

Q. What is parallax? 

A. Parallax is the angular difference in deflection for guns, the 
unit of measurement being the angle subtending an arc the 
chord of which is one platoon front (20 yards). 

Q. What is the angle of site? 

A. The angle of site is the vertical angle formed between a hori- 
zontal plane and a line from the gun to the target. 

Q. Why is it necessary to figure an angle of site? 

A. Because differences of elevation between guns and targets 
have practically the same effect as differences in range. In 
order, therefore, to fire accurately, it is necessary to determine 
the angle of site and use it in conjunction with the determined 
range to compute the gun range for the particular situation. 



HORSEMANSHIP 

By Capt. H. W. Banks and 2D Lt. E. J. Laing 
GROOMING 

Q. Why is grooming necessary? 

A. Because a horse throws off a great deal of waste matter 
through the pores of his skin, and if this is not removed from 
the surface of the body the skin clogs up and is unable to per- 
form its proper functions, and the horse becomes sick from not 
being able to get rid of the waste matter. The friction of the 
brush stimulates the circulation of the blood and makes the 
skin healthy. The brush should be applied vigorously, and 
frequently, during the grooming process, cleaned on the curry- 
comb. The currycomb may be used to loosen hard dirt and 
mud, but must not be used below the knees and hocks, or on 
any place where the bones or joints are near the surface. A 
thorough grooming acts in the same manner as a bath. A 
horse with a clean skin is less likely to get sores from the saddle 
and harness, than is one which has not been properly groomed. 

Q. Why is it necessary to clean the feet? 

A. Because manure and dirt collects in the clefts between the frog 
and the sole, where it rots and causes thrush or other foot 
diseases, if the foot is not cleaned regularly. In the course of 
cleaning a horse's feet, always inspect them to determine 
whether any of the shoes are loose, or the nails broken or 
twisted. If anything is wrong, the stable sergeant should be 
notified immediately, as a loose shoe will cause a great deal of 
trouble if not securely fastened as soon as it is located. 

Q. If only a few minutes are given for grooming, what parts 
should receive particular attention? 

A. The feet, shoulders, back and cincha place. 

Q. What is the order for grooming by detail? 

A. To groom by detail the instructor causes the men to stand to 

172 



HORSEMANSHIP 173 

heel and commands: (i) By detail, (2) COMMENCE 
GROOMING. Clean and brush front legs from the knees 
down, rubbing under the fetlocks and around the coronets 
with the brush and hand; time, 2 minutes. (3) CHANGE. 
Same as at second co mmand, the hind legs from the hocks 
down; time, 2 minutes. (4) CHANGE. On the near side, 
with curry comb and brush, groom neck, shoulder, arm, elbow, 
back, side, flank, loins, croup, and the hind leg to the hock; 
time, 4 minutes. (5) CHANGE. First on the near side, 
after finishing up on the off side, groom chest between the 
forelegs, the belly, and between the hind legs; time, 3 minutes. 

(6) CHANGE. Same as 4, on the off side; time, 4 minutes. 

(7) CHANGE. Brush head, ears, and throat; with the hand 
rub the throat and between the forks of the lower jaw; time, 1 
minute. (8) CHANGE. Brush and lay forelock and mane; 
time, 2 minutes. (9) CHANGE. Brush out the tail; time, 
2 minutes. (10) CHANGE. With the grooming cloth, or 
with a damp cloth or sponge if the parts are foul, wipe out the 
eyes and nostrils; wipe the muzzle, dock, sheath, and up 
between the hind legs; time, 2 minutes. (11) CHANGE. 
Clean out the feet; time, 2 minutes. (12) CHANGE. Com- 
plete any unfinished work. (13) CEASE GROOMING. 
(14) STAND TO HEEL. 

Total time required for the horse, at least 24 minutes. 
To facilitate supervision, the men must be required to change 
promptly at the command. 

To judge the cleanliness of a horse, the hand may be passed 
the reverse way of the hair to get a view of the skin. When 
the points of the fingers are run firmly against the set of the 
coat, lines of gray are left on the coat of a dirty skin and the 
points of the skin are covered with scurf. Between the 
branches of the under jaw, under the crownpiece of the halter, 
at the bends of the knees and hocks, under the belly and 
between the forelegs and thighs are the places usually 
neglected when the work is not thorough and which should 
be looked at when the horse is being inspected. 

Q. How should a horse be dried when he is wet and muddy? 

A. He should be thoroughly rubbed with a straw wisp and his 
hair laid flat with a brush. 



174 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE 

Q. What are the characteristics of a horse that should be borne 
in mind in order to handle him properly? 

A. That he is an animal of small intelligence. That he has 
an excellent memory; that his education is based on the prin- 
ciple of certain movements being demanded in a definite 
manner; and his rewards for their proper performance given 
immediately. 

Q. When should a horse be punished? 

A. Immediately after he disobeys, or while he is in the act of 
disobeying. Punishment after the act has been committed 
and forgotten does more harm than not punishing him when 
the act is being performed. 

Q. What qualities make a good horseman? 

A. Patience, more than anything else. If you lose your temper 
with a horse and punish him while in the heat of anger, you 
are liable to ruin the results of all your previous efforts in 
training him. Under no condition should a horse be struck 
about the head. 

Q. How would you describe a good seat? 

A. Weight resting evenly on the buttocks, thighs in contact with 
the horse, legs from the knees down hanging easily. The body 
should be erect not inclined forward or backward, shoulders 
square, head up. The arms should hang naturally, with the 
elbows close to the sides, hands low with thumbs up and the 
backs of the hands turned out. The body should be without 
stiffness and an easy seat maintained by balance and friction 
rather than by a grip of the knees. The reins must never be 
used as a means of support. 

Q. Is lounging in the saddle permitted while riding at route order? 

A. Never. If the weight is unevenly distributed over the saddle, 
it may cause a sore back. A good seat makes it easier for the 
horse to carry the weight. 

Q. What do you mean by the aids? 

A. The means at the disposal of the rider for controlling the 
movements and gaits of his horse are his legs, reins, and 
weight. These are termed the aids. On suitable occasions 
the aids are assisted or emphasized by a proper use of the 
spurs, the whip, and the voice. According to their very na- 
ture, the legs are the driving, while the reins are the restrain- 



HORSEMANSHIP 175 

ing aids. Both are effectively assisted, by the weight of the 
rider. Of the two aids, the driving and restraining, the for- 
mer are overwhelmingly predominating. As the training of a 
horse or rider progresses, the aids must become more refined 
and less noticeable until the horse, without perceptible effort 
on the part of the rider, seems to obey the latter's thoughts 
alone. 
Any of the aids prescribed should be used intermittently, 

rather than by means of a steady pressure. The whip must 

be used to direct the off horse by light taps on the shoulders 

or haunches, to make him keep his place in the team. 

Q. What is the use of the reins? 

A. To control the forward movement of the horse and to direct 
the forehand, i.e., the -part of the horse in front of the rider. 
The forehand is moved to either side by pressure of the rein 
against the neck and a slightly increased pull on the opposite 
rein. 

Q. How T should the legs be used? 

A. The legs govern the movement of the haunches, i.e., the part 
of the horse behind the rider. The legs should act behind 
the girth, and always together. When the pressure of the 
legs is equal, it makes the horse move forward. When the 
right leg acts more strongly than the left, the haunches are 
moved to the left. The legs should tap the horse lightly 
and not apply a steady pressure. 

Q. What is meant by keeping a horse up to the bit? 

A. It means keeping a light even pressure through the reins in 
contact with the horse's mouth. The movement of his head 
is taken up through the rider's fingers and wrists. 

Q. How T is a horse kept up to the bit? 

A. By means of the legs. If the reins hang loose, it is an indica- 
tion that no control is being exercised over the forehand. If 
he leans heavily against the bit, the mouth is liable to become 
hardened and insensitive, thus making him hard to control. 
For the same reason, a steady pressure through the reins is 
to be discouraged. Contact with his mouth should be main- 
tained through successive tightening and loosening of the 
reins with the fingers and wrists. The reins should never be 
jerked. 



176 



FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE 




HORSEMANSHIP 



177 



Q. How should the spurs be used? 

A. Spurs are only used to increase the effect of the leg pressures. 
The spurs should be applied lightly after the legs have failed 
to execute the desired movement. Spurs are also used to 
punish the horse while he is disobeying — never afterward. 

Q. How is the horse gathered? 

A. By closing the legs lightly behind the girth and putting a 
slight pressure on the bit, without permitting the horse to 
move forward. 

Q. What is the object of gathering the horse? 

A. To get his legs under him and to concentrate his attention, so 
that he will move in the desired direction at the command. 
It is similar to calling a dismounted man to attention before 
executing a movement. The same thing must be done when- 
ever it is desired to increase or decrease the gait, or to change 
the direction of march. 

Q. How should a horse be halted? 

A. He should be gathered, the weight of the body thrown slightly 
backward, the legs closed and the pressure on the bit increased, 
meanwhile keeping his haunches straight through the aid of 
the legs. 





Points of the 


Horse. 






i. Lips. 


18. Ribs, of barrel 




35- 


Pastern. 


2. Muzzle. 


19. Girth. 




36. 


Cornet. 


3. Face. 


20. Loins. 




37. 


Foot. 


4. Forehead. 


21. CrQup. 




38. 


Fetlock. 


5. Eyebrows. 


22. Tail. 




39- 


Point of the hip. 


6. Forelock. 


23. Dock. 




39a. Haunch. 


7. Ears. 


24. Flank. 




40. 


Thigh. 


8. Lower jaw. 


25. Belly. 




41. 


Stifle. 


9. Cheek. 


26. Sheath. 




42. 


Buttock. 


10. Nostril. 


27. Testicles. 




43- 


Gaskin. 


11. Poll. 


28. Point of shoulder. 


44. 


Hock. 


11a. Throat. 


28a. Shoulder. 




44a 


.. Point of hock. 


12. Parotid. 


2&b. Arm. 




45. 


Chestnut. 


13. Neck. 


29. Elbow. 




46. 


Cannon. 


13a. Mane. 


30. Forearm. 




47- 


Fetlock joint. 


14. Jugular channel 


.31. Chestnut. 




48. 


Fetlock. 


15. Breast (front of 


32. Knee. 




49. 


Pastern. 


chest). 










16. Withers. 


33. Cannon. 




50. 


Coronet. 


17. Back. 


34. Fetlock joint. 




51. 


Foot. 


[{Reproduced from The Army Horse 


in Acci 


dent 


and Disease.) 


12 











178 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE 

Q. How should a horse be backed? 

A. Gather him, increase the pressure on the bit, release the pres- 
sure on the bit after the first step has been taken and again 
increase it for the second step, etc., until the desired distance 
has been taken up. A steady pressure will confuse the horse 
so that he will not understand what is required. Haunches 
should be kept straight with the legs. 

Q. How is the snaffle bridle fitted? 

A. (a) The cheek straps are adjusted so that they are of even 
length and so that the snaffle rests easily in, but does not 
draw up the corners of the mouth.. A mouthpiece that is 
too low strikes the tushes and makes them sore; one that is 
too high causes the horse discomfort and makes the corners 
of his mouth sore, (b) The browband is examined. If it 
is too short, it causes the sensitive skin at the base and back 
of the ears to be galled or cut by the crownpiece. If it is too 
high on the crownpiece, it causes the same trouble at the base 
and sides of the ears, (c) The throatlatch is buckled loosely, 
being only sufficiently tight to prevent the crownpiece from 
slipping over the horse's ears. Generally speaking, it should 
permit the entire flat of the hand to be inserted between it 
and the throat when the horse's head is reined in. A tight 
throatlatch interferes with the large blood vessels of the neck, 
with the gullet, and also with the windpipe, (d) The mane 
and forelock are carefully smoothed out under the crownpiece 
to avoid causing a sore at the poll and also to present a neat 
and tidy appearance. 

Q. How is the double bridle fitted? 

A. (a) The snaffle is fitted as described in the preceding para- 
graph, (b) A curb bit is selected with a mouthpiece of such 
length that the branches bear easily against the horse's lips. 
A narrow bit pinches the lips, while a wide one works about 
and bruises the lips and the bars. The mouthpiece is best 
examined for width by inspecting it from the underside of 
the lower jaw. (c) The cheek straps are adjusted so that the 
mouthpiece of the bit rests as near as possible opposite the 
chin groove, but touching neither the tushes nor the corners 
of the mouth. Generally speaking, the bit should rest about 
i inch above the tushes of horses and about 2 inches above 



HORSEMANSHIP 179 

the corner teeth of mares. It rides below the snaffle, (d) 
The curb chain is fastened outside and below the snaffle. It 
must be twisted to the right until it lies flat, and it should 
rest in the chin groove opposite the mouthpiece of the bit. If 
not properly adjusted, it will have a tendency to ride up and 
press upon the sharp bones of the lower jaw. The curb 
chain should be loose enough to admit the flat of two fingers 
between it and the chin groove when the branches of the 
bit are in line with the cheek straps. When brought to bear 
the branches of the curb bit should make an, angle of about 
45° with the line of the horse's mouth, (e) The throatlatch 
and brow band are fitted as directed in paragraph above. 

Q. How is the bridle removed? 

A. UNBRIDLE; Unbuckle the throatlatch. Grasp the mid- 
dle of the reins with the crownpiece in the right hand. Take 
hold of the bit or bits with the left hand. Carefully and 
gently slip the crownpiece over the ears, at the same time 
steadying the bits with the left hand so they will not roughly 
strike against the tushes or teeth. Straighten the reins out 
together and fold them over the crownpiece. 

Q. How is the horse blanket folded? 

A. The blanket, after being well shaken, will be folded into six 
thicknesses, as follows: Hold it well up by two adjacent cor- 
ners, the longer edges vertical; double it lengthwise, so the 
fold will come between the "U" and " S," the folded corner in 
the left hand; take the folded corner between the thumb and 
forefinger of the right hand, thumb pointing to 'the left ; slip 
the left hand down the folded edge two-thirds of its length 
and seize it with the thumb and second finger; raise the hands 
to the height of the shoulders, the blanket extended between 
them; bring the hands together, the double fold falling out- 
ward; pass the folded corner from the right hand into the 
left hand, between the thumb and forefinger, slip the second 
finger of the right hand between the folds, .seize the double 
folded corner; turn the left, disengaged corner in and seize 
it with the thumb and forefinger of the right hand, the second 
finger of the right hand stretching and evening the folds; after 
evening the folds, grasp the corners and shake the blanket 
well in order to smooth the folds; raise the blanket and hold 



180 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE 

the upper edge between the chin and breast; slip the hands 
down halfway, the first two fingers outside, the other fingers . 
and thumb of each hand inside; seize the blanket with the 
thumbs and first two fingers, let the part under the chin fall 
forward; hold the blanket up, arms extended, even the lower 
edges; retake the middle points between the thumb and fore- 
finger and flirt the outside part over the right arm; the blan- 
ket is thus held before placing it on the horse. 

Q. How are the blanket and surcingle put on? 

A. The instructor commands: BLANKET. Approach the horse 
on the near side, with the blanket folded and held as just 
described; place it well forward on his back by tossing the part 
of the blanket over the right arm to the off side of the horse, 
still keeping hold of the middle points; slide the blanket once 
or twice from front to' rear to smooth the hair, being careful to 
raise the blanket in bringing it forward; place the blanket with 
the forefinger of the left hand on the withers and the fore- 
finger of the right hand on the backbone, the blanket smooth; 
it should then be well forward with the edges on the left side; 
remove the locks of mane that may be under it; pass the 
buckle end of the surcingle over the middle of the blanket and 
buckle it on the near side, a little below the edge of the 
blanket. 

Q. How is the saddle put on? 

A. For instruction, the saddle may be placed 4 yards in rear or in 
front of the horse. The stirrups are crossed over the seat, the 
right stirrup uppermost; then the cincha and cincha strap are 
crossed above the stirrups, the strap uppermost. The blan- 
ket, without the surcingle, having been placed as previously 
explained, the instructor commands: SADDLE. 
Seize the pommel of the saddle with the left hand and the 
cantle with the right; approach the horse on the near side 
from the direction of the croup and place the center of the 
saddle on the middle of the horse's back, the front ends of the 
side bars about three finger widths behind the points of the 
shoulder blades; let down the cincha strap and cincha; pass 
to the off side, adjust the cincha and straps and see that the 
blanket is smooth; return to the near side, run the left hand, 
back up, down the withers so as to raise the blanket slightly 



HORSEMANSHIP 181 

under the pommel arch, in order that the withers may not be 
pinched or pressed upon; take the cincha strap in the right 
hand, reach under the horse and seize the cincha ring with the 
left hand, pass the end of the strap between the ring and safe 
and thru the ring, then up thru the upper ring from the 
outside; if necessary, make another fold in the same 
manner. 

The strap is fastened as follows: Pass the end thru the 
upper ring to the front; seize it with the left hand, place the 
fingers of the right hand between the outside folds of the 
strap; pull slowly from the horse with the right hand and take 
up the slack with the left; cross the strap over the folds, pass 
the end of it, with the right hand, underneath and thru the 
upper ring back to the folds, then down and under the loop 
that crosses the folds and draw it tightly; secure the end of the 
strap. 

Another method of fastening the cincha strap is as follows: 
Pass the end thru the upper ring to the rear; seize it with 
the right hand, place the fingers of the left between the outer 
folds of the strap; pull slowly from the horse with the left 
hand and take up the slack with the right; pass the end of the 
strap underneath and draw it thru the upper ring until a 
loop is formed; double the loose end of the strap and push it 
thru the loop and draw the loop taut. The free end 
should then be long enough conveniently to seize with the 
hand. 

Having fastened the cincha strap, let down the right stirrup, 
then the left. 

The surcingle, if used, is then buckled over the saddle, and 
should be a little looser than the cincha. 

A. In saddling a horse the cincha must be tightened gradually, 
and not with violence, a practice that if persisted in renders a 
horse ill tempered and mean in saddling. 

Q. How is the saddle removed? 

A. UNSADDLE. — Stand on the near side of the horse; unbuckle 
and remove the surcingle; cross the left stirrup over the sad- 
dle; loosen the cincha strap and let down the cincha; pass 
to the off side, cross the right stirrup, then the cincha over the 
saddle; pass to the near side, cross the cincha strap over the 



182 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE 

saddle; grasp the pommel with the left hand, the cantle with 
the right, remove the saddle over the croup and place it in 
front or in the rear of the horse as may be directed, pommel to 
the front; if in the stable, place the saddle on its peg; grasp the 
blanket at the withers with the left hand and at the loin with 
the right; remove it in the direction of the croup, the edges 
falling together, wet side in, and place it across the saddle, 
folded edge on the pommel. 

FITTING THE SADDLE 

Great care must be taken in the fitting and adjustment of 
saddles, to prevent sore backs. 
Q. What are some axioms in saddle fitting? 
A. There are six axioms in saddle fitting: 

i . The withers must not be pinched nor pressed upon. 

2. The central line of the back must have no pressure put 
upon it. 

3. The shoulder blades must have full and unhampered 
movement. 

4. Thue loins must not carry weight. 

5. The weight must be put upon the ribs thru the medium of 
the muscles covering them. 

6. The weight must be evenly distributed over a surface which 
extends from the play of the shoulders to the last true rib. 

Q. How do you proceed in fitting a saddle? 

A. (a) The saddle, without blanket, is placed in its proper posi- 
tion on the back. It is noted whether the upper or lower 
edges or the front or rear of the side bars gouge into the 
back at any place. If this occurs or if the saddle when 
lifted from the back a distance corresponding to the thick- 
ness of the blanket otherwise fails perceptibly to conform 
to the outlines of the back, the test and remedy described 
under (e) should be made and applied. 

(b) The existence of wither pressure is determined by blanket- 
ing and saddling the horse and placing an assistant in the 
saddle. The hand is run over the top and along both sides of 
the withers beneath the blanket. To make the test effect- 
ive the man in the saddle should lean forward, and the exam- 



HORSEMANSHIP 183 

iner should not be satisfied with anything less than the intro- 
duction of his entire hand. 

(c) It is noted that the central line of the back and also that 
the loins bear no weight even when the assistant in the saddle 
leans to the front, rear, or either side. 

(d) To determine if the blade bones have unhampered move- 
ment, the hand is passed underneath the blanket from 
the front until the play of the shoulder blade can be felt. 
The fore leg is raised and advanced to its full extent to the 
front by an assistant while the hand is in this position. If 
this can be done while the man in the saddle is leaning for- 
ward without pinching the fingers between the side bars and 
the shoulder blade, the fit in this respect is satisfactory. The 
test should be made on both shoulders. If the fingers are 
pinched, the blade bones will also be pinched and the action 
of the horse restricted. To correct the difficulty the saddle 
must be raised, assuming that it is at the proper place on the 
back, by placing under it a greater thickness of blanket or by 
attaching pieces of felt under the side bars. 

(e) To ascertain whether the pressure of the side bars is evenly 
distributed the saddle is ridden in for half an hour or more. 
On completion of the ride the saddle is carefully ungirthed 
and lifted from the blanket without disturbing the latter in 
any way. The blanket will be found to bear the imprint of 
the side bars, and an examination of this depression will show 
at a glance whether the bars press evenly from top to bottom 
and from front to rear. This examination must be made 
quickly as the elasticity of the blanket soon causes it to lose 
the impression of the side bars. Any irregularity in the fit 
of the side bars may be remedied by the introduction of pieces 
of felt to fill up the spaces between the side bars and the blan- 
ket. With very little practice these pieces of felt may be cut 
to the required shape and thickness with a very sharp knife. 
Some edges will need to be as thin as a knife edge; other parts 
may require the addition of more than one thickness. After 
determining where these pieces of felt are to rest they are 
attached to the side bars with glue and bound in place by 
sheepskin tacked to the side bars. The most radical altera- 
tions in the fit of the side bars can in this manner be affected. 



184 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE 

The method is simple and quick and can easily be performed 
by the average battery saddler. 

(/) The cincha should be sufficiently tight to keep the saddle 
in its place and no tighter. Generally speaking, correct 
cinching has been obtained when the flat of the hand is easily 
admitted under the quarter ring safe. With most horses, 
after exercising for a while, the cincha will be found too loose, 
and should be taken up. 

A tight cincha restricts the animal's breathing and also brings 
too much pressure upon and strangles the tissues. Especially 
is this apt to be the case under the quarter and cincha ring 
safes, where strangulation soon causes lumps, puffs, and sores. 
(g) Care is taken that the quarter straps are so adjusted and 
the cincha so selected that the cincha ring safe will be a suffi- 
cient distance from the quarter ring safe to avoid pinching 
and galling the skin between them. 

Q. How is the double bridle put on? 

A. BRIDLE. — Take the double reins in the right hand, the 
crownpiece in the left; approach the horse on the near side; 
slip the reins over his head, letting them rest on his neck; take 
the crownpiece in the right hand and the lower left branch of 
the curb bit in the left, the forefinger against the mouthpiece; 
bring the crownpiece in front of and slightly below its proper 
position; insert the left thumb into the left side of the mouth 
above the tush; press upon the lower jaw, insert both bits by 
raising the crownpiece, then with the left hand draw the ears 
gently under the crownpiece, beginning with the left ear 
arrange the forelock, secure the throat latch and the curb 
chain, taking care to adjust them properly. 

Q. How is the bridle with the snaffle bit only, put on? 

The bridle with snaffle bit only, used on team horses, is put 
on in a similar manner. 

Q. What should you know about curb bits? 

A. A bridle with curb bit only is not permitted to be used on the 
horses of individually mounted men, because the curb when 
used alone is a powerful instrument requiring such dexterity 
in its use that only an expert horseman on a perfectly 
trained horse is capable of using it with sufficient delicacy 



HORSEMANSHIP 185 

and discretion to obtain perfect control without injuring 
the horse. 

Q. How should the snaffle reins be held? 

A. If in both hands, the backs of the hands should be turned out, 
thumbs up, the reins coming into the hands under the little 
ringers and held in place with the thumbs, the bight of the 
reins falling to the right. If in the left hand, the left rein 
should be held under the little finger and the right rein over 
the little finger, the bight held with the thumb and falling to 
the right. 

Q. How should the reins of the double bridle be held? 

A. The left snaffle rein should be held under the little finger, left 
curb rein above the little finger, right curb rein below the mid- 
dle finger, right snaffle rein above the middle finger; i.e., the 
curb rein in the middle, with the snaffle rein on the outside. 
The bights of the reins come out under the thumb and fall to 
the right. The right hand is used to adjust the length of the 
reins. Ordinarily the curb rein should be looser than the 
snaffle reins. 

POSTING 

Q. What is the advantage of posting? Explain how it is 
executed. 

A. Posting, or rising to the trot, greatly diminishes the concus- 
sion produced by the rider's weight on the back and joints 
of the horse. It also makes breathing easier and facilitates 
the impulsion from the engagement of the hind feet. It is 
also less fatiguing to the rider than sitting down to the trot. 
It is executed as follows: The horse moving at a trot, the 
rider inclines the upper part of his body forward, then sup- 
porting himself on the stirrups while maintaining the grip of 
the knees, he rises under the impulsion of the horse, maintain- 
ing his position detached from the saddle while the succeeding 
impulse is produced, again sits down in the saddle shoving his 
buttocks forward in doing so, and continues in this way, 
always avoiding every other impulse. 

At the beginning the mechanism of posting is made easier to 
the rider by causing him to stroke the horse's neck or to grasp 



186 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE 

a lock of the mane or the pommel with either hand, thus deter- 
mining the forward inclination of the body. 
Its proper execution requires that the seat shall be raised 
moderately; that contact with the saddle shall be resumed 
gently and without shock; that the full support of the stirrup 
is obtained, while keeping the lower leg steady; that the ankle 
joint shall be supple; and that the heel shall be kept lower than 
the toe. Above all, the rider must be supple in the loins and 
convex them backward. 

CHANGING THE DIAGONAL IN POSTING 

Q. What is meant by changing the Diagonal? 

A. In posting the rider is said to post on the right diagonal 
when after rising he sits down in the saddle at the instant 
the right fore foot comes to the ground. 
It is important to instruct the rider to post for a time on 
one diagonal and then change to the other, so that the horse's 
legs will each perform the same amount of work and the 
chance of injury from the equipment will be reduced. 
In the riding school the rider should always rise on the 
inside hind foot, because this foot, in response to the inner leg 
aid, is the only one that can properly place itself under the 
mass of the horse and support the weight during the change of 
direction in the corners; hence to insure automatically that 
the posting is done as much on one diagonal as on the other, 
the riders may be required to post on the left diagonal when 
riding to the right hand on the track and on the right diagonal 
when riding to the left. 

The instructor occasionally requires each rider to inform him 
on which diagonal he is posting. 

To teach the rider to change the diagonal the instructor 
directs him to diminish the weight borne on the stirrups and 
to retain his seat in the saddle for two successive beats of the 
horse's feet instead of one, and then to rise as before. The 
rider will thus find himself posting on the diagonal opposite 
to the one on which he was posting before. 



HORSEMANSHIP 187 

SUPPLING EXERCISES 
Flexion of the Loins 

Q. What are some 6i the principal suppling exercises? 

A. BEND TO THE RIGHT (LEFT). The rider, without de- 
ranging his seat, legs, or the position of his hands, slowly in- 
clines his body to the right by bending at the loins. The 
head, shoulders, and arms conform to the movement of the 
trunk. He returns slowly to the initial position. 
This exercise can profitably be used to combat general con- 
traction, stiff back, stiffness in the loins. 
STROKE RIGHT (LEFT) FLANK. The rider sits down in 
the saddle by pushing the buttocks forward; turns the body at 
the loins, and leaning backward but not to the side, places the 
right hand as low as possible on the horse's flank. 
To combat general contraction, stiff back, leaning forward, 
letting buttocks rise and go too far to the rear, riding on 
crotch, legs sticking too far to the front, stiffness in the loins. 
i. RIGHT (LEFT) HAND ON CANTLE; 2. LEAN BACK. 
The rider places the palm of the indicated hand on the cantle 
of his saddle so that the arm rests against his body at or below 
the loins. He pushes his legs and knees well down and 
elevates his toes. Without deranging the position of his 
legs or thighs, and without pulling on the reins, he slowly 
leans to the rear as far as he can, touching the croup of the 
horse if possible, with his head, which is well thrown back. 
He returns slowly to N the initial position. Executed only at 
the halt or the walk. 

To combat general contraction, stiff back, thighs carried too 
high, legs pushed too far to front. It is also the best exercise 
for suppling the muscles of the groin. This exercise should 
not be used until the position of the buttocks and thighs has 
been fairly well established by other simple flexions. 

Rotation of the Loins 

RIGHT (LEFT) HAND STROKE LEFT (RIGHT) HAUNCH. 

The rider turns to the left at the loins, being careful not to de- 
range the seat or the position of the other hand or of the thighs, 

and strokes the left haunch with the right hand. He avoids 



188 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE 

opening out the other elbow or pulling on the reins. He turns 
his head, but is careful to keep it erect. 
To combat general contraction, stiff back, unsteady hands, or 
involuntary movement of the rein hand. 

Strengthening the Thighs 

GRIP HORSE WITH THIGHS AND RELAX. The rider 
without deranging seat, body, legs, or arms, squeezes his 
thighs together as though he wished to crush the horse be- 
tween them. 

To combat loose, wobbly, insecure seat insufficient strength 
in the leg muscles. 

Rotation of the Arms 

ROTATE RIGHT (LEFT) ARM VERTICALLY: The rider 
takes a deep breath while extending his arm upward to its full 
extent, where he pauses a moment, and then describes slowly, 
with uniform movement, large vertical circles from front to 
rear and from below upward, exhaling and keeping the head 
erect and high while the arm is descending. 
To combat general contraction, stiffness in the shoulders, con- 
traction in the arms, depressed chest, round shoulders. This 
exercise is especially valuable for giving the upper body a 
proper poise and posture upon the hips and for opening the 
chest and shoulders. 

ROTATE RIGHT (LEFT) ARM HORIZONTALLY: The 
rider extends his arm forward, palm up, and describes slowly, 
with uniform movement, large horizontal arcs from front to 
rear and back to the front, constantly keeping his eye upon 
the palm of the hand. The seat and thighs must remain 
fixed, the upper body rotating at the loins. The other hand 
must remain in place. The rider avoids opening out the 
other elbow or pulling on the reins. 

To combat general contraction, stiffness in the shoulders and 
in the loins, contractions in the arms. 

Properly executed this exercise becomes at once the simplest 
and one of the best means of acquiring balance. To be exe- 
cuted properly the rider must constantly keep his eyes upon 



HORSEMANSHIP 189 

the palm of the hand. Its most important use is during 
jumping to overcome the involuntary contractions and move- 
ments usually shown by the beginner. The exercise should 
be begun before the obstacle is reached, continued throughout 
the jump and until at least 30 yards beyond the obstacle. 

Carrying the Head 

TURN HEAD RIGHT AND LEFT : The rider sits erect on 

his horse with his head up and eyes sweeping the horizon. 

While in this position and without deranging, any other part of 

his body he slowly turns his head as far as he can first to the 

right, then to the left. 

To combat leaning to the -front and carrying the head and eyes 

too low. 

BEND HEAD FORWARD AND BACKWARD : The rider 

sits erect on his horse with his head up and eyes sweeping the 

horizon. While in this position and without deranging any 

other part of his body he throws the head up and back as far 

as he can, returning slowly to the initial position. 

To combat leaning to the front and carrying the head and eyes 

too low. 

Rotation of the Thighs 

ROTATE RIGHT (LEFT) THIGH: The rider carries the 
knee outward from the saddle, then moves it to the rear, 
straightening the leg, toes slightly elevated, heels depressed; 
he then turns the knee in as much as possible and replaces the 
thigh flat upon the saddle. All muscles are then relaxed and 
the leg and foot are permitted to hang naturally. 
To combat general contraction, leaning to the rear with 
thighs rising to the front, rolling the thighs away from the saddle 
and holding on with the calves, toes turned out too much, 
knees bent too much, daylight under knees. 

Flexion of the Thighs 

1. HANDS ON POMMEL, 2. RAISE RIGHT (LEFT) 
THIGH AND KICK TO THE REAR : The rider places both 
hands on the pommel and draws himself forward and into 



190 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE 

the bottom of his saddle. He raises the thigh to the front 
and slightly away from the horse's side, then with toe raised, 
heel well pushed down, he kicks to the rear as if to strike 
between the horse's hind legs; he straightens the entire leg 
in the direction of the horse's hock. He slowly brings the 
flat of the thigh to its position against the saddle. 
To combat general contraction, leaning to the rear with thighs 
rising to the front, rolling the thighs away from the saddle and 
holding on with the calves, toes turned out too much, knees 
too high, daylight under knees. 

RATES OF SPEED 

Three gaits are recognized in military equitation, drill, and 

maneuver, as follows : The walk, trot, and gallop. These, how- 
ever, are subject to different rates of speed. Those usually 

considered are as follows: 

Slow walk : 2}/^ to 3 miles per hour, 66 to 88 yards per minute. 

Walk (regulation): 4 miles per hour, 118 yards per minute. 

Walk out : 4 to 5 miles per hour, 118 to 147 yards per minute. 

Slow trot (a jog trot): 6 to 6% miles per hour, 176 to 190 

yards per minute. 

Trot (regulation) : 8 miles per hour, 235 yards per minute. 

Trot out: 10 miles per hour, 295 yards per minute. 

Extended trot: 12 miles per hour, 352 yards per minute. 

Slow gallop: 9 to 10 miles per hour, 265 to 295 yards per 

minute. 

Gallop (regulation): 12 miles per hour, 352 yards per minute. 

Extended gallop: 16 miles per hour, 470 yards per minute. 
Q. What information should you possess concerning the feeding 

of horses? 
A. Three principles should be adhered to in feeding: 

1. Water a thirsty horse before feeding him. 

2. Feed in small quantities and often. 

3. Do not work a horse hard immediately after a full feed. 
The water which a horse drinks passes almost immediately 
from his stomach into the small intestines and thence, in 
the course of a few minutes, to the caecum or blind gut, which 
is the reservoir from which it is absorbed and used by the 
horse as needed. To water a thirsty horse immediately after 



HORSEMANSHIP 191 

he has eaten causes a considerable portion of the contents of 
his stomach to be carried with the water into the intestines. 
As a consequence digestion is incomplete, there is avoidable 
loss of nourishment, and indigestion or colic may result. 
The digestive organs of the horse are arranged to admit of 
leisurely feeding for long periods at a time. Thus a horse 
will graze 22 out of 24 hours. The fact that the stomach of a 
horse is small, the capacity of the functional stomach being 
only about 1% gallons, points to the necessity for frequent 
feeding in small quantities. The intestines, on the other 
hand, are very large and require a considerable bulk of forage 
to fill them. If bulk is withheld, horses will eat quantities of 
earth or sand or otherwise become depraved in appetite to fill 
up the void. A horse will not thrive if bulk of forage in the 
form of hay or other good roughage is not supplied him, even 
if highly nutritive food is given in abundant quantities. 
A horse requires, roughly, about 2% pounds of provender 
daily for each 100 pounds of live weight; that is, about 25 
pounds for a 1000-pound horse. Of this amount the propor- 
tion of grain to hay should depend upon the severity of 
his work. When the work is very light one-third of the allow- 
ance should be grain and two-thirds hay; when the work 
is very heavy two-thirds should be grain and one- third hay. 
The proportion varies between these limits according to the 
amount of work the horse is doing. 

The daily allowance of oats, barley, or corn is 12 pounds, 
and of hay 14 pounds for each light artillery horse. It is 14 
pounds of grain and 17 pounds of hay for each field artillery 
horse of the heavy draft type weighing 1300 pounds or more. 
Substitutions of hay for grain or grain for hay are authorized, 
so that in garrison the horses of an organization may at all 
times be properly fed in accordance with the severity of their 
work. 

The best substitute for the slow, continuous feeding natural 
to the horse is regular and frequent feeding. The value of 
regularity is abundantly proven by experience. The diges- 
tive organs become organs of habit, and perform their func- 
tions best if called upon to work at fixed and regular times. 
If not limited by other important considerations, five feeds 



192 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE 

daily would be better than three, the first one being not later 
than 6 a. m. and the last at n p. m., the other three so that 
the intervals between feeds are as nearly equal as the work may 
permit. In the service such frequent feeding is impracticable. 
Artillery horses should be fed at least three times a day, at 
reveille, in the middle of the day, and at night. Ordinarily 
one-third of the grain ration is fed each time. Hay, if the 
horses are at work, is not fed in the morning, but about one- 
third of the ration should be fed at noon and the remainder at 
night. 

Immediately after a full feed the stomach and bowels 
are distended. If hard work is given at once they press 
against the lungs and impede their power of expansion, thus 
leading to blowing and distress. Fast work should therefore 
be avoided after a full feed. Moreover, though such work 
rarely results in colic, it interferes with digestion to such an 
extent that looseness of the bowels occurs and the food passes 
thru undigested and is wasted. Food remains in the 
stomach about one and one-half hours. Fast or heavy work 
should therefore be deferred for from one and one-half to 
two hours after a full feed. 

A bran mash acts as a mild laxative and should be fed 
once or twice a week to stabled horses. A little dry bran 
mixed with the oats is of value in compelling more thorough 
mastication and prevents greedy animals from bolting their 
grain. In spring or early summer the animals should be 
grazed daily when practicable. A lump of salt should be 
kept in each manger. 

Before feeding hay it should be thoroughly shaken out with 
a fork so as to get rid of dust and seed; it is also advisable to 
moisten the hay before giving it to the horse. The grain, if 
possible, should be run over wire screens or allowed to fall 
thru the air to remove dust. 

It is advisable to feed at least a portion of the allowance of 
hay before feeding the grain. 

Grain should never be fed or placed in the mangers until it 
is certain that thehorses are thoroughly cool. 
In the morning horses are usually fed at or before reveille. 
The noon feed of hay is usually placed in the mangers while 



HORSEMANSHIP 193 

the organization is at drill, but the grain is not fed until the 
horses are thoroughly cool. The evening feed is placed in the 
mangers after the stables have been thoroughly policed for the 
night. 

All horses do not require the same amount of forage; the 
amount given each horse must be based, therefore, upon his 
individual requirements. 

When forage cannot be obtained, grazing should be re- 
quired at every spare moment, especially early in the morning 
when dew is on the grass, but not if it is covered with frost. 
All forage should be inspected by the lieutenant in charge to 
see that it is up to weight and contract specifications. A for- 
age book, showing daily entries of all forage drawn, fed, and 
remaining on hand, together with the number of the public 
and private animals fed, will be kept by the stable sergeant 
and checked daily by the lieutenant in charge. All officers 
should be familiar with the characteristics of good forage and 
the manner in which it is commercially graded for contract 
specifications. To obtain this knowledge, officers should be 
encouraged to visit large commercial stables. 
Barley possesses a husk so tough and indigestible that it 
should always be crushed before being fed, else a very great 
part of its nutrient value is lost. 

Sudden changes in food are to be avoided. The digestive 
organs are frequently unable to accommodate themselves to a 
sudden change and scouring, constipation, or colic may result. 
If sudden changes become necessary, the ration of the new 
feed should be greatly reduced and then increased gradually 
to the full requirements. 

Good oats weigh about 40 pounds to the bushel; barley 
about 48 pounds; corn about $6 pounds. Pressed hay weighs 
about 11 pounds per cubic foot. 

The standard bushel in the United States contains 2150.4 
cubic inches. A cubic yard contains 21.69 bushels. A box 
16 by 16.8 by 8 inches holds 1 bushel; a box 12 by 11. 2 by 8 
inches holds half a bushel; a box 8 by 8 by 8.4 inches holds 1 
peck; a box 8 by 8 by 4.2 inches holds one-half peck or 4 
quarts. 

13 



194 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE 

Q. What information should you possess concerning the watering 
of horses? 

A. Except when they are heated it is desirable that horses should 
have free access to water at all times. It is always best 
to water a horse so frequently that he will never be unduly 
thirsty. As frequent watering, however, is usually impossible 
it becomes necessary to water at stated times. 
Horses should, if possible, be watered before feeding, or not 
until two hours after feeding. As horses rarely drink in the 
early morning, the watering must follow the feeding, but after 
the proper interval, if practicable. 

A horse requires from 5 to 15 gallons of water daily; de- 
pending upon the temperature and upon the work he is doing. 
Except in very cold weather horses should be watered at 
least three times daily — in the morning, before the noon feed- 
ing, and before the evening feeding. In warm weather, water 
drawn from a cold well or spring should be allowed to stand 
long enough for the chill to pass off before the horse is allowed 
to drink. 

A horse should be allowed ample time to drink his fill 
and not be led away the first time he raises his head from the 
water. This must be carefully explained to the untrained 
man who thinks, because a horse puts up his head to get his 
wind after his first fill, that he has finished. Horses are al- 
ways led or ridden to and from water at a walk. 

MEANS OF CONTROL 

Q. What is the underlying principle in controlling a horse? 
A. To make the horse believe at all times that you are his master, 

as well as his protector. 
Q. How is this accomplished? 
A. By the use of various mechanical means of restraint and 

punishment when he disobeys, and by rewarding him when 

he does obey. 
Q. What is the form of restraint known as the "loop twitch?" 
A. It is simply the use of a rope with a pulley or loop on one end 

applied to the horse's head by holding the loop opposite the 

left eye, rope extending upward and over the poll, down the 



HORSEMANSHIP 195 

right side of the face, thru the mouth, up the left side of the 
face, thru the loop and then down to the hand. 

Q. What advantage does it have over the "nose twitch" and how 
is it used? 

A. It is much more easily applied to nervous horses; it permits 
instant punishment on the slightest provocation; and allows 
the punishment to be discontinued immediately, thus elimi- 
nating the danger of doing injury to the horse. It may be 
used singly or in conjunction with other means of restraint. 
By jerking on the end of the rope considerable pain is caused, 
and by relaxing the pressure when the horse executes the de- 
sired movement properly he is made to understand thathe 
must obey. 

Q. Xame some instances when it may be used? 

A. It may be used when a horse refuses to pick up his feet, when 
he kicks, refuses to stand still, balks, when he refuses to be 
harnessed, to correct practically all minor vices and to per- 
form minor operations. 

Q. Describe the application of one form of war bridle. 

A. Make a loop in the end of a % 6 -inch rope (preferable sash 
cord) large enough to easily slip over the horse's lower jaw; 
carry the rope up the right side of the head, over the poll, 
down the left side, opposite the left eye and grasp the rope at 
this point. Holding the rope in this position, carry it up 
and alongside the descending rope, over the poll from left 
to right, down the right side of the face, above the upper 
teeth, but under the upper lip, up the left side of the face 
thru the loop formed when the rope was returned to a point 
just opposite the horse's left eye, pass the free end of the 
rope thru the loop, carry it down and pass it thru the first 
loop placed around the lower jaw, take up any slack which 
may have formed in any part of the bridle. By jerking 
on the free end of the rope when the horse disobeys, he may 
easily and quickly be punished. 

Q. How should one handle a horse that is a "halter puller" or 
one that throws his head into the air so as to make it difficult 
or impossible to handle him? 

A. Tie a loop on one end of a %-inch rope, swing the loop over 
the horse's back and across his loins, reach under his belly 



196 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE 

and grasp the loop, pass the free end of the rope thru the 
loop, forming a sliding noose about his body; pass the rope 
between his front legs, thru the ring of his halter and tie 
to a strong post. Approach him from the front. If he steps 
back the noose will tighten about his body. In the event that 
he still refuses to come forward, force him farther to the rear 
by pulling on his halter or by waving a coat in front of him, 
being careful meanwhile not to hurt him in any way with 
the coat. Persist in this treatment until the horse no longer 
jerks back. 

Q. How should one handle a horse who refuses to permit shoeing, 
or one that will not allow cleaning of his feet? 

A. Tie as above described and apply a "loop twitch" or "war 
bridle." Put a hobble on one of the front feet; attach a rope 
to the hobble and throw the free end over his withers to be 
held by an assistant. Take the end of the twitch in your 
left hand, pressing the body against his left shoulder, with 
your right hand grasp the rope opposite his knee and try to 
lift his foot. If he refuses to raise his foot, jerk on the twitch 
until he does. After it is raised, the assistant holds it up from 
the other side. If the horse sinks on one knee punish him 
with the twitch until he stands quietly. Adjustment for 
the back foot is very much the same. Place a hobble on 
the hind foot, take the twitch in one hand and the rope 
attached to the hobble in the other and pull the foot for- 
ward and upward. To get the hind foot back, tie a rope 
to his tail, pass the free end thru the ring and carry the 
rope back to several assistants; pull his foot off the ground 
and up, waiting until he ceases to fight and then pick up in the 
ordinary manner. 

Q. How should a horse that balks be treated? 

A. First try to ascertain the reason for his balking and, if possible, 
remove the cause. A tight fitting, or choking collar, a stone 
lodged in his hoof, or anything that tends to make him un- 
comfortable might be the cause of his balking. If his actions 
are found to be, after a thoro examination, the result 
of stubbornness, do not continue to beat him. Tie a rope 
about his neck in such manner that the knot will not slip, 
pass the rope thru his mouth, down and under his lower 



HORSEMANSHIP 197 

jaw, between the rope coming from hrs neck and under his 
lower jaw. Then stand back opposite his girth and have 
the driver give the command to move forward. If the 
horse refuses, he should again repeat the command and 
punish the horse in the rear with the whip and the spurs, at 
the same time the assistant holding the end of the rope should 
run forward and slightly to one side, giving the rope a quick 
jerk as he does so. It is important that the command to 
move, the punishment from the rear and the jerk from the 
front occur all at the same time. Repeat the punishment 
until the horse moves as desired. This treatment is of value 
in correcting horses that refuse to move from the picket line. 

Q. How may a safe, quick acting bridle be made from a halter 
rope? 

A. Double a rope, drop the center of it over the poll, allowing 
the single ends to drop down each side of the head, pass the 
rope on the left side of the head thru the mouth to the 
right side and the rope on the right side thru the mouth 
to the left side, crossing the ropes in the mouth, carry the 
ends back and tie over the withers. 

Q. What points should be noted in an inspection of shoeing? 

A. The following examination should be made while the horse is 
standing on a level floor with the foot on the ground: (a) Are 
the axes correct when viewed from the front and from the 
side? (b) Does the shoe follow the outer line of the wall to 
the last nail hole and from there extend outward, allowing 
about 3^ inch at the heel for expansion? Has the rule 
against rasping the hoof to fit the shoe been violated? (c) Is 
the toe clip in the center properly made and properly 
seated? (d) Are the nails driven at the proper height and 
proper distance apart? Have any old stubs been left in the 
wall? (e) Are the clinches well turned and set in. of the 
proper size, and have they been smoothed off but not rasped 
sufficiently to weaken them? The foot should be raised and 
the examination continued. (/) Is the shoe of the proper 
size and weight; the last nail hole back of the bend of the 
quarter? (g) Has enough horn been removed? Has too 
much been removed? Is the foot level? (j) Does the shoe 
rest evenly on the wall, covering the buttresses, and show- 



198 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE 

ing no air space at any point? (i) Is the shoe properly 
concaved so as to avoid pressure on the sole? (i) Has the 
knife been used on the bars, sole, or frog? (k) Are the 
nails well seated and of the proper size? (/) Are the heels 
of the shoe correct in width and thickness and are they prop- 
erly rounded without sharp edges or points ? Is their length 
even with the bulb of the frog? 



THE HORSE— DISEASES AND CURES 

Q. What would lead you to think a horse is sick? 

A. When a horse by his actions or attitude appears to be abnor- 
mal, as revealed by a systematic examination, carried out ac- 
cording to the "Table of Examination," which shows that 
any organ, set of organs, or his body as a whole is not func- 
tionating properly, he is known to be sick. 

Q. How should a horse be drenched? 

A. Have an assistant to hold the horse's head fairly high, insert 
bottle in the side of mouth, and pour in a mouthful of medi- 
cine at a time, allowing the animal to swallow each mouthful 
before pouring in another. If difficulty is experienced in get- 
ting the horse to swallow, insert ringer between the bars and rub 
the roof of the mouth, or press the nostrils together, excluding 
all air, until he swallows ; if neither of these methods serve the 
purpose a tablespoonful of cold water poured into the nostril 
will often force the animal to swallow. Medicine must not 
at any time be administered thru the nose. 

Q. What dangers are sometimes encountered in drenching? 

A. Care must at all times be exercised to prevent the breaking of 
the bottle in the horse's mouth. To alleviate this danger, a 
rubber flask, or a piece of rubber garden hose attached to the 
neck of a glass bottle, should be used. Another danger fre- 
quently experienced is choking, caused by the medicine pass- 
ing down the windpipe. This will cause the horse to cough 
violently, upon which immediately lower his head and allow 
him to fully recover before the further^administration of 
medicine. 

Q. Name the things that are important in the care of sick 
animals. 

A. Furnish the animal with a roomy box stall, if at all available. 
If a box stall is unobtainable, improvise some means of shelter 
to protect him from cold or draughts. This shelter should be 
at a convenient place, but, if possible, quiet and removed from 

199 



200 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE 

well or healthy horses, (b) Proper ventilating facilities 
should at all times be provided, (c) Stall should be kept free 
of manure, moisture and odors. Sufficient bedding should 
be furnished to tempt the horse to lie down, (d) Food should 
be given in small quantities at frequent intervals ; unconsumed 
food should be removed — excepting hay. To encourage the 
horse's appetite, he should be furnished with delicacies, 
such as turnips, apples, carrots, green grass, etc. Fresh 
water and salt should be within easy reach at all times. 

Q. How should a wound be treated? 

A. In case of a hemorrhage, if the flow of blood is profuse, it 
must be checked before proceeding with other treatment. In 
all cases, where possible, a tourniquet (rubber band or rope 
tightly applied between the wound and the heart to compress 
the blood vessels) should be applied. If the bleeding is from a 
large vessel, pick up the ruptured ends and tie off with a piece 
of thread or string. If unable to apply a tourniquet, apply 
pressure in the form of pads or bandages directly over the 
wound. Cold water or ice, iron heated to a cherry red, or 
astringent agents such as alum, copperas, etc., may be 
applied. After checking the hemorrhage, cleanse the wound 
and parts thoroughly with a weak antiseptic solution, such 
as creolin, bichloride of mercury, potassium permanganate; 
remove all threads or tissue; apply healing preparations 
such as 2 per cent creolin solution, boric acid, iodoform 
powder, etc.; apply bandage to part. Old wounds may be 
treated without bandaging, unless in a position where they 
might be injured. Simple abrasions, such as collar sores, 
saddle galls, etc., may be treated by antiseptic cleansing, 
after which they should be kept dry by the use of dusting 
powders and salves. 

Q. Give cause and treatment for scratches. 

A. Scratches are caused by improper cleansing of the fetlocks 
and pasterns and as a result of neglect to keep these parts 
dry. To treat, first wash with castile soap and water, dry, 
and apply an astringent powder, such as tannic acid, iodo- 
form, alum and boric acid, salves such as zinc oxide oint- 
ment, a mixture of equal parts of sulphur and vaseline, or 
paint with tincture of iodine. 



THE HORSE— DISEASES AND CURES 201 

Q. How should a case of thrush be treated? 

A. Clean the foot and pare away the unhealthy portions of the 
frog, then apply burning drugs, such as alum, copperas or 
formaline 

Q. How would you proceed in the case of a horse picking up a 
nail? 

A. If a veterinarian is near by, always leave the nail in the 
foot until he arrives, otherwise withdraw the nail carefully 
and allow the wound to bleed for a short time, then pare the 
hoof down around the nail hole making the cutting about the 
size of a quarter and until the hoof springs under the pressure 
of the finger, clean thoroughly with antiseptics and inject 
tincture of iodine or turpentine into the nail hole, pack the 
foot with gauze or cotton soaked in iodine or pine tar, adjust 
a bag or bandage to prevent foreign matter from coming in 
contact with the hole. Thereafter soak the foot daily in 
warm bichloride solution for an hour or more, then readjust 
the packing and bandages as described. Rest the animal 
until all traces of lameness disappear. 

Q. What is founder, and what measure should be taken imme- 
diately it is noticed? 

A. Founder or laminitis is an acute inflammation of the sensitive 
leaves or laminae directly underlying the horny hoof or foot 
box. Usually occurs in the front feet, but may affect all 
four. It may be caused by pounding of the feet on hard or 
uneven roads, or overexertion, digestive disturbances or in- 
judicious feeding and by sudden chilling, as from draught 
or drinking of large quantities of cold water when overheated. 
The animal stands with his hind feet well up under his belly, 
and refuses to move his fore feet. Early action should be 
taken to remedy this condition. The shoes should first be 
removed and the affected feet soaked in cold water for long 
periods. Give the animal epsom salt, one pound at a dose, 
with heated water for the first twelve to eighteen hours, also 
grain. 

Q. What is meant by the " spraining" of a part? 

A. When a muscle or muscle fibres, a tendon or tendon fibres, a 
ligament joint or joint capsule, has been overstretched, over- 
tired, or perhaps torn, they are said to be sprained. 



202 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE 

Q. What is the general treatment for sprains? 

A. Keep animal quiet. If swelling and inflammation are pro- 
nounced, apply cold to the part by means of running water or 
ice packs, for the first twenty-four hours, then apply warm 
applications, warm water bathings, alcohol or liniment rubs, 
or tincture of iodine where the swelling is not excessive, keep 
the part at rest by the use of bandages. 

Q. How should bruises be treated? 

A. Practically 'the same as sprains. If swollen, massage away 
from the center and the swelling will frequently disappear. 

Q. How should rope burns be treated? 

A. In the same manner as scratches. Cleanse the part thor- 
oughly with antiseptic solutions, such as weak dilution of 
creolin or bichloride; dry the part and apply healing remedies, 
such as zinc oxide ointment, equal parts of borax and char- 
coal, corn starch, tincture of iodine, etc. 

Q. What is considered to be a good drench for colic? 

A. A mixture of }4 pint of turpentine, J^ pint of aromatic spirits 
of ammonia and enough linseed or cottonseed oil to make a 
pint. Give as one dose. 

Q. What should be administered for a case of diarrhea? 

A. Put animal on half rations, but allow hay, give little water to 
drink. Give wheat flour and water, chalk, aromatic sul- 
phuric acid, Y% teaspoonful in one half pint of water, three 
times daily. 

Q. How may over-heating affect a horse? 

A. He becomes dull, weak and may stagger, his breathing be- 
comes more rapid, eyes may water and be slightly reddened, 
nostrils distended and perhaps of a reddish purple color, heart 
can be felt pounding on wall of chest, pulse full and fast, 
sweating is usually profuse, but in some rare cases this fea- 
ture may be absent and instead the animal be chilly, with a 
temperature lower than ioo°F. 

Q. How should an animal affected by the heat be treated? 

A. Immediately take him from the team, at the same time re- 
move all harness, get the animal in the shade and apply cold 
water or ice to the head, and make cold water injections into 
the rectum. Give mild stimulants, such as alcohol, nitre, 
aromatic spirits of ammonia. In the rare case mentioned, 



THE HORSE— DISEASES AND CURES 203 

where the animal is apparently chilly with a subnormal tem- 
perature, give stimulants, but do not apply cold in any form. 

Q. How should colds, bronchitis and pneumonia be treated? 

A. In all cases keep the animal in a well ventilated place, yet 
one that is free from draught. If throat is swollen, apply 
mild liniment. It is also well to encourage the appetite and 
keep bowels open. If animal is in great distress, apply mus- 
tard plaster or cloths soaked in warm water, turpentine to 
the region of the lungs and rub the limbs energetically with 
the hand. 

Q. What are the symptoms which indicate glanders? 

A. The horse having a prune-juice colored discharge from the 
nose should be held for examination for a veterinarian. For 
further confirmation of the existence of glanders the lining of 
the nose should be examined for ulcers or ulcers and whitish 
scars. The space between the branches of the lower jaw 
should also be examined for swellings, and the external body 
— particularly the limbs — should be gone over carefully to 
note any ulcers or running sores. 

Q. How should horses with glanders, or those appearing to have 
this disease, be handled? 

A. Isolate all suspicious cases at some place far removed from 
the healthy animals. Do not allow attendants to handle 
animals thought to be afflicted and the healthy animals 
at the same time. Attendants should be acquainted with the 
danger of the disease, both to humans and to animals. Veteri- 
narian should be consulted immediately for definite diagnosis 
and disposition. 



204 



FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE 



Table or Examination 



HISTORY 



ATTITUDE 

AND 

GENERAL 

CONDITIONS 



CIRCULATORY 
SYSTEM 

TEMPERA- 
TURE 



When first taken ill 



Length of ownership 



Time 
Place 

Kind of work 
| Kind 
Food and water j Quantity 

[ Period of feeding 
Previous owner 
Previous work 
Method of transportation 
From part of country re- 
ceived 

Any other horses similarly affected 
. Treatment already given 

I Position of feet and legs 
Position of head 
Position of back and tail 
Stretched out 
Sitting 

Curled with nose in flank 
Fat or thin 

I Rough or slick 
Pliable or hide bound 
Dry or sweaty 
[ Painful 
Expression j Wild 
[ Sleepy 
Tense 
Relaxed 

I Excitable 
Dull 
Coma 

[ Color 
Visible mucous membranes ] Swollen 

[injured, etc. 

[ Pulse taken on jaw bone (33 to 38 per minute) 

j Sounds of the heart 

[ Original circulation of various parts 

I Fever 

j Normal (99.5 to 101 deg. Fahrenheit) 

[ Subnormal 



Muscles 



THE HORSE— DISEASES AND CURES 



205 



RESPIRATORY 
SYSTEM 



DIGESTIVE 
SYSTEM 



Number of respiratory movements (Normal 8 to 16) 

Odor of breath 

Noise made in breathing 

Nasal discharge 

Cough 

Noise heard in lungs 

Appetite and manner of eating 

Mouth and teeth 

Throat 

[ Tucked up 
Abdomen j Bloated Increase 

[Noise produced by bowels or ab- 

[ sence 

j Odor 
Excrement i Color 

[ Consistency 

URINARY AND [ Urine 

SEXUAL ] Manner of voiding 
ORGANS [ External appearance 

DRY MEASURE 

Ordnance spoon = i ounce of lead acetate 
% " " zinc sulphate 
2 drams or y± ounce of salts 
Ordnance tin cup = % of a quart 

Fuji day's ration of medium weight 
oats = 14 cups 



LIQUID MEASURE 

One drop = One minim, 60 to the dram. 

One teaspoonful = One fluid dram, 8 to the ounce. 

One tablespoonful = y 2 fluid ounce. 

Tin cup =28 ounces or % of a quart. 



206 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE 

TO MAKE VARIOUS STRENGTHS OF SOLUTIONS 

128 teaspoonfuls = 1 fluid pint 

1 34 added to a pint of water equals a 1 per 

cent, solution. (To make other strength 
solutions use the 1 per cent, solution as 
a basis and multiply and divide for 
strength of solution desired, as follows: 
5 X iK or 6}i teaspoonsful of liquid to 
a pint of water equals a 5 per cent, solu- 
tion.) 

VETERINARY MEDICINES 

ACETANILID. — Is a febrifuge and antiseptic. Used in- 
ternally to lower fever in doses of from 1 to 4 drams. Used 
externally as an antiseptic in the form of a dry dressing. 

ACID, ARSENIOUS (arsenic). — Is an irritant, corrosive poison, 
given internally in doses of from 1 to 6 grains as a digestive 
tonic, and for skin diseases, usually in combination with iron 
sulphate and gentian. Externally it is used to remove warts, 
in the form of an ointment, 1 part of arsenic to 8 or 10 of lard. 

ACID, BORACIC. — Action, antiseptic; a saturated solution is 
very useful in conjunctivitis. With oxide of zinc it makes a 
very nice dressing for abrasions, scratches, etc. 

ACID, CARBOLIC. — A valuable antiseptic and disinfectant. 
A 1 to 20 solution makes a very good wash for all wounds. A 
very good prescription for local use is the following: 

Carbolic acid, 6 drams. 
Glycerin, ij^ ounces. 
Water to make 1 pint. 

ACID, SALICYLIC. — A useful antiseptic; a saturated solution 
of salicylic acid in alcohol is a good dressing for indolent sores and 
ulcers. 

Salicylic acid dusted upon a wound will remove the granulations 
of proud flesh. 

ACID, TANNIC. — An astringent and antiseptic. It is given 
internally in diarrhea and dysentery. Dose, 30 grains to 1 dram. 



THE HORSE— DISEASES AND CURES 207 

The following prescription may be used: 

Acid, tannic, y 2 to i dram. 
Opium, powdered, H to i dram. 

Make into one ball and repeat every two hours until the diar- 
rhea is checked. 

Tannic acid is an excellent remedy, used in the form of a 
saturated solution (with witch-hazel water), for hardening tender 
shoulders. 

ACONITE. — Is a dangerous poison and should not be used in- 
ternally, but locally. Mixed with other drugs it makes a good 
anodyne liniment. 

Aconite, 2 ounces. 
Alcohol, 5 ounces. 
Opium, tincture, 4 ounces. 
Witch-hazel, distilled, 5 ounces. 
Mix and apply several times daily. 

ALCOHOL. — Stimulant. Given for a weak heart in debili- 
tating diseased, such as lung troubles, etc. Dose, 2 to 4 ounces 
in 1 pint of water, and repeated every four to six hours, as required. 

It is useful in the formation of liniments. 

ALOES, BARBADOS.— Is the general purgative for the horse. 
Dose 6 to 8 drams. 

Aloes, Barbados, 6 to 8 drams. 

Ginger, 1 dram. 

Make into a ball and give upon an empty stomach. 

The "cathartic capsule,^ to be supplied, will take the place 
of aloes. It will contain aloin, strychnine, ginger, and calomel. 

A purgative should never be given in diseases of the respiratory 
system. 

It generally takes about twenty-four hours to operate. 

ALUM. — Astringent. It is useful as a wash for sore mouths; 
used in the strength of J£ ounce to 1 quart of water. Ex- 
ternally it is a valuable remedy in the treatment of thrush. 
Burnt alum is useful for the removal of proud flesh. 

AMMONIA, AROMATIC SPIRITS OF.— Stimulant and 
carminative. A very useful remedy in the treatment of colics, 
and exhaustion. Dose, 1 to 3 ounces, well diluted. 



208 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE 

AMMONIA, SOLUTION OF.— Used externally only, in 
combination with other drugs, as a stimulating liniment. 

Ammonia, solution of, i part. 
Turpentine, oil of, i part. 
Olive oil, 2 parts. 
To be well shaken before using. It is an excellent external 
application for sore throat. 

AMMONIA, CHLORIDE OF.— Used in all cases where an 
expectorant is indicated, such as diseases of the respiratory 
system. Dose, i to 4 drams. For catarrhal diseases it is 
usually combined with quinine and nitrate of potash, prepared 
in the following manner: 

Ammonia, chloride of, 3 ounces. 
Quinine sulphate, 6 drams. 
Nitrate of potash, 3 ounces. 
Make into twelve powders and give one every three or four 
hours. 

BELLADONNA, FLUID EXTRACT.— Antispasmodic and 
anodyne. Used in cases of colic in conjunction with other 
medicines. Dose, 1 to 2 drams. 

When applied to the eyes it dilates the pupil and soothes the 
irritated membrane. Generally used in combination with 
sulphate of zinc or boracic-acid solutions. 

A very useful wash for the treatment of conjunctivitis is 
made as follows: 

Sulphate of zinc, 20 grains. 
Belladonna, fid. ext., 1 dram. 
Water, 3^ ounces. 
Apply twice a day. 

CAMPHOR, GUM. — Antispasmodic and antiseptic. Dose, 
1 to 2 drams. A very good remedy for diarrhea is made as 
follows: 

Camphor, gum, 1 dram. 
Opium, powdered, 1 dram. 
Make into a ball; give, and repeat every two hours until relief 
is afforded. 



THE HORSE— DISEASES AND CURES 209 

Externally it is useful for sprains, combined with other medi- 
cines, forming what is known as soap liniment. 

Castile soap, 10 parts. 
Camphor, 5 parts. 
Alcohol, 70 parts. 
Water, 15 parts. 
To be used externally as a mild, stimulating, anodyne liniment. 

A useful dressing for wounds is made of gum camphor, 8 
ounces, carbolic acid, 3 ounces. This is especially valuable in 
fly time. 

CANNABIS, INDICA (Indian Hemp).— Antispasmodic and 
anodyne. Its main use is in colic, as it relieves pain without 
causing constipation. Dose, 2 to 4 drams. 

Cannabis, indica, 2 to 4 drams. 
Ammonia, aromatic spirits, 1 ounce. 
Water, 1 pint. 
Give at one dose and repeat in three-quarters of an hour if 
necessary. This is an excellent remedy for colic. 

CANTHARIDES, POWDERED (Spanish Fly).— Used only 
for its blistering effect. Prepare by rubbing the cantharides 
and cosmoline together (1 to 5 or 6) with a spatula or a piece of 
glass. 

CAPSICUM (cayenne pepper). — Stomachic and carminative. 
Given internally in combination with gentian and ginger in 
mild cases of indigestion attended with flatulency. Dose, 
}4, to 1 dram. 

CHARCOAL. — A mild antiseptic and deodorant. It is very 
good mixed with poultices, especially for wounds and sores that 
have a foul odor. It may be dusted on the surface of foul 
sores and will soon destroy the odor. Internally it is given in 
doses of 2 to 4 drams, and is useful in chronic indigestion and 
diarrhea. 

COPPER SULPHATE (blue vitriol, bluestone).— A caustic 
tonic, vermicide and astringent. Used principally as a caustic 
for thrush and canker. A good remedy for thrush or canker is 
equal parts of sulphate of copper (powdered), sulphate of zinc, 

14 



210 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE 

and sulphate of iron: "The Three Sulphates. " This powder 
can be applied two or three times daily. Used also internally 
as a tonic in chronic nasal catarrh. Dose, i to 2 drams. 

COLLODION. — When painted over wounds it forms an air 
tight coating and in small wounds keeps the edges in a fixed 
position and promotes healing. Especially valuable when 
applied to punctured wounds of joints. 

CHLOROFORM. — Antispasmodic, stimulant, and anodyne. 
Useful in colics. Dose, 1 to 2 drams, well diluted. It may be 
added to anodyne liniments. When inhaled it acts as an 
anesthetic. 

COSMOLINE. — A by-product of petroleum. Used as a base 
for ointments. It is also valuable to apply upon the skin, 
when wound secretions are abundant to prevent dropping out 
of the hair. 

CREOLIN. — A nonpoisonous, nonirritating antiseptic and 
parasiticide. It is one of the best medicines that we have, not 
only as a valuable application for all wounds, but to destroy all 
parasites with which the animal may become infested. 

Used in solution or ointment in a strength of 1 to 50 or 1 to 
20. For mange it is useful in a 1 to 10 solution. 

DIGITALIS, FLUID EXTRACT OF.— A very dangerous 
poison, and should not be administered internally. A valuable 
diuretic when applied over the kidneys and well rubbed in. 

ETHER, NITROUS, SPIRITS OF (sweet spirits of nitre).— 
Stimulant, antispasmodic, diuretic, and diaphoretic. Dose, 
1 to 2 ounces. 

A very useful stimulant in all cases of weakness of the heart 
action. For its stimulating and antispasmodic actions it is given 
in colics combined with belladonna or cannabis indica. 

ETHER, SULPHURIC— Stimulant, antispasmodic, and car- 
minative. Dose, 1 to 3 ounces, well diluted. 

Combined with belladonna or cannabis indica its antispas- 
modic action is increased. 

FENUGREEK. — Aromatic and stomachic. Sometimes com- 
bined with tonics to disguise their odors. Dose, 1 ounce. 

FLAXSEED MEAL.— Used for poultices. 

GENTIAN. — Stomachic and bitter tonic. It improves the 
appetite and general tonic. Dose, H to 1 ounce. 



THE HORSE— DISEASES AND CURES 211 

GINGER. — Stomachic and carminative. Combined with 
purgatives it diminishes their tendency to gripe, and also some- 
what hastens their action. Dose, K to i ounce. 

GLYCERIN. — Used as a base in the same manner as cosmo- 
line. Useful, combined with equal parts of iodine, in the treat- 
ment of grease. 

IODINE. — Given internally in diabetes insipidus. Dose, 20 
grains to 1 dram, to be repeated three times daily until the 
quantity of urine is lessened. Best given when made into a 
ball with flaxseed meal. 

Externally it is used for the removal of swellings, curbs, 
enlarged tendons, etc. It is also a useful stimulant for indolent 
sores and ulcers. A good solution for external use is made as 
follows: 

Iodine, 1 ounce. 
Iodide of potassium, 3 ounces. 
Water, 1 pint. 
To be applied several times daily. 

Tincture of iodine is made of iodine, 1 ounce; alcohol, 1 pint. 

IODOFORM. — Antiseptic. Used externally as a dry dressing, 
either alone or combined with other drugs, such as boracic acid, 
acetanilid, etc. 

IRON, TINCTURE OF THE CHLORIDE OF.— A valuable 
tonic, building up the system and enriching the blood. Useful 
in purpura and in convalescence after all debilitating diseases. 
Dose, 1 to 2 ounces, well diluted. 

Used externally as an astringent and styptic in serious hemor- 
rhages. A small piece of cotton saturated with it and applied 
to the bleeding part is the proper mode of application. 

IRON, SULPHATE OF (Ferrisulphate).— Tonic and vermi- 
cide. It increases the appetite and builds up the system. Dose, 
M to 1 dram. Frequently combined with nux vomica, etc. 

LANOLIN. — Used as a base for ointments in the same manner 
as cosmoline. -• 

LEAD, ACETATE OF.— Astringent and a valuable remedy for 
relieving local pain. Used externally to cool and relieve sprains, 
inflamed tendons and joints, and to relieve itching skin diseases. 



212 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE 

The white lotion is made as follows: 

Acetate of lead, i ounce. 
Sulphate of zinc, i ounce. 
Water, i quart. 
Shake well and apply several times daily. 

The lotion is a very valuable remedy for the relief of all external 
diseases accompanied by heat and swelling; also an excellent 
dressing for wounds. 

LIME, CHLORIDE OF.— This is the best disinfectant that 
we have. Four ounces to i gallon of water is the proper strength. 
This solution should be used as a wash for the disinfection of 
stables. A small portion of chloride of lime placed around in 
stables will destroy the odor arising from decomposed urine. 

LUNAR CAUSTIC— Used for the removal of warts and proud 
flesh. Four grains to i ounce of water make a good application 
for the removal of the cloudiness remaining after an attack of 
ophthalmia. 

MERCURY, BICHLORIDE OF.— (Corrosive sublimate, anti- 
septic tablets). — Dissolved in water this is the most energetic 
antiseptic; i to iooo solution is the proper strength to use in the 
treatment of all wounds. Two tablets to a quart of water give 
this strength; if the bichloride is in bulk, use. 15 grains to a 
quart of water, and add 15 grains of chloride of ammonia to 
insure complete dissolution. 

MERCURY, MILD CHLORIDE (calomel).— Internally, a 
cholagogue. Dose, % to 2 drams. It is not used alone, but is 
combined with aloes. 

Calomel, 1 dram. 
Barbados aloes, 4 drams. 
Ginger, 1 dram. 
Water to make a ball. 
Externally, antiseptic and drying. Used in the treatment of 
ulcers and thrush. 

MERCURY, BINIODIDE— Used as a blister; its effects are 
very penetrating. Used principally in the treatment of spavins, 
splints, sidebones, ringbones, and all bony enlargements. 



THE HORSE— DISEASES AND CURES 213 

Biniodide of mercury, i part. 

Cosmoline, 5 to 6 parts. 
Mix and rub together thoroughly. 
Apply with friction for at least ten minutes. 

NUX VOMICA, POWDERED.— A nerve stimulant and tonic. 
Dose, % to 1 dram. It is a very useful tonic in building up the 
tone of the system in convalescence from debilitating diseases 
and general lack of vitality. Generally given in combination 
with gentian, iron and other tonics. 

OIL, LINSEED.— Laxative (mild purgative). Dose, Y 2 to 1 
quart. Do not use boiled oil. 

OIL, OLIVE. — Generally used as a vehicle in making liniments 
and oily solutions. 

OIL OF TAR (pine tar). — Useful for plugging holes and cavi- 
ties in the hoof after all suppuration has ceased. 

OIL OF TURPENTINE.— Diuretic, stimulant, antispasmodic, 
vermicide, and expectorant. Dose, 1 to 3 ounces diluted with 
oil. 

Externally it is used in the formation of liniments (see Solution 
of Ammonia). 

OPIUM, TINCTURE OF (laudanum).— Anodyne, antispas- 
modic. Checks secretion of mucous membrane. On account of 
these properties it is a valuable remedy in diarrhea and dysen- 
tery. 

Very useful in the treatment of all abdominal pain where there 
are no symptoms of constipation, but as a rule belladonna and 
cannabis indica are preferable. Dose, 1 to 2 ounces. 

Externally, opium tincture is used to relieve pain of sprains 
and bruises. 

A very good lotion is made as follows: 

Opium tincture, 4 ounces. 
Acetate of lead, 2 ounces. 
Water to make 1 quart. 
Apply every few hours. 

OPIUM, POWDERED.— Not used externaUy. It is used in- 
ternally for the same purpose as the tincture. Dose, K to 2 
drams. 



214 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE 

POTASSIUM BROMIDE— Nerve sedative. Dose, K to 2 
ounces. In tetanus this medicine can be given in large doses. 

POTASSIUM NITRATE (saltpeter).— Alterative, febrifuge, 
and diuretic. Dose, 1 to 4 drams. In the treatment of laminitis 
the dose is 2 to 4 ounces, repeated three times a day. Exter- 
nally it makes a good cooling lotion: 

Nitrate potassium (saltpeter), 5 ounces. 
Chloride of ammonia, 5 ounces. 
Water, 16 ounces. 
Mix and keep the affected parts saturated with this lotion. 

Internally, saltpeter is the most excellent medicine in the 
treatment of catarrhal and febrile diseases. It is also useful in 
the treatment of swollen legs. 

POTASSIUM IODIDE.— Alterative, diuretic, and expecto- 
rant. Dose, 2 to 4 drams. It is given to promote absorption of 
enlargements, such as enlarged glands in lymphangitis, and in 
partial paralysis resulting from injury to the brain and spinal 
cord. 

For such purposes full doses are given twice a day for two 
weeks. 

POTASSIUM PERMANGANATE.— Antiseptic, disinfectant, 
and deodorant. Useful for the removal of foul odors arising from 
unhealthy wounds; also for cleansing hands and instruments. 
From 1 to 4 drams, water 1 pint, is the proper strength of the 
solution for use. 

QUININE, SULPHATE OF.— Tonic, stomachic, antiseptic, 
and mild febrifuge. Dose, K to 1 dram, repeated three times a 
day. It is given in all febrile and debilitating diseases. Com- 
bined with sulphate of iron it is very useful in purpura. In 
influenza and pneumonia it is generally combined with gentian 
and nitrate of potash, made into powders in the following 
proportions: 

Quinine sulphate, 1 ounce. 
Gentian, 3 ounces. 
Make twelve powders and give three times a day. 

SALOL. — Antiseptic. Used internally and externally for its 
antiseptic properties. Dose, 2 to 4 drams. 



THE HORSE— DISEASES AND CURES 215 

SODIUM BICARBONATE.— Carminative, stomachic, re- 
lieves acidity of the stomach. Dose, i to 2 drams. This is an 
excellent medicine in chronic indigestion and flatulency. 

SULPHUR. — Parasiticide. This medicine may be used for 
the treatment of mange, but it is inferior to creolin or carbolic 
acid. 

WITCH-HAZEL. — A cooling astringent wash, very useful 
when combined with other medicines in the form of liniments or 
lotions. 

ZINC SULPHATE.— Externally it is much used as a caustic 
and astringent for wounds, foul ulcers, etc. It is an excellent 
remedy for the treatment of thrush and canker. 

Sulphate of zinc 

Sulphate of copper \ Equal parts. 

Sulphate of iron J 

ZINC OXIDE. — Antiseptic and astringent. Used either as a 
dry powder dusted on the wounds or can be made into an oint- 
ment with lanolin. 

Zinc oxide, 1 part. 
Lanolin, 6 parts. 

ZINC CHLORIDE. — An irritant and corrosive poison, never 
given internally. Externally it is applied as a stimulant, as- 
tringent, caustic and parasiticide. It is also used as an antisep- 
tic, disinfectant and deodorant. From 2 to 4 drams to the pint 
of water used for ordinary antiseptic purposes. 

DOSES 

Grouped according to amounts; for reference and for conven- 
ience is memorizing: 

GRAINS 

Arsenic 1 to 6. Iodine 20 to 60. 

DRAMS 

y 2 to 1 

Capsicum; Iron sulphate; Nux vomica, powdered; Quinine sul- 
phate; Tannic acid. 

y 2 to 2 

Calomel; Opium, powdered. 



216 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE 

1 to 2 

Belladonna, fluid extract; Camphor, gum; Chloroform; Copper 
sulphate; Sodium bicarbonate, 
i to 4 

Acetanilid; Ammonia, chloride; Potassium, nitrate. 

2 to 4 

Cannabis indica, fluid extract; Charcoal; Potassium iodide; 
Salol. 
6 to 8 

Aloes. 

OUNCES 

M to i 

Gentian; Ginger. 
i 

Fenugreek. 
12 to 2 

Bromide of potassium, 
i to 2 

Sulphuric ether; Sweet spirits of niter; Tinct. Chloride of 
iron; Tinct. Opium, 
i to 3 

Aromatic spirits of ammonia; Oil of turpentine. 
2 to 4 

Alcohol; Potassium nitrate (in laminitis). 



NOMENCLATURE 
AMMUNITION, FUZES AND MATERIEL 

By Capts. Walton Clark axd W. H. Schoellkopf 

Q. Is ammunition fixed or unfixed ? 

A. For the 3 inch gun- it is fixed. For the 4.7 inch howitzer 
it is unfixed. For the 6 inch howitzer it is unfixed. 

Q. What kinds of ammunition are used? 

A. Common shrapnel, high explosive shrapnel and high explosive 
shell. 

Q. What do the projectiles weigh? 

A. 3 inch, 15 pounds; 4.7 inch, 60 pounds; 6 inch, 120 pounds. 

Q. What do the complete rounds weigh? 

A. 3 inch, 18% pounds; 4.7 inch, 67 pounds; 6 inch, 132 pounds. 

Q. From what materiel are the cartridge cases made? 

A. Drawn brass. 

Q. What is stamped on the base of the cartridge case? 

A. Name of the gun, initials of place and year of manufacture, 
also' the ammunition lot number. 

Q. What is the primer? 

A. It is composed of a percussion cap, which, when hit by the 
firing pin, ignites an auxiliary charge of black powder. The 
ignition of the black powder charges insures the uniform 
and complete ignition of the smokeless powder charge. 

Q. What is the weight of the explosive used as a bursting charge 
in common steel shell? What is its name? 

A. 3 inch gun, 13.12 ounces; 4.7 inch howitzer, 3.36 pounds; 6 
inch howitzer, 13,87 pounds. It is termed " Explosive D." 

Q. What are the fundamental parts of a round of shrapnel? 

A. Propelling charge; steel case containing the bursting charge 
and the shrapnel balls; separated by a steel diaphragm from 
the bursting charge; the balls, embedded in_a smoke pro- 
ducing matrix; and a combination time and percussion fuze. 

217 



218 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE 

Q. How many balls does a shrapnel contain? 

A. 3 inch gun, 252; 4.7 inch howitzer, 711; 6 inch howitzer, 1084. 

Q. How much does each weigh? 

A. 3 inch gun, 167 grains; 4.7 inch howitzer, 230 grains; 6 inch 
howitzer, 306 grains. 

Q. What is their diameter? 

A. 3 inch gun, 0.5; 4.7 inch howitzer, 0.54; 6 inch howitzer, 54. 

Q. How thickly should they fall on the enemy. 

A. One per square yard. 

Q. What should be done to shrapnel before it is fired? 

A. The waterproof hood removed. In the case of the 4.7 
inch and 6 inch howitzer the safety wire also removed. The 
fuze set for range and corrector. 

Q. What is the name of the fuze chiefly used? 

A. Frankford Arsenal, 31 second combination, time and per- 
cussion, fuze. 

Q. Why does not a shrapnel explode or its time train start when 
it is dropped? 

A. Because the fuze is so constructed that the concussion re- 
sistance ring holds the concussion plunger in place, unless 
the projectile received a tremendous blow or impact from 
the rear. Also because the percussion plunger has a firing 
pin that is held at 90 deg. from the direction of the per- 
cussion primer by a spring which can only be compressed 
and the firing pin brought into position to fire when the 
rapid rotary motion of the projectile sets up a centrifugal 
force sufficient to compress the spring holding the firing 
pin out of position. 

Q. If the fuze should be set at safety and the time or concussion 
plunger accidentally fired what would happen? 

A. The solid portion of the upper time ring, which covers the 
vent connecting the upper and lower time trains, would 
force the time train to burn out without communicating the 
flame to the lower train. 

Q. How should fuzes be set for travel and transportation in 
ammunition chests? 

A. At safety. 

Q. How are boxes with ammunition marked? 

A. On the sides and both ends with a borut and flame. To 



NOMENCLATURE 219 

the right of this figure "3G," "4.7H" or U 6H" to indicate 
3 inch gun, 4.7 inch howitzer or 6 inch howitzer and still 
farther to the right a star if the shell or shrapnel has a train. 
The numerals 3, 4.7 or 6 are printed in red for high explosive 
shrapnel, black for steel shell, and yellow for common 
shrapnel. For blank ammunition the figures 4.7 and H 
are in blue. 

Q. Of what is the powder charge composed? 

A. Twenty-four ounces of nitrocellulose powder for the 3 inch 
gun, 28.9 ounces of nitrocellulose powder packed in three 
raw silk bags for the 4.7 inch howitzer and 3 pounds 12.25 
ounces for the 6 inch howitzer. 

THREE INCH GUN, FOUR POINT SEVEN INCH HOWITZER, 
SIX INCH HOWITZER— WHEELED MATERIEL 

Q. How many guns in one battery? Caissons? 

A. Four guns. Twelve caissons. 

Q. How is a gun or howitzer made? 

A. Built of nickel steel. A gun consists of a tube, jacket, locking 
hoop and clip. A howitzer of the body and breech hoop. 

Q. How is the gun or the howitzer attached to the recoil 
cylinder ? 

A. By means of a lug which projects from the under side of the 
jacket in guns and from the upper side of the breech hoop 
in howitzers. 

Q. How is the breech block dismantled? 

A. Grasp the operating lever and open the mechanism. When 
the mechanism is opened, force the block latch out of its 
seat in the block by gently pressing it into its seat in the 
carrier. Take hold of the block and revolve it to the left 
until it stops, then pull it out to the rear, taking care not 
to drop it. 

Q. How is the firing lock case and firing mechanism complete 
removed from the howitzer? 

A. Take hold of the milled headed locking bolt situated at the 
lower end of the firing lock case, pull it to the rear, at the same 
time revolve the firing lock case down and about 45 and pull 
it gently to the rear. This will remove the case with the 
firing mechanism complete from the howitzer. 



220 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE 

Q. How is the cylinder of a howitzer filled? 

To fill the cylinder. — Practically all damages to the rear cradle 
head and parts of cylinder can be traced to the fact that the 
cylinder was not completely filled with oil. For that reason 
the cylinder should be filled with the greatest care; a commissioned 
officer should, himself, verify that the cylinder is full and that 
no air is left in it, with the exception of the void noted below. 
The easiest way to fill the cylinder is to fill it when disassembled 
from the carriage. If this is impracticable, fill as follows: 
The piston rod, recoil valve, counter recoil buffer and cylinder 
heads being assembled, the piston is drawn out until clear of the 
counter recoil buffer, approximately 25 inches. With the 
cylinder assembled to the howitzer lug in such a location as to bring 
one of the filling and drain plugs as near the top of the cylinder 
head as possible, elevate the howitzer to maximum elevation. 
Remove both plugs and fill slowly through either hole. When 
about two-thirds full replace the plugs and depress to zero eleva- 
tion to permit the air pocketed in the counter recoil buffer recess 
to escape. The piston rod is now forced in to within an inch 
of its firing position. The cradle is again elevated, the cylinder 
entirely filled, and the rod forced in. Before final insertion 
of the plugs the valves should be rotated slowly to permit the 
escape of any entrapped air in the by-pass; also allow plenty 
of time for pocketed air to escape. 

When satisfied that the cylinder is entirely full allow about 4 
cubic inches {about one-eighth pint) of oil to escape, thus providing 
a void for the expansion of the oil. Tighten both plugs and 
secure them with copper wire. 

Q. How is the cylinder of a 3 inch gun filled? 

A. The gun is first brought to its maximum elevation and the 
filling and drain plugs removed (it is necessary that the 
drain plug hole be located on the top of the cylinder); fill 
through the hole in the piston rod, allowing a few minutes 
for the air to escape and the oil to settle; refill. When 
the cylinder is entirely refilled, insert both plugs and depress 
the gun as far as possible. After a few minutes have elapsed, 
again elevate and unscrew both plugs and refill as described. 
When entirely full allow about 1 tablespoonful to escape. 
Insert both plugs and lash them with copper wire. 



NOMENCLATURE 221 

Q. What kind of oil and how much is required? 

A. Hydroline oil; 9 pints for the 3 inch gun and 22 pints for 
the 4.7 inch howitzer. 

Q. What is the purpose of the traveling lock? 

A. To relieve the elevating and traversing mechanism from the 
strain of travel. 

Q. How is the howitzer dismounted? 

A. Get the howitzer in a position slightly elevated and secure 
it so that it will not slide out too fast when the cylinder 
retaining ring is unscrewed. Unscrew the cylinder retaining 
ring on the rear end of the cylinder and draw the piece to 
the rear until the rails are free from the cradle gun slides. 

Q. How is the 3 inch gun dismounted? 

A. Remove the recoil indicator throw, unscrew the cylinder end 
stud nut and shove the gun to the rear until the clips are 
free of the guides. 

Q. How is the howitzer mounted? 

A. Shove the piece from the rear with the gun slides engaging 
the rails, guiding the cylinder carefully into the lug on the 
howitzer, taking care that the locating pin in the bore of 
the lug enters one of the notches on the exterior surface of 
the cylinder. 

Assemble the cylinder retaining ring locking it in place on 
the cylinder with the locking screw. 

In moving the piece on or off the cradle particular care must 
be taken to support the breech end so that the howitzer rails 
are in prolongation of the cradle gun slides. Great care 
must be exercised during this operation not to injure the 
other mechanisms about the howitzer carriage. 

Q. How is the gun mounted? 

A. Shove the piece (from the rear) over the cradle guides, with 
the clips engaging the guides; assemble the cylinder end stud 
nut, taking care that the locking stud on the recoil lug 
enters one of the recesses provided for it in the end of the 
cylinder; assemble the recoil indicator throw. In moving 
the gun on or off the cradle, care must be taken to support 
the breech end so that the gun clips remain in line with 
the gun slides. 

Q. What does the gun weigh? The howitzer? 



222 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE 

A. 788 pounds; 4.7 inch howitzer, 1056 pounds; 6 inch howitzer. 

Q. What is the caliber? 

A. 3 inch gun, 3 inches; 4.7 inch howitzer, 4.7 inches; 6 inch 

howitzer, 6 inches. 
Q. How long are they? 
A. 3 inch gun, 87.8 inches; 4.7 inch howitzer, 69 inches; 6 inch 

howitzer. 
Q. What is the rifling? 
A. The grooves on the inside of the bore. 
Q. How many grooves are there? 
A. 3 inch gun, 24; 4.7 inch howitzer, 42. 
Q. Which way does the rifling twist? 
A. As a right hand screw; i.e., in inspecting it through the 

breech, in a clockwise direction. 
Q. What is the muzzle velocity? 
A. 3 inch gun, 1700 feet per second; 4.7 inch howitzer, 900 feet 

per second; 6 inch howitzer 900 feet per second. 
Q. What is the maximum range and at what angle must the 

firing be made to get it. 
A. 3 inch gun, 6000 yards, 15 deg. elevation; 4.7 inch howitzer, 

6640 yards, 40 deg. elevation, 6 inches. 
Q. What are the weights of the gun and howitzer carriages 

complete? 
A. 3 inch gun, 2520 pounds; 4.7 inch howitzer, 3988 pounds; 

6 inch howitzer 5443 pounds. 
Q. What are the weights of the gun and howitzer carriages com- 
plete with gun and howitzer limbers loaded and equipped? 
A. 3 inch gun and limber, 4260 pounds; 4.7 inch howitzer, 5252 

pounds; 6 inch howitzer 7354 pounds. 
Q. What is the length of recoil? 
A. 3 inch G, 45 inches; 4.7 and 6 inch H's at horizontal 52 and 

6^ inches, at 40 deg. elevation 24 and 26 inches. 
Q. What is the amount of free height under the carriage and 

limber? 
A. 3 inch gun, 22 inches; 4.7 inch howitzer, 20 inches; 6 inch 

howitzer 20 inches. 
Q. What is the action of the recoil mechanism during firing? 
A. The 3 inch piece moves to the rear on the cradle; the 4.7 inch 

howitzer slides to the rear suspended from the cradle. Both 



NOMENCLATURE 223 

carry the cylinder with them and compress the counter recoil 
springs. The piston rod is attached to a stationary part of the 
carriage and the action of the cylinder in moving to the rear 
forces the oil to pass from one side of the piston to the other. 
The energy of the gun's recoil is absorbed or counteracted 
by the resistance which the oil offers on being forced thru 
the small openings past the piston, assisted by the shock 
absorption of the recoil springs. The energy transmitted to 
the springs in turn reacts to force the gun or howitzer into its 
original position. The recoil of the gun should be the same at 
all elevations, about 45 inches. With the howitzer, however, 
the recoil is less when the piece is elevated than when horizon- 
tal. This is due to the controlling properties of the gears 
which turn the piston and piston rod as the howitzer is 
elevated or depressed in order to provide fewer or more 
holes for the oil to pass through. 

Q. What nuts should not be removed unless the springs they 
engage are to be dismounted in the presence of an officer? 
Where are they? 

A. The two swing bolt nuts on the side clips of the cradle head 
front that hold in the retaining ring, which in turn fastens 
the springs in place. 

Q. How does the forge limber differ from the gun or caisson 
limbers? 

A. It is the same, except in the construction of the chest and foot 
rest, which are fitted to carry tools and supplies pertaining to 
a farrier's shop. 

Q. To what is the forge limber attached? 

A. To the battery wagon. 

Q. What is the battery wagon? 

A. A wagon carrying the following: Two spare wheels; one 
carpenter's chest; two saddler's chests; three chests for clean- 
ing materiel and small spare parts; and four chests for spare 
sights. 

Q. What is the store limber? 

A. It is substantially the same as the forge limber, excepting 
that it is constructed to carry the instruments used by the 
Battery Commander. 

Q. To what is it attached? 



224 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE 

A. To the store wagon used to carry spare parts. 

Q. How much does the caisson and limber, completely equipped 

and with ammunition weigh? 
A. 4560 pounds. 
Q. How much does the forge limber and battery wagon equipped 

and loaded weigh? 
A. 4524 pounds. 
Q. How much does the store limber and store wagon, completely 

equipped, weigh? 
A. 4208 pounds. 



THE FOUR POINT SEVEN INCH HOWITZER, MODEL OF 1908 
Weights, Dimensions, Etc. 



Weight , . pounds . 

Caliber inches . . 

Total length do. . 

Length of bore do. . 

Length of rifled portion of bore do . . 



1,056 

4-7 

69 

64.15 

54-05 



Rifling: 

Number of grooves 42 

Depth of grooves inches ... o . 04 

Width of grooves do. . . o. 21 16 

Width of lands do . . . 0.14 

Twist, right-hand, uniform, one turn in 20 calibers. 

Weight of projectile, filled and fuzed pounds. 60 

Weight of powder charge do . . . 2 

Weight of cartridge case do . . . 5.1 

Capacity of powder chamber cubic inches. . 114 . o 

Muzzle velocity feet per second. . 900 

Maximum pressure per square inch pounds. . 16,500 

Range at 15 deg. elevation yards. . 3,575 

Maximum range, 40 deg. elevation do. . . 6,640 



NOMENCLATURE 225 

THE FOUR POINT SEVEN INCH HOWITZER CARRIAGE, 
MODEL OF 1908 

Weights, Dimensions, Etc. 

Weight of carriage, complete pounds. . 2,745 

Weight of howitzer and carriage, complete do. . . 3,988 

Weight at end of trail, carriage, limbered, howitzer engaged in 

traveling lock, pounds 149 

Diameter of wheel inches. . . 58 

Width of track do . . . 60 

Height of axis of howitzer above ground do. . . 38 

Height of line of peep sight above ground .do. . . 47 . 25 

Length of sight radius. . . -. do. . . 19 

Maximum angle of elevation degrees . . 40 

Maximum angle of depression do . . . 5 

Length of recoil of howitzer on carriage, zero eleva- 
tion inches. . . 52 

Length of recoil of howitzer at 40 deg. elevation do. . . 24 

Amount of traverse of howitzer on carriage. . . . .milli ernes. . . 107 
Weight of carriage limber (model of 1909), com- 
pletely equipped pounds. . 1,264 

Weight of howitzer carriage and limber, loaded and 

equipped do. . . 5,252 

Free height under limber and carriage inches. . . 20 

Turning angle degrees. . 112 

Distance, center of limber axle to center of carriage axle when 

limbered (wheel base) inches. . . 160 



15 



226 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE 

THE SIX INCH HOWITZER, MODEL OF 1908. 

Weights, Dimensions, Etc. 

Weight . .pounds. . 1,925 

Caliber inches . . 6 

Total length do 87 

Length of bore do ... . 81.5 

Length of rifled portion of bore do ... . 69 . 05 

Rifling- 
Number of grooves 54 

Depth of grooves inches . . .05 

Width of grooves do 2091 

Width of lands do ... . .14 

Twist-right-hand, uniform one turn in 18 calibers. 

Weight of projectiles, rilled and fuzed pounds. . 120 

Weight of powder charge . . . . do . . . . 3.75 

Weight of cartridge case do ... . 8 

Capacity of powder chamber cubic inches. . 291 

Muzzle velocity (zone 3) feet per second. . 900 

Maximum pressure per square inch pounds. . 20,000 

Maximum range yards. . 6,704 

Travel of projectile . . .inches . . 71 .95 

THE SIX INCH HOWITZER CARRIAGE, MODEL OF 1908. 
Weights, Principal Dimensions, Etc. 

Weight of carriage, complete pounds . . 5,443 

Weight of howitzer and carriage, complete do. . . . 7,354 

Weight at lunette, carriage limbered and in battery .do ... . 455 
Weight at lunette, carriage limbered and howitzer in travel- 
ing position . do M93 

Diameter of wheels inches . . 60 

Width of track do ... . 60 

Maximum angle of elevation degrees . . 40 

Maximum angle of depression do ... . 5 

Amount of traverse of howitzer on carriage, . milliemes. . 107 
Length of recoil of howitzer on carriage, howitzer at zero 

degrees elevation inches . . 63 

Length of recoil of howitzer on carriage, howitzer at 40 

degrees elevation do ... . 26 

Height of axis of howitzer do ... . 43 

Height of line of peep sight do ... . 51 

Length of sight radius do ... . 19 



CLEANING: MATERIEL, HARNESS, 
INSTRUMENTS 

Q. In the case of harness and materiel, what oils and greases are 

issued and to what uses are they applied? 
A. Oils and Greases. — Lubricating oil, sperm oil, clock oil, and 

petroleum or vaseline, for lubrication; 

Light slushing oil and cosmic as rust preventives; 

Goal or kerosene oil for the cleaning of metal parts and for 

lanterns; 

Boiled linseed oil, raw linseed oil, and turpentine as ingredi- 
ents of prepared paint ; 

Neat's-foot oil for softening and preserving leather; 

Hydroline oil for filling recoil cylinders. This oil should be 

used for no other purpose. 

Officers and men should be able to distinguish the different 

oils and greases by the color, smell, or viscosity. 
Q. What oil cans are issued to a battery? How large are they 

and how much do they hold? 
A. The oil cans issued to a battery, their capacities, disposition, 

and contents are as follows: 



Coal oil, 

gallons 



Hydro- Lubricat- 
line oil, ing oil, 

gallons gallons 



Three 5-gallon oil cans on battery wagon.. . ' 

Three 5-gallon oil cans on store wagon 

Two tubular two-thirds gallon oil cans on 

forge limber 5 

Two tubular oil cans on store limber i 

Forty-eight tubular oil cans, 3 in each lim- 
ber, 1 of each kind of oil ; 

Four i-pint horizontal oilers, 1 in each trail 
box 

Total 



H 



2V2 



227 



228 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE 

Q. Name some materiels for painting. 

A. Materiel for Painting. — Second coat and third coat olive drab 

paint for the wheeled materiel. 

Brown enamel primer for painting horse collars, trace chains, 

etc. 

Rubberine paint for sealing blank charges. 

Sal soda for removing dirt and grease before painting. 

Powdered lye for removing old paint. 

Sandpaper for smoothing surfaces before painting. 

Japan drier as an ingredient for hastening the drying. 

Boiled linseed oil as an ingredient for hastening the drying 

and for making the paint more suitable for interior work. 

Raw linseed oil as an ingredient for making the paint more 

suitable for outside work. 

Turpentine for thinning paint. 

Sash and varnish brushes for painting. 
Q. Name some miscellaneous materiels and state their uses. 
A. Miscellaneous Materiels. — Borax as a flux in welding; 

Camel's hair brushes for removing dust and lint from optical 

instruments ; 

Castile soap for cleaning leather; 

Chamois skin as a wiping cloth for instruments except on the 

lenses; 

Crocus cloth for polishing metal; 

Emery cloth for cleaning metal by abrasion or wearing away 

of the surface; 

H. and H. or Paco soap for cleaning cloth and web equipment; 

Lavaline for polishing metal, such as bearing surfaces of 

collars, etc.; 

Russet leather dressing for polishing leather after cleaning; 

Saddle soap as a dressing for leather; 

Soap polish as a substitute for lavaline; 

Sponges: Large size for washing carriages, small size for 

cleaning leather; 

Waste as a wiper for general cleaning; 

Wax for rubbing on thread before sewing. 
Q. Why is frequent cleaning of carriages desirable? 
A. To preserve them from rust, or corrosion, to protect the 



CLEANING 229 

bearing surfaces, and to aid in detecting the loss of small parts 
and parts broken, cracked or out of adjustment. 

Q. Should any metal part be struck directly with a hammer? 

A. No, use a copper drift pin or a wooden block. 

Q. What is the proper way to fold a canvas bucket? 

A. Place the bottom of the bucket on the ground and hold it in 
place with both feet,, grasp the top with both hands and twist 
the bucket. 

Q. Is it necessary to keep the tools carried in the carriages in good 
condition? 

A. Yes; working edges sharp, surfaces bright and smooth. 

Q. How should the paulins be folded for use as cushions? 

A. The paulin is made of fine strips. Spread the paulin on the 
ground, throw the ropes on it, fold each outside strip over 
onto the strip next to it; fold both these double strips onto 
the middle strip, making the paulin the width of one strip 
only. Fold the paulin once down the middle lengthwise; 
then fold both ends over making the finished paulin one-third 
the length of the strip. 

Q. Why is it bad practice to wash carriages with a hose? 

A. Water reaches parts not easily dried. 

Q. How should brakes be released? 

A. By a steady pull, never by a kick or sudden blow. 

Q. What is lubrication and why is it necessary? 

A. By lubrication is meant the practice of keeping a thin film of 
the proper type of oil between all working or bearing surfaces. 
It is necessary for the x proper working of all parts and to 
preserve them from wear. 

Q. What precaution should be taken during oiling? 

A. The old oil should,, if possible, be wiped from the surface and 
the grit cleaned from it; the parts to be oiled are moved back 
and forth to make sure that enough oil reaches the entire 
bearing surface. Oil that spills on any other surface than 
where required should be wiped off to prevent accumulation 
of dust. Oil holes should be cleaned before oiling to prevent 
grit from running in. and should be closed immediately after 
use. 

Q. How much cleaning is necessary after the firing of a gun and 
when should it be done? 



230 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE 

A. As soon as possible after firing, the bores of the guns should be 
cleaned with a solution of ingredients in the following pro- 
portion: One-half pound of sal soda to one gallon of boiling 
water. They are then dried carefully and oiled. 
Also, the exploded primers should be removed from the car- 
tridge cases and and cases washed by immersing them com- 
pletely in a hot but somewhat weaker solution of sal soda; 
they are then dried carefully. Neither acids nor solutions 
of acids will be used for cleaning cartridge cases. 

Q. What care is necessary in assembling parts? 

A. A light coating of oil should be given all unpainted surfaces, 
to prevent rust, and on threads and nuts, to make the next 
disassembling easier. All split pins should be replaced and 
opened. 

Q. What are some things to remember in tilling, cleaning and 
assembling the recoil cylinder? 

A. Use only Hydroline oil (or water) inside the cylinders. 

Strain all the oil thru a clean, fine cloth and do not keep it 

in dirty containers. 

Never clamp the cylinder in a vise. 

Keep all grit out of the cylinders. 

Cotton cloth is better than waste, as the threads from the 

waste are apt to clog the ports in the valve. 

Q. Under what conditions may water be used in the recoil 
cylinders? 

A. When no Hydroline oil can be obtained. Water rusts, and 
in cold weather, is apt to freeze in the cylinder. 

Q. When should harness and horse equipment be cleaned? 

A. Immediately after use. This obligation, like the care of a 
horse, is to be regarded as a part of the mounted duty, and 
exercises will not be considered complete until horses, har- 
ness, and equipment have been put in order. 

Q. Explain the cleaning and dressing of harness. 

A. Take the harness apart, unbuckling straps and slipping 
back all keepers. With a sponge dampened — but not wet — 
with water, wipe off all dust and mud; rinse out the sponge, 
moisten it in clean water, squeeze it until nearly dry, rub 
it on castile soap and work up a thick, creamy lather. Clean 
each piece thoroughly in this lather, each piece being drawn 



CLEANING 231 

its entire length thru the lathered sponge to remove all 
salt, sweat and dirt. Again rinse out the sponge thoroughly 
and make a thick lather with sponge as dry as it can be 
squeezed. Go over each piece as before, and place the 
parts in the shade to dry. While these parts are drying, 
clean the buckles and other metal parts of the harness. 
When leather has become partially dry, rub hard with a 
cloth. Assemble the harness. 

Q. When is it necessary to oil harness and how is it done? 

A. As long as the saddle soap keeps the leather pliable, no oil is 
necessary; when the leather becomes hard and stiff, Neat's 
foot oil dressing is required. While the leather is still damp 
from castile soap dressing apply the oil to the flesh side of 
the leather with a cloth moistened, but not soaked in oil. 
Oil should be applied evenly with long, light strokes, care 
being taken to reach every part of the harness. The seat 
of the saddle hardly requires oil. 

Q. W T hy should oil be applied to the flesh side of leather? 

A. It is absorbed more easily and preserves the leather longer. 

Q. What is a general rule about handling harness? 

A. Never throw it about; saddles may be broken, collars bent, 
or straps torn by rough handling. 

Q. What should be done with the saddle blanket after use? 

A. It should be folded, wet side in, and placed across the saddle. 
This will cause the blanket to shape to the horse, and the 
wet portions will dry soft and not wiry. When necessary, 
clean the blanket by. repeatedly sousing up and down in 
warm soapsuds and hang it over a line without pressing or 
wringing it out. 

Q. Where should wet harness be dried ? 

A. In a warm, shady place; never near the stove or in the sun, 
as this will harden and crack the leather. 

Q. How should the leather straps on the carriages be cared for? 

A. As prescribed for harness. 

Q. Is it necessary to overhaul harness every day? 

A. No, after every drill the driver wipes and cleans, with a 
damp cloth, the bits, the bearing surfaces of the collars and 
the leather parts of the harness, paying particular attention 
to the places where the leather is wet from perspiration; 



232 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE 

dries the bits and rubs them with a cloth dampened with 
oil, and puts the harness in order. 

Q. What is the chief of section responsible for in cleaning 
harness? 

A. He is responsible that the cleaning done by his section is 
carried out properly, that the materiels issued are properly 
expended, and that the harness is left in good order. 

Q. Is the use of polish on leather equipment permitted? 

A. It is forbidden to use any dressing or polish except those issued 
by the Ordnance Department. 

Q. What care should be taken of the instruments of a battery? 

A. The instructions contained in the Handbook, in Ordnance 
Pamphlet No. 1795, and in Signal Corps Manual No. 3, 
for the care and disassembling of the range-finding and fire- 
control and signal equipment will be followed. 

Q. When should instruments be cleaned and by whom? 

A. The equipment will be cared for as soon as possible after 
being used, the work on each instrument being performed 
habitually by the individual assigned to its service. 

Q. How should they be cleaned? 

A. In caring for the instruments chamois skin is ordinarily 
used as a wiper on parts other than optical surfaces. To clean 
such surfaces, remove with a earners hair brush all particles 
that might scratch the surface, moisten the surface with 
the breath, wipe it carefully with the special lens paper that 
can be procured from the Ordnance Department or with a 
piece of old soft linen, and remove any remaining lint with 
the brush. 

Water is harmful to optical surfaces except in very small 
quantities, as from the condensation of the breath. The 
perspiration of the body contains an acid that decomposes 
optical glass, and for that reason drops of perspiration and 
finger marks should not be permitted to remain thereon. 
L T nder no circumstances will dirty cloth, chamois skin, 
cotton waste, or similar materiels be used for cleaning 
optical surfaces, and oil will never be allowed to reach 
them.*! 

It is important that optical parts of instruments be kept in 
warm, dry places when not in use. 



PISTOL 

POSITION AND AIMING AND MANUAL 
By 2D Lt. Erroll B. Hay 

Q. What are the principal parts of the Colt .45 Pistol? 

A. Slide, front and rear sights, slide stock, barrel, barre] bush- 
ing, recoil spring, recoil spring guide, safety lock, firing 
pin, hammer, trigger, trigger guard, magazine. 

Q. How should a pistol be handled to avoid accident? 

A. On taking the pistol from the arm rack or holster, take out 
the magazine and see that it is empty before replacing it, then 
draw back the slide and make sure that the piece is unloaded, 
looking thru the bore as an added precaution. Observe the 
same precaution on the range and before beginning a drill. 

Q. What is the purpose of pistol instruction? 

A. To make the soldier a good shot under war conditions. 

Q. How may this be done? 

A. By means of preliminary drills and gallery practice the soldier 
is trained in the fundamental principles of marksmanship. 
By means of range practice he is taught to apply these 
principles. 

Q. What is the position, dismounted? 

A. Stand firmly on both feet, body perfectly balanced and erect 
and turned at such an angle as is most comfortable when the 
arm is extended toward the target ; the feet, far enough apart 
to insure firmness and steadiness of position (about 8 to 10 
inches). Weight of body borne equally upon both feet; 
right arm fully extended, left arm hanging naturally. 

Q. How is the pistol grasped? 

A. Grasp the stock as high as possible with the thumb and last 
three fingers, the forefinger alongside the trigger guard, the 
thumb extending along the stock. The barrel, hand and fore- 
arm should be as nearly in one line as possible when the 

233 



234 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE 

weapon is pointed toward the target. The grasp should not 
be so tight as to cause tremors of the hand or arm to be com- 
municated to the weapon, but should be firm enough to 
avoid losing the grip when the recoil takes place. 
To do uniform shooting the weapon must be held with exactly 
the same grip for each shot — the tension of the grip must be 
uniform. The pressure of the forefinger on the trigger should 
be steadily increased and should be straight back and not 
sidewise. 

Q. What is the best way to sight? 

A. Except when delivering rapid or quick fire the rear and front 
sights of the pistol are used in the same manner as the rifle. 
The normal sight is used and the line of sight is directed upon 
a point just under the bull's-eye at "6 o'clock.' ' The front 
sight must be seen through the middle of the rear-sight notch, 
the top being on a line with the top of the notch. Do not 
cant the pistol to either side. 

Q. How is the pistol aimed at the target while mounted? 

A. Position and aiming drill mounted: Rapid aim must be 
taken while in motion. To practise this drill frequently 
going thru the motions of aiming and firing (at will) 
at silhouette targets and other objects placed along the 
track and 5 yards from it, practise while moving at a walk, 
trot and gallop. In quick-aimed fire this can best be done 
by holding the pistol pointed toward the targets and moving 
the arm up and down. With both eyes fixed on the target, 
point the pistol just as it starts on the upward motion and 
squeeze the trigger. 

MANUAL OF THE PISTOL 

Both before and after drill or other exercise with the pistol, 
remove the magazine to see that it is empty, and draw back 
the slide and examine the bore to see that the pistol is not 
loaded. 

The pistol being in the holster, to raise pistol: 1. Raise; 
2. PISTOL. 

At the command raise, unbutton the flap of the holster and 
grasp the handle with the last three fingers of the right hand, 
back of the hand to the right. At the command, pistol, 



PISTOL 235 

lift the pistol straight up, closing the thumb on the stock as it 
clears the holster, and extend the forefinger outside of the 
trigger guard. Carry the pistol forward and upward to a 
position 6 inches in front of the point of the right shoulder, 
barrel to the rear and inclined forward about 30 degrees. 

Being at raise pistol: 1. Return; 2. PISTOL. 

If the pistol is loaded, see that the hammer is down or that 
the safety lock is in the locking position. Lower the pistol and 
raise the flap of the holster with the right hand. Insert the 
pistol in the holster and force it down. Button the flap with 
the right hand. 

Being at raise pistol: 1. Inspection ; 2 . PISTOL. 

Without deranging the position of the hand, rotate the pistol 
so that the sights move to the left, the barrel pointing to the 
right front and upward. With the thumb and forefinger of the 
left hand grasp the slide and pull it toward the body. 

If the magazine is empty, as it should be, the slide stop will 
lock the slide in the open position. Drop the left hand by the 
side. Carry the pistol to a position about 6 inches in front of 
the center of the body, barrel pointing upward at an angle of 
about 45 degrees and to the left, wrist straight and as high as 
the breast. 

When the inspection is completed, resume raise pistol, 
release the slide stop with the left thumb, and lower the hammer 
by pressing the trigger. 

The pistol being in the holster: Prepare for inspection. 

At this command the Jap of the magazine pocket is unbut- 
toned and turned back with the left hand. Each man in turn 
executes raise pistol and inspection pistol in time to be at the 
latter position as the inspection of the man on his right is com- 
menced by the inspector. 

As soon as the inspector passes, the soldier completes in- 
spection pistol, executes return pistol, and with the left hand 
closes the magazine pocket. 

Being at raise pistol to remove the magazine: 

Without deranging the position of the hand, rotate the pistol 
so. that the sights move to the right, the barrel pointing to the 
left front and upward; press the magazine catch with the right 
thumb and remove the magazine with the left hand. 



236 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE 

To charge the magazine: Hold the magazine in the left 
hand, open end up, rounded side to the right. Take the car- 
tridge in the right hand, thumb on the rim, bullet end pointing 
to the right; place the rim on the end of the magazine follower; 
force down the magazine spring and slip the cartridge to the 
left into the magazine. The next cartridge is similarly slipped 
in by placing it on the cartridge just inserted and forcing down 
the spring. 

The magazine may be charged with any number of cartridges 
from one to seven. 

The pistol being in the position for removing the maga- 
zine, to insert the magazine : 

With the left hand insert the magazine in the handle and 
shove it home, not by striking it, but with a quick continuous 
movement, making sure that it engages with the magazine 
catch. Resume raise pistol. 

Being at raise pistol with at least one cartridge in the 
magazine: LOAD. 

Rotate the pistol as in inspection pistol. With the thumb 
and forefinger of the left hand grasp the slide, and by pulling 
it toward the body until fully back and then quickly releas- 
ing it, cause a cartridge to enter the chamber of the barrel. 
If the pistol is to be kept in the hand and not fired at once, 
the safety lock is moved to the locking position with the 
right thumb. If the loaded pistol is to be carried in the hol- 
ster the hammer must be fully lowered. Resume raise pistol. 

The pistol being loaded, to lower the hammer. 

The pistol being in the position for loading, place the left 
hand around the grip over the right, seat the left thumb 
firmly on the hammer, and insert the right forefinger inside 
the trigger guard. Exert sufficient pressure with the left 
thumb to control the movement of the hammer, press the 
trigger and the grip safety with the right hand, and carefully 
and slowly lower the hammer completely down. Remove the 
forefinger from the trigger. 

To again cock the pistol, move the forefinger clear of the 
trigger, place the right thumb on the hammer, and bring the 
hammer back to the position of full cock. 

To unload : UNLOAD, 



pistol 237 

Remove the magazine. Execute the motions of load, 
thereby throwing the cartridge from the chamber. 

Being at raise pistol, to fire: With the right thumb release 
the safety lock, if in the locking position; extend the arm, 
bring the sights on the target, and press the trigger. 

The energy of recoil causes the mechanism of the pistol to 
eject the empty cartridge case, load, and prepare the pistol 
for the next shot. Pressure must be entirely relieved from 
the trigger after each shot in order that the trigger may re- 
engage the sear. At the firing of the last cartridge, as the 
slide moves to the rear, it is automatically locked in the open 
position by the slide stop, thus calling attention to the fact 
that the magazine is empty. 
Q. What oils can be used on pistols? 

A. For metallic surfaces, sperm oil, cosmic, or "3 in 1." When 
arms are stored, cosmic should be used. The stock should 
be wiped off occasionally with a cloth moistened with any 
of the oils named. 



ROLLS AND PACKS 

By ist Lt. H. S. Southall 

Q. What departments furnish field equipment for the men? 

A. The articles comprising the field kit vary with the duties of 
the men and are furnished by the Ordnance Department, the 
Quartermaster Corps and the Medical Department. 

Q. What comprises the field kit of individually mounted men? 

A. The field kit for individually mounted men consists of and 
is carried as shown below. 



ORDNANCE PROPERTY 

(a) personal equipment 



Articles 

i can, bacon 

i canteen 

i canteen cover 

i cup 

i fork 

i knife } Mess kit. 

i spoon 

i meat can 

i pistol, belt, holster, magazine 
pockets, 2 extra magazines, 21 
cartridges 

1 pouch for first-aid packet 



Where carried 

Near saddle pocket. 

Near cantle ring. 

On canteen. 

On canteen, under cover. 

Near saddle pocket. 

Near saddle pocket. 

Near saddle pocket. 
L Near saddle pocket. 

On person, belt outside all clothing, 
pistol on right hip, first-aid packet 
on left of and toward front of 
belt, magazine pocket in front of 
first-aid packet. 



1 spurs, pair 

1 spur straps, pair. 



On person, buckles outside. 



(b) horse equipment 

1 bridle On horse. 

1 halter headstall On horse. 

1 halter tie rope On halter, free end secured in near 

pommel ring. 

1 link On bridle, free end snapped up. 

238 



ROLLS AXD PACKS 239 

i saddle blanket On horse. 

i saddle On horse. 

i saddlebags, pair On saddle, the saddlebag straps passed 

through the cincha rings and 
drawn tight before fastening. 

i surcingle Over saddle, buckled on near side. 

. } grooming kit. . . Oft* saddle pocket. 
i horse brush J 

i feed bag On saddle. 

i grain bag In feed bag. 

QUARTERMASTER PROPERTY 

(c) EQUIPMENT 

i identification tag Slung around neck by tape. 

5 pins, tent, shelter 1 T . . . t „ 

D F ' ' . > In blanket roll. 

i pole, tent, shelter J 

i tent, shelter, half, mounted . . Around and forming part of blanket 

roll. 

(d) clothing component 

i blanket In blanket roll. 

i slicker Rolled and strapped to pommel of 

saddle, 
i towel Off saddle pocket, outside canvas 

lining, 
i comb ] 

i soap, cake [ Wrapped in towel. 

i toothbrush J 

i drawers, pair . . . \ 

2 stockings, pairs \ In blanket roll. 

i undershirt J 

(e) rations 

2 reserve rations, each consisting of — 

12 ounces bacon In bacon can. 

16 ounces hard bread Divided between saddle pockets. 

1. 1 2 ounces coffee, R. & G In coffee bag of saddlebags, in near 

pocket. 
2.4 ounces sugar In sugar bag of saddlebags, in near 

pocket. 
0.16 ounce salt In salt bag of saddlebags, in near 

pocket. 



240 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE 

(f) forage 
i feed, 4 pounds of grain .In grain bag. 

(g) medical property 
i first-aid packet. In pouch on belt. 

Q. When and where are the sweater and overcoat carried? 

A. The sweater and the overcoat form part of the equipment 
to be carried with the men in the field only when climatic con- 
ditions require them. When they are not ordered carried 
they are made up in bundles, secured and marked so that 
they may be forwarded whenever necessary. 
When the sweater is carried and is not worn on the person 
it is placed in the blanket roll. When the overcoat is carried 
and is not worn it is rolled and strapped on the pommel of 
the saddle. 

Q. Describe how to roll the overcoat and slicker. 

A. Spread the slicker or overcoat on the ground, inside down, 
skirt buttoned throughout, sleeves parallel to the middle seam, 
collar turned over on the shoulders. 

Turn the tails of the coat under about 9 inches, the folded 
edge perpendicular to the back seam. Fold over the sides to 
form a rectangle not more than 34 inches across, according to 
the size of the coat. Roll tightly from the collar with the 
hands and knees, and bring over the whole roll that part of 
skirt which was turned under, thus binding the roll. 

Q. Describe how to make the blanket roll for mounted men. 

A. Spread shelter half (model 1904) on the ground, roll straps 
underneath, and fold over the triangular part on the rect- 
angular part. Turn under the roll strap edge of the shelter 
half so that the width of the fold will be 8 inches. Fold the 
blanket once across the longer edges and lay the blanket on 
the shelter half, folded edge within 1 inch of the roll strap edge 
of the shelter half. Fold the sides of the blanket and of the 
shelter half inward, width of folds about n inches. The 
shelter tent pole and pins are now laid on the blanket at the 
edge farthest from the roll strap edge, pole on one side of the 
center line, pins on the other, so as to allow the roll when 
completed to bend at the center. Place the underclothing 



ROLLS AND PACKS 241 

on the blanket. If the sweater is to go in the roll, spread it 

smoothly over the blanket. 

Roll tightly toward the roll strap edge, using hands and knees, 

and bring over the entire roll the part of the shelter half which 

was turned under, thus binding the roll. Buckle the two 

available roll straps about the roll, passing them around 

twice. 

The roll thus formed should be about 44 inches long. 

Q. Describe how to pack the feed bag for individually mounted 
men. 

A. The grain is placed in the grain sack and equally divided be- 
tween the two halves. The elongated grain sack is then 
placed inside the feed bag and the whole lashed tightly to 
the blanket roll by the web straps at each end of the feed bag, 
so that the open part of the feed bag is closed against the 
blanket roll. If empty, the feed bag, with grain sack in- 
closed and all web straps buried in the bag, is lashed to the 
blanket roll by the coat straps. 

Q. How is the feed bag packed with the blanket roll? 

A. To pack the blanket roll with the attached feed bag, three 
coat straps are used, one to fasten the middle of the roll to the 
middle of the cantle of the saddle, and one at each end to 
fasten the end of the roll to the saddlebag strap ring. The 
blanket roll is placed on the cantle so that the feed bag will 
be uppermost. The coat straps are passed twice around the 
roll and buckled. 

Q. How does the drivers equipment differ from that of indi- 
vidually mounted men ? 

A. The equipment of each driver is the same as for individually 
mounted men with the exception of horse equipment and grain. 
The driver's horse equipment consists of 1 horse brush, 1 
currycomb, 2 feed bags, 2 grain bags, and 2 surcingles. Each 
driver carries a feed of grain for each horse. Halters, saddle- 
bags, saddle blankets, etc., are included in the harness. 
The driver's canteen is snapped in the near pommel ring of 
the off saddle. His saddlebags, blanket roll, feed bags, 
slicker, etc., are likewise packed on the off saddle. After 
attaching his slicker the driver turns the top of the roll over 

16 



242 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE 

the pommel down into the saddle so as to avoid any inter- 
ference with the rein roller on the off saddle. 

Q. Describe how to pack the driver's blanket roll and feed bags. 

A. The grain is placed in the grain sacks and each sack placed in 
its feed bag. The two feed bags are tied securely together 
at their open ends, using the "nose and head" web straps, the 
two bags being tied as closely as possible to prevent the lower 
ends chafing against the traces. The two feed bags are then 
suspended across the seat of the saddle of the off horse and 
lashed in place by the 6o-inch coat straps on each side, as 
follows: Pass the coat strap under the rear quarter strap and 
take one turn around the nose bag, if necessary punching a 
" throat" into the bag near the lower end to prevent the coat 
strap slipping. The blanket roll being lashed to the center of 
the cantle, bring the free end of the roll forward so as to bind 
over the feed bag and take two turns around the end of the 
blanket roll with the coat strap. They pass the free end of 
this strap over the straps thus in place and buckle tightly. 
Do the same on the other side. 

If more than one feed is to be carried, place the grain for the 
first feed in the closed end of the feed bag and lash the feed bag 
tightly with the rawhide thong. Put the remainder of the 
grain in the grain sack, and place the grain sack in the feed 
bag; secure the two feed bags to the off saddle as above. 
The surcingles are carried one on each horse, buckled over 
the saddle. 

With the exceptions noted, all articles of the driver's equip- 
ment are packed and carried in a manner similar to that de- 
scribed for individually mounted men. 

Q. What additional equipment do corporals and members of 
special details carry? 

A. In addition to the kits above prescribed, each corporal is 
provided with a housewife which he will carry in his haver- 
sack or off saddle pocket. 

The members of the special details and of the headquarters 
company are provided with various equipment which they 
carry on their persons. The field glasses will be carried on the 
right side, the flag kit on the back, the strap in each case 
passing over the left shoulder. 



ROLLS AND PACKS 



243 



Q. What is the field kit for cannoneers. and other dismounted 
men? 

A. The field kit for cannoneers and all men not mounted, in- 
cluding Nos. 8 trained as spare drivers, consists of and is car- 
ried as shown below: 

ORDNANCE PROPERTY 



(a) personal equipment 



'Mess kit. 



Articles 
i can, bacon 
i can, condiment 

i canteen 

i canteen cover. , 

i cup 

i fork 

i knife 

i spoon 

i meat can 



i pistol, belt, holster, magazine ' 
pocket, 2 extra magazines, 
21 cartridges. 

i pouch for first-aid packet. 

i haversack 



Where carried 

. In haversack. 

. On right rear of pistol belt. 
. On canteen. 
On canteen under cover. 
In haversack 
In haversack. 
In haversack. 
[ In haversack. 

On person, belt outside all 
clothing on right hip, first- 
aid packet on left of and 
toward front of belt, maga- 
zine pocket in front of first- 
aid packet. 
On person. 



. In blanket roll. 



QUARTERMASTER PROPERTY 

(C) EQUIPMENT 

i identification tag Slung around neck by tape. 

5 pins, tent, shelter 
i pole, tent, shelter 
i tent, shelter, half mounted Around and forming part of 

the blanket roll. 

i blanket In blanket roll. 

i slicker Folded and placed between 

folds of one of paulins of 

carriage on which soldier 

rides. 

i towel .In haversack. 

i comb 

i soap, cake \ Wrapped in towel. 

i toothbrush 



244 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE 



.In blanket roll. 



i drawers, pair 
2 stockings, pairs 
i undershirt 

(e) rations 

2 reserve rations, each consisting of — 

12 ounces bacon . . .In bacon can. 

16 ounces hard bread In haversack. 

i.i 2 ounces coffee, R. & G. ] 

2.4 ounces sugar \ In condiment can. 

0.16 ounce salt 

(g) medical property 
1 first-aid packet In pouch or belt. 

Q. Where do cannoneers carry sweaters and overcoats? 

A. The remarks made with reference to the sweater and the 
overcoat in the case of mounted men apply to cannoneers 
except that when the overcoat is carried, and not worn by the 
cannoneer, it is folded and placed between the folds of a paulin 
on a carriage of the section to which the cannoneer is assigned. 

Q. Where are old model haversacks and canteens carried? 

A. When the old model haversack and canteen are issued the 
personal equipment of men not mounted is increased by two 
canteen haversack straps. Such haversacks are slung from 
the right shoulder to the left side. The canteen is slung from 
the left shoulder to the right side, the strap passing over that of 
the haversack. Both ends of the haversack strap and the 
rear end of the canteen strap pass under the pistol belt. 
When the old model canteen and cup are issued the cup is 
carried in the near saddle pocket by mounted men and in the 
haversack by men not mounted. 

Q. Describe how to make the blanket roll for men not mounted. 

A. Lay the shelter half on the ground and fold over the triangular 
part. Hold the blanket up by two corners, the shorter edges 
vertical; bring the two corners together, thus folding the 
blanket in the middle; take the folded corner between the 
thumb and forefinger of the right hand, thumb pointing to 
the left; slip the left hand down the folded edge two-thirds 
of its length and seize it with the thumb and second finger; 



ROLLS AND PACKS 245 

raise the hands to the height of the shoulder, the blanket 
extending between them; bring the hands together, the double 
fold falling outward; pass the folded corner from the right 
hand into the left hand, between the thumb and forefinger; 
slip the second finger of the right hand between the folds, 
seize the double folded corner; turn the left (disengaged) 
corner in, and seize it with the thumb and forefinger of the 
right hand, the second finger of the right hand stretching 
and evening the folds. The blanket is now folded in six 
thicknesses. 

Lay the folded blanket on the shelter half so that one of its 
shorter sides will be about 8 inches from the edge of the shelter 
half farthest from the triangular part. Place the underclothing 
on the blanket. If the sweater is to go in the roll fold it and 
place it on the blanket with the folded edge of the sweater 
even with that of the folded edge of the blanket. Across 
the other short side of the blanket place the shelter tent pole 
and pins. 

Fold over the sides and ends of the shelter half which lie out- 
side of the blanket, causing the ropes and straps to be included 
within the folds. 

Commencing at the end where the pole and pins are placed 
roll the pack, using the hands and knees to insure the roll being 
made as tight as possible. Just before the roll is completed 
open out slightly with the hands the pocket formed by the 
8-inch fold of the shelter half, and then draw the pocket over 
the roll, thus binding it. Care should be taken to draw the 
canvas over the ends of the roll so as to prevent rain and dust 
from entering the inner portion of the roll. The roll thus 
formed should be about 22 inches long. 

The roll is secured to the limber chest of the carriage to which 
the soldier is assigned, by means of the straps provided for the 
purpose. The rolls carried on any one limber chest are evenly 
disposed on either side of the door lock. 

It is frequently desirable, especially in a strong w T ind, for the 
men to work in pairs in making their rolls. 

Q. What is a surplus kit? 

A. The surplus kit contains articles of clothing necessary in 
camps of several weeks' duration and to permit the replace- 



246 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE 

merit of clothing worn oat in active operations. For these pur- 
poses the surplus kits are forwarded to troops when serving in 
instruction, maneuver, mobilization, and concentration 
camps, or when in active service temporary suspensions of 
operation, or other conditions, permit the troops to refit. In 
certain cases in time of peace the surplus kits may, when 
transportation is available, accompany the troops on the 
march. 

The surplus kit of each man consists of — 
i breeches, pair. 2 stockings, pairs. 

1 drawers, pair. 1 shoe laces, extra pair. 

1 shirt, olive drab. 1 undershirt. 

1 shoes, russet leather, pair. 
The kit of each man will be packed as follows: 
Stockings, rolled tightly, one pair in the toe of each shoe; 
shoes placed together, heels at opposite ends, soles outward, 
wrapped tightly in underwear, and bundle securely tied 
around the middle by the extra pair of shoe laces, each bundle 
tagged with the battery number of the owner. 
The breeches and olive drab shirt are not rolled. 



SALUTES AND COURTESIES 

Q. What is a salute? 

A. A salute is a military courtesy. It is the soldier's claim to 
instant recognition as a soldier. 

Q. How is a salute executed unarmed? 

A. Always with the right hand, raise it smartly till the tip of the 
forefinger touches the lower part of the headdress, above the 
right eye; thumb and fingers extended and joined; palm to 
the left; forearm inclined at about 45 deg.;hand and wrist 
straight; at the same time look toward the person saluted, 
until it is acknowledged by, or until passing, the person 
saluted. 

Q. How should an artilleryman salute when armed with a pistol? 

A. In the same manner as he would if unarmed — with the right 
hand. 

Q. Does an artilleryman armed with a pistol salute during hours 
of challenge ? 

A. No. He remains at raise pistol. 

Q. Whom should he salute? 

A. All officers of all arms, and of all nations allied to the United 
States; all colors and- standards not cased; the national airs of 
the United States or her allies; and at funerals when the cas- 
ket is passing. 

Q, When is the salute rendered? 

A. On all occasions outdoors, when not in ranks, excepting when 
at work or at play. 

Q. Is the salute rendered when at double time, trot or gallop? 

A. No. Only at quick time or at a walk. 

Q. If the officer is at double time, trot or gallop, should he be 
saluted ? 

A. Yes. 

Q. Should a soldier riding in or driving a vehicle of any kind 
salute officers that he passes? 

247 



248 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE 

A. Yes. He should salute without rising. 

Q. On meeting, acknowledging an introduction, or being ad- 
dressed by a lady, what form of salutation should a soldier 
render? 

A. Either the salute or raising of the hat. 

Q. When should a salute begin and how long should it be held? 

A. The hand should be raised to the headdress when the soldier 
is six paces from the officer, and held there until the salute has 
been returned or the officer has passed. If the parties ex- 
changing the salute do not approach each other within six 
paces, the salute is executed at the point of nearest approach. 

Q. If a soldier passes an officer from the rear, or an officer passes 
a soldier from the rear, should the soldier salute? 

A. Yes. He should salute when the officer is about to pass him. 

Q. Do prisoners salute? 

A. No. They are not entitled to the exchange of this courtesy. 
They merely stand at attention. 

Q. When a soldier in ranks is addressed by an officer, what does 
he do? 

A. Assumes the position of a soldier at attention: a soldier in 
ranks never salutes. 

Q. When an officer approaches a number of enlisted men out- 
doors, what is done? 

A. The soldier who first perceives the officer gives the command 
ATTENTION, when all stand at attention and salute. All 
the men should salute at the same instant. 

Q. When an officer enters a room where there are soldiers, what 
is done? 

A. The soldier first noticing the approach of an officer gives the 
command ATTENTION, when all rise and remain standing 
at attention until the officer leaves the room. Soldiers at 
meals do not rise, they merely discontinue eating and sit at 
attention, resuming their meal when the officer has departed. 

Q. Upon entering an officer's quarters, or a place where a number 
of officers are congregated, what does a soldier do? 

A. Removes his hat and stands at attention. If under arms, he 
does not remove his hat. 

Q. When speaking or reporting to an officer, what should a soldier 
do? 



SALUTES AND COURTESIES 249 

A. He should first salute, address or report to the officer, and 

again salute on leaving. 
Q. When an enlisted man is in command of a body of soldiers, 

what does he do on the approach of an officer? 
A. Brings the soldiers to attention and salutes. 
Q. What does a soldier out of ranks do at the first note of the 

National Air. 
A. Comes to attention, faces the music, and salutes, holding the 

salute until the last note of the air has been played. 
Q. What does a soldier out of ranks do at the first note of the 

National Air when played at retreat? 
A. Comes to attention, faces toward the flag and salutes. 
Q. What does a soldier do on approaching uncased colors or 

standards? 
A. Salutes when within six paces of the uncased colors or stand- 
ards and holds the salute until he has passed six paces beyond 

them. 
Q. In walking or riding with an officer, what is the soldier's 

position? 
A. To the officer's left and about one pace in rear of him. He 

also keeps step with the officer, when dismounted. 
Q. Is it proper to salute with the hand in the pocket, or a cigar, 

cigarette or pipe in the mouth ? 
A. No. It is decidedly unmilitary and a sure indication of a 

poorly trained soldier. 



THE INSIGNIA OF THE U. S. ARMY AND COLLAR 
DEVICES OF NAVAL OFFICERS* 




The General Staff 




US. 

The Regular Army 




The Officers' Reserve Corps 



The National Guard 




The National Army 




The Adjutant General's 
Department 





The Inspector General's The Judge Advocate's 

Department Department 

* The illustrations in this section were supplied through the courtesy of Bailey, 
Banks and Biddle Company, Philadelphia. 

250 



INSIGNIA 



251 




^^uj^* 



The Quartermaster's 
Department 




The Medical De- 
partment 





The Ordnance 
Department 



The Corps of Engineers 






The Signal Corps 



The Coast Artillery 




The Field Artillery 



Infantry 



252 



FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE 




Aviator's Device 
ORDER OF RANK 

The order of rank and the relation to each other of the Commis- 
sioned line Officers of the Army and Navy is as follows : 



ARMY 

General 

Lieutenant General 

Major General 

Brigadier General 

Colonel 

Lieutenant Colonel 

Major 

Captain 

First Lieutenant 

Second Lieutenant 



NAVY 

Admiral 

Vice Admiral 

Rear Admiral 

Commodore 

Captain 

Commander 

Lieutenant Commander 

Lieutenant 

Lieutenant (Junior Grade) 

Ensign 



INSIGNIA OF RANK— ARMY 

LIEUTENANT GENERAL 

— One large silver star, an inch 
and a quarter in diameter. 
Two small silver stars, fifteen- 
sixteenths of an inch in di- 
ameter. 



MAJOR GENERAL— Two 
silver stars, fifteen-six- 
teenths of an inch in diameter. 

BRIGADIER GENERAL 

— One silver star, fifteen-six- 
teenths of an inch in diameter. 



(The Army has recently promoted Officers to rank of General) 







REGULATION SIZE MINIATURE 

COLONEL-Silver spread eagle, three-fourths of an inch high and two inches 
between stretch of wings, J 



INSIGNIA 



253 



INSIGNIA OF RANK 




LIEUTENANT _ COLONEL— 
A silver leaf, one inch high, one 
inch across. 

MAJOR— Gold leaf of the same 
design, size and shape as for 

Lieutenant Colonel. 




REGULATION SIZE 



MINIATURE 






CAPTAIN — Two silver bars, each one- 
quarter of an inch wide and one inch long. 
The bars are placed one-quarter of an inch 
apart. 



FIST LIEUTENANT— 
One silver bar, one-quar- 
ter inch wide and one inch 
long. 




Cap Device Cap Device 

Commissioned Officers Commissioned Officers 

U. S. Navy U. S. Army 



Cap Device 
U. S. Marine Corps 



254 



FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE 






Button for uni- Button for uniform Button for uniform 

form of Officers U. of Officers U. S. Army of Officers U. S. Army 

S. Army Engineers. except Engineers. except Engineers. 

(Coat size.) (Vest size.) 



NAVAL OFFICERS 




M COLLAR DEVICES 



ADMIRAL. 

iiiiiiuiiuiiiinifiiiiiiiiuiiiiiiiiininiiiiiiniiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiuniiiiiiiiiiiiitiiuuiiniiiiiiiiuiiiiiiiMiniiiiiiiiiini 




VICE ADMIRAL 



REAR ADMIRAL 




COMMANDER 
SILVER OAK LEAF' 



•LIEUTENANT-COMMANDER- 
GOLD OAK LEAF 



LIEUTENANT- 



I c £* I . ( *r*& 



LI EUTEN ANtJJuN loci] 




CHAPLAIN 



FLAGS OF THE 




United States 



ft 

\\ \ France 




256 



ALLIED COUNTRIES 




Serbia 




Montenegro 





Portugal 




Cuba 



257 



SIGNALLING 

Caft. R. G. MacKendrick and ist Lt. C. P. Smith, ist Lt. 
L. C. Forgie, 2D Lt. W. T. Powers 

FIELD TELEPHONE AINTD BUZZER 

Q. Give a general description of the service buzzer. 

A. The service buzzer is a complete telegraph and telephone 
combined. It is packed in a small leather case and weighs, 
complete, five pounds. The main parts are: batteries (2), 
induction coil, condenser, line jack, telegraph key, receiver 
and transmitter, and rocker switch. 

Q. Describe the working of the buzzer as a telegraph instrument. 

A. An induction coil consists of a primary winding of a few 
turns of heavy wire around a soft iron core, and a secondary 
winding of very small wire. As current is passed through 
the primary coil, it sets up or induces a secondary current of 
high voltage in the secondary coil. This current magnetizes 
the iron core to alternately attract and release the vibrator 
so rapidly that a buzzing noise is caused. As varying cur- 
rents go through the coil, varying secondary currents are 
set up, giving the characteristic dots and dashes, when the 
key is pressed. 

Q. Trace the primary circuit for the telegraph. 

A. The primary telegraph circuit is as follows: battery, lug 
P, primary coil, lug PS, back under contact key, front under 
key contact, vibrator, then back to the battery. 

Q. Trace the secondary current for telegraphy. 

A. The secondary current for sending by telegraph is: line 
jack ring, lug S, secondary coil, lug PS, line condenser, 
switch and back to line jack tip. 

Q. Of what use is the condenser? 

A. Sometimes it is necessary to tap a wire that already has a 
direct current running through it for the use of either a 

259 



260 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUiDE 

buzzer or a phone. The condenser will not permit direct 
current to pass through it, but the alternating current of the 
buzzer or telephone can pass freely. The condenser is put in 
use by moving the condenser switch in the direction indicated 
by the arrow. 

Q. Trace the primary circuit for the telephone. 

A. The primary circuit for the telephone is: battery, lug P, 
primary coil, lug PS, center main binding post, transmitter, 
binding post T, and back to the battery. 

Q. The secondary circuit for telephone and buzzer receiving are 
the same. Trace this circuit. 

A. Line jack ring, lug S, secondary coil, lug PS, center main 
binding post, receiver, binding post R, upper contact key, 
base of key, line condenser switch, and back to the line 
jack tip. 

Q. What is the purpose of the rocker switch in the front of the 
instrument? 

A. At the base of the rocker switch are two white letters; namely 
"B " and U T." When the switch is tilted toward "B," the 
buzzer is put in operation, when toward "T," the telephone 
is connected. 

Q. What is the jack? 

A. The jack is the clip and ring combination in front of the 
coil into which the plug is seated to put the buzzer or 'phone 
in use. One wire is connected through the clip and point 
of the plug and the other by the ring and shank of the plug. 

BUZZER TESTS 

Q. Why are buzzer tests important? 

A. The buzzer is a delicate instrument and is liable to get out 
of order quickly. The wires used in connecting stations are 
small and easily broken. As communication is vitally 
important in artillery work, it is necessary to make repairs 
as rapidly as possible. These buzzer tests locate the trouble 
and make it possible to quickly reestablish communication. 

Q. When the buzzer is out of order, what steps should be taken to 
locate the trouble? 

A. For testing purposes, the switch is always set on the side 
marked "T." 



SIGNALLING 261 

(a) To test the buzzer element: Press the key several times 
and, if necessary, adjust the buzzer until a clear, distinct 
note is obtained. Directions for adjusting the buzzer are 
given inside the lid of the case. Seat the plug firmly in the 
jack and — while pressing the key — touch the ground rod 
with the connector several times. When this contact note 
is made the buzzer should be much fainter than it is when 
the contact is broken. If the test is successful, the buzzer 
element, plug, cord and its connections are in order. 

(b) To test the telephone element: seat the plug firmly in 
the jack; clip the connector to the ground rod and, while 
blowing briskly into the transmitter, press the transmitter 
button several times. If the blowing is clearly heard in the 
receiver when the button is pressed and is not when the 
button is released, the telephone element, plug, cord and its 
connections are in order. 

If both tests are successful, the instrument is in serviceable 
condition. If either test fails, the faults should be localized 
and then repaired. 



TO USE THE TELEPHONE 

Press the button on the transmitter while talking. 

Test of Speaking Circuit 

Q. What are some special tests to be remembered besides 
the two general tests already given ? 

A. Short circuit secondary circuit. This is done by connect- 
ing R and S of Field Artillery Telephone and by connecting 
the binding posts of the Service Buzzer. Place receiver to 
the ear, blow in transmitter. If speaking circuit is operative 
the blowing will be heard in receiver. 

Test of a Battery 

Detach a receiver that is working properly and touch its 
terminals to the opposite ends of the battery. A loud click 
will be heard if the battery is operative. 

17 



262 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE 

Test of a Receiver 

Detach the receiver and touch its terminals to the opposite 
ends of a battery that is known to be operative. A loud click 
will be heard in receiver if it is operative. 

TEST OF BUZZER 

Press button or key and if operative it will be known by 
the sound. This is also an indication that the batteries are 
operative. 

ADJUSTMENT OF BUZZER 

The buzzer is adjusted by means of two screws; the upper 
screw adjusts the air gap (the distance between the vibrating 
spring and the iron core of the induction coil) and the lower 
screw carries the current to the vibrating spring. First set 
the upper screw and turn lower screw until by pressing call 
iDutton a strong buzz is heard. If no results are obtained try 
another setting of the upper screw and again turn the lower 
screw in and out. Proceed in this manner until the desired 
adjustment is obtained. If the battery is strong and the 
above fails to give adjustment, clean contacts on buzzer by 
running a smooth file or fine sand paper between lower screw 
and springs. When adjustment is secured the locking nuts 
with which both adjusting screws are provided should be 
carefully tightened. 

TEST OF CONNECTIONS 

Tighten all loose nuts and screws. 

Test all cords for breaks beneath the insulation. 

Remove telephone or buzzer from case and examine wiring 

on reverse side of base plate. 

See that plugs make connection in jacks. See, also, that 

connectors make a good contact with line and ground rod. 

See that a good ground is secured. 

TEST OF TRANSMITTER 

Make the tests outlined above. If speaking circuit is out 
of order and the other tests show that battery, receiver and 



SIGNALLING 263 

connections are intact, the trouble has been quite definitely 
traced to the transmitter. 

Test of Line 

Where telephones that have been tested and found opera- 
tive are connected to both ends of the line and operator at 
one station is unable to get distant station, proceed as follows: 

(a) A grounded line — 

Raise transmitter and if a click is heard in the receiver the 
line is probably grounded as a click indicates" a complete cir- 
cuit; if no click is heard, the circuit is open, which may be 
caused by very poor connections or a severed line. 

(b) A metallic circuit, i.e., a double wire — 

Make same test as in (a), if a click is heard, the line is prob- 
ably short circuiting the two conductors, if no clicks are 
heard, the line is open. 

BUZZER SIGNALLING 

Q. What are some conventional signs peculiar to buzzer com- 
munication? 

A. HR — Here is a message. 

Before and after numerals (if using short code of 

numerals). 

Phone or Fone — Use telephone. 

CS— Close Station. 

Q. Describe the position of the right hand, fingers, wrist and arm 
in sending on the buzzer. 

A. The key is grasped at the diameter, perpendicular to the 
lever, between the thumb and third or middle finger. The 
index-finger is placed on the middle of the key. The index 
finger controls the downward motion and the thumb and 
third finger the upward motion. The wrist is relaxed, 
the motion of sending being from the elbow. Most opera- 
tors send with the elbow resting on something solid. 

Q. How does one operator call another? 

A. He calls "attention" (L) several times, followed by the call 
number of the station called and continues until answered, 
occasionally sending his own station number. After the 



264 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE 

receiver has acknowledged, the sender signals HR and starts 

the message. 
Q. How does the receiver acknowledge a call? 
A. By signalling IX and affixing his call number. 
Q. How does the sender indicate an error? 
A. By sending a series of dots, then continuing the message, 

starting with the last word correctly sent. 
Q. How does the receiver indicate that he has missed a word? 
A. By sending a series of dots, followed by IX and the last word 

correctly received. » 

Q. Why should calling between the Battery Commander's 

Station and the battery be unnecessary? 
A. Because neither operator should leave his instrument under 

any circumstances until the signal "close station" (CS) has 

been received. 
Q. What are the advantages of the buzzer over the telephone? 
A. It is more accurate. It can be sent over uninsulated wire, 

and can still be sent when there are breaks in the wire. 
Q. What is the advantage of the telephone over the buzzer? 
A. The telephone is more rapid. 
Q. What table of abbreviations for semaphore, wig-wag and 

buzzer signalling should be learned? 
A. See Plate. 

TELEPHONE 

Q. How is telephone communication established? 

A. By one operator calling the other on the buzzer and sending 

the signal "fone." 
Q. Should an operator remove the receiver from his ear before 

he receives the order to close station? 
A. No. 

Q. How should the transmitter be placed? 
A. Approximately vertical, about i inch from the mouth. 
Q. How may a message be sent in a high wind, or when there is 

noise at the speakers end of the line? 
A. By pressing the transmitter against the throat on either side of 

the windpipe. 
Q. What caution should the speaker use in transmitting? 



SIGNALLING 265 

A. To speak in a moderate tone of voice and never shout; to 

speak slowly and distinctly, not slurring words or syllables. 
Q. When a figure is misunderstood, how may it be indicated? 
A. By .counting up to it, e.g., "four, one, two, three, four." 
Q. How are numbers in firing data customarily sent over the 

telephone? 
A. Exact hundreds and thousands are so announced; of all 

other numbers each digit is given separately. 
Q. Show how this system of giving numbers differs from the 

method used by an executive in announcing numbers to the 

battery. 



Number 


By telephone 


To the battery- 


3000 


Three thousand 


Three thousand 


400 


Four hundred 


Four hundred 


1800 


One, eight hundred 


One, eight hundred 


3225 


Three, two, two, five - 


Three, two hundred and twenty- 
five 
Four thousand and fifty 


4050 


Four, zero, five, zero 



Q. Is zero ever announced as the letter u O." 
A. No. 

Q. How may nine be announced to distinguish it from five. 
A. As "niner." 

Q. When a word is spelled out and a letter is misunderstood, 
what words are authorized for use in distinguishing letters? 
A. 



A for able 


NNan 


B for boy 


opal 


C cast 


s P pup 


D dock 


Q quick 


E easy 


R rush 


Ffox 


S sail 


G George 


T tare 


H have 


U unit 


I item 


V voice 


J jig 


W watch 


Kking 


X x-ray 


L love 


Y yoke 


M Mike 


Z zed 



26.6 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE 

BATTERY AND BATTALION COMMUNICATION 

Q. Who is responsible for establishing communication between 
the Battery Commander's Station and the battery? 

A. The Telephone Corporal. 

Q. Who assists the Telephone Corporal in establishing communi- 
cation between the Battery Commander's Station and the 
battery and what is the duty of each after communication has 
been established? 

A. Operator No. 2 and Operator No. 1. Operator No. 2 acts as 
operator at the Battery Commander's Station on the battery 
line and reports to the Telephone Corporal or to the captain 
when communication is established with the battery. Opera- 
tor No. 1 acts as operator at the battery and reports to the 
Executive when communication has been established with 
the Battery Commander's Station. 

Q. When does the Telephone Corporal start to establish commu- 
nication? 

A. As soon as the captain has told him the location of the Bat- 
tery Commander's Station, the position of the guns and the 
kind of communication. 

Q. In case of telephone or buzzer communication, in which di- 
rection should the wire be strung? 

A. From the Battery Commander's Station to the battery, leav- 
ing the reel at the battery, so that, if necessary, the wire may 
be strung out to any point the executive may select for his 
position. 

Q. Who acts as operator at the battery on the battalion line? 

A. The Telephone Corporal. 

Q. Who is responsible for establishing battalion communication, 
and who assists him? 

A. The Battalion Sergeant Major, assisted by a Signal Corporal, 
a Signal Private and an Agent from each battery. 

Q. Who are the operators at the Battalion Station? 

A. The Signal Corporal on the line to the batteries and the Sig- 
nal Private on the regimental line. 

Q. What precautions are necessary in laying any line or wire? 

A. To avoid laying the wire in such a position that horses and 
carriages will pass over it, and to avoid laying the wire so 



SIGNALLING 267 

that the enemy will detect it (especially when laying with the 

battalion reel cart). 
Q. Where may a wire be generally laid to be safe from breakage 

thru horses and carriages passing over it? 
A. In front of the gun position. 
Q. What may be necessary to prevent the possibility of the 

battalion wire being located by the enemy? 
A. Laying it from the battalion reel cart and then having it 

carried backward or forward by hand as far as possible. 

TWO -ARM SEMAPHORE 

Q. How many positions are there for the arms in semaphore and 

how may they best be described? 
A. Eight represented by the hour hand of a clock at 6 o'clock, 

7 : 30, 9, 10 : 30, 12, 1 : 30, 3, and 4 : 30. 
Q. Into how many series may the various combinations forming 

semaphore letters be divided? Name these series with the 

base positions in each. 
A. Seven series. 

I. A. B, C, D, E, F, G; the letters made with one arm, the 
other arm or base being at interval (6 o'clock). 

II. H, I, K, L, M, N; with two arms, the base being always 
the position of A (7 : 30). 

III. 0, P, Q, R, S; with two arms, the base being always at 
B position (9 o'clock). 

IV. T, U, Y; with twa arms, the base being always at the 
position of C (10 130). 

V. J, V; with two arms, the base being always at the position 
of D (12 o'clock). 

VI. W, X; with two arms, the base being always at the posi- 
tion of E (1 :3o). 

VII. Z; with two arms, the base being at the position of F 
(3 o'clock). 

Q. In what direction are all the changes in the different series? 
A. From the sender's right to left, clockwise to the receiver. 
Q. What are the exceptional letters out of their regular order in 

series ? 
A. J and Y. 



268 



HELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE 



Q. What possible positions are omitted? 

A. The last position in the fourth series and the first position in 
the fifth series. 



31 



UJ O 

So 

<o or 

si 
II 






>■ 

M 

uj r ± 

— tf _i 

£«< 

UJI a 

in** 

z 2 

-J UJ UJ 

ZfflO 

uj ,"- 





* 



V 






B K 




4bc>^ 



18 



•III. I M I : i ! 

1 1 ! i ! ! i ! i ! 1 1 i^i 1 1 . 

z o q. aar (oh d > ^ x >- n ^<d r- co o) 



I 3ll, 

I""" I • 1*1 I • Z m 

i I I I « • I • • * S i I ■•••• 
<CQOQuJL.(i)X-'O^J5 -^r7^iO 




Q. Should the student master one series before passing to the 
next, or should he first learn the letters in alphabetical order? 
A. The former. 

Q. Should the student first learn to send or receive? 
A. To receive. 



SIGNALLING 269 

Q. How should the passage be made between letters? 

A. Abruptly, avoiding the position of interval. One letter 
should swing into another. 

Q. What is the exact position of the flag at 12 o'clock? 

A. The wrist bent over the head, so that the flag staff will extend 
Upward directly over the middle of the head. 

Q. May the letter D be made with either hand? 

A. Yes. 

Q. Where should the sender look while sending a word? 

A. A beginner should look at the position of his own arms, but 
should discontinue this practice when he has thoroughly 
learned the proper positions of the arms for the various letters. 
otherwise he will continue this practice later in sending actual 
messages and will be unable to determine when any letter or 
word is misunderstood by the receiver. The secret of perfect 
sending lies in the ability to "feel M the proper position of the 
arms. 

Q. Where should a beginner look at the end of a word? 

A. At the receiver, to be sure the word was understood. 

Q. If the receiver misses a letter, should he signal ''repeat last 
word" at once or should he wait until the end of the word? 

A. Wait until the end of the word. 

Q. When should rapid sending be attempted? 

A. Only after absolute perfection of the arm positions has been 
attained. 

Q. What is a simple rule for governing the relative positions of 
the arms in the two-arm letters? 

A, The arms are never placed across the body, except when nec- 
essary to form a letter of two positions on either side of the 
body; e.g.. in K the right hand is at 7:30 and the left hand at 
12 o'clock, not the reverse. When one arm must cross the 
body, the arm crossing is always in the lower position; e.g., 
in H the left hand is at 7:3.0 and the right hand at 9 o'clock, 
not the reverse. 

Q. What is an easy way to avoid dropping the lower flag in 
andW? 

A. The beginner should place the butt of the lower flag under 
the arm pit. 



270 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE 

Q. How may the letters H, I, O, W, X and Z be made more 

clearly than from the erect position? 
A. By turning the body slightly toward the side on which the 

letter is to be made. 
Q. What is the advantage of the two-arm semaphore over the 

wig-wag? 
A. It is faster. 

Q. What is the disadvantage? 

A. The semaphore cannot be seen at a great distance. 
Q. How far may semaphore signals be read when sent without 

flags? 
A. 600 yards. 
Q. With flags? 

A. 1 200-1 500 yards, without glasses; 2000 yards with glasses. 
Q. What is the maximum speed at which important or compli- 
cated messages, such as firing data should be sent? 
A. About thirty letters a minute. 
Q. What is the speed at which signallers should be able to send 

and receive? 
A. About 120 letters a minute. 

Q. What type of background should the sender always seek? 
A. Trees or fields of uniform color. 
Q. Why should the sky line be avoided? 
A. Because the sender is easily seen by the enemy. 
Q. How are double letters indicated? 
A. After the first letter describe a small circle, or make a dip to 

the front and again make the letter. 
Q. Explain the meaning and use of the following signals found in 

the plate and the table of abbreviations: "Error." 
A. Erroneous sending. "A" is repeated several times after 

which the entire word is sent again. 
Q. "Negative." 

A. "No" or "The following message is not so." 
Q. "Preparatory." 
A. "Message follows." 
Q. "Annuling." 
A. "Disregard last message." 
Q. "Interrogatory." 



SIGNALLING 271 

A. "The following is a question," as, "0 interval RN" ("What 

is the range"). 
Q. "Affirmative." 
A. "Yes" or "The following is so." 
Q. "Acknowledge." 
A. "I understand." 
Q. "Attention." 
A. "I have a message for you." The signal is repeated until 

the person called also signals "Attention" with the call 

numbers of his station, if he has one. Then both parties drop 

to the interval, the sender signals "Preparatory," drops to 

the interval and starts the message. "Attention" is also 

used by the receiver to break in. 
Q. "Interval." 
A. "End of word." 

Q. "Numerals follow." Signalled before numerals. 
A. After the numerals have been sent, the position of "Interval" 

indicates that the letters are to commence. 
Q. To what letters of the alphabet do the numerals correspond ? 
A. The first ten in order. 

Q. What are the conventional semaphore signals? 
A. CC, repeat last word; 

CCC, repeat last message; 

CC a word, repeat after the word given; 

One chop-chop, end of sentence; 

Two chop-chops, end of message, followed by withdrawing 

flags from view. 
Q. How is the chop-chop made? 
A. Extend both arms to the right horizontal (9 o'clock), move 

one arm up and down while the other is being moved down 

and then up, executing the movement with a cutting motion. 

GENERAL SERVICE CODE 

Q. What is the disadvantage of the American Morse Code? 

A. The space letters. 

Q. Is there any difference between the International Morse, the 

Continental Morse and the United States General Service 

Code? 
A. No. 



272 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE 

Q. Give the general service alphabet, numerals and punctuation. 

A. See plate. 

Q. What are the principle uses of the General Service Code in 

Field Artillery? 
A. Wig-wag and buzzer. 
Q. What is the best way to study the General Service Code, so 

as to best fix the various combinations in mind? 
A. By using the buzzer, and if a buzzer is not available, by 

imitating vocally the sound of the buzzer; e.g., "dah" for 

dash and "dit" (as in starting to say "dog," and cutting off 

the og) for dot. Example: in imitating the sound of the 

letter F, the following would be the manner of articulation: 

dit-dit-dah-dit . 
Q. Should the beginner first learn to send or receive? 
A. To receive. 
Q. In sending to a beginner should the letters be sent more 

slowly than is normally the case. If not, how is the beginner 

to be given time to recognize the letters? 
A. The letters should be sent at normal speed and the intervals 

between letters should be prolonged. 
Q. What is the quickest way to learn the General Service Code? 
A. Group the letters in pairs of opposites, leaving only four 

letters without opposites; as follows: 



A — 


N — • 


H •• 




B 


V 


C - 




D 


U 


J - 




F •• — • 


L 


Z - 


— 


G 


W 






K 


R 






P 

Q 

E • 


X 

_ y 

T — 










I •• 


M 






S ••• 










When the alphabet has been learned, and the student has 
become thoroughly familiar with it — especially in studying 
the buzzer — with the combinations of dots and dashes in 



SIGNALLING 273 

short words of common usage; such as the words; "the," 
"and," etc., he should proceed with sentences. 

Q. What is the best way of remembering the numerals? 

A. All numerals have five elements. From one to five, inclusive, 
they begin with dots and end with dashes, there being as many 
dots as the number represented. From six to zero, inclusive, 
they begin with dashes and end with dots, there being as 
many dashes as the number exceeds five, zero corresponding 
to ten in sequence. 

Q. What is an easy code of numerals in common use in field 
artillery? 

A. Send a double A (•— — ) at the beginning and end of num- 
erals, and represent the numbers by the following system: 



' Deflection 3270:" (numerals follow) 

. — — ., — (end of numerals) . 



WIG-WAG 

Q. What are the advantages of the wig-wag over the two-arm 

semaphore? 
A. It may be read at a greater distance, and may be sent from 

the prone position. 
Q. What is the disadvantage of the wig-wag? 
A. It is slow. 
Q. What is the maximum distance at which wig-wag signals can 

be read? 
A. 2000 yards without field glasses; 2500, with field glasses. 
Q. What is the greatest speed at which complicated messages, 

such as firing data, should be sent? 
A, Twenty to twenty-five letters a minute. 
Q. What is a speed at which all signallers should be able to send 

and receive? 



274 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE 

A. Fifty to sixty letters a minute. 

Q. What is the starting position for the wig- wag? 

A. The flag staff held in both hands, vertical in front of the face, 

and perpendicular to the ground. 
Q. What motion represents a dot? 
A. Dropping the flag from the starting position 90 deg. to the 

sender's right and returning quickly to the starting position. 
Q. What motion represents the dash? 
A. Dropping the flag sharply from the starting position 90 deg. 

to the sender's left and returning quickly to the starting 

position. 
Q. What represents the end of a word? 
A. Front made by dipping the flag directly to the sender's front 

and returning to the starting position. 
Q. How is "End of sentence" indicated? 
A. Two dips front, front. 
Q. How is "End of message" indicated? 
A. Three dips front, front, front. 
Q. How is the interval between letters indicated? 
A. By a pause at the starting position. 
Q. Should there be any pause at the starting position between 

the elements of a single letter? 
A. No. 

Q. In what should the beginner exercise the greatest care? 
A. In making all motions and positions clear cut. In letters 

containing successive dots and successive dashes to make the 

first dot (or dash) and return fully to the starting position 

before starting the next dot (dash). Be sure that the flag is 

always vertical in the starting position. 
Q. What is the best way to send in order to avoid furling the 

flag? 
A. Describe an oval or circular motion with the flag for a single 

dot or dash and a figure eight for dots following dashes, or the 

reverse. 
Q. How many and what flags should a signaller carry, and why? 
A. Two flags; a light one to be used against a dark background, 

and a dark one to be used against a light background. 
Q. How does the sender call a station? 
A. Signal the call number of the station called, or, if there be no 



SIGNALLING 275 

call number, wave the flag until acknowledged. He may 

then signal ''attention" (L) before starting the message. 
Q. How does the receiver acknowledge a call? 
A. By signalling MM interval, followed by the number of the 

station (if he has one) and the personal signal of the receiver; 

the receiver may then send "go ahead transmit" (IX). 

Q. Explain the use of " interrogatory" ( ). 

A. "What follows is a question." 

Q. How does the sender indicate that he has made an error? 

A. By a series of dots and repeating, starting with the last 

word correctly sent. 
Q. How does the receiver indicate that he has missed a word? 
A. By a series of dots and, if necessary, sending "Interrogatory" 

( • • ■ ), followed by the last word correctly received. 

Q. How does the receiver indicate that he has received the 

message? 
A. By signalling " Acknowledgment" (R). 

INSTRUCTIONS 

Visual Signalling 

Memorize this code. The two-arm semaphore code is pre- 
scribed for this test. (See Figure 14). In addition to learning 
the code it is necessary that each candidate memorize the 
authorized abbreviations for visual signalling in field artillery as 
follows : 



A.. 


. Error. 


AD.. 


.Additional. 


AKT.. 


. Draw ammunition from combat train. 


AL. 


. Draw ammunition from limbers. 


AM.. 


.Ammunition going forward. Ammunition 




required. 


AMC. . 


.At my command. 


AP. 


.Aiming point. 


B (numerals) . . 


.Battery (so many) rounds. 


IS (numerals). . 


. (Such.) Battalion station. 


BL.. 


.Battery left. 


BR.. 


.Battery right. 



276 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE 

CCC. .. .Charge (mandatory at all times). Am 
about to charge if not instructed to con- 
trary. 
CF. . . .Cease firing. 
CS . . . . Close station. 
CT. . . . Change target. 

D . . . . Down. 
DF. . . .Deflection. 
DT Double time. Rush. Hurry. 

F . . . . Commence firing. 

FCL (numerals) .... On ist piece close by (so much). 

FL. . . .Artillery fire is causing us losses. 
FOP (numerals) . . . .On ist piece open by (so much). 

G . . . . Move forward. Preparing to move forward . 
HHH....Halt. Action suspended. 

IX. .. .Execute. Go ahead. Transmit. 
JI. .. .Report firing data. 

K Negative. No. 

KR. . . .Corrector. 
L .... Preparatory. Attention. 
LCL (numerals) .... On 4th piece close by (so much). 
LOP (numerals) ... .On 4th piece open by (so much). 
LT....Left. 

LL Left, left. 

LR Left, right. 

MD Move down. 

ML Move to your left. 

MR. . . . Move to your right. 

MU Move up. 

N. . . .Annul, cancel. 

What is the (R.N., etc.)? Interrogatory. 

P. . . .Affirmative. Yes. 
PS. . . .Percussion shrapnel. 

QRQ Send faster. 

QRS .... Send slower. 
QRT. . . . Cease sending. 

R. . . .Acknowledgment. Received. 
RS. . . .Regimental station. 
RL Right, left. 





SIGNALLING 27 


RR.. 


. .Right, right. 


RN.. 


. . Range. 


RT. . 


. .Right. 


S.. 


. . Subtract. 


SCL (numerals) . . 


. .On 2d piece close by (so much). 


SOP (numerals) . . 


. .On 2d piece open by (so much). 


SEL 


. . Shell. 


SI.. 


. .Site. 


sss.. 


. . Support needed. Support going forward. 


sw.. 


. .Sweeping. 


T.. 


. .Target. 


TCL (numerals) . . 


. . On 3d piece close by (so much). 


TOP (numerals) . . 


. . On 3d piece open by (so much). 


U.. 


..Up. 


Y (letter) . . 


. . Such battery action. 



18 



TENTS 

By ist Lt. H. R. Southalt/ 
PITCHING AND STRIKING OF HEAVY TENTAGE 

Q. How is the heavy tentage of batteries usually pitched? 

A. In two lines. 

Q. What is the distance between lines of pyramidal tents? 

A. About 50 feet. 

Q. Where is the office tent pitched? 

A. In the front line at the end next to the line of officers' tents. 

Q. Who are usually assigned to this tent? 

A. The First Sergeant and the Battery Clerk. 

Q. Who is assigned to the tent in the rear line in rear of the office 
tent? 

A. The Battery Commander's Detail, etc. 

Q. How are the remaining tents assigned? 

A. Two to each section. 

Q. What tents do the Chiefs of Sections and the driver squads 
occupy ? 

A. The front line. 

Q. What tents do the gun squads occupy? 

A. The second line. 

Q. What is the command to pitch tents? 

A. PITCH TENTS. 

Q. How many men pitch a common tent or a wall tent? 

A. Four. 

Q. Describe the method of pitching common and wall tents. 

A. Drive a pin to mark the center of the door; spread the tent 
on the ground to be occupied; place door loops over the door 
pin, draw front corners taut, align, and peg them down; 
the four corner guy pins are then driven in prolongation of 
the diagonals of the tent and about two paces beyond the 
corner pins; temporarily loosen the front door and the lee 

278 



TENTS 279 

corner loops from the pins; insert uprights and ridge pole, 
inserting the pole pins in the ridge pole and in eyelets of tent 
and fly; raise the tent; hold it in position; replace lee corner 
loops, and secure corner and fly guy ropes; tighten same to 
hold poles vertical; drive wall pins thru the loops as they 
hang; drive intermediate guy pins, aligning them on corner 
pins already driven. 

Q. How many men pitch a pyramidal tent? 

A. One squad. 

Q. Describe the method of pitching a pyramidal tent. 

A. The corporal drives a pin to mark the center of the door. 
The others of the squad unfold the tent and spread it out 
on the ground to be occupied, pole and tripod underneath. 
The corporal places the door loops over the door pin; one 
man goes to each corner of the tent; the two men in front 
draw the front corners taut, align the front of the tent with the 
battery line of tents, and peg the corners down; the two 
men in rear draw the rear corners taut in both directions 
and peg them down. The same four men drive the four 
corner guy pins in prolongation of the diagonals of the tent, 
about two paces beyond the corner pins. Meantime, the other 
men of the squad, having crept under the tent; insert the tent 
pole spindle in top plate, the corporal placing the hood in posi- 
tion; the pole is raised and the lower end inserted in the tripod 
socket; the tripod is raised to its proper height. Under the 
supervision of the corporal the men inside the tent shift the 
tripod and the men outside the tent handle the corner guy ropes 
in such manner as to erect the tent with the corner eaves 
directly above the corner pins. Each outside man, moving 
to the left, drives pins for the wall loops along one side of the 
tent and, returning, drives the intermediate guy pins; in 
both cases the pins are aligned on the corner pins. The 
inside men assist. 

Q. Describe the method of pitching a conical wall tent. 

A. Drive the door pin and center pin 8 feet 3 inches apart. 
Using the hood lines with center pin as center, describe two 
concentric circles with radii 8 feet 3 inches and 11 feet 3 
inches. In the outer circle drive two door guy pins 3 feet 
apart. At intervals of about 3 feet drive the other guy pin. 



280 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE 

In other respects conical wall tents are erected practically 
as in the case of a pyramidal tent. 

Q. What is the command to strike tents? 

A. STRIKE TENTS. 

Q. Describe the method of striking common, wall, pyramidal 
and conical wall tents. 

A. The men first remove all pins except those of the four corner 
guy ropes, or the four quadrant guy ropes in the case of a 
conical wall tent. The pins are neatly piled or placed in 
their receptacle. One man holds each guy, and when the 
ground is clear the tent is lowered, folded, or rolled and tied, 
the poles or tripod and pole fastened together, and the re- 
maining pins collected. 

Q. How are common, wall, hospital and storage tents folded? 

A. Spread the tent flat on the ground, folded at the ridge so 
that the bottoms of side walls are even, ends of tent forming 
triangles to the right and left; fold the triangular ends of the 
tent in toward the middle, making it rectangular in shape; 
fold the top over about 9 inches; fold the tent in two by carry- 
ing the top fold over clear to the foot; fold again in two from 
the top to the foot; throw all guys on tent except the second 
from each end; fold the ends in so as to cover about two-thirds 
of the second cloths; fold the left end over to meet the turned- 
in edge of the right end, then fold the right end over the top, 
completing the bundle; tie with the two exposed guys. 

Q. How is a pyramidal tent folded? 

A. The tent is thrown toward the rear and the back wall and 
roof canvas pulled out smooth. This may be most easily 
accomplished by leaving the rear corner wall pins in the 
ground with the wall loops attached, one man at each corner 
guy, and one holding the square iron in a perpendicular 
position and pulling the canvas to its limit away from the 
former front of the tent. This leaves the three remaining 
sides of the tent on top of the rear side, with the door side in 
the middle. Now carry the right front corner over and lay 
it on the left rear corner. Pull all canvas smooth, throw 
guys toward square iron, and pull bottom edges even. Then 
take the right front corner and return to the right, covering 
the right rear corner. This folds the right side of the tent 



TENTS 281 

on itself, with the crease in the middle and under the front 
side of the tent. Next carry the left front corner to the right 
and back as described above; this when completed will leave 
the front and rear sides of the tent lying smooth and flat 
and the two side walls folded inward, each on itself. Place 
the hood in the square iron which has been folded downward 
toward the bottom of the tent, and continue to fold around 
the square iron as a core, pressing all folds down flat and 
smooth, and parallel with the bottom of the tent. If each 
fold is compactly made and the canvas kept smooth, the 
last fold will exactly cover the lower edge of the canvas. 
Lay all exposed guy ropes along the folded canvas except 
the two on the center width, which should be pulled out and 
away from the bottom edge to their extreme length for 
tying. Now, begin at one end and fold toward the center 
on the first seam (that joining the first and second widths) 
and fold again toward the center so that the already folded 
canvas will come to within about 3 inches of the middle 
Width. Then fold over to the opposite edge of middle 
width of canvas. Then begin folding from opposite end, 
folding the first width in half, then making a second fold to 
come within about 4 or 5 inches of that already folded; 
turn this fold entirely over that already folded. Take the 
exposed guys and draw them taut across each other, turn 
bundle over on the under guy, cross guys on top of bundle 
drawing tight. Turn bundle over on the crossed guys and 
tie lengthwise. When properly tied and pressed together this 
will make a package n by 23 by 34 inches, requiring about 
8855 cubic inches to store on pack. Stencil the organiza- 
tion designation on the lower half of the middle width of 
canvas in the back wall. 

PITCHING AND STRIKING SHELTER TENTS 

Q. Describe the various steps in pitching shelter tents. 

A. When shelter tents are to be pitched the first sergeant, 
after the horses have been unharnessed, properly secured and 
cared for, and the guard having been sent to its post, gives the 
command: In two lines (or In column facing to the right 
(l^f t) ) form for shelter tents. The men, carrying their blanket 



282 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE 

rolls, saddlebags, canteens, and haversacks, proceed to the 
rear of the rear carriage of their sections. Each chief of 
section causes his section to fall in in column of squads, the 
driver squad in front, with a distance of about 10 yards be- 
tween the squads. The squads of each section face the park 
if the command be In two lines. All the squads face in the 
designated direction if the command be In column facing to 
the right (left). In either case 10 yards open space is left 
in rear of the rear line of carriages. 

Each chief of section arranges for pairing odd men in his 
squads as far as practicable. If, after this has been done, 
any man in the section, including the chief of section, remains 
unpaired the first sergeant is notified. Having arranged pairs 
between the men left over in the several sections the first ser- 
geant reports the battery formed, and with the guidon, with 
whom the sergeant pitches, takes his place to the right of 
the leading squad of the first section. The first sergeant 
having reported, the officer in charge causes the battery to 
take intervals as prescribed in The Squad. The men of each 
squad take intervals, but no attempt is made to close the 
squads to the right or left. As each man faces to the front he 
places his blanket roll and other equipment on the ground. 
The officer aligns the men and commands: Pitch tents. The 
men open their blanket rolls and take out the shelter half, 
poles and pins; the front man places one pin in the ground at 
the point where his right heel, kept in position until this time, 
was planted. Each then spreads his shelter half, triangle to 
the rear, flat upon the ground the tent is to occupy, rear man's 
half on the right. The halves are then buttoned together. 
Each front man joins his pole, inserts the top in the eyes of 
the halves, and holds the pole upright beside the pin placed 
in the ground; his rear rank man, using the pin in front, pins 
down the front corners of the tent on the line of pins, stretch- 
ing the canvas taut; he then inserts a pin in the eye of the 
rope and drives the pin at such distance in front of the pole 
as to hold the rope taut. Both then go to the rear of the tent; 
the rear rank man adjusts the pole and the front rank man 
drives the pins. The rest of the pins are then driven by both 
men, the rear rank man working on the right. 



TENTS 283 

As soon as the tent is pitched each man arranges the contents 

of the blanket roll in the tent and stands at attention in front 

of his own half on line with the front guy rope pin. 

The guy ropes, to have a uniform slope when the shelter tents 

are pitched, should all be of the same length. 

The guard pitches tents at its post. The cooks' tents are 

usually pitched at the kitchen. 

Q. What is done on the command Strike Tents? 

A. Equipments are removed from the tents ; the tents are lowered, 
rolls made up, equipments slung, and the men stand at atten- 
tion in the places originally occupied after taking intervals. 



ENGLISH— FRENCH CONVERSATION 

The following phases in combinations and used with the 
dictionary are simply to help the reader find his way about 
until he can further master the French language, for example: 

Can you tell me please where I can buy a (look in the dictionary) 
newspaper ? 

Pouvez-vous me dire, sil vous plait, ou je peux acheter un journal? 

Be sure to make liberal use of " thanks," "please, " and "pardon. " 

If numbers are used or the time of day, write them; if you desire to 
refer to a particular part of the body, point to it. 

In the phonetic spelling pronounce "aw" as in awning and "zh" 
as in azure. * 



Yes 


No 


Thanks 


If you please 


Pardon me 


Oui 


non 


merci 


s'il vous 


plait 


Pardonnez-moi 


wee 


naw 


mair-see 


seel voo 


play 


pardonnay-mwah 


Good morning 


(day) 


Good evening 


Goodbye 


Bon jour 




bon soir 




au revoir 


baw zhure 




baw swarr 




awre-vwarr 


Mr. (sir) 




Mrs. 




Miss 


monsieur 




madam 




mademoiselle 


musseeur 




maddam 




madmwahzell 


Where 




When 


* Which (what) Which? What? 


ou 




quand 


quel 




comment? 


00 




kawn 


kel 




commaw? 


The 


A 




At In 




From 


le 


un une 


a dans 


en 


de d y (before a vowel) 


luh 


un (as in shunt) 


ah daw 


aw 


duh 








284 







ENGLISH- FRENCH CONVERSATION 



285 



He- 
il 

eel 



-It 



She 
elle 
/ 



You have 
vous avez 

voo zavay 



You are 
vous etes 

voo zett 

I have 
j'ai 

zhay 



I am 
je suis 

zhuh swee 

He has 
ila 
eel ah 



It is 
il est 

eel ay 



Can you tell me 
Pouvez vous me dire 

poovay voo muh deer 

the American camp 
le camp americain 

luh caw amerycane 

a place where 
une endroit ou 

ooun ondwah oo 

to eat 
a manger 

ah mawzhay 



please 

s'il vous plait 

seel voo play 

the village (city) 
la ville 

Lah veel 



Is it? 
es que? 

eskuh ? 

We have 
nous avons 

noo zavon 



the route to 
la route a 

lah root ah 



the station 
la gare 

lah gahr 



the hospital 
L'hopital 

lopeetal 



I can 
je peux 

zhuh puh 



buy 
acheter 

ashtay 



to drink 
a boire 

ah bwah 



where is a restaurant (cafe) 

ou est un restaurant cafe 

oo ay un restowraw kajfay 

store a tobacco store 

epicerie un debit de tabac 

aypeesery m un daybee Huh tabback 



Do you speak english? 
Parlez-vous anglais? 

parlay voo awnglay 



Do you understand 
Comprenez-vous 

hawmprenay vco 



something 
quelquechose 

kelkah-shoze 

sleep 
dormir 

dormear 

jewelry shop 
bijourie 

beezhury 

shoemaker 
un cordonner 

un cordawniay 

I do not understand 
je ne comprens pas 

zhuh nuh kawmpraw 
pah 



1 want (point to the word in the dictionary, of the article desired) . 
je veux 
zhuh vuh 



How much 
Combien? 

kawmbyan 



It is too much 
c'est trop (cher) 

say tro share 



It is good 
c'est bon 
say baw 



It is no good 
ce n'est pas bon 

sah nay pah baw 



286 



FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE 



Give me this 


that 


donnez-moi ceci 


cela 


donnay-mwah sir see 


sirlah 



What time (hour) is it 
Quel hour est-il 

kel urr ay-teel 



What do you want 
Que voulez-vous 

kuh voolay-voo 



Will you give me some change 
Voulez-vous me changer ce billet 

voclay voo muh shawzhay sir beelay 



Will you write it please 
voulez-vous Fecrire s'il vous plait 

voolay voo laycrire seel voo play 



I am 


hot 


thirsty 


cold 


I am tired 


j'ai 


chaud 


soif 


froid 


je suis fatigue 


zhay 


shoad 


swaff 


frwah 


zhuh swee fateegay 



iooo FRENCH WORDS AN AMERICAN ARTILLERYMAN 
SHOULD KNOW 



(IN PREPARATION) 



287 



BUGLE CALLS. 



To economize space, the music is written an octavo higher than the trumpet- 
scale, and is adjusted to the scale of the bugle. 



1. First Call. 



Quick. 



ii|p 



M—i 



B 



£E 



pg^mmmmm 



2. Guard Mounting. 



Quick, 




jiz^rrjt g jj E 



fug 



^ife 



£==»==* 



~w 



*-4-0-MZl^Zm 



^^ 



wg ^§zW mm 



/7\ 



288 



BUGLE CALLS 



289 



3. Full Dress. 



Quick. 




^ggffiE^g^P^E g^j 



,*? ^rs 



4. Overcoats. 



t 



- — ^ 



p*^ 



p^P 



5. Drill. 



Quick. m 



i 



[g^Sr^gB 



'6. Stable. 



Quick. 



##■ 



si 



^nTn^rag^ ^S 



R= 



0-0-0 — - 



V — 



$^m 



mtuM 



fflSBrQpg g gg p^^ 



290 



FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE 



7. Water. 



Quick. 



^ 



^ 



8. Boots and Saddles 






i ^^pff^aTTFTTi 



9. Assembly. 



Moderate. 




m 



v i ^- f = # f 



^ 4 * 



4 10. Adjutant's Call. 




|FC£f-tq=£ ^^^^^?j 



BUGLE CALLS 



291 




11. To the Standard, or to the Color. 
Quick time. 



eSP 



SSig^s 




End, 




M 



*:* 



d.c. 



¥ 



Quick, /-s 



12. Fire. 



SWF^B 



jgrr^rgt 



j pj^jjgEl ^ 



Repeat at will. 



292 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE 



13. To Arms. 



P 



Quick.'* <J> 



* 






i 



^a 



# * # (t -i 



^ 



Repeat at will. 



i 



14. To Horse. 




Presto. 






,15. Reveille. 



Quick. 



^p§^^^ 



End. 



JO> peg 



^eg^^^ 




C.G 



IggHlSllpP 



BUGLE CALLS 



293 



fi 



Moderate. 



16. Retreat. 



mm 



i 



a 



r*-Vr w 



^^ 



-# — *-H* 



4 i i -H -g 



# #- 



p 



S3 



£; 



£f=P5g 



P*? 33 ^ 



i 



a: — g 



aS 



£Z p m • ? 



i 



p ^ ^^g^ 



?rpn: 



m 



^rf T jifH^^^ 



£ 



f— F 



i 



^ 



?z= 



p 



Si 



#— T 



^ 



r-^^jpjgj 



19 



294 



FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE 



R ETR E AT— Concluded . 



gk^y^ 



M. ^ 0, 



Pi 



/TN 



y — w 



s 



i 



/CN 



35 



W 



17. Tattoo. 



Jj-rV- s ^ J.-^-^-f-i-j. — |— =! 


(CD 1 ' J J— — #- ■ 1 — 1 # 4-*~4-4—4- - 

fffl^J _J J J 1 1 4 J-!-J J J. , 



fspp 



J* J* J.- J. 



» • ■ » » — #• 



i 



s 



4 4 # 



^=|hj= ^p^BB±fr=^£Ep E 



* .#. 



Hiisg 



3?^J^jr^j r^; 



BUGLE CALLS 



295 



Tattoo— Continued. 




is^iliP&l 



^^rgg gg^ 




$ rt^=fjt=m^ -&jm& 



$ 



1^=^Z 



j=g£gjfeg## F 



3=fc 



^H— i^-i^i T|) g r-[j': [J-[J=F 



P 



296 



FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE 



TATTOO— Continued, 



pg^^^^a^^^^p 



i 



3 =u3JIlg 



»Q£ 



4Mfe 



4-4—4- 



^^^^tfff^ff&s ^M 



$TUm 



#=^? 



* # 



# # 



b-^4t 



^ g£ 



/Ts 



E£ 



I 



/7S 



S3 



^t^i^* 



P 



g f,CJV, i i m 

F _=3 -4 4' tt 



ff^S 



^ 



3rrtrr=%^ 



p 



-# # • 4 4 



s 



-4-^-4-4- 



££ 



^ 



BUGLE CALLS 



297 



TATTOO — Concluded, 



SE 



p 



-s— 9- 



3= 



3= 



#-*-# 



^p^^Pi^ 



■8-T- 



# 



I 



B 



1=^=2- 



=* 



^VA/ 



18. Taps. 



^^ Pir Pir fe^ 




19. Mess. 



Qttfefc. 



E3 



a 



SeS 



Bgg 



^ 



^^^ 



j ^zSJ^m^fldS i^ 



298 



FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE 



20. Sick. 



Quick. j 

mmmmmm 



Fj^gp^a 




Slow. 

f) 


21. Church 

/TS 


Call. 

f3 




/TN 




/ 


/*> 


m ] 


p 


i* 




s 


/ l* 




• 


<# j 


f * r 




# 






fm * y a 


♦ 






b 


| 








VMJ ■ 


J 










• 




%j 



















-^rf- 


-^ 


^ 


** 




-i- 


f- 


T l 




(i f 










-U-J 










^■^^ 







I 



* * fi 



!===* 



c f * 



r j j j 



4 h 



22. R EC ALU 



Moderate, 





Hfrsih&kmgm 



BUGLE CALLS 



299 



23. Issue. 



^§p^^p^^ 



p 



j^ ^TH^p ^ 



24. Officers' Call. 



Quick. 



^^ 



e 



#^ 



^s 



25. Captains' Call. 



pi 



Eqi " * TF 



i* 



?» » aps 



s 



^==^=: 



26. First Sergeants' Call. 



^g^g^o^ ^ 



300 



FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE 



Quick. 



27. Fatigue. 



£— #- 



££ 



ft: 



t=& 



^II|§I 



i 



# F P f 



m 



m 



$ 



ft — f f f #. 



E^P ^ P 



28. School. 



pi 



Ouicfc. 



#-# 



f -£ 



323=3 



-*■ 



s 



m 



f CTPia^EgfcSfet 



BUGLE CALLS 

29. The General. 



301 



Quich 



tes^iiiii^lgi 



fe=-^fc| ?=gB c ffi c r = l^£bff^ 



a 



P^S 



£ * -W 



-0-4 



^^^ggg|§ 



-f *- 



^SH^^pp 



^-^S^f ^ &ygg^ &j 



30. Call to Quarters. 



Slow. 



i 



«-JL_* 



TFF 



? * • * - 



*-£-*- 



^ 



^ » 



is 



r? * 



a 



»: 



i 



/TN /TS /TS 



P 3 



48350°— 16 11 



DRILL SIGNALS. 



31. Attention. 
Stow. 




S7\ 



e£ 



m 



i 



32. Drivers Prepare to Mount. 

3 3 



MOUNT. 



m 



Efc^E^iiH 



33. Drivers Prepare to Dismount. 



i 



£££a 



DISMOUNT. 



— — !j — — 



*= 



^r 



34. Cannoneers Prepare to Mount. 



% 



Quick. 



MOUNT. 
/7\ 



Et 



M 



4 — »— i — * — *■ 



■t 



i 



35. Cannoneers Prepare to Dismount. 
Quick. 



DISMOUNT. 
/7\ /TS 



Eg 



m 



162 



302 



DRILL SIGNALS 



303 




36. Forward. 



Slow. 



MARCH. 



37. Halt. 



^m 



38. Walk. 



i 



Slow. 



MARCH. 
<7\ 



?—*—*- 



m 



39. Trot. 



Slow. 



MARCH. 



^g^ B^Tff : !Ba 



40. Gallop, 



march. 



~#z:si:=4K 



£^ 



41. Guide Right. 



^^ 



FF 



a 



304 



FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE 



42. Guide Left. 
Slow. ^ 



£S 



I 



43. Guide Center. 
Slow. /rs 



£B 



m 



44. Countermarch. 



Moderate. 3 




45. Right About. 



Slow* 



e 



i — r 



MARCH. 
-£2—. 



46. Left About. 



MARCH, 



i 



Slow.- 



ee 



-# #- 



1 



47. Column Right. 



Slow. 




*i 



±=S 



MARCH. 



wg^^mm 



DRILL SIGNALS 



305 



48. Column Left. 



i 



Slow. 



MARCH. 



S 



m 



49. By the Right Flank. 

MARCH. 

Moderate. _ J£ 



h*=F^ 



$ 



50. By the Left Flank. 

MARCH. 

Moderate. 



EE 



51. Right Oblique. 



£ 



£fow. 



MARCH. 

<fi 



52. Left Oblique. 



Stow. 


* * 








MARCH. 




-iL 2 


fi 










irn — ' 


L- 


P 










IS \) -4 *" 


[ 











53. Right Fromt into Line. 

march. 

Moderate, ^ /T\ 



f^jjjgJEi 



ffi ' '11 1 1 fcg- 



306 



FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE 



54. Left Front into Line. 



Moderate^ — ^ ^ 



iPa 



MARCH. 



^^ 



-— «^- 



i 



55. On Right into Line. 
Moderate. /rs /Ts 



MARCC. 

<2_ 



£ 



« * #■ #** 



££ 



FF-- 



56. On Left into Line. 
Moderate^ ^ ^ 



MARCH. 



F|^raa'i'f = ^ g ^d=^^4 



I 



57. Battery Right Wheel. 
Quick. 3 3 3 



£ 



r? 



? p ? 



March. 



i 



^^ 



*—*—*. 



m 




58. Battery Left Wheel. 

3 



Quick » , » 



£ 



EJji 



i 



3 



March. 



£&^& 



■0 — 4 — # 



DRILL SIGNALS 



307 



59. Pieces Front. 



i 



Moderate. 



MARCH. 



IT\ 1 /T> 



f P P P 



fh-h-f 



fo4 U-4£ £j 



=FF 



-=^-x-q- 



Moderate. 



60. Caissons Front. 

march. 

/TN 1 /T\ 



|fi7 ^ f r ; ytmj 



-^-*-^- 



61. Double Section, Right Oblique. 



i 



Quick. 



-*-?- 



/7\ , /T\ 

4 1 A 



i *r ~ 



gil^-^^ry^ g 



i 



62. Double Section, Left Oblique 



-*-^ 



MARCH. 

S7\ /T\ 



2 gg r r^ i ,.m i ir_f,i i - 



is 






-*-*- 



i 



63. Flank Column, Right Oblique. 
Moderate. ^ 



TUr.\rj f J 



/V\ 



*-*-*-*-& 



ws 



i 






1 « MARCH. 



-=H*- 



308 



FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE 



i 



64. Flank Column, Left Oblique. 
Moderate. 



*-**■ 



5 



' i i. i 



PBE* 



•# — # 



O ' t - J =^=^ 



i 



=P=*: 






#-2- 



MARCH. 
1 /TN 



P=?: 






t=t 



65. Right by Sections. 



Moderate. T* 1 



-a — fy 



^H^i^ 



-3-a-r* 



MARCH. 



t=n: 



£3= 



66, Left by Sections. 

MARCH. 

Moderate. 1 ^ 



$m 



uxtta 



67. Form Double Section Line. 



Quick. 



fi-± 



3 /T\ 



MARCH. 



j£ 




&± 



3= 



68. Route Order. 



Moderate. 



^S^z t 



'^- 



MISCELLANEOUS BUGLE CALLS. 



69. PRESIDENT'S MARCH. 



Quick time. 



tjir. jif g fr ii \ rjw fir LiHng 




HiHg 



sgjr n^fr i f t^ ^ 



i 



g p 



i C, a ^ y 




s 



« 4*4 4 -*— 0- 



J j ■ —■ # -# *# <g 



jifgraiggf 



» a 




20 



309 



310 



FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE 



Quick time, 



70. General's March. 



^ , \/ ^zzrj^2-^^i^ — Jj^ ^ty * ^Jp^ fTJ \ 



• 



*tf 



p ^ff^ 



^tr-gntd ^ 



3S 



m 



-s-s-g- 



— j- f i <*■ ■ ^ -r 



71. Flourishes for Review. 
Quick. 



\sD 4 * 4 S # # | 



MISCELLANEOUS BUGLE CALLS 



311 



I 



72. Sound Off. 
Quick. 

r , ff } 77 

Q 1 * 



S££ 



m m m 



I p m. 



^ ^P^p^^mi-i^p^ 



~Sk — " J 7"" f ' i* ,L ~ J j T . * f r~~ 


ig? . J ...^...<f.gi l j i j J ^ j r a 



73. Rogue's March. 



Quick time 




Repeat at wilL 



312 



FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE 



74. Funeral March. 



Very slot?. 




pp U— Z=^E 



Repeat at will* 



QUICKSTEPS. 



75. Quickstep No. 1. 
Quick. 



$&hmm^mm 



p r - ju &n$±H\ tgtf\ 



End. 



mt^t^m 



1 .0UL 



rr 



-*-* 




rjri T ni,'.f/ i c.Kmj^^ 



to^^M 



-Efoi. 



Bid. 



i 



s 



:: J-/<#-J-Ji 



313 



314 



FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE 



76. Quickstep No. 2. 



ffi^^gpgs3Ea=fgp 



^^op^^B 



*=t 



^=f^ ^^^ £ 4d ^Slfiu t 



77. Quickstep No. 3. 



fe^pa^ 



ttZZZIjEZjL 



m 



^=& 



ti 



^1P 



a?^ 



^=a 



ffiS 



^S£i 



a?e 



r-& -_ r __ r =| zig== 



QUICKSTEPS 



315 



78. Quickstep No. 4. 



m 



(JUf-Lil^a 



fz^msmmfl gj p gp 



4 *,— =* 



p~_JL_Jfc 



fe 



£ 



-4 — |— a- 



£ 



IS 



r 7XTt 



222 




79. Quickstep No. 5. 



toff^^ S^^ ^^^ 





rtjwsrtfim&m 



316 



FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE 



80. Quickstep No. 6. 



i 



IiPse^^Ii 



« — w-± 



& 



* a t 



3£=zz2f: 



J/ r v - 



|e§ 



! ff J u Hf^t ± f : T^ ^' 



'^[rtrffvEffli 



v^- — v 



^S^^d^^^^^^ f^f, 



5 



S£3 



-#. N ■ P -|- ~p~7 J~] : | F~ ?— ?-J 



81. Quickstep No. 7. 



% 



ftd^t 



-?-? 



^S§ 



£=£i5 



r*-* 



fH 



Eg 



P* 







^ ^^E^zg^.-gj^ig 






S^ 



-*-^ 



m 



QUICKSTEPS 



317 



82. Quickstep No. 8. 



F Trttmpet. 




p 



O Crook. 



FT 



: £-*H*£--f 



i^ i ' v - 



f t 1 I _Jy| TTT 



^ 



w&* 



r*> yr^ 



^^^^=^ 1 ^ ^^ 




4MM- 



: S^ 



# # ...» #-=v 



V--4— U 



= £ = ^-*-*ff 




Second time. End. 



S^^SppB^K 



i 



-# (L. 



-*— *- 



# *-=--- 



s 



7 X -J-j 



Z)a Capo. 

SSI 



m 



^ 



i 



318 FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE 

83. Quickstep No. 9. 
F Trumpet. 



j pgf C J cif- 6 



i 



C Crook. 




#— P 



i 



£nrf. 



* ^ 



gg 



§ 



?-7— \/- 



I 



^g 



i 



EB -hcJ^^ 



f&r^- 



$ 



Quickstep No. 9— Concluded. 



i 



si 



m 



ife? 



:*— ■¥- 



SS 



P^P 



-9-J 



P • 0' 



^ 



ftr"ir'n r '[g 



fe£ 



~fff"x~77 f 



QUICKSTEPS 



319 




84. Quickstep No. 10. 
Quick. F Trumpet. 



0*0 0L 



— #-H A I I , »f- 



C Crook. 



^^ 



p 



& 



End. 



P 



..#•* i i m. 



!■ I r -^-f- 



FTJT 7 1 y . 7 ^ Efl 



-+-*HSr 



1 



g 



-f4 



^^ 



£S£ 



^e 



*a= 



i 



$^E 




0..0 



p. a 



TABLES OF MEASURE AND VALUE 



— 




— 






130 








40 




"50 

40 




120 













MO 














30 

— 


iQO 


— 


_ 








90 








30 








20 




20 


80 








To" 










JO 




— 




6 























5 





10 










"p 






"0" 










4 


o 














3 


2 


-D- 
< 

-UJJ 


3 





-UJ. 

.Q. 
.<- 

.cr. 

-O. 

-z- 

-uJ- 




££ 




I 




< 


~2. 


Q 












Ft. M 



FEET = METRES 
1000 FEET = 304.79 METRES 



0'305I0 
061 



M 

3&5 



Ft. 



Ft. M 
100= 30'5 1000 
610 ZOO 61 
0'9I430 914 300 91 
l'ZI940 IZI9400 12214000 



M. 
304'8 
2000 610 
3000 914 
I2I& 
'524150 15241500 I52I500O 1524 
l'82960 I8'29600 1836000 1829 
215470 2154700 2137000 2154 
243880 2438800 2448000 2438 
274390 ZrapOO 274|9000 2743 



MILES = KILOMETRES 



31250 



M. Kmt M. Kmt 

V A -- 04024= 6457 
\ 08045 8 047 
% IZ00& 10058 

1 16097 II 

2 3 2198 12674 

3 4828 9 I44S430 482791300 



ft Kmt. 

10"- 16095 

12 19 
15 24i40 

32186 
Z5 40233 



26520 



M. Kmt. 
40=64373 
80466 
M. K. 
100= 161 
200 322 
483 



cr 

r- uJ 
£ X 

P * 

2 
ID 

U 



in 




























* 
































ro 
































(VI 

























































































































320 



TABLES OF MEASURE AND VALUE 



321 



Linear Measure 



English measures 



Linear measure 



Inch 

Foot 12 inches 

Yard 3 feet 

Pole 5.5 yards 

Furlong 40 poles 

Mile 8 furlongs 

League 3 miles 



Om, 0254 

Om, 30479 

Om, 9143 8 

5m, 029 ...... 5 metres 

201m, 164 200 metres 

1609m, 315 1600 metres 

4829m, 9 5 kilometres 



French measures 



Approximate measures 



Millimetre 

Centimetre 10 mm. 

Decimetre 10 cm. 

Metre 10 dm. 

1 1 metre 11 metres 

Decametre 10 metres 

Hectometre 100 metres 

Kilometre 1000 metres 

Lieue 4 km? 



0.0393 inches 0.04 inches 

0.3937 inches 0.4 inches 

3 . 937 inches 4 inches 

. , j 40 inches 

39.37 mches.... ^ ^^ feet 

12 yards 12 yards 

10.936 yards 11 yards 

0.06214 miles }/i furlong 

0.6214 miles 5 furlongs 

2 . 5 miles 2.5 miles 



To convert kilometres into miles, multiply by %. 
To convert metres into yards, multiply by %o or deduct 10 per 
cent. 



322 



FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE 



Comparative Table of Distances 
i Kilometre = 1093 yards or nearly 5 furlongs, or % of a mile 



Kil. Miles 


Kil. 


Miles 


Kil. 


Miles 


1 


= about % 


16 = 


about 10 


75 = 


about 46^ 


2 


= about ij^ 


17 = 


about 11 


80 = 


about 48 


3 


= about 1% 


18 = 


about nJ4 


85 = 


about 53^ 


4 


= about 2^ 


19 = 


about 11% 


90 = 


about 56^ 


5 


= about 3 


20 = 


about 12% 


95 = 


about 59K 


6 


= about 3% 


25 = 


about 15JH2 


100 = 


about 6234 


7 


= about 4% 


30 = 


about 18%, 


200 = 


about 124^ 


8 


= about 5 


35 = 


about 21% 


300 = 


about 185 


9 


= about sH 


40 = 


about 25 


400 = 


about 2483^ 


10 


= about 6J4 


45 = 


about 28% 


500 = 


about 310% 


11 


= about 6% 


50 = 


about 31% 


600 = 


about 372% 


12 


= about 73^2 


55 = 


about 34% 


700 = 


about 435 


13 


= about 8 


60 = 


about s^> 


800 = 


about 497 


14 


= about 8% 


65 = 


about 41 


. 900 = 


about 559 


15 


= about 9% 


70 = 


about 44 


1000 = 


about 621% 



TABLES OF MEASURE AND VALUE 



323 



Table of Inches, Feet and Yards Converted into 
Metrical Measures 



Inches Metre 



Feet 



Metre 



Yards Metre 



6 = 




10 



15 = 



16 
17 



19 
20 



23 
24 
25 

26 

27 

28 
2Q 

30 
"31 

32 

33 
34 
35 
36 



0.0254 
o .0508 
0.0762 
. 1016 
0.1270 

0.1523 
0.1778 
0.2032 
0.2286 
0.2539 

0.2794 
0.3048 
0.3302 
0.3556 
.3810 

.4064 
0.4318 
0.4572 
.4826 
.5080 

0.5334 
0.5887 
0.5842 
.6096 
0.6349 

.6604 
0.6858 
D.7112 

0.7366 
.7619 

0.7874 

0.8128 
0.8381 
0.8636 



= 0.9144 



3 = 

4 = 

5 = 

6 = 



9 
10 



13 
14 
15 

16 
17 
-18 
19 
20 



23 
24 
25 

26 
27 
28 
29 

30 

31 
32 
33 
34 
35 
36 



0.30479 
0.60959 
0.91438 
1 .26918 
1 -52397 

1 .82877 
2.13356 
2 .43836 

2 .74315 
3.04794 

3 -35274 
3 .65753 
3 .96233 

4.26712 
4-57192 



6 .4.0068 
6.70548 
7 .01027 
7.31507 
7 .61986 

7 .92466 
8.22945 
8.53425 
8.83904 
9.14383 

944863 
9.75343 
10 .05822 
10.36301 
10.66781 
ic . 79260 



9 
10 



12 
13 

14 
15 



2.74315 
365753 
4-57192 

548630 
6.4OO68 
7.31507 
8.22945 
914383 

10 .05822 

10 .97260 

11 .88698 

12 .80137 

13 .71575 



4.87671 


16 = 14.63014 


5.18151 


17 = 15-54452 


5 .48630 


18 = 16.45890 


5 .79HO 


19 = 17-37329 


6.09589 


20 = 18.28767 



23 
24 
25 

26 
27 
28 
29 
30 

31 
32 

33 
34 
35 
36 



19.20202 

20 . 11643 

21 .03082 
21 .94520 
22.85959 

23-77397 
24.68835 
25 .60274 
26.51712 

27.49150 

28.34589 
29 .26027 
30.17445 

31 .08904 
32 .00342 

32 .91780 



1 centimetre, roughly 24 of an inch 

5 centimetres, roughly 2 inches " 

10 centimetres, roughly 4 inches 

15 centimetres, roughly 6 inches 

20 centimetres, roughly 8 inches 

25 centimetres, roughly 10 inches) 

50 centimetres, roughly 1 foot 8 inches 

75 centimetres, roughly 2 feet 6 inches 

1 metre, roughly. 1 yard feet 3 £5 inches 

5 metres, roughly 5 yards 1 foot 5 inches 

10 metres, roughly 10 yards 2 feet 5 inches 

15 metres, roughly 16 yards 1 foot 3 inches 

20 metres, roughly 21 yards 2 feet 8 inches 

25 metres, roughly 27 yards 1 foot 1 inches 

50 metres, roughly 54 yards 2 feet 2 inches 

100 metres, roughly 108 yards 4 feet 4 inches 



324 



FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE 



Lengths— Millimetres to Decimals of an Inch 








1 


2 


3 


4 







0.03937 


O.07874 


O. Il8ll 


O.15748 


IO 


0.39370 


0.43307 


O.47244 


O.51181 


0.55118 


20 


0.78740 


0.82677 


O.86614 


0.9055I 


O.94488 


30 


1.18110 


1 . 23047 


I.25984 


I . 29921 


1.33858 


40 


1.57480 


1 .61417 


1-65354 


I .69291 


I.73228 


50 


1.96850 


2.00787 


2.04724 


2.08661 


2.12598 


60 


2.36220 


2.40157 • 


2.44094 


2.48031 


2.51968 


70 


2.75590 


2.79527 


2 • 83464 


2.87401 


2.91338 


80 


3.14960 


3.18897 


3.22834 


3.26771 


3 • 30708 


90 


3-5433 


3-58267 


3.62204 


3.66141 


3.70078 


1 <D 


5 


6 


7 


8 


9 


SI 














0.19685 


0.23622 


0.27559 


O.31496 


0.35433 


IO 


0.59055 


O.62992 


0.66929 


O.70866 


O.74803 


20 


0.98425 


1.02362 


I.06299 


I. 10236 


I.I4I73 


30 


1-37795 


1. 41732 


I.45669 


I.49606 


1 • 53543 


40 


1. 77165 


I .81102 


I.85039 - 


I.88976 


1. 92913 


50 


2.16535 


2. 20472 


2 . 24409 


2.28346 


2.32283 


60 


2.55905 


2.59842 


2.63779 


2.67716 


2.71653 


70 


2.95275 


2.99212 


2.O3149 


3.07086 


3.11023 


80 


3 • 34645 


3-38582 


3-425I9 


3-46456 


3 • 50393 


90 


3.740I5 


3-77952 


3.81889 


3.85826 


3-89763 



TABLES OF MEASURE AND VALUE 



325 



Square Measure 



English 










Square inch 






mq., 006645 


Square foot 




144 sq. inches 


mq., 0929 


Square ] 


■ard 




9 sq. feet 


836 


Square pole 






25 mq., 2919 


Rood 






40 sq. poles 


10 acres, 1167 


Acre 






4 roods 


hect., 404671 


Square mile 






2 kil., 5989477 


French 










Are. 




100 metres 


car. 3-954 poles 4 poles 


10 ares 




100 metres 


car. 1 rood = 


y± acre 


Hectare 




100 acres 


2 
Cubic Measure 


471 acres 2^ acres 


English 












Cubic inch 




mc, 000016380 




Cubic foot 




mc, 028315 




Cubic yard 




mc, 7645 




40 cubic feet 




1 mc, 132 


French 






f 61028 


. 000 cubic inches 




1 metre cube 


{ 35 


.520 cubic feet 








I 1 


. 308 cubic yard 






Measures or Capacity 


English 






Compara- 
tive 

table 


Comparative 

decimals 






' Gill 


N 


lit., 141983 






Pint 


4 giUs 


lit., 567935 


Liquides 


< 


Quart 


2 pints 


1 lit., 135870 






Gallon 


4 quarts 


4 lit., 543458 






Barrel 


2,2 gallons 


145 lit., 390656 






Bushel 


8 gallons 


36 lit., 34760 


Dry 


< 


Sack 


3 bushels 


109 lit., 043 




Quarter 


8 bushels 


290 lit., 781 






i Caldron 


12 sacks 


1308 lit., 516 


French 










Litre 




1 


.76 pints 


0. 22 gallons 


Decalitre 








2.201 gallons 


Hectolitre 






J 22.01 gallons 










\ 2% bushels 


21 











326 



FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE 



Weights 



i gramme roughly % of a dram 

5 grammes, roughly 2% drams 

10 grammes, roughly 5^2 drams 

15 grammes, roughly &}i drams 

20 grammes, roughly 11 drams 

25 grammes, roughly 14 drams 

50 grammes, roughly 1 ounce 12 drams 

75 grammes, roughly 2 ounces 10 drams 

100 grammes, roughly. 3 ounces 7^2 drams 

150 grammes, roughly 5 ounces 3 drams 

250 grammes, roughly 8 ounces 11 drams 

500 grammes, roughly 1 lb. 1 ounce 6 drams 

750 grammes, roughly 1 lb. 10 ounces 

1 kilogramme, roughly 2 lb. 2 ounces 11M drams 

5 kilogrammes, roughly 10 lb. 13 ounces 10 drams 

10 kilogrammes, roughly 21 lb. it ounces 3 drams 

15 kilogrammes, roughly 32 lb. 8 ounces 12 drams 

20 kilogrammes, roughly 43 lb. 6 ounces 7 drams 

25 kilogrammes, roughly 54 lb. 4 ounces 

50 kilogrammes, roughly 108 lb. 8 ounces 

75 kilogrammes, roughly 162 lb. 12 ounces 

100 kilogrammes, roughly 220 lb. 

500 kilogrammes, roughly.. . . 9 cwt. 95 lb. 
1000 kilogrammes, roughly.. . . 19 cwt. 77 lb 



TABLES OF MEASURE AND VALUE 



327 



Table of Comparative Money Values 



French 






English 



German 



American 



Fr. 


C. 


£ Sh. D. T 


If. Pf. 


$ 


* 






OI 




0.4 farthing 


• . * 




% 






05 






Md. 


04 




1 






IO 






id. 


OS 




2 






20 






2d. 


16 




4 






25 






2d.^ 


.20 




5 






50 






5d. 


40 




10 






75 






7^ 


60 




15 










iod. 


80 




20 


i 








1 iod. 








i 


25 








I 




25 


2 








1 - iVz 


I 60 




40 


2 


50 






2 .... 


2 




5o 


3 








2 4% 


2 40 




60 


4 








3 2V 2 


3 20 




80 


5 








4 


4 20 


1 




6 








4 9K 


4 80 


1 


20 


7 








5 7M 


5 60 


1 


40 


8 








6 4 % 


6 40 


1 


60 


9 








7 2^ 


7 20 


1 


80 


IO 








8 


8 20 


2 




ii 








8 9% 


8 80 


2 


20 


12 








9 iH 


9 60 


2 


40 


13 








ro s 4% 


10 40 


2 


60 


14 








n 2V2 


11 20 


2 


80 


IS 








12 .... 


12 20 


3 




16 








12 9% 


12 80 


3 


20 


17 








13 7H 


13 60 


3 


40 


18 








14 4% 


14 40 


3 


60 


19 








15 2^ 


15 20 


3 


80 


20 








16 


16 


4 


00 


25 




1 


16 


20 


5 


00 


IOO 




4 


16 


80 


20 


00 



RANGE TABLES 



329 



RANGE TABLES 



Range Table for 3 Inch Gun 

Muzzle Velocity, 1700 feet per second 
Weight of Projectile 15 pounds. Normal Corrector, 30 





Ang 


le of 


O 

a 
ft 


>> 

'0 

> 

e 

1 

a> 


Range change 
due to 


1 oo-yard 
range 
change 


Maximum 
] ordinate 


-t-3 

Q 






M 
P4 




B 

u 


d 


US 

. -M 

ra as 
£ > 


O O 
£ 0) 

O «-. 

M 8 


> 

i) 



u 




Q 




be 

c 


"3 


Q- 


Yards 


Mils 


Mils 


I on 


Ft. per 

sec. 


Yards 


Yards 




Bo 
£ 


Yards 


Yards 


Sec. Mils 


100 


2 


2 


595 


1647 


61 


24 


1.4 


4.2 


50 





! 
0.2 0.0 


200 


3 


■4 


282 


1595 


54 


24 


1.6 


A. 2 


101 





0.4 0.0 


300 


5 


6 


178 


1547 


52 


24 


1.8 


4.2 


152 


1 


0.5 0.3 


400 


7 


8 


127 


1501 


50 


24 


2 .0 


4-3 


203 


1 


0.7 0.3 


500 


9 


10 


97 


1459 


48 


23 


2 . 1 


4.4 


255 


1 


1.0 0.4 


600 


11 


13 


77 


1418 


46 


23 


2 .2 


4-4 


307 


2 


1.2 0.5 


700 


13 


16 


63 


1379 


44 


23 


2.3 


4-4 


361 


3 


1.4 0.6 


800 


16 


19 


53 


1343 


42 


23 


2.4 


4. A 


415 


4 


1.6 0.6 


900 


18 


22 


45 


1308 


40 


23 


2.5 


4-4 


469 


5 


1.8 0.7 


1000 


21 


26 


39 


1276 


38 


23 


2.6 


4.4 


524 


6 


2.1 0.8 


IIOO 


24 


30 


34 


1245 


37 


23 


2.7 


4.4 


579 


7 


2.3 0.9 


1200 


27 


34 


30 


1216 


36 


22 


2.8 


4-5 


634 


9 


2.6 1 .0 


1300 


30 


38 


27 


1189 


3-1 


22 


2.9 


4.6 


690 


11 


2.8 1.1 


1400 


33 


42 


24 


1164 


33 


21 


30 


4-7 


745 


13 


31 1-3 


1500 


36 


47 


22 


1140 


32 


21 


3-1 


4-8 


801 


15 


3-3 1-4 


1600 


39 


Si 


20 


1118 


x 31 


21 


3-2 


4-9 


858 


18 


3.6 1.6 


1700 


42 


56 


18 


1096 


30 


20 


33 


4-9 


914 


21 


3-9 1.8 


1800 


45 


62 


16 


1076 


29 


20 


35 


50 


971 


24 


4-2 1.9 


1900 


49 


67 


15 


1057 


28 


20 


3-6 


5-0 


1028 


27 


4-5 2.0 


2000 


52 


73 


14 


1039 


27 


20 


3-7 


5-i 


1084 


31 


4-7 


2 .1 


2100 


56 


78 


13 


1022 


26 


20 


3-8 


5-i 


1141 


35 


5-0 


2.3 


2200 


60 


84 


12 


1005 


26 


19 


3-8 


5-2 


1197 


39 


5-3 2.5 


2300 


64 


91 


11 


990 


26 


19 


3-9 


5-2 


1253 


44 


5-6 2.7 


2400 


68 


97 


10 


975 


25 


19 


39 


5-2 


1310 


49 


5-9 2.9 


2500 


72 


103 


10 


961 


25 


19 


4-0 


5-3 


1366 


54 


6.3 3-1 


2600 


76 


109 


9 


949 


25 


19 


4.0 


5-3 


1422 


60 


6.6 3-3 


2700 


80 


116 


9 


937 


24 


19 


4.1 


5-3 


1478 


66 


6.9 3-4 


2800 


84 


123 


8 


925 


24 


19 


4.2 


5-4 


1534 


72 


7.2 3-6 


2900 


88 


130 


8 


915 


23 


19 


4-3 


5.4 


1590 


79 


7-5 3-8 


3000 


92 


137 


7 


905 


23 


18 


4-4 


5.4 


1646 


86 


7-8 


4.0 



331 



332 



FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE 



Range Table for 3 Inch Gun {Continued) 
Muzzle Velocity, 1700 feet per second 
Weight of Projectile 15 pounds. Normal Corrector, 30 





Angle 


"3 
55 


'0 


> 

a 
1 

a> 


Range change 
due to 


100-yard 
range 
change 


Maximum 
ordinate 


.5? 


a 






u 
2 

u 

oj 
ft 
<0 

Q 


"3 


US 

& > 


*3S 
"Sfc 

M 


Oj 

> 
a) 

*o 
.9 § 

3* 


i-i 




"8 

g 

ft 




<D 

bo 
P4 


O 

"3 
H 


Q 


Yards 


Mils 


Mils 


1 on 


Ft. per 
sec. 


Yards 


Yards 


Yards 


Yards 


Sec. 


Mils 


3100 


97 


144 


7 


897 


23 


18 


4.4 


5-5 


1701 


93 


8.1 


4.2 


3200 


101 


151 


7 


889 


22 


18 


4.5 


5-5 


1757 


100 


8.5 


4.4 


3300 


106 


158 


.6 


881 


22 


18 


4.6 


55 


1813 


108 


8.8 


4-6 


3400 


no 


166 


6 


874 


21 


18 


4.7 


5-5 


1868 


117 


91 


4-8 


3500 


115 


174 


6 


867 


21 


18 


4.8 


5-6 


1924 


126 


95 


5-0 


3600 


120 


181 


55 


861 


20 


18 


49 


5-6 


1980 


135 


9-8 


5-2 


3700 


125 


100 


53 


855 


20 


18 


50 


57 


2035 


145 


10.2 


5-4 


3800 


130 


198 


5.i 


849 


19 


18 


5.1 


5.7 


2091 


156 


10.5 


5-6 


3900 


135 


206 


4-9 


•843 


19 


17 


5-2 


5-7 


2147 


167 


10.9 


5-8 


4000 


140 


215 


4-7 


837 


18 


17 


5.3 


5-7 


2203 


178 


n. 2 


6.1 


4100 


I46 


224 


4-5 


831 


18 


17 


5.4 


5.8 


2259 


100 


11. 6 


6.3 


4200 


151 


233 


43 


825 


18 


17 


5.5 


5-8 


2315 


203 


12.0 


6.6 


4300 


157 


242 


4.1 


820 


18 


17 


5.7 


5-8 


2371 


216 


12.4 


6.8 


4400 


103 


251 


4.0 


814 


18 


17 


5.8 


5-9 


2427 


230 


12.7 


7-1 


4500 


168 


260 


3-8 


808 


17 


17 


5.9 


59 


2484 


244 


13. 1 


7-4 


4600 


174 


270 


37 


803 


17 


17 


6 


6 


2541 


259 


13-5 


7-8 


4700 


180 


280 


35 


798 


17 


17 


6 


6 


2597 


275 


13-9 


8.1 


4800 


187 


290 


3-4 


793 


16 


17 


6 


6 


2654 


291 


14-3 


8.4 


4900 


193 


300 


33 


788 


16 


16 


6 


6 


2711 


308 


14-7 


8.8 


5000 


199 


310 


32 


783 


16 


16 


6 


6 


2768 


325 


15. 1 


9.2 


5100 


205 


321 


31 


778 


16 


16 


6 


6 


2825 


343 


155 


9-5 


5200 


212 


332 


3-0 


773 


15 


16 


7 


6 


2882 


361 


159 


99 


5300 


218 


342 


2.9 


768 


15 


16 


7 


6 


2940 


38i 


16.3 


10.2 


5400 


225 


353 


2.8 


764 


15 


16 


7 


6 


2997 


401 


16.7 


10.5 


5500 


232 


365 


2.7 


759 


15 


15 


7 


6 


3054 


421 


17. 1 


10.9 


5600 


239 


376 


2.6 


755 


14 


15 


7 


6 


3112 


442 


17.6 


n .2 


5700 


246 


387 


2.5 


75i 


14 


14 


7 


7 


3169 


464 


18.0 


11. 5 


5800 


253 


398 


2.4 


747 


14 


14 


7 


7 


3227 


486 


18.4 


n. 9 


5900 


260 


410 


2.4 


744 


14 


13 


7 


8 


3284 


509 


18.9 


12 .2 


6000 


267 


422 


2.3 


740 


13 


13 


8 


8 


3342 


533 


19.4 


12.5 



RANGE TABLES 



333 



Range Table for 3 Inch Gun (Continued) 

Muzzle Velocity, 1700 feet per second 

Weight of Projectile 15 pounds. Normal Corrector, 30 





Angle of 


*3 

ft 
53 


>> 

'0 
c> 

> 

1 

CD 


Range change 
due to 


100-yard 
range 
change 


Maximum 
ordinate 


XI 

O 

a 




bo 


Vh 

Q 


"3 
ft 


M 


"3S 

"Sfc 

a 


> 


u 

O 

4-1 

O 

So 

Oh ' 




<u 

bo 
G 


Si 
M 


-t-i 
Q 


Yards 


Mils 


Mils 


1 on 


Ft. per 
sec. 


Yards 


Yards 


Yards 


Yards 


Sec. 


Mils 


6100 
6200 
6300 
6400 
6500 

6600 
6700 
6800 
6900 
7000 

7100 
7200 
7300 
7400 
7500 

7600 
7700 
7800 
7900 
8000 


275 
283 
290 
298 
306 

314 
323 
33i 
339 
348 

357 
365 
375 
384 
393 

402 
412 
422 
432 
442 


434 
446 
A58 
470 
483 

496 
508 
521 
534 
548 

56i 
575 
588 
602 
617 

631 
645 
659 
674 
689 


2.2 
2 .1 
2 .1 
2.0 
19 

1.8 

1.8 
1-7 

1.7 
1.6 

1-5 
1.5 
1.4 
1.4 
1-3 

1 .2 
1 .2 
1 .2 
1 .1 
1.1 


736 
733 
729 
726 
723 

720 
717 
714 
711 
708 

706 
703 
700 
698 
695 

692 
690 

687- 
684 
682 


13 
13 
13 
13 
12 

12 
12 
12 
12 
11 

11 
11 
11 
11 
11 

11 
10 
10 
10 
10 


12 

11 

10 

9 

7 

6 


8 
8 
8 
8 
8 

8 
8 
8 
8 
9 

9 
9 
9 
9 
9 

9 

10 
10 
10 
10 


9 
9 

10 
12 
14 

17 


3400 
3458 
35i6 

3574 
3632 

3691 
3750 
3809 
3868 
3927 

3986 
4046 
4105 
4165 
4226 

4286 
4347 
4407 
4468 
4530 


557 
583 
609 
636 
663 

692 

722 
752 
784 
817 

850 
885 
921 
957 
995 

1033 
1073 
1114 
1156 
1199 


19.8 
20.3 
20.9 
21 .4 
21 .9 

22.5 

23.0 
23.6 

24.2 
24.8 

25-5 
26. 1 
26.8 
27-5 
28.2 

29.0 
29.8 
30.6 
31.4 
32.3 


12.9 
13-3 
13.6 
14. 1 
14-5 

14.9 
15-3 
15-7 
16.2 
16.7 

17.2 
17-7 
18.2 
18.7 
192 

19.7 
20.3 
20.9 
21 .4 
22 .0 



Range Table for 4.7 Inch Gun 

Weight of Projectile, 60 pounds 



100 


I 


2 


565 


1681 


62 


35 


1.6 


2.8 


50 





0.2 


0.1 


200 


3 


3 


282 


1662 


59 


35 


i.7 


2.8 


100 


1 


0.4 


0.1 


300 


5 


5 


187 


1644 


57 


35 


1.8 


2.8 


150 


1 


0.5 


0.2 


400 


7 


7 


139 


1625 


55 


35 


1.8 


2.8 


200 


2 


0.7 


0.3 


500 


8 


9 


110 


1607 


54 


35 


1.9 


2.8 


251 


2 


0.9 


0.4 


600 


10 


II 


91 


1588 


53 


35 


1.9 


2.8 


301 


3 


1.1 


0.4 


700 


12 


13 


77 


1570 


52 


34 


1.9 


2.9 


352 


3 


1.2 


0.5 


800 


14 


15 


66 


1552 


51 


34 


2.0 


2.9 


403 


4 


1.5 


0.6 


900 


16 


17 


58 


1535 


50 


34 


2.0 


2.9 


454 


4 


1.7 


0.7 


1000 


18 


20 


51 


1517 


49 


34 


2.1 


2.9 


505 


5 


1.9 


0.7 



334 



FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE 



Range Table for 4.7 Inch Gun {Continued) 
Weight of Projectile, 60 pounds 





Ang 


le of 


ft 
O 

tn 


>> 

'0 

^0 
% 

> 

r aJ 
u 


Range change 
due to 


100-yard 
range 
change 


Maximum 
ordinate 


5 

6 




CD 

be 

C 


U 

d 

Q 


ft 


rd ^ 
£ > 


M-l U 
O O 

ofc 


> 
CD 

1" 


1 
u 




'o 

• So 

« 

a, * 



a 




P 


Yards 


Mils 


Mils 


1 on 


Ft. per 
sec. 


Yards 


Yards 


Yards 


Yards 


Sec. 


Mils 


1100 


20 


22 


46 


1499 


48 


34 


2.1 


2.9 


557 


6 


2 .1 


0.8 


1200 


23 


25 


41 


1481 


47 


34 


2 .1 


3.0 


609 


7 


2.3 


0.9 


1300 


25 


28 


37 


1464 


47 


34 


2.1 


30 


661 


8 


2.5 


1 .0 


1400 


27 


30 


34 


1447 


47 


34 


2 .1 


30 


713 


10 


2.7 


1 . 1 


1500 


29 


32 


32 


1430 


47 


34- 


2 I 


30 


766 


12 


2.9 


1 .2 


1600 


3i 


35 


29 


1413 


46 


34 


2 .2 


30 


819 


13 


3i 


13 


1700 


33 


38 


27 


1396 


45 


34 


2 .2 


3-0 


872 


15 


3-3 


1.4 


1800 


36 


41 


25 


1379 


45 


34 


2.2 


3 


936 


17 


3-5 


15 


1900 


38 


44 


23 


1363 


45 


34 


2 .2 


3-0 


980 


19 


3-7 


1.6 


2000 


40 


47 


22 


1347 


A4 


34 


2-3 


30 


1034 


21 


4.0 


1.7 


2100 


43 


5i 


20 


I33i 


43 


34 


2-3 


3-0 


1089 


24 


4.2 


1.8 


2200 


45 


54 


19 


1314 


42 


34 


2.4 


3-0 


1 144 


26 


4-4 


19 


2300 


47 


57' 


18 


1297 


41 


34 


2.4 


3-0 


1199 


29 


4-7 


2 .0 


2400 


50 


60 


17 


1281 


40 


34 


2-5 


3-0 


1255 


32 


40 


2 .1 


2500 


52 


6a 


16 


1267 


39 


33 


2.5 


3-0 


1310 


35 


5-i 


2.2 


2600 


55 


68 


15 


1253 


38 


33 


2.6 


3-0 


1366 


38 


5-4 


2.3 


2700 


58 


72 


14 


1239 


37 


33 


2.7 


3-0 


1422 


42 


5-6 


2.4 


2800 


60 


76 


14 


1225 


36 


33 


2.8 


3-0 


1477 


46 


5-9 


2.6 


2900 


63 


80 


13 


1212 


35 


33 


2.9 


3-0 


1533 


50 


6.1 


2.7 


3000 


66 


84 


12 


1199 


34 


33 


2.9 


30 


1589 


55 


6.4 


2.8 


3100 


69 


88 


12 


1187 


33 


33 


2.9 


30 


1645 


59 


6.6 


30 


3200 


72 


92 


II 


1175 


33 


32 


2.9 


3.1 


1701 


64 


6.9 


3-1 


3300 


75 


96 


II 


1163 


33 


32 


3.0 


3-1 


1757 


69 


7-2 


3-3 


3400 


78 


101 


10 


1151 


33 


32 


3-0 


3-1 


1813 


74 


7-4 


3-4 


35oo 


81 


106 


10 


1 140 


33 


32 


3-1 


3-1 


1869 


79 


7-7 


3-6 


3600 


84 


in 


92 


1130 


32 


32 


3-2 


3-1 


1926 


85 


8.0 


3-7 


37oo 


87 


116 


8.8 


1120 


31 


32 


3-3 


3-1 


1982 


9i 


8.2 


3 9 


3800 


91 


121 


8-4 


IIIO 


30 


32 


3-3 


3-1 


2038 


98 


8.5 


40 


3900 


94 


126 


8.0 


IIOI 


30 


31 


3-4 


3-2 


2095 


105 


8.8 


4.2 


4000 


97 


131 


7-7 


1093 


29 


31 


3-4 


3-2 


2151 


112 


9.1 


4-4 



RANGE TABLES 



335 



Range Table for 4.7 Inch Gun {Continued) 
Weight of Projectile, 60 pounds 





Ang 


e of 


"3 

a 

JO 

to 


'a 

O 

> 

1 


Range change 
due to 


100-yard 
range 
change 


Maximum 
ordinate 


4J 



6 




bo 

c 




u 

u 

a 
a 

Qi 

Q 


"3 


r3 la 

B > 


I point of 
corrector 


ctS 

> 

0) 

O 


u 







ID 

be 
C 

a 


■4-5 

'S 


Q 


Yards 


Mils 


Mils 


1 on 


Ft. per 
sec. 


Yards 


Yards 




So 

2 


Yards 


Yards j 


Sec. 


Mils 


4100 


101 


136 


7.4 


1085 


29 


3i 


3-4 3-2 


2208 


119 


9-4 4-5 


4200 


104 


141 


7-2 


1077 


29 


3i 


3-5 


3-2 


2264 


127 


9-7 4-7 


4300 


. 108 


147 


6.9 


1069 


28 


3i 


3-5 


3-2 


2321 


135 


99! 4-9 


4400 


i in 


153 


6.6 


1061 


27 


31 


3-6 


3-2 


2377 


143 


10.2 5.0 


4500 


! 115 


159 


6.4 


1054 


27 


3i 


3-7 


3.2 


2434 


152 


10.5 


52 


4600 


119 


165 


6.2 


1047 


- 27 


3i 


3-7 


3.2 


2490 


161 


10.8 


5-4 


4700 


123 


171 


6.0 


1040 


27 


3i 


3-7 


3.2 


2547 


170 


11 . 1 


5-6 


4800 


126 


177 


5-7 


1034 


27 • 


3i 


3-7 


3-2 


2603 


179 


11. 4 


5-7 


4900 


130 


183 


5-6 


1027 


26 


3i 


3-8 3.2 


2660 


189 


11. 7 


5-9 


5000 


134 


189 


5-4 


1021 


25 


30 


3-9 33 


2716 


199 


12.0 6.1 


5100 


138 


195 


5-2 


1015 


25 


30 


4.0 


3.3 


2773 


210 


12.4 6.3 


5200 


142 


201 


5-0 


1000 


25 


30 


4.1 


3.3 


2830 


221 


12.7 6.5 


5300 


146 


207 


4-9 


1003 


24 


30 


4-2 3-3 


2886 


233 


130 6.7 


54.00 


150 


213 


4-7 


997 


24 


30 


4-2 3-3 


2943 


245 


13-3 6.9 


5500 


: 154 


220 


4-6 


991 


23 


30 


4-3 33 


2999 


258 


13-6 7-2 


5600 


159 


227 


4-4 


985 


23 


30 


4.4 


3.3 


3056 


270 


14-0 74 


5700 


163 


234 


4-3 


979 


22 


29 


4-5 


3.4 


3112 


283 


14-3 7-6 


5800 


168 


241 


4.1 


974 


22 


29 


4-5 


3.4 


3168 


297 


14.6 7.8 


5900 


172 


248 


4.0 


969 


22 


29 


4-5 


3.4 


3224 


311 


15 .0 8.0 


6000 


177 


255 


3-9 


964 


22 


29 


4-6 


3.4 


3280 


325 


15-3 8.3 


6100 


l8l 


262 


3-8 


960 


22 


29 


4.6 


3-4 


3336 


340 


15.6 8.5 


6200 


186 


269 


3-7 


956 


22 


29 


4.6 


3-4 


3392 


355 


16.0 8.8 


6300 


191 


276 


3-6 


952 


22 


29 


4-6 3-5 


3448 


370 


16.3 90 


6400 


196 


283 


3-5 


948 


22 


29 


4-6 ; 3-5 


3504 


386 


16.6 92 


6500 


200 


290 


3-4 


944 


22 


29 


4.6 


3-5 


356o 


402 


17 .0 


95 


6600 


205 


297 


3-3 


940 


22 


29 


4-6 


3-5 


3615 


410 


173 


9-7 


6700 


200 


304 


3-2 


937 


22 


29 


4.6 


3-5 


3671 


436 


17.6 


99 


6800 


214 


3ii 


3-1 


934 


21 


29 


4-7 


3-5 


3727 


453 


18 .0 10 .2 


6900 


219 


318 


3-1 


931 


21 


28 


4-7 


35 


3782 


471 


18.3 


10.4 


7000 


| 223 


325 


3-0 


929 


21 


28 


4-7 


3 5 


3838 


490 


18.7 


10 .7 



336 



FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE 



Range Table for 4.7 Inch Gun {Continued) 
Weight of Projectile, 60 pounds 





Angle of 


■3 
m 



<D 

55 


> 

a 


Range change 
due to 


100-yard 
range 
change 


Maximum 
ordinate 


bo 

O 

a 






bo 

a 


u 
H 
u 

Q 


*3 
ft 


1 

% 
o.o 

£ > 


T5S 

u 


1 

h 

a* 


u 
O 


O 

05 
"£ -^ 
.5 

Pm U 





bo 
C 


'53 


'u 

Q 


Yards 


Mils 


Mils 


1 on 


Ft. per 
sec. 


Yards 


Yards 


Yards 


Yards 


Sec. 


Mils 


7100 


228 


332 


30 


927 


21 


28 


4.7 


3.5 


3894 


509 


190 


10.9 


7200 


233 


339 


2.9 


925 


21 


28 


4.7 


3-5 


3949 


528 


19.4 


11 .2 


730Q 


237 


346 


2.8 


922 


21 


28 


4.8 


35 


4005 


548 


19.7 


II. 4. 


7400 


242 


353 


2.8 


919 


21 


28 


4.8 


3-6 


4061 


568 


20.1 


11. 7 


7500 


247 


36i 


2.7 


917 


21 


28. 


49 


3.6 


4116 


589 


20.4 


11. 9 


7600 


252 


369 


2.6 


916 


20 


28 


50 


3-6 


4172 


610 


20.8 


12.2 


7700 


257 


377 


2.6 


914 


20 


28 


5.1 


3-6 


4228 


631 


21 .2 


12.5 


7800 


262 


385 


2.5 


912 


19 


28 


5.2 


3-6 


4283 


652 


21.5 


12.7 


7900 


267 


393 


2,5 


910 


19 


28 


53 


3-6 


4339 


673 


21 9 


13-0 


8000 


272 


401 


2.4 


908 


19 


28 


53 


3-6 


4395 


695 


22.2 


132 


8100 


277 


409 


2.4 


907 


19 


28 


53 


3-6 


4450 


719 


22.6 


13.5 


8200 


283 


417 


2.3 


006 


19 


28 


53 


3-6 


4506 


744 


23.0 


13.7 


8300 


288 


425 


2.3 


904 


19 


28 


5.4 


3-6 


d.562 


769 


23.4 


14.O 


8400 


293 


433 


2 .2 


903 


19 


28 


5.4 


3-6 


4617 


794 


23.7 


14-3 


8500 


299 


441 


2 .2 


902 


19 


27 


5.4 


3-7 


4673 


820 


24.1 


14.6 


8600 


304 


449 


2.1 


901 


19 


27 


5.4 


3-7 


4729 


847 


24 .5 


149 


8700 


310 


457 


2.1 


900 


19 


27 


5-4 


3-7 


4784 


875 


249 


15.2 


8800 


315 


465 


2 .0 


899 


18 


27 


5-4 


37 


4840 


902 


25.2 


155 


8900 


320 


473 


2.0 


898 


18 


27 


5.5 


37 


4896 


930 


256 


15-8 


9000 


326 


481 


2.0 


897 


18 


27 


5-6 


37 


4951 


958 


26.0 


16. 1 


9100 


332 


489 


1-9 


895 


18 


27 


5-7 


37 


5007 


988 


26.4 


16.4 


9200 


338 


497 


19 


894 


17 


27 


5-8 


37 


5063 


1018 


26.8 


16.7 


9300 


344 


506 


1.8 


893 


17 


27 


59 


37 


5118 


1049 


27.2 


17. 1 


9400 


349 


515 


1.8 


893 


17 


27 


6.0 


3-7 


5174 


1080 


27.7 


17-4 


9500 


355 


524 


1.8 


892 


16 


27 


6 


37 


5230 


1113 


28.1 


17.8 


9600 


362 


533 


1.7 


892 


16 


26 


6 


3-8 


5285 


1 147 


28.5 


18. 1 


9700 


368 


542 


i-7 


892 


16 




6 




5341 


1181 


29.8 


18.5 


9800 


375 


551 


i-7 


892 


15 




7 




5397 


1217 


294 


18.8 


0900 


38i 


560 


1.6 


892 


15 




7 




5452 


1253 


29.8 


19.2 


10000 


388 


569 


1.6 


892 


14 




7 




5508 


1291 


30.2 


195 



RANGE TABLES 



337 



Range Table for 4.7 Inch Gun {Continued) 
Weight of Projectile, 60 pounds 





Angle of 




a 

CO 


•±3 

> 
1 

0) 


Range change 
due to 


100-yard 
range 
change 


Maximum 
ordinate 


bo 




bo 
§ 



P 


"3 

ft 


1 

0.8 

•g> 

M 


*4-l U 

O O 

a 

M ° 


1 

> 


u 




.5 o 




<D 

bo 
C 




Q 


Yards 


Mils 


Mils 


1 on 


Ft. per 
sec. 


Yards 


Yards 


Yards 


Yards 


Sec. 


Mils 


IOIOO 
10200 
10300 
IO4OO 
10500 

10600 
10700 
10800 
10900 
IIOOO 


395 
402 
409 
416 
424 

431 
439 
447 
455 
463 


578 
587 
596 
605 
614 

623 
632 
642 
652 
662 


1.6 

1. 5 
1.5 
1.5 
1.5 

1.4 
1.4 
1.4 
1-3 
1.3 


892 
892 
893 
893 
894 

894 
895 
896 
897 
897 


14 
14 
14 
14 
13 

13 
13 
13 
13 
13 




7 
7 
7 
7 

7 

8 
8 
8 
8 
8 




5564 
5619 
5675 
5731 
5786 

5842 
5898 
5953 
6009 
6065 


1329 
1369 
1410 
1453 
1498 

1544 
i59i 
1640 
1690 

1742 


30.7 
31. 1 
3i 6 
32.1 
32.5 

330 
335 
34-0 
34-5 
35-0 


19.9 
20.3 
20.8 
21 .2 
21.6 

22 .1 
22.5 
23.0 
23.4 
23-9 



338 



FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE 



4.7 Inch Howitzer, Range Table 
Shell and Shrapnel 
[Zone 3, M. V. 900 feet per second] 



I 


2 


3 


4 


5 


6 


7 


8 


9 


10 


11 


12 


13 


14 


15 


16 






'a; 






T3 




<u 
bo 
G 
aS 

•So 








c 
£ 






'0 



u 









<u 


< 

+1 


<3 


g 


rG 

# bp 

<3 


bo 
G 




g ° 
.2 w 




*d 


> 

15 


6 
3 


O 

M-l 
O 





0) 

bo 
G 
o3 


a 

<u 


u G 


Xrn 




S-2 

X+\ 




e 


3 


'In 


O C/3 


°3 


O 

a 



c 

u 


|. 

nJ aJ 


13 


ti 


< * 


<] 


< 


< 


H 


fc 


(-1 


Q c 


w. 


H 


> 


> 


7ds. 


/ 


Yds. 


Yds. 


Yds 


Yds. 


Sec. 


Divs. 


Mils 


; Mils 


/ 


1 on 


F.S. 


Ft. 






100 


43 


4.9 


2.2 


0.1 


0.5 


0.35 


0.3 


0.27 


0.05 


19 


156.3 


893 


3 


2.70 


1.004 


200 


I 4 


4-8 


4.4 


0.2 


1.1 


0.68 


0.6 


0.37 


0.08 


40 


76.5 888 


7 


2.69 1.008 


300 


I 25 


4.8 


6.6 


0.3 


i.7 


1. 01 


0.9 


0.87 


O.II 


I I 


52. 9 ! 883 


11 


2.68 1. 012 


400 


I 46 4.7 


8.8 


0.4 


2.3 


1.34 


1.2 


1. 17 


0.15 


I 22 


38.8 


878 


15 


2.67 1. 016 


500 


2 7i 4.7 


10.9 


0.6 


2.9 


1.68 


1. 5 


1.48 


0.19 


I 43 


30.1 


873 


19 


2.66 1.020 


600 


2 29 4.6 


13.0 


0.8 


3.6 


2.02 


1.9 


1.79 


0.23 


2 5 


24.7 


868 


24 


2.65 1.023 


700 


2 51 


4-6 


15. 1 


1.0 


4-3 


2.36 


2.3 


2.10 


0.27 


2 27 


21.2 


863 


29 


2.65 1.026 


800 


3 13 


4-5 


17.2 


1.2 


5.o 


2.71 


2.7 


2.41 


0.31 


2 49 


18.7 


858 


35 


2. 64! 1. 029 


900 


3 35 


4-5 


19.3 


1.5 


5-8 


3.06 


3.1 


2.73 


0.35 


3 II 


16.7 


853 


42 


2.63 


1.032 


1000 


3 58 


4.4 


21.4 


1.8 


6.6 


3.41 


3.5 


3.05 


0.39 


3 33 


15.0 


848 


50 


2.62 


1.035 



RANGE TABLES 



339 



4.7 Inch Howitzer, Range Table {Continued) 

Shell and Shrapnel 

[Zone 3, M. V. 900 feet per second] 



13 



14 



15 



16 



S.2 

*1 






*T3 



X+\ 
< 



in 
c 2 

o w 

a) cl> 



^^ 






Yds. 



Yds. Yds. Yds. 



Sec. 



Divs. Mils Mils 



r .on F.S. 



Ft. 



4.4 
4-3 
4-3 
4-3 

4.2 

4.2 
4.2 
4.1 
4.1 
4.0 



20 4.0 

45 4-0 



300 


9 


10 


3-9 


400 


9 


36 


3-9 


500 


10 


2 


3-8 


600 


10 


26 


3-8 


700 


10 


55 


3-7 


800 


II 


23 


3-7 


900 


II 


50 


3.7 


3000 


12 


17 


3-6 


100 


12 


45 


3-6 


200 


13 


13 


3-6 


300 


13 


41 


3.5 


400 


14 


9 


3.5 


500 


14 


38 


3-5 


600 


15 


8 


3-4 


700 


IS 


37 


3-4 


800 


16 


7 


3.4 


900 


16 


37 


3.3 


4000 


17 


7 


3.3 



23.4 

25.4 
27.4 
29.4 
31.4 

33.4 
35.3 

37-2 
39-1 
41.0 

42.9 
44-8 
46.7 
48.6 
50.5 

52.4 
54-3 
56.2 
58.1 



2.1 
2.4 
2.8 
3-2 1 

3.6 

4.0 
4-5 
5-0 
5 5 
6.1 

6.7 

7.3 
7.9 
8.5 
9-2 

9-9 
10.6 
11. 3 
12. 1 



3-77 
4.13 
4.49 
., 4 ."86 
1 5.23 



7-4 

8.3 

9.2 

10. 1 



12. 1 

13. 1 
14.2 
15.3 
16.4 



5.6o 

5-97 
6.35 
6.73 
7. 11 



3-9 
4-3 
4.7 
5-1 
5-5 

5-9 
6.3 
6.7 
7-1 
7.5 



60.0 12.9 



61.9 
63.8 
65.7 
67.6 
69.5 



13.7 
14.6 
15-5 
16.4 
17.4 



71.3 18.4 
73.II9.4 

74-9 10.5 
76.7 21. 6| 44-9 



17.6 7-49 7-9 
18.8 7.88 8.3 
20.1 8.27I 8.7 
21.4 8.66 9-0 

22.7 9.05 9-4 



24.1 
25.5 
26.9 
28.4 



9-45 9-8 
9.85 10.2 
10.25 10.6 

10.66 



29.9 11.07 

31.4jn.48 

33.0 11.90 
34.6 12.32 
36.2 12.74 



37.9 

39.6 
41.3 
43.1 



14.47 15-0 

14.91 15.4 

78.522.8S 46.7 15.36 15-9 



13.17 

13.60 
14.03 



11. 

11. 4' 

11. 8 
12.2 
12.7 

13. 1 
13.5 

14.0 
14.5 



3-37| 
3-70 
4.03I 
4.36' 
4.70 

5.04 
5.38 
5-73 
6.08 
6.43 

6.79 

7.15 

7.51 

7 

8.25 

8.62 
9.00 
9.38 
9.76 
10.15 

10.54 
10.94 
11-34 
11.75 
12.16 



0.43 

0.47 
0.51 
0.55 
0.59 

0.63 
0.67 
0.71 
0.75 
0.79 

0.83 
0.87 
0.91 
0.95 
0.99 



1.23 

1.27 
1. 31 
1.35 
1.39 



56 
19 
4-' 
5 
28 

52 
16 

40 
4 

29 

54 
19 
44 
10 

30 



1.03 Jio 

1.07 10 29 

I. II 10 56 

1. IS 11 23 

1. 19 11 50 



12 18 

12 46 

13 14 

13 42 

14 11 



12.58 1.43 14 40 

13.00 1.47 15 9 

13.43 I. Si 15 39 

13.86' 1.55 16 9 

I4.30j 1.59 |i6 39 



843 

838 

833 

5 828 

7 1 823 



0, 818 

4 814 

9 810 

806 

802 



6.6 
6.3 
6.0 
5.7 

5-4 

5-1 

4-9 
4-7 
4.5 
4-3 

4.1 
3-9 
3-7 
3.6 
3.5 

3-4 
3-3 
3.2 
3.1 
3.0 



798 
794 
790 
786 
782 

778 
775 
772 
769 
766 

763 
760 
758 
756 

754 

752 
750 

749 
748 
747 



59 


2.62 


09 


2.61 


So 


2.61 


92 


2.60 


05 


2.60 


20 


2.60 



1.037 
1.039 
1. 041 
1.043 
1.044 



2.6011.046 

2.59 1.047 
2.59 1.047 



137 
156 
177 

200 2.60 I.O46 



224 
249 
276 
305 

335 

366 
398 
432 
467 
503 

540 
578 
618 
660 

704 

750 
798 
848 
905 



2.60 
2.60 
2.61 
2.61 
2.62 

2.63 
2.64 
2.65 



1.045 
1.044 
1.042 
1.040 
1.037 

1.034 
1.030 
1.026 



2.66 1. 021 
2.67|i.oi6 



1. 010 
1.003 
0.995 



2.69 
2.71 
2.73 

2.750.986 
2.78 0.976 

2.81 0.965 
2.840.953 
2.88 0.940 
2.92 0.927 
956 l2.96jO.914 



340 



FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE 



4.7 Inch Howitzer, Range Table (Continued) 

Shell and Shrapnel 

[Zone 3, M. V. 900 feet per second] 



I 


2 


3 


4 


5 


6 


7 


8 


9 


10 


n 


12 


13 


14 


15 


16 




13 

*o a 


< > 


13 

M 
< 

+1 

xl 


ft 

< 

u . 

•2S 

< 



<! 


<u 
bo 
P! 
d . 

0^ 

u 

X+i 
< 


-p 

O 

0) 

B 


bo 
.£ 

xn 
N 
ft 


Q 


0^ 

a 

> 

M-4 to 

c 

.2 u 
-t-> 
w 

Q * 


M-t 

O 

15 

P 


u 

ft 


<+-t 
O 


>> 

13 
> 

a 
1 

u 


u 



B 

.1. 


d 

10 

15 
> 




to 
CO 

13 
> 


Yds. 


/ 


Yds. 


Yds. 


Yds 


Yds. 


Sec. 


Divs 


Mils Mils 





/ 


1 on 


F.S. 


Ft. 






100 


17 


37 


3-3 


80.3 


24.0 


48.5 


15.81 16.4 


14.74 


I.63 


17 


9 


2.9 


746 


1014 


3.01 


0.900 


200 


18 


8 


3.2 


82.1 


25.2 


50.4 16.27 16.9 


15.19 


I.67 


17 


40 


2.8 


745 


1074 


3.06 0.886 


300 


18 


40 


3.2 


83.9 


26.5 


52.3 ! i6.73'l7.4 


15.64 


1. 71 


18 


II 


2.7 


745 


1 136 


3.12 0.873 


400 


19 


II 


3.2 


85.7 


27.8 54-3 17.20 19.0 


16.10 


1.75 


18 


42 


2.6 


745 


1200 


3.17 


0.860 


500 


19 


43 


3.1 


87.5 


29.2 56.3 17.67 18.5 


16.56 


1.79 


19 


14 


2.5 


745 


1266 


3.22 


0.847 


600 


20 


15 


3-1 


89.3 


30.6 58.3 18.15 19. 1 


17.03 


I.83 


19 


46 


2.4 


745 


1334 


3.26 


0.835 


700 


20 


48 


3.0 


91. 1 


32. i 1 60.4 18.63 19.7 


17.50 


I.87 


20 


19 


2.3 


744 


1404 


3.30 


0.824 


800 


21 


21 


3.0 


92.9 


33.7 62.5 19.12 20.4 


17.98 


I.92 


20 


52 


2.2 


744 


1477 


3.34 


0.814 


900 


21 


56 


2.9 


94-7 


35-3 64.6 


19.62 21.0 


18.46 


1-97 


21 


26 


2.2 


744 


1553 


3.38 


0.804 


5000 


22 


31 


2.8 


96.5 


37-0 


66.8 


20.13 21.6 


18.95 


2.02 


22 


I 


2.1 


743 


1632 


3.42 


0.795 


100 


23 


7 


2.7 


98.3 


38.7 


69.0 


20.65 22.4 


19.45 


2.07 


22 


37 


2.1 


743 


1714 


3.45 


0.787 


200 


23 


44 


2.7 


100. 1 


40.5 


71.2 


21.18 23.2 


19.97 


2.12 


23 


14 


2.0 


742 


1799 


3.48 


0.780 


300 


24 


22 


2.6 


101.9 


42.4 


73.5 


21.72 24.0 


20.51 


2.17 


23 


52 


2.0 


742 


1888 


3.51 


0.773 


400 


25 


I 


2.5 


103.7 


44-4 


75.8 


22.27 24.8 


21.07 


2.22 


24 


31 


1.9 


741 


1982 


3.54 


0.767 


500 


25 


42 


2.4 


105.4 


46.5 


78.2 


22.83 25.6 


21.65 


2.27 


25 


II 


1.8 


740 


2082 


3.56 


0.762 


600 


26 


24 


2.3 


107. 1 


48.7 


80.6 


23.40I26.5 


22.25 


2.32 


25 


53 


1.8 


740 


2189 


3.58 


0.758 


700 


27 


8 


2.2 


108.8 


51.0 


83.1 


23.98 


27.4 


22.88 


2.38 


26 


37 


1.7 


739 


2304 


3-59 


0.755 


800 


27 


54 


2.1 


no. 5 


53.5 


85.6 


24.58 


28.3 


23.54 


2.44 


27 


23 


1.7 


738 


2428 


3.60 


0.753 


900 


28 


43 


2.0 


112. 2 


56.2 


88.2 


25.22 


29.2 


24.24 


2.51 


28 


12 


1.6 


738 


2562 


3.61 


0.751 


6000 


29 


36 


1.9 


113- 9 


59.1 


90.8 


25.91 


30.1 


24.99 


2.58 


29 


4 


1.5 


737 


2707 


3.62 


0.750 


100 


30 


32 


i.7 


115. 6 


62.2 


93.5 


26.66 


31.0 


25.80 


2.66 


30 





1.5 


736 


2862 


3.62 


0.750 


200 


31 


34 


1.5 


117. 2 


65.5 


96.2 


27.48 




26.69 


2.75 


31 


2 


1.4 


736 


3037 


3.61 


0.752 


300 


32 


45 


1.3 


118. 8 


69.0 


98.9 


28.39 




27.69 


2.85 


32 


12 


1.3 


735 


3235 


3-59 


0.757 


400 


34 


6 


1.1 


120.4 


72.7 


101.7 


29.40 




28.86 


2.96 


33 


33 


1.2 


734 


3470 


3.55 


0.767 


500 


35 


46 


0.8 


122.0 


76.6 


104.5 


30.53 




30.32 


3.09 


35 


13 


1.2 


733 


3772 


3-47 


0.785 


600 


38 


12 


0.4 


123.6 


80.9 


107.4 


31.81 




32.36 


3.24 


37 


38 


1.1 


732 


4196 


3.32 


0.815 


640 


40 





0.2 


124.2 82.4 


108.5 


32.36 




33.89 


3.30 


39 


25 


1.1 


731 


4390 


3.23 


0.841 



RANGE TABLES 



341 



4.7 Inch Howitzer, Range Table (Continued) 
[Zone 2 ; M. V. 620 feet per second] 




o c 
o o 



9* 



'- . 

■2S 



z 



a 








*d 


bo 








c 


e 


^! 






' s rt 


d 




_c 









*o 
6 


a) 
w 

O 

N 

3 




< 


<+' 


H 


ft 


p 



O £ 

c P 










>> 


1 








+3 


T3 








a 


i-< 








O 

















1 


*c3 

M-l 


> 


£ 


O 


•O 


__ 








od 


3 


O 


O u 
■S3 




ft 
O 





2* 





<ft 


CO 


H 


> 



Yds. Yds. Yds. Yds. Sec. Divs.Mils I Mils 



1 on F.S. ! Ft. 



17 
18 
19 
20 



IOO 8 40 

200 9 28 

300 10 17 

400 n 7 

500 11 58 

600 12 50 

700 13 43 

800 14 37 

900 15 32 

2000 16 28 



2.2 
2.2 
2.2 
2.2 
2.2 

2.2 
2.2 
2.1 
2.1 
2.1 

2.1 
2.0 
2.0 
2.0 
1-9 

1.9 
1.9 
1.8 

1.8 
1.8 

1-7 

1-7 
1.6 
1.6 



3-2 

6.4 

9-6 

12.8 

« 

19.0 
22.1 
25.2 
28.3 
31.4 

34-5 



0.1 
0.2 
0.3 
0.4 
0.6 

0.8 
1.0 
1.2 
x.S 
1.8 



2.1 
37.6 2.4; 
40.6 2,8 



0.2 
0.5 
0.8 

1.2 
1.6 

2.0 
2.4 
2.9 
3-4 
3.9 



0.48 
0.97 
1.46 
1.95 
2.45 

2.95 

3.46 
3.97 
4.49 
5.01 



0.4 
0.8 
1.3 
i-7 
2.1 

2.6 
3-2 
3.7 
4.2 
4.8 



4.4 5.54 5.4 
5.0 6.07 6.0 



43.6 
46.6 



3.2 
3.6 



5.6 

6.2 



6.61 
7.15 



6.6 
7-2 



6.8i 7.70 7-8 






0.63 
1.27 
i. 91 
2.55 
3.20 

3.85 
4.51 
5-17 
5.84 
6.52 

7.21 
7.9i 
8.62 
9.34 
10.07 



0.04 

0.09 
0.14 
0.19 
0.24 



45 74-7 616 

29 37.8 612 

13 24.5 609 

■58 18.5 606 

43 14.9 603 



0.29 4 28 12.4 600 37 

0.34 ■ 5 14 10.6 597 49 

0.39 6 9.2 594 63 

0.44 6 47 8.1 591 79 

0.49 7 34 7-2 588 100 



2.69 1.009 
2.67 1. 017 
2.65 1.024 
2 . 63 1 • 030 
2.62 1.035 

2.61 1.039 
2.61 1.042 
2 . 60 1 . 044 
2.60 1.045 
2.60 1.045 



0.54 i 8 22 

0.59 9 10 
0.64 9 59 
0.69 
0.74 



10 


49 


II 


40 


12 


32 



6.5 

5.9 

5.4 

5.0 
4.6 



582 
579 
576 

574 



49-6 4.1 7-5 8.25 8.4 10.81 0.79 

52.6 4.6 8.2 8.81 9.1 11.56 0.84 13 25 

55.6' 5.2 9.0 9.38 9-7 12.32 0.89 14 19 

58.6 5-8 9.8 9.9610.3 13.10 0.94 15 14; 

61.5 6.5 10.7 10.55 11. 13.90 0.99 16 



64.4 7.2; 11. 6 II. 15 11. 7 
67.3 8.0 12.6 11.76 12.4 
70.2 8.8 13.6 12.38 13. 1 



73.1 9-7 14-7 I3.0I 13.8 17.31! 1.23 



21 29 1.5 76.0 



14.72 1.05 

15.56 1. II 

16.42 1. 17 



10.7 15.9 13.66 14.5 18.23 1.29 



35 1.5 78.8 11. 8 17. 1 14.33 15.4 I9.i8| 1.35 

81.6 13.0 18.4 15.02 16.2 '20.17 1.42 

84.4 14.4 19.8 I5.74|I7.I 21.21I 1.50 

87.2 16.0 21.3 16.50 18.0 22.32 1.59 

89.9 17.8 22.9 17.31 18.8 23.52 1.69 



23 


44 


1.4 


24 


56 


1-4 


26 


12 


1-3 


27 


34 


1.2 



4.3 572 

4.0 570 

3.7 568 

3.5 567 

3.3 566 



120 2.60 1.044 

144 2.6l 1. 041 

171 2.62 1.035 

201 2.64 1.027 

234 2.67 I. 017 

270 2.70 1.005 

309 2.74 0.991 

351 2.79 0-973 

397 2.85 0.951 

445 2.920.926 



17 7 3.1 

18 5 2.9 

19 5 2.7 

20 7 2.5 



21 11 



2.3 564 748 3.360.8 



565 497 3.OOO.900 

565 553 3.090.875 

564 613 3.i9°- 8 5i 

564 678 3.28 0.828 



17 2.2 563 

26 2.1 563 

38[- 2.0 563 

54 1.9 562 



824 3.43 o.79i 

907 3-49 0.777 

998 3.540.766 

1098 3.580.758 



27 16 1.8 562 1208 3.600.753 



22 



342 



FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE 



4.7 Inch Howitzer, Range Table (Continued) 
[Zone 2, M. V. 620 feet per second] 



13 



J4 



<u o 



< 

+1 

P 






< 



^0 



<] 



o £ 



O 5h 



>> 


■ 






•a 







(H 


















> 


a 


O 


a3 


pi 





G 


n 


w 


a 


■a s 


3 






o5 
> 



Yds. Yds. Yds. Yds. Sec. 



Divs.;Mils" Mils 



i on F.S. 



Ft. 



1.1 
0.9 
0.7 
0.5 
0.3 
0.2 



92.6 
95-2 
97-7 

100. 

102. 1 
102.7 



19.9 
22.3 
25.0 
28.1 
3i.7 
32.4 



24.6 
26.4 
28.3 
30.3 
32.5 
33.2 



18.18 
19.12 
20.17 
21.47 
23.37 
23.96 



19.8 
20.8 
21.8 

22.8 
23.9 
24.9 



24.83 
26.28 
27.95 
30.00 
33-12 
34.14 



1.80 

I.Q2- 
2.06 
2.22 
2.40 
2.46 



28 46 

30 26 

32 21 

34 48 

38 32 

39 42 



i-7 

1.6 
1.5 
1.3 
1.1 
1.1 



561 
56i 
560 
559 
557 
556 



1329 
1466 
1633 
1862 
2221 
2305 



[Zone 1, M. V. 454 feet per second] 



100 


I 


39 


1.2 


200 


3 





1.2 


300 


4 


22 


1.2 


400 


5 


45 


1.2 


500 


7 


10 


1.2 


600 


8 


37 


I.I 


700 


10 


6 


I.I 


800 


11 


37 


I.I 


900 


13 


10 


I.I 


000 


14 


46 


1.0 


100 


16 


25 


1.0 


200 18 


7 


1.0 


300 19 


53 


0.9 


400 


21 


45 


0.9 


500 


23 


45 


0.8 


600 


25 


56 


0.7 


700 


28 


24 


0.6 


800 


3i 


21 


0.5 


900 


35 


8 


0.4 


980 


40 





0.3 



4-4 ( O.I 

8.8 0.2 

13.2 0.3 
17.6 0.4 
22.0 0.6 

26.3 0.8 
30.6 1.0 
34-9 1. a 
39-2 1.5 
43-4 

47.6 2.2 

51.8 2.7 

56.0 3.3 

60.1 4.1 

64.2 s.i 



68.3 
72.3 
76.3 
80.2 
83.2 



6.3 
7-7 
9.4 
11. 5 
13.3 



0.1 
0.2 
0.4 
0.6 
0.8 



1.4 
1.8 
2.2 

2.7 

3.2 
3.8 

4-4 
5.1 
5.9 

6.8 

7 

8.9 
10. 1 
11. 3 



0.64 
1.32 
2.00 
2.69 



0.6 
1.2 

1-7 
2.3 



3.38 2.9 

4.08 3-7 
4-78j 4-5 
5.49 5-2 



6.21 
6.95 



6.0 
6.8 



7.72 7-8 
8.52 8.8 
9-35 9-8 
10.22 10.8 
11.1311.9 

j 

12.09 13.3 
13.12 14.7 
14.29 16. 1 
15.87 17.5 
17.75 18.9 



1. 16 


0.06 


1 


21 


41.9 


45i 


5 


2.66 


2.32 


0.12 


2 


42 


21. 1 


448 


11 


2.63 


3.50 


0.19 


4 


4 


13.9 


446 


20 


2.61 


4.70 


0.26 


5 


27 


10.3 


444 


32 


2.60 


5.92 


0.33 


6 


52 


8.1 


442 


47 


2.60 


7.16 


O.4O 


8 


19 


6.7 


440 


66 


2.60 


8.43 


0.47 


9 


48 


5.7 


438 


89 


2.62 


9.73 


0.54 


11 


19 


4-9 


436 


117 


2.66 1 


11.06 


0.6l 


12 


52 


4-3 


434 


150 


2.72 


12.43 


0.68 


14 


28 


3-8 


433 


189 


2.81 


13.84 


o.75 


16 


7 


3.4 


432 


234 


2.93 


15.30 


0.82 


17 


49 


3-0 


431 


286 


3.07 


16.83 


0.90 


19 


35 


2.7 


430 


346 


3-22 


18.45 


0.98 


21 


27 


2.4 


430 


415 


3.36, 


20.18 


1.07 


23 


27 


2.2 


430 


494 


3.48 


22.06 


1. 17 


25 


38 


2.0 


429 


585 


3-57! 


24.18 


1.29 


28 


6 


1.8 


429 


693 


3.62 ( 


26.71 


1.43 


3i 


3 


1.6 


428 


830 


3.60 


29.96 


1.60 


34 


50 


1.4 


428 


1025 


3.50 


34.14 


1.76 


39 


42 


1.2 


427 


1265 


3-21 



RANGE TABLES 



343 



Range Table for 6 Inch Howitzer 

Weight of Projectile, 120 pounds. Normal Corrector, 60 

ZONE 1. — Muzzle Velocity, 464 feet per second 



Angle of 



Mils Mi's 



U 



Range change' 
due to 



U2 

-u 

6 > 



^ 



Yards 



100-yard 
range 
change 



Maximum 
ordinate 



.3 o 
2* 



2"S 



Yards 



Yards 



Sec. Mils 



100 24 i 23 

200 47 46 

300 70 69 

400 94 93 

500 118 118 

143 143 

167 168 

193 194 

219 221 

245 249 



273 

301 
331 
361 
394 

429 
468 
512 
565 
632 



45 
23 
15 



7 

6 

5 

4-5 

4.0 



462 
461 
459 



278 3.6 
308 ; 3.2 
339 2.9 
372 

408 



2.6 
2-4 



448 2 . 1 

493 1-9 

544 : 1.7 

603 1.5 

672 1.3 



450 
456. 


: 


455 


4 


553 


4 


452 


4 


450 


4 


448 


4 


447 


4 


445 


3 


444 


3 


• 442 


3 


440 


3 


439 


3 


437 


2 


436 


2 


434 


2 


433 


1 



24 
24 
24 
24 
24 

25 
26 
26 
27 
27 

28 
29 
29 
31 

34 

37 

42 
49 
60 
73 



13 
13 
13 
13 
13 

14 
15 
16 
17 
18 



50 
100 
150 
201 
251 

301 
352 
402 
453 
503 



18 
24 



0.6 
1.3 
2 .0 
2.6 
3-3 



30 4.0 
38 4-6 
46 ; 5-3 
56 6.0 
67 6.7 



19 554 

20 605 

21 655 

22 706 

23 757 

24 808 
26 859 
29 910 
33 96i 
37 1012 



1.3 
2.5 
3-7 
5.0 
6.2 

7-5 



11. 5 

12 .9 



79 7-5 14.4 

94 8.3 15.9 

in 9. 117. 4 

131 9-9 19. 1 

153 10 .8 20 .8 

180 11. 722. 6 

212 12.7 24.7 

252 13 .8 27.0 

302 15.0 29.8 

367 16.433-3 



ZONE 2. — -Muzzle Velocity, 629 feet per second 



100 


12 


13 


76 


626 


8 


9 


13 


n 


50 


1 


0.5 0.6 


200 


25 


26 


38 


623 


3 


9 


13 


n 


100 


2 


0.9 1.3 


300 


38 


40 


2 * 


620 


8 


9 


13 


n 


150 


4 


1.5 2.0 


400 


Si 


54 


19 


618 


8 


9 


13 


11 


201 


6 


1.9 2.7 


500 


63 


68 


15 


616 


8 


9 


13 


n 


251 


9 


2.4 S3 


600 


76 


82 


12 


613 


8 


9 


13 


n 


301 


13 


2 .9 4.0 


700 


89 


96 


n 


610 


8 


9 


13 


n 


352 


17 


3-4 4-7 


800 


103 


no 


9 


608 


7 


9 


14 


n 


402 


22 


3-9 5-4 


900 


116 


124 


8 


605 


7 


9 


14 


11 


453 


28 


4.4 6.1 


1000 


130 


138 


7 


603 


7 


9 


14 


n 


503 


34 


5.0 6.8 



344 



FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S GUIDE 



Range Table for 6 Inch Howitzer. 


Zone 2 (Continued) 






Angle of 




'O 


Range change 
due to 


100-yard 
range 
change 


Maximum 
ordinate 


6 








M-l 
O 

<D 
Pi 
O 


> 

"9 

u 

<x> 

H 


















t-i 

oS 

a 

V 

Q 


T c3 


US 


CO 
h! 

M O 


> 

O 


u 







01 

bo 

c 
a 


.5? 

'ID 


Q 


Yards 


Mils 


Mils 


1 on 


Ft. per 
sec. 


Yards 


Yards 


.2 § 


.go 
Ph h 


Yards 


Yards 


Sec. 


Mils 


I IOO 


143 


153 


7 


601 


7 


9 


14 


11 


554 


41 


55 


7.6 


1200 


157 


168 


6 


598 


7 


9 


14 


11 


605 


49 


6.0 


8.3 


1300 


171 


183 


5 


596 


7 


9 


14 


11 


656 


57 


6.5 


91 


1400 


185 


198 


5 


593 


7 


9 


15 


11 


707 


67 


70 


9-8 


1500 


200 


213 


4-8 


591 


7 


9 


15 


11 


758 


77 


7-6 


10.6 


l600 


215 


228 


4-4 


589 


7 


9 


15 


11 


809 


88 


8.1 


11. 4 


1700 


230 


243 


4.1 


586 


7 


9 


15 


11 


860 


100 


8.6 


12.2 


1800 


245 


258 


39 


584 


6 


9 


16 


11 


9ii 


113 


9-2 


130 


1900 


261 


274 


3-6 


582 


6 


8 


16 


12 


962 


127 


9-7 


13.8 


2000 


277 


290 


3-4 


580 


6 


8 


16 


12 


1014 


142 


10.3 


14.6 


2100 


293 


306 


3-2 


578 


6 


8 


16 


13 


1065 


158 


10.8 


155 


2200 


310 


322 


31 


577 


6 


8 


17 


13 


1116 


175 


11. 5 


16.4 


2300 


327 


338 


2.9 


575 


6 


7 


17 


14 


1168 


193 


12 .0 


173 


2400 


344 


354 


2.7 


574 


6 


7 


18 


14 


1219 


213 


12.6 


18.2 


2500 


362 


371 


2.6 


572 


5 


7 


18 


14 


1270 


233 


13-3 


19. 1 


2600 


38i 


389 


2.5 


571 


5 


6 


19 


15 


1322 


256 


139 


20.1 


2700 


400 


408 


2.4 


569 


5 


6 


20 


16 


1374 


280 


14.6 


21 .1 


2800 


420 


428 


2.2 


567 


5 


6 


21 


17 


1425 


305 


15-2 


22 .2 


2900 


441 


450 


2.1 


566 


5 


6 


22 


18 


1477 


333 


159 


23-3 


3000 


464 


474 


2.0 


564 


4 


5 


23 


19 


1529 


363 


16.7 


24.5 


3100 


487 


500 


1.9 


563 


4 


5 


24 


19 


1581 


396 


17.4 


257 


3200 


513 


528 


1.8 


56i 


4 


5 


28 


20 


1633 


435 


18.3 


27.1 


3300 


542 


559 


1.6 


560 


3 


5 


33 


20 


1685 


482 


19.2 


28.6 


3400 


575 


594 


1.5 


559 


3 


5 


38 


21 


1737 


540 


20.3J30.4 


3500 


617 


635 


1.4 


558 


2 


5 


47 


21 


1790 


613 


21.5 326 


3600 


672 


686 


1 .2 


557 


2 




64 




1843 


710 


23-235-5 



ZONE 3. — Muzzle Velocity, 900 feet per secoDd 



100 


6 


6 


172 


896 


16 


13 


6 


8 


50 


1 


0.3 


0.3 


200 


13 


12 


86 


891 


16 


13 


6 


8 


100 


2 


0.7 


0.7 


300 


19 


18 


56 


887 


16 


13 


6 


8 


150 


3 


1 .0 


1 .0 


400 


25 


24 


42 


883 


16 


13 


6 


8 


201 


4 


13 


13 


500 


31 


30 


33 


879 


16 


13 


6 


8 


251 


6 


1.7 


1-7 



RANGE TABLES 



345 



Range Table for 6 Inch Howitzer. Zone 3 {Continued) 





Angle of 


"3 

"o 

a 


09 


'0 

O 

% 
> 

"3 

c 

a 

u 

V 

H 


Range change 
due to 


100-yard 
range 
change 


Maximum 
ordinate 


5 

bo 

O 




C 

a 




4-9 

U 

a 

a 

Q 


ft 


13 C 

SI 

S > 


O O 

"S « 

St 



H 


> 



u 



t-t— 1 





bo 




# bfl 


Q 


Yards 


Mils 


Mils 


I on 


Ft. per 
sec. 


Yards 


Yards 


J3 


go 


Yards 


Yards 


Sec. 


Mils 


600 


38 


36 


27 


874 


16 


13 


6 


8 


301 


7 


2 .0 


2 .0 


700 


44 


43 


23 


870 


16 


13 


6 


8 


352 


9 


2.3 


2.3 


800 


Si 


50 


20 


866 


15 


13 


7 


8 


402 


n 


2.7 


2.7 


900 


57 


57 


18 


862 


15 


13 


7 


8 


453 


13 


3-0 


3-0 


1000 


63 


64 


16 


857 


15 


13 


7 


8 


504 


16 


34 


33 


IIOO 


70 


71 


14 


853 


15 


13 


7 


8 


555 


19 


37 


37 


1200 


76 


78 


13 


849 


J5 


13 


7 


8 


606 


22 


4.1 


4.0 


1300 


83 


85 


12 


845 


15 


13 


7 


8 


657 


26 


4.4 4-4 


1400 


90 


92 


n 


841 


15 


13 


7 


8 


708 


30 


4.8 


4-7 


1500 


97 


100 


10 


837 


15 


13 


7 


8 


759 


35 


5-i 


5-1 


1600 


104 


107 


9 


833 


15 


13 


7 


8 


810 


40 


5-5 


5-4 


1700 


no 


115 


9 


829 


15 


13 


7 


8 


862 


46 


5-9 


5-8 


1800 


117 


122 


8 


825 


14 


13 


7 


8 


913 


52 


6.3 6.2 


1900 


124 


130 


8 


821 


14 


13 


7 


8 


965 


58 


6.6 6.5 


2000 


131 


137 


8 


817 


14 


13 


7 


8 


1016 


65 


7.0 


6.9 


2100 


139 


145 


6.9 


814 


14 


13 


7 


8 


1067 


72 


73 


73 


2200 


146 


153 


6.6 


811 


14 


13 


7 


8 


1118 


79 


7-8 7-7 


2300 


153 


l62 


6.2 


808 


13 


13 


7 


8 


1170 


87 


8.2 


8.1 


2400 


160 


171 


5-9 


804 


13 


13 


7 


8 


1222 


96 


8.5 


8.4 


2500 


168 


180 


5-6 


801 


13 


13 


7 


8 


1273 


105 


8.9 


8.8 


2600 


175 


189 


5-4 


798 


13 


13 


7 


8 


1325 


114 


93 


92 


2700 


183 


198 


5-1 


795 


13 


13 


8 


8 


1377 


124 


9-7 


9-6 


2800 


191 


207 


4.9 


792 


13 


13 


8 


8 


1429 


134 


10. 1 


10. 


2900 


198 


2l6 


4-7 


789 


13 


12 


8 


8 


1481 


146 


10.5 


10.5 


3000 


206 


225 


4-5 


786 


13 


12 


8 


8 


1533 


158 


10.9 


10.9 


3100 


214 


234 


4-3 


783 


12 


12 


8 


8 


1585 


170 


11. 4 


n. 3 


3200 


222 


243 


4.1 


78i 


12 


12 


8 


8 


1637 


183 


n. 8 


n. 7 


3300 


230 


253 


39 


779 


12 


12 


8 


8 


1689 


197 


12.2 


12. 1 


3400 


238 


263 


3-8 


777 


12 


12 


8 


8 


1742 


211 


12.6 


12 .6 


3500 


247 


273 


3-6 


774 


12 


12 


8 


8 


1794 


226 


13.0 


13.0 



346 




FIELD ARTILLERYMAN'S 


GUIDE 








Range 


Table for 6 Inch Howitzer. 


Zone 3 [Continued) 




Angl 


e of 


<v 

ft 
55 


>> 
'0 

> 
1$ 

| 


Range change 
due to 


1 00- yard 

range 
change 


Maximum 
ordinate 


£ 


Q 


G 


u 

a 
ft 
<v 

Q 






C 

O U 

*8 


> 
so 


£ % 


u 






- 

S "' 




<D 

bo 
C 
eg 


O 
'53 


Yards 


Mils 


Mils 


1 on 


Ft. per 
sec. 


Yards 


Yards 


Yards 


Yards 


Sec. Mils 


3600 


255 


283 


35 


772 


12 


12 


8 


8 


1846 


242 


13.5 


13-4 


3700 


264 


293 


3-4 


770 


12 


11 


9 


9 


1899 


258 


139 


13-9 


3800 


272 


304 


33 


768 


12 


11 


9 


9 


I95i 


275 


14-3 


14-3 


3900 


281 


315 


3-1 


766 


11 


11 


9 


9 


2003 


293 


14-7 


14.8 


4000 


290 


326 


30 


764 


11 


11 


9 


9 


2056 


312 


15-2 


15.2 


4100 


299 


337 


2.9 


762 


11 


11 


9 


9 


2109 


33i 


15.6 15.7 


4200 


308 


348 


2.8 


760 


11 


11 


9 


9 


2161 


35i 


16. 1 


16.2 


4300 


317 


359 


2.7 


759 


10 


11 


10 


9 


2214 


372 


16.5 


16.7 


4400 


326 


370 


2.7 


758 


10 


11 


10 


9 


2267 


393 


17 .0 


17 .2 


4500 


336 


38i 


2.6 


757 


10 


11 


10 


9 


2319 


415 


17.5 


17-7 


4600 


346 


392 


2.5 


755 


10 


10 


10 


10 


2372 


438 


17-9 


18.3 


4700 


355 


403 


2.4 


754 


10 


10 


10 


10 


2425 


461 


18.4 


18.8 


4800 


365 


414 


2.3 


753 


10 


10 


10 


10 


2477 


485 


18.9 


19.4 


4Q00 


376 


425 


2.3 


752 


10 


10 


10 


10 


2530 


510 


19.4 


10.9 


5000 


387 


436 


2 .2 


751 


9 


9 


11 


II 


2583 


536 


19.9 


20.5 


5100 


397 


447 


2 . 1 


750 


9 


9 


11 


II 


2635 


563 


20.4 


21 .0 


5200 


400 


458 


2 .1 


749 


9 


9 


11 


II 


2688 


591 


20.9 


21 .6 


5300 


420 


469 


2 .0 


748 


9 


9 


11 


II 


2741 


620 


21.5 


22 .2 


5400 


432 


481 


19 


747 


8 


9 


12 


II 


2794 


651 


22 .0 22 .8 


5500 


444 


493 


i-9 


746 


8 


8 


12 


12 


2847 


683 


22 .6 


23-4 


5600 


457 


506 


1.8 


745 


8 


8 


13 


13 


2900 


717 


23.1 


24.I 


5700 


469 


520 


1.8 


744 


8 


8 


13 


13 


2953 


752 


23.7 


24.8 


5800 


483 


535 


i-7 


743 


7 


7 


14 


14 


3007 


791 


243 


25.5 


5900 


497 


551 


1.6 


743 


7 


7 


14 


15 


3060 


833 


25.0 


26.2 


6000 


5ii 


569 


1.6 


742 


6 


7 


16 


15 


3113 


879 


25.7 


27 .0 


6100 


527 


589 


1-5 


741 


6 


6 


17 


15 


3i67 


932 


26.4 


279 


6200 


545 


612 


i-5 


740 


5 


6 


19 


15 


3221 


991 


27.2 


28.8 


6300 


564 


638 


1.4 


740 


5 


6 


21 


15 


3276 


1057 


28.1 


29.8 


6400 


587 


671 


1.3 


739 


4 


6 


25 


15 


3331 


1133 


29.0 31 .0 


6500 


614 


709 


1 .2 


739 


3 


6 


30 


15 


3387 


1220 


30.1 


32.4 


6600 


647 


753 


1 .1 


738 


3 




38 




3445 


1325 


31-5 


34-2 


6700 


693 


805 


1 .0 


738 


2 




49 




3503 


I488 


33-3 36.6 



